71 10 13229 https://digitalcollections.lakeheadu.ca/files/original/72cb867a4d36424fcb48910e270292b3.pdf f0c0719259673e7aa22efaa5c67dcabf PDF Text Text VIV p... \ \<'-l- \'.:::, LS'l<ehead University �;. _3. SPECIAL SENATE MEETING A special meeting of the Lakehead University Senate has been called for Monday, Sept­ ember 14, 1970, at 12:00 noon in the Senate Chambers. The meeting will consider ratification of the establishment by the Committee of Presidents of Universities of Ontario of an Advisory Subcommittee on Aca­ demic Planning. The function of the proposed Subcommittee is to conduct Discipline Assess­ ments, "formal reviews of cur­ rent and projected graduate and/or undergraduate programs within discipline groups," at the fourteen provincially - assisted Ontario universities. Senate will also consider a letter from the President of Lakehead University to the Deputy Minister of University Affairs concerning the recent decision by the Department to withhold approval of current Capital Projects at the Uni­ versity, pending the report of the Commission on Post - Secondary Education. The Commission's re­ port, dealing with the status of post - secondary education in Northwestern Ontario, is not ex­ pected until later in the Fall. Senate meetings at Lake­ head University are open to ticket - holders. Tickets may be obtained in the office of the Secretary of the Senate, Mr. D. E. Ayre. FACULTY OF ARTS SEMINAR ON SURVIVA'L Contrary to opm10n, stu­ dents- who fail at . University (50% of those entering accor­ ding to a recent report) do not fail because of lack of talent or intelligence; they fail simply be­ cause they do not know how to apply themselves or how to study. Thus, the Seminar has two Main objectives: To motivate the student and give him assistance on how to motivate himself. To introduce him to the. study skills: • reading, listening, scheduling, taking of examina­ tions, using the library, and writing essays and papers. This seminar will be held the week of the 19th of October at 8:00 p.m. each evening. There will be no costs, however, there is a recommended text; On Becoming an Educated Person, by Virginia Voeks (W. B. Saun­ ders Company, $2.20). Please direct further inquir­ ies to: The Dean, Faculty of Arts, Lakehead University, Thunder Bay, Ontario. REGISTRATION 1970 PARKING AUTHORITY A meeting of the University Committee on Wednesday, Sept­ ember 2, 1970, approved the establishment of a Parking Auth­ ority for Lakehead University. The Parking Authority will be responsible for all parking lots on campus, will formulate and enforce regulations, and will determine and collect parking fees. President Tamblyn explain­ ed to members of the Committee that the Provincial Government had discontinued its financial support for the operation and construction of university park­ ing facilities. It has therefore become necessary to charge all members of the University community for parking privil­ eges. The Parking Authority will consist of three student mem­ bers, three faculty members, and three administration mem­ bers. Selection of members by the A.M.S., L.U.F.A., and the Administration should be com­ pleted by the end of the month, with details on parking regu­ lations and fees to be announ­ ced sometime thereafter. OFFICE RELOCATIONS Please note the following changes in office locations. The Canada Manpower Office, The General Service Office and The Office Services Department, have moved from the first floor of the University Centre to the old Senior Lounge on the 3rd floor. Mr. Hugh J. Parker - Chief Academic Services, Mr. T. A. Cambly - Internal Auditor, and the Information Office are now located on the first floor of, the University .Centre, next to the Dean of Students Office. 9:30 a.m. 4:30 p.m. 9:00 p.m. 1:00 a.m. 9:30 a.m. 4:30 p.m. Start 12 n. 2nd Show 5:00 6:00 p.m. 8:30 p.m. FRIDAY, SEPT. U' Registration - English; His-· , tory Cent. Bldg. , Languages, Philosophy DANCE with PHEUS" $1.00 L.U. BAR "QR·' Main Cafe. .,, Lakehead Medical Summer School September • i'a - 12· • ' :' MONDAY,'SEPT. 14' Registration -Bus. Ad. & : ·, Cent. Comp. . . �ldg. Diploma, Eng. Tech. -' Year 1 . only, Elementary Education'Oiploma 1st & 2nd year programs, Library Technology, First"Year Arts -undecided rema}ot. - - -· MOVIES- - "3 Stooges, in· , 1 •.• Orbit" ; _ ' "Walk Don't.Run" • 1·: 1 ,� ,. U.C.T..� "Have Rocket-Will / Tr1;1vel" Adm. 75¢' LU. 25¢ &- but-.' ,, .. •• i , ton Registration - Late Applicants ,Cent. • ' ';)Bldg. • 1 j.' •! , ·, TUESDAY, SEPT.15 .;-,_ First Day of Classes , : 12 Meeting of first year ARTS Noon students-compulsory. . U.C.T. , 1:00 Meeting of first . year SCI- \ p.m. ENCE studen_ts - cornpuJ- ' • , sory U.C.T. 7:30 Behind WEINER ROAST(Free) ., ..• �gora _ p.m. .' WEDNESDAY, SEPT.16 12 • Meeting· of fir.st year UNINoon VERSITY SCHOOL students, -compulsory U.C.T.' 1:00 Meeting of first year FACp.m. ULTY OF EDUCATION stµ­ dents • compulsory U.C.T.· 2:00 UNDERGROUND MOVIES p.m. "STERO" "SINS OF THE . FLESHPOIDS" U.C.T. Complete show every 2 hrs. 8:00 Last showing sta'rts Adm. / p.m. 50¢L.U. 25¢& button ., THURSDAY, SEPT.17 "LAS VEGAS NIGHT" 6:00 p.m. Agora 0 10:00 p.m. 12 Noon 9:00 p.m. 2:00 p.m. 6:30 p.m. 10:30 p.m. 12 Noon 12 Noon FRIDAY, SEPT. 18 • • CAR RALLY DANCE _;.,;ith bar "TEE­ GARDEN & VANWINKLE" Adm. $1.00 L.U. 50¢ & button SATURDAY, SEPT. 19 HORROR MOVIES Three Complete Shows U.C.T. Adm. 75¢ L.U. 25¢ & button MEETINGS MONDAY, SEPT.14 Senate Meeting Sen. ' , , qham. ·,,:, ··, ' Board of Governors Sen. Meeting Cham. �COMMISSION ON UNIVERSITY GOVERNMENTAL ORGANIZATION The cotnmission on University Governmental Organization has been appointed to: "critic~lly examine the existing governmental organization of the University and the functional interrelationships of its component parts, including the Board of Governors, the Senate, the Alma Mater Society, the Alumni Association, the Faculties, the academic departments and the administrative offices and departments in so far as they relate to these bodies. In light of this study, the Commission shall make recommendations concerning the governmental organization which is most appropriate in order to best serve the interests of the University as a whole. The Commission shall also outline revisions to the Lakehead University Act which would be made necessary by the adoption of its recommendations. These recommendations shall be embodied in a report to the President of the University." In order to accomplish this task the Commission is earnestly soliciting opinions on Lakehead University governance from all concerned. Accordingly the Commission would appreciate the expression of your thoughts by way of a written brief, supported by an open hearing if you so desire. Below is a preliminary list of issues to which you may wish to address yourself either in whole or in part. The issues and questions are intended only to provide guidance and a framework for the collection and analysis of opinion, information and evidence; in no way should you . feel restricted to the subject headings or queries. Again, on behalf of the Commission and in the interests of th~ University, its members and the community, I urge you to present your views as soon a~ possible (but not later than November 16. 1970) on these critical topics. Temporarily my academic office (L4044) will serve as that of the Commission and I would be pleased to hear from you as to your intention to submit an early brief. Sincerely, (Prof.) W. J. Hanley, Chairman, Commission on University Governmental Organization. POSSIBLE ISSUES FOR STUDY 1. The Purpose of Lakehead University Are specific goals and objectives definable? Should this university seek a unique educa- tional posture specifically attuned to its environment, play a broad, general role in meeting the educational needs of the population, or embrace certain combinations of these approaches? What is the nature of the university's commitment to the community, to its members, to education? Should size and physical location influence the purpose of the university and the manner in which it is governed? How are the purposes of the institution related to its governance? What estates exist within the university to serve its purposes, how are they precisely defined, and what stakes does each have in institutional governance? 2. Governing Bodies - Senate and Board of Governors What is your perception of the existing structure and its effectiveness? What changes (if any) should be made in the functions, powers and responsibilities of these bodies? How should they be constituted and selected? How should they relate and interact with each other? What structural alternatives (if any) would you recommend, and why? What would be the relationship between governing bodies and the President and/ or other administrators? What committees should exist and what powers should they exercise? 3. Faculty, Students and Others What should be the respective roles • and responsibilities of individual faculty, students and others in university government? What parts should each play in governing bodies, committees, etc? Should representation of each in committees be fixed and uniform, or flexible according to purpose? Should any estate be deliberately excluded from official university bodies or committees? Should academic rank or tenure be taken into account in the holding of office on a governing body or committee, or in holding a franchise for election thereto? Should student 'seniority' be taken into account for the same purposes? 4. President, Vice - President Deans, Chairmen What should be their roles and responsibilities in the university? What parts should they play in the decision-mak.i ng processes? How should appointments be made? What relationships should exist between administrators and governing bodies, colleagues, academics, students, ai;ademic service staff, etc.? In short, how should the day-to- day work of the university be determined and execut~d? 5. Student Councils, Faculty Associations and Other Groups What should be the functions and responsibilities of these bodies vis-a-vis the governing bodies, the President and other administrators, their constituents? Should they play a more direct role in the structure of university government? DEPARTMENT NEWS Political Science Dr. G. F. Engholm, Associate Professor and Chairman of the Department of Political Science, is attending the Annual Conference of the American Political Science Association in Los Angeles, September 8th to 12th where he will present a paper entitled "Representation and Policy". Dr. Pradip Sarbadhikari, Associate Professor of Political Science presented a paper entitled "Towards a Study of Social Movements in a Typology of International Theories" to the VIIIth World Congress of the International Political Science Association held at Munich, Germany, between September 1st and 5th. Also attending was Mr. A. M. Macleod, Lecturer in the department. Psychology Mr. John Jamieson has been appointed as Lecturer, Department of Psychology. Computer Centre. Mr. Guy S. Davis has been appointed Faculty Advisor/Programmer. English Department Mr. John Rosenman has been appointed as Assistant Professor, Department of English. Business Administration Mr. E. Grant Walsh has been appointed Lecturer in the School of Business Administration. L.U. WEEK is published weekly during the academic year by the Information Office of Lakehead University, Oliver Road, Thunder Bay, Ontario and distributed free of charge to faculty, students, administrative staff and friends of the University. Copy should be sent to the Information Office by 5 p.m. on Wednesday for publishing in the following WEEK. Vol. 3, No. I . .. . Sept. 11, 1970 � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Lakehead University Collection Description An account of the resource Photographs from Lakehead University's history: people, events, and campus. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Lakehead University Week Vol. 3 No. 1 Subject The topic of the resource Universities Description An account of the resource Lakehead University Week, Vol. 3, No. 1, September 11 1970. Includes: information about Senate meeting to propose the creation of a Subcommittee on Academic Planning for the Committee of Presidents of Universities of Ontario to conduct discipline assessments at fourteen Ontario universities; Faculty of Arts Seminar on "Survival" for students to assist with motivation and study skills; establishment of a Parking Authority for Lakehead University; the Commission on University Governmental Organization invitation to submit briefs on topics of governance; departmental news; registration 1970 (photo). Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Information Office of Lakehead University Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1970-09-11 Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource Lakehead University Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource PDF Language A language of the resource English Type The nature or genre of the resource Text Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context LU Week_vol3no1 Coverage The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant Canada - Ontario - Thunder Bay https://digitalcollections.lakeheadu.ca/files/original/c19f5e2236ad99fdefc3662e6dd01909.pdf c1f19976c2cbfb13e24e0f562bf0fccd PDF Text Text �INSTITUTE ON LAKE SUPERIOR GEOLOGY April 1 2, 1955 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA Center for Continuation Study Minneapolis i4 �UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA Center for Continuation Study Minneapolis it,. Institute on Lake Superior Geology April 1 - 2, 1955 PROGRAM 8:1.5 a. April 1, 1955 m. Auditorium, Museum of Natural Eistory Friday - Carl E. Dutton, Chairman U. S. Geological Survey, Madison, Wisconsin Welcome: 1. 2. 3. 11. 9:00 F. E, Berger, Director, Center for Continuation Study J. M. Nolte, Dean of University Extension G. A. Thiel, Chairman, Department of Geology and Mineralogy Harold L. James: Sedimentary fades of iron-formation 10:00 Intermission (Please, no smoking in auditorium) 10:10 David White: 11:10 DiscussIon 12:00 Luncheon Origin of the Biwabik iron-formation, Mesabi Range, Minnesota 1:30 Burton Boyum, Gerald J. Anderson, and Tsu-Ming Han: Progress report on the primary features of the Negaunee iron-formation, Marquette district, Michigan 2:30 DIscussion 3:00 Intermission 3:10 Stanley Tyler: li.:1O Discussion On the origin of the Lake Superior iron ores �UNIVERSITY OF MI1'INESOTA Center for Continuation Study Minneapolie 111 •"titute on Lake Superior Geo1 April 1 - 2, 1955 PROGRAM Friday - April 1, 1955 6:30 p.m. Junior Ballroom, Coffman Memorial Union 0. M. Schwartz, Professor of Geology and Director, Minnesota Geological Survey GEOPHYSI CS IN TEE LA STJPERI OR EEGI ON Gordon Bath, Chairman U. S. Geological Survey Charles E. Jahren: Some magnetic susceptibility measurements on diamond drill cores from the Cuyuna district Edward Thiel: Panel A gravity study of the Lake Superior syncline Discussion: James Baisley, Chief, Geophysical Branch, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D.C.; Harold Mooney, Assistant Professor of Geophysics, University of Minnesota; George Woollard, Professor of Geophysics, University of Wisconsin; Lloyal 0. Bacon, Assistant Professor of Geophysics, Michigan Institute of Mining and Technology, Houghton, Michigan; and others. �UMEVERSITY OF MINNESOTA Center for Continuation Study Minneapolis 11i April Superior Geology Institute on Lake 1 - 2, 1955 PR0RAM Saturday Morning - April 2, 1955 9:00 a.m. Auditorium, Museum of Natural History Carl E. Dutton and S. S. C-oldich, Co-Chairmen (10-is minutes are allowed for presentation; 5 minutes for discussion) 1. Robert G. Schmidt: Stratigraphy in the central part of the Cuyuna district, Minnes eta 2. 3. I. Justin Zimi, Gerald L. Brooks, Theodore Engel, and Richard Hagni: Studies of stratified rocks occurring below the Huronian succession in the Marquette district, Michigan J. F. Wolff, Sr.: N. King Huber: Summary of the sub-divisional correlation of the Middle Huronian iron formations of the Lake Superior district Environmental control of sedimentary iron minerals 3. Henry Lepp: 6. L. C. Kilburn and HIID.B. Wilson: 7. Alan T. Broderick: 8. Howard Evans: 9. Joseph P. Dobeli: J. E. Dryden: Nagnetite, maghemite, hematite Pyrrhotite iron formations Some notes on the occurrence of oxidation and soft iron orebodies at considerable depth in the Iron River district, Michigan Color photographic record of drill core Sandstone dikes in Keweenawan lavas A near surface crystalline mass at Manson, Iowa �U1IVERSITY OF MENNESOTA Center for Continuation Study Minneapolis ]A Institute on Lake Superior Geology April 1 - 2, 1955 PROGRAM Saturday 1:00 Afternoon - April p.m. Auditorium, Museum of 2, 1955 Natural History Carl E. Dutton and S. S. Goldich, Co-Chairmen Megesoopic petrofabrics used in dociphering structure 1. James W. Trow: 2. J. M. Neilson and J. P. Dobell: 3. F. M. Swain and N. Prokopovitch: Ii.. James H. Zumberge: Keweenawein felcites of the Beto Grise Bay area Stratigraphy of Minnesota lake deposits Bottom coring in Lake Superior 5. Gerald M. Friecinian: Progress report on the Mamainse "Diabase," Batchawana, Ontario 6. Gerald E. Anderson: The ore minerals of the copper-nickel deposits In the Duluth gabbro 7. Donald H. Yardley: 8. M. P. Walls: Geochemical exploration for nickel and copper In northern Minnesota The work of the Hibbing laboratory of the Division of Land and Minerals �UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA Center for Continuation Study Minneapolis Institute on Lake i1i April. 1 — 2, 19% Superior Geology THE ORE MINERALS OF THE COPPER—NICKEL DEPOSITS IN THE DULUTH GABBRO Gerald E. Anderson University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota The discovery in 19L1.8 of appreciable amounts of copper and nickel sulfides near the base of the Duluth gabbro south of Ely, Minnesota, has stimulated field exploration and laboratory studies. The present work on the mineralogy of the sulfide mineralization is being done under the auspices of the Minnesota Geological Survey with the aid of a fellowship sponsored by the E J Longyear Company. The principal mineralization discovered to date is restricted to a narrow band in the gabbro near the base. Definite paragenetic relationships have been determined between the rock silicates, the magnetite, and the sulfides, which in order of abundance are chalcopyrite, pyrrhotite, cubanite, pentlandite, violarite, and pyrite—marcasite. types of sulfide assemblages. There appear to be two general In some specimens relatively massive copper sulfides predominate, whereas in others, pyrrhotite and pentlandite are more abundant and interstitial to the silicates. The copper—nickel mineralization is characteristic of most, if not all, large differentiated gabbroic intrusions. Brief consideration is given to some hypotheses to explain the origin of the deposits. �UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA Center for Continuation Study Minneapolis Th Institute April 1 — cii Lake Superior Geology 2, l9S PROGRESS REPORT ON THE PRIMARY FEATURES OF THE NEGAUNEE IRON—FORMATION, MARQUETTE DISTRICT, MICHIGAN Burton H Boyum, Gerald J. Anderson, and Tsu—Ming Han The Cleveland—Cliffs Iron Company, Ishpeming, Michigan A progress summary is presented describing the primary features of the Negaunee iron—formation of the Marquette District, Michigan. The Negaunee iron—formation is distinctive because of its thickness and uniformity and may be considered as being a single unit, by contrast with other major iron—formations of the Lake Superior region in which two to four members are recognized. The general setting and the position in the Huronian sec- tion are outlined. Nomenclature and historical highlights are reviewed. The subject of total thickness is developed. A specific description of the Negaunee iron—formation is detailed. The lower contact with the Siamo formation •is examined relative to the "inter— bedded argillaceous complex". oolitic zones. Clastic phases are shown, together with Attention is given to the igneous rocks found in the Negaunee iron—formation. Special studies using spectrographic analyses and oil field electric logging are presented. The conclusion is reached that the primary Negaunee formation is remarkably uniform and that local primary features cannot be used as horizon markers for great distances, as these features seldom extend more than one—half to one mile along the strike or dip. �UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA Center for Continuation Study Minneapolis iii. April 1 — 2, 195 Institute en Lake Superior Geology SOME NOTES ON THE OCCURRENCE OF OXIDATION AND SOFT IRON OREBODIES AT CONSIDERABLE DEPTH IN THE IRON RIVER DISTRICT, MICHIGAN Alan T. Broderick Inland Steel Company, Ishpeming, Michigan The earthy to massive hematite—goethite—limonite orebodies in the Iron River District occur in the oxidized portions of a practically unmetamorphosed chert—side rite iron formation. In the writer's opinion, the structural and mineralogic evidence supports classic theory of origin of these deposits, i.e. that they are the result of the oxidation of siderite, the transportation and deposition of iron and the removal of silica by circulating oxygen—bearing meteoric waters. the There is considerable evidence that the replacement of chert by iron oxides and not the leaching of chert is the major ore—forming process. The circulation has been long held to be artesian. However, since ore has now been found at about 2000 feet vertically below ledge and through oxidation down to nearly 3000 feet, topographic and structural arrangements which coi.d have afforded the necessary hydraulic head have become increasingly improbable. The writer proposes that heat introduced along the major faults as hot water or steam provided the energy which caused the circulation. The heavy cool column of meteoric water in a limb of iron formation cut at depth by one of these warm channels would tend to move downward in the formation and then rise in the heated channel. Once established, such a circulation might be supported by heat from the wall—rocks if the geothermal gradient were steep enough. Laboratory experiments on the solubility of silica suggest that the silica—bearing solutions must have been warm. The tendency of many of the orebodies to lie on structural footwalls of either older or younger rocks indicates that another gravity—controlled mechanism must also have been operative. The writer believes that this is simply that the solutions richest in iron, those which would be the most active in replacing the chert, would also be the heaviest and therefore would follow the bottom of any channel and displace any lighter solutions. This density current principle alone might be the circulation—causing force in shallow structures or in cul—de—sac areas lying below the main thermally—stimulated circulation channels. In some of the Iron River mines, there is evidence of a post—oxidati.n period of mineralization that is quite from the original ore—forming period. In these areas, irregular mineralized zones occur which cross the normal orebodies. These zones contain specularite, barite, rhodochrosite, quartz, pyrite, hausrrianite, magnetite, and traces of chalcopyrite, sphalerite, and pitchblende. These may be the result of a late resurgence of hydrothermal fluid from the same source as that which stimulated the deep meteoric circulation, or it could be a later, completely independent invasion from a new source. Radioactive age determination on traces of pitchblende indicate the latter. distinct �UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA Center for Continuation Study Minneapolis 1l Institute nn Lake Superior Geol April 1 — 2, 195S SANDSTONE DIKES IN KEWEENAWAN LAVAS Joseph P Dobell Michigan College of Mining and Technology Houghton, Michigan Sandstone dikes occur in a Keweenawan flow which crops out at Bete Grise Bay on the east side of the Keweenaw Peninsula of Upper Michigan. Three parallel dikes fifteen feet apart were noted. The thickness ranges from an inch to eight inches and the length is from seven to eight hundred. feet. Two of the dikes are a few feet beneath the surface of Lake Superior and the third occurs just above the waterline. The elastic material was injected or wind blown which parallel the Keweenaw fault. The dikes are into open fractures megascopically and rnineralogicafly similar to the Upper Cambrian Jaccbsville sandstone. �UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA Center for Continuation Study Minneapolis it April 1 — 2, Institute on Lake Superior Geology l9S A NEAR SURFACE CRYSTALLINE MASS AT MANSON, IOWA J. E. Dryden Department of Geology, State University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa A near—surface occurrence of crystalline rock has been discovered at Manson, Iowa, 17 miles west of Fort Dodge, Iowa. Water well records indicate that it is a flat—topped elliptial mass with an area of approximately square miles. It has steeply dipping sides and rises to within 90 feet of the surface under a cover of glacial drift. a disturbed area measuring l miles by 2L The mass is surrounded by miles. The rock has been cored to a depth of I90 feet. Megascopically, the core is composed of irregularly alternating light gray gneiss, coarse pink and white feldspar, chioritized breccia and chlorite schist with magnetite. A study of selected thin sections suggests an original syenite gneiss extensively replaced by albite and orthoclase. The entire rock is altered to kaoliriite and breccjated zones are altered to chlorite. The lithology suggests that the mass is of pre—Cainbrian age. The disturbed area contains sediments reported to be Cretaceous in age. A cross section of the area reveals evidence of faulting, but the relationship of the faults to the crystalline structure has not been established at this time. �UNIVERSITY OF 1'ttNNESOTA Center for Continuation Study Minneapolis 14 April 1 — 2, 1955 Lake Superior Geology istitute COLOR PHOTOGRAPHIC RECORD OF DRILL CORE Howard Evans Oliver Iron Mining, Research Laboratory, Duluth, Minnesota The usual method of retaining one—half the drill core for permanent visual record has been supplanted by a color photographic record. The colored photographs, supp1emexted by the core logs have been found adequate for subsequent reference. This was done to dispense with the labor of splitting the core, to overcome the problem of large storage space and to permit all the core to be available for testing purposes. The original cost of the equipment and the continuous cost of maintain— ing the program may seem high, but it is only about one—third the cost of splitting and storing core. At the present time, the photographs from over 300,000 feet of drilling are filed in a space approximately 2' x 4 x 4'. If this record had been kept as split core it would have occupied a building 100' x 120' x 10' high, and this space would allow very little room to work. If storage area is limited some of the core eventually will have to be discarded to make room for new core arriving. With the colored photographic record of the drill core, the filing can continue indefinitely without running out of space. It is also more convenient, when there is a desire to review the core from a drill hole, to be able to quickly select the slide from the file, rather than carry on an extended search for it in a storage house and transport it to the examination site. �UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA for Continuation Study Minneapolis 34 Center stitute April 1 — 2, 1955 on Lake Suerior Geology PROGRESS REPORT ON TRE MANAINSE "DIABASEtt, BATCHAWANA, ONIARIO. Gerald N. Friedman Saalt Ste. Marie, Ontario, Canada The Mamainse YtDiabasetl is located about 3 miles north of Sa.tilt Ste. Marie in the District of Algoma within about six miles of the east The area is one of the most rugged in Ontario. shore of Lake Superior. The Mamainse "Diabase" forms a high plateau with an average elevation of about 1600 to lOO feet and is intersected by deep fault— and joint— controlled valleys. The Griffin Lake diabase intrusion, which postdates the Mamainse "Diabase", underlies an area of at least three square miles at the eastern margin of the Mamainse "Diabase" and rises to an elevation of 2100 feet towering about 1400 feet above Lake Superior. The Mamainse "Diabase" is a metadiabase and metabasalt composed of plagioclase (AnA5O) and hornblende with locally abundant epidote and chlorite. Its texture ranges from ophitic and poikilophitic to basaltic; metabasalts of porphyritio texture were noted but are rare. Pillow structures suggest deposition in a submarine environment. A complex series of metamorphosed lavas and sediments, and siliceous iron ore is interbedded with the Maniainse "Diabase" near its northern and southern margins. This complex sequence was overlain by the main mass of the Mamainse "Diabase" prior to folding. The rocks maintain general east—west to N 60°E strike and have a steep dip. Granite dikes locally cut up the "diabase" and interbedded formations and are Ln turn cut by later diabase dikes which are probably equivalent to Moore's Lower Keweenawan. Faults and joints of several generations are irominent and are locally mineralized with cobaltite, chalcopyrite, rite, pyrrhotite, molybdenite, carbonate and quartz veins. The Griffin Lake diabase intrusion is mostly composed of plagio— e (An502) and subcalcic augite (2 V= 35—44°). Quartz and opegnatite are abundantly disseminated through the rocks, secondary nblende is locally prominent and epidote has been noted. �UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA Center for Continuation Study Minneapolis 14 April 1 — istitute on Lake Superior Geo1o 2, 1955 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL OF SEDIMENTARY IRON MINERALS N. King I-tuber U. S. Geological Survey, Iron Mountain, Michigan A recontly developed Eh—pH (th = bility oxidation diagram for hematite, siderite and potential) iron mineral pyrite has been extended to Lude raagnetite through the utilization of free enerr data for these als in addition to the solubility data previously used. Physical— a1 data supports the probability of primary (or diagenetic) bite in sedimentary iron—formations as suggested by field evidence. The chemical environments, as indicated by the Eh—pH stability diagram are sunmarized as follows: Hematite: Requires oxidizing environment, although stable under moderately reducing conditions above pH of approximately 5. Siderite: Stable under intermediate Eh conditions, and apparently only below pH of approximately 6.5. Magnetite: Stable under moderately reducing conditions at pH values of approximately 6 or above. Pyrite: Moderate to strongly reducing environment through normal pH range. �UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA Continuation Study Center for Minneapolis hi. nstitute April 1 — on Lake Superior Geology 2, 1955 SOME MAGNETIC SUSCEPTIBILITY MEASUREMENTS ON DUMOND DRILL CORES FROM THE CUYtJNA DISTRICT Charles E • Jahren U. S. Geological Survey, Austin Junior College, Austin, Minnesota Measurements of magnetic susceptibility of 57 cores from diamond drilling in the Cuyuna District were made as part of a geophysical study by the U. S. Geological Survey and the Minnesota Geological Survey. Values of susceptibility are calculated from the readings of an alternating current deviation test bridge, slightly modified from commercial design, and the calculated values are tabulated against footage and generalized geologic logs. Susceptibilities of cores with similar where this seems feasible. readings and from adjacent values are averaged The problems of interpreting scattered core smples, the effects of varying core recovery, the compari son of values from oxidized and unoxidized core discussed. are �UNIVERSITY OF IffNNESOTA Center for Continuation Study Minneapolis 14 stitute on Lake orior Gel April 1 — 2., 1955 SEDIMENTaRY FACIES OF IRON—FORMATION Harold L. James U. S. Geological Survey, Menlo Park, California The sedimentary iron—formations in the Lake Superior region can be divided on the basis of the dominant original iron mineral into four prinsulfide, carbonate, oxide, and silicate. As chemical sedi— cipal facies: raents, these rocks reflect certain aspects of the chemistry of the deposi— tional environxients. The major control, at least for the sulfide, carbonate, and oxide types, was the oxidation potential. The evidence indicates that deposition took place in restricted basins, which were separated from the open sea by thresholds that inhibited free circulation and permitted development of abnormalities in oxidation potential and water composition. The sporadic distribution of metamorphism and of later oxidation permits primary fades on the basis of unoxidized, essentially unnetamorphosed material. The sulfide facies is represented by black slates description of the in which pyrite may make up as much as 40 percent of the rock. The free— carbon content of these rocks typically ranges from 5 to 15 percent, indicating that ultra—stagnant conditions prevailed during deposition. Locally, The carbonate facies the pyritic rocks contain layers of iron—rich carbonate. consists, in its purer form, of interbedded iron—rich carbonate and chert. It is a product of an environment in which oxygen concentration was sufficiently high to destroy most of the organic material but not high enough to facios is found as two permit formation of ferric compounds. principal types, one characterized by magnetite and the other by hematite. The cie Both minerals appear to be of primary origin. The magnetite—banded rock is one of the dominant lithologies in the region; it consists typically of magnetite interlayered with chert, carbcnate, or iron silicate, or combinations of the three. Its mineralogy and association suggest origin under weakly oxidizing to moderately reducing conditions. The hematite—banded rocks consist of finely crystalline hematite interlayered with chert or jasper. Oolitic structure is common. This facies doubtless accumulated in a strongly oxidiz- ing, probably nearshore, environment similar to that in which younger hematitic ironstones such as the Clinton oolite were deposited. The licate faci contains one or more of the hydrous ferrous silicates (greenalite, minnesotate, stilpnomelane, chlorite) as a major constituent. Granule structure, similar to that of glauconite, is typical of some varieties; others are nongranular and finely laminated. The most common association of the silicate rocks is with either carbonate— or magnetite—bearing rocks, which suggests that the optimum conditions for deposition ranged from slightly oxidizing to slightly reducing. AU of these rocks show evidence of post—deposition, pre—lithifica— tion changes (diagenesis), which in general have produced minerals characteristic of one step lower in the oxidation—potential scheme. �UNIVERITY OF ffNNESOTA Center for Continuation Study Minneapolis Institut on Lake Superior ology 14 April 1 — 2, 1955 Harold L. James Page 2 The generalized facies characteristics of the iron—formations in the principal Lake Superior districts are summarized as follows: 1. Mesabi. Most of the Biwabik iron—formation is of the oxide facies, principally magnetite—banded, with a large amount of granular silicate rock. White's study has shown that the oxide—silicate rocks of the main Mesabi grade westward into carbonate and sulfide facies. 2. Ouyuna. Principally silicate and carbonate rocks, verging toward the sulfide facies (which accounts for the high—phos, high manganese ores). Similar to the Mesabi, with magnetite—banded oxide facies 3. Gogebic. and silicate facies predominant. Magnetite—banded rock grades locally into carbonate iron—formation, but much of the carbonate in the rocks can be shown to be the result of diagenesis. 4. Marquette. Lower part of the Negaunee iron—formation is carbonate fcies, which grades upward into silicate facies and that in turn to rock of the oxide facies that forms the uppermost part of the formation. The Vulcan iron—formation is almost entirely of the oxide 5. Menominee. facies; the lower member appears to be principally magnetite-banded rock; the upper member is principally hematite—banded rock. 6. Iron River—Crystall Falls district. The main iron—formation is carbonate facies, which is underlain by and gradational into a 50—foot black slate bed that contains 35—40 percent pyrite. The relationship between the iron—rich rocks and volcanism, stressed by many, is believed to be structural, not chemical: in the Lake Superior region both iron—deposition and volcanism are related to geosynclinal develop— rient during Huronian time. In Michigan, the lower Huronian rocks are iron— poor quartzite and dolomite-—typical "stable—shelf" deposits; most of the upper Huronian consists of iron—poor grayiacke and slate with associated volcanic rocks—a typical "geosynclinal" assemblage. Thus the iron—rich beds of the middle Huronian and lower part of the upper Huronian were deposited during a trasitional stage in structural history. The major environmental requirement for deposition of iron—formation is the closed or restricted basin; this requirement coincides in time with what would be a normal stage in evolu— tion of the geosyncline: namely, structural development of offshore buckles or swells that subsequently develop into island arcs characterized by volcanism. �UNIVERSITY OF 1INNESOTA Center for Continuation Study Minneapolis iL'. stitute April 1 — 2, on Lake Superior Geology FYRRHOTITE IRON FORMATIONS L. C. Kilburn and H. D. B. Wilson University of Manitoba, Winnipeg, Canada Large numbers of pyrrhotite iron formations are being discovered in the Canadian shield by airborne magnetic and electromagnetic surveys. One common type of pyrrhotite iron fonnation consists of banded pyrrhotite— magnetite mixtures in banded cherts and tuffs. other types of These deposits like many pyrrhotite deposit are barren of other base metal mineralization. Laboratory experiments show that H23 reacts with magnetite and converts it to pyrrhotite at temperatures as low as LOO° C. Iron silicates are con- verted in part to pyrrhotite at somewhat higher temperaturs. It is proposed that this type of banded pyrrhotite—magnetite deposit is a normal cherty iron formation which has been metamorphosed by heat and reaction with a sulphur—bearing gas, possibly H2S, to produce pyrrhotite from some of the magnetite and possibly from some of the iron—bearing silicates. �UNIVERSITY OF i1INNESOTA Center for Continuation Study Minneapolis iL April Thstitute on Lake Superior Geology 1 — 2, 19SS MAGNETITE, MAGHEMITE, HEMATITE Henry Lepp University of Minnesota, Duluth Branch, Duluth, Minnesota Differential thermal analyses of magnetite specimens show that magnetite goes through two stages of oxidation when heated in air. The first stage occurs at temperatures between 200 and to S60° C, and its intensity is related the fineness of the specimen. The second stage begins at approximately 6° C It and it is often not complete even at ioSo° C. is suggested that the first stage is a surface phenomena involving. the formation of maghemite (gamma Fe203) on the amount of maghemite specimen, and of a formed is a function of the speed of oxidation. magnetite nuclei. The the specific surface of the The second stage results from complete breakdown of the magnetite structure with oxidation to hematite (alpha Fe203). The behavior of synthetic siderite with respect to oxidation supports the foregoing explanation for the mechanism of magnetite oxidation. is commonly first oxidized to magnetite. Siderite Rapid oxidation of synthetic siderite at moderate temperatures produces gamma Fe203 as an end product, whereas slow oxidation of the same material results in the formation of alpha—Fe203. �UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA Center for Continuation Study Minneapolis iL'. Institute on Lake Superior Geology April 1 — 2, 19SS KEWEENAWAN FELSITES OF THE BETE GRISE RAY AREA J. 14. Neilson and J. P. Dobl1 Michigan College of Mining and Technology, Houghton, Michigan Recent field and laboratory studies have been undertaken at the Michigan College of LiLining and Technology in an effort to determine the origin of certain felsite masses in the Bete Grise Bay area of the Keweenaw Peninsula. The felsite masses occur of interbedded lava flows and conglomerates. felsite and in the Keweenawan series Earlier workers mapped the occurrences and suggested intrusive relationships for some bodies extrusive relationships for others. Results of the present work in— dicate that thc felsites are rhyolitic differentiates of a magma which provided the chemically—related lavas of the region, and that some felsite masses bear intrusive relations to the older rocks while others were extruded as highly viscous flows. Criteria are presented for the field recognition of both types of felsitic occurrence. �UNIVERSITY OF MINNiSOTA Center for Continuation Study iviinneapolis 1)4 April 1 Institute on Lake Superior Geo1ogr — 2, 195 STRATIGRA.PHY IN THE CENTRAL PART OF THE CUYUNA DISTRICT, ItINNESOTA Robert G. Schmidt U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. (ie stratigraphy of the Cuyuna district has been shown to be much simpler than was previously believed. Almost all of the iron ore and mangan— iferous iron ore produced in the district is mined from one well—defined stratigraphic unit, here referred to as the "main" iron—formation. Other sediments may be roughly grouped as older or younger than the main iron— formation, and the stratigraphic positions of the other rocks are usually measured from it. The elastic sediments are dominated b3r argillites and siltstones. Part of the argillites older than the main iron—formation are sandy or silty, and there are lenses of quartzite near the contact with the iron—formation. Between 1,000 and about 2,000 feet stratigraphically below the iron—formation fine quartz siltstones are abundant. These siltstones are the oldest rocks that have been examined in this study. The main iron—formation is the best—knvwn stratigraphic unit in the district. Its lithologic variations are similar to some "typical" pre—Cambrian iron—formations in other districts. Extensive changes in lithology and thickness take place in short distances along the strike. Two general lithologic types have been recognized and mapped. The thin—bedded fades is a thinly laminated rock, which may contain any combination of chert, siderite, minnesotaite, stilpnomelane, and magnetite. The thick—bedded Lacies is composed of chert and red and brown iron oxides. In part of the district, the entire iron—formation is thick—bedded, in part it is all thin—bedded, and in about one third of the area the thick-bedded facies overlaps the thin-bedded facies and grades downward into it. Several lines of evidence suggest——but do not prove——that the thick—bedded facies was deposited in shallower water. In general, where the iron—formation is thin, the thick—bedded facies is present or dominates, granular textures may be present, and there are quartzite lenses in the adjacent older sediments. The younger sediments are generally finer elastics, partly ferruginous and partly carbonaceous. Tuffaceous argillites, tuffs, and lava flows make up the 300 feet immediately overlying the main iron—formation .J The volcanic rocks and some associated argillites, which are assumed to be reworked tuffs, are characterized by an unusually high Ti02 content, generally 1 to )4 percent and averaging about 2 percent. This itaniferous zone can be easily mapped even where the stratigraphic position of sediments cannot be determined by other means. It is therefore useful in the solution of stratigraphic problems. Part of the younger argillites is abnormally ferruginous and locally grades into lenses of lean "upper" iron—formation. The relation of these lenses to-a particular stratigraphic horizon is not known, but it is probable that they are not all of the same age. They have not been found closer to the main iron—formation than SOO feet. The transitional contacts of these lenses contrast with the sharp contacts of the main iron—formation . �UNIVERSITY OF IviIINESOTA Center for Continuation Study Minneapolis 114. Institute on Lake Superior April Geology STRTIA?HY 1 — 2, 19S5 OF MINNESOTA LAKE DEPOSITS F. M. Swain and N. Prokopovich University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota Samples been studied • County; County; of the bottom sediments of several lakes in Minnesota have The lakes include Minnetonka, Hennepin Johanna, Ramsey County; Cedar, County; Prior, Scott Wright County; Burntside, St. Louis and Beaver Bay area, Lake Superior. A preliminary report of the results of these studies will be presented. �uNIvERsir OF MINNESOT Center for Continuation Study Minneapolis lLi. Institute on Lake Superior Geology April 1 — 2, 195S A GRAVITY STUDY OF THE LJKE SUPERIOR SYNCLINE Edward Thiel University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin Six years ago the Geophysics Section at Wisconsin began a program of regional gravitational mapping in the western United States and .1aska. The first traverses leading westward from Madison across the northern mid—contiIn some cases nent in 19)49 detected regions of abnormally high gravity. this "high" was flanked on both sides by gravity "lows" • As the data accumulated it became evident that the anomalous area formed a more or less linear feature, offset in several places, extending from the Lake Superior region southward into Kansas. On the south, the anomalous area was blanketed by Paleozoic sediments, and the scarcity of deep boreholes made interpretation difficult. Therefore, the cause of the anomaly was sought first at its northern end, about Lake Superior, where the pre—Canibrian rocks outcrop, facilitating a correlation of gravity and geology. In the Lake Superior area the large regional anomaly is associated with rocks of Keweenawan age. Positive Bouguer anomalies occur over the dense lava flows of the Keweenaw Peninsula, northwestern Wisconsin, northeastern Minnesota, and Isle Royal; these anomalies reach +60 mgals in Wisconsin and Minnesota. The gravity "lows" occur over basins filled with low density sediments of Upper Keweenawan age; the most striking example is the —90 mgal low on the Bayfield Peninsula. second thick accumulation of sedimentary rocks is suggested. to underlie the —90 mgal low at Cinber1and. The structre exhibited by the. Pale ozoic rocks (River Falls Syncline) in the Curaberland region may represent only the last stage in the development of the more fundamental Keweenawan structure at depth Steep gravity gradients indicate the Douglas Fault. A second major symmetric to the Douglas Fault is mapped in northwestern Wisconsin on the opposite side of the Lake Superior Syncline. The center of the syncline has been thrust upward between the two faults as a horst. The interruption fault of the positive anomaly near eUon is related to the intrusion of a granitic mass. Further detailed geologic correlation is presented in six structure sections along lines of gravity traverse. An isostatic correction cannot significantly reduce the gravity differentials in the Lake Superior region. Complete local isostasy cannot exist here, but regional isostasy which considers the "highs" and "lows" together may prevail. A "geological correction" which takes account of geology to a radius of 20 miles from a station and to a depth of 38,000 feet was computed for gravity stations in Wisconsin. Such a correction accounts for the greater part of the anomalies. Any attempt to compute variations in the thickness of crustal layers without first allowing for the near—surface geology would have led to serious error in this region. �UNIVERSITY OF IVaNNESOTA Center for Continuation Study Minneapolis it1. Institute on Lake Superior April Geology 1 — 2, l9S MEGASCOPIC PETROFABRICS USED IN DECIPHERING STRUCTURE James W. Trow U. S. Geological Survey, Michigan State College, East Lansing, Michigan Megascopic rock fabrics are integrated with lithology, gross structure, and microscopic petrofabrics in an outline of the sequence of orogenic events of late Huronian time in a part of Dickinson County, Michigan. The fabrics of these Huronian and pre—Huronian rocks are compared to the fabrics of a somewhat similar lithologic sequence of' Cambro—Ordovician and pre- Cambrian rocks of Dutchess County, New York, described in detail in the literature by Robert Balk, and briefly examined by the author of the present paper. Statistical equal—area diagrams of rock fabrics support the conclusions that the rocks of the Dickinson County area experienced i) late-Huronian deformation within the pattern determined largely by the anisotropism of the pre—Huronian rocks, 2) and strong following dip—slip underthrusting and ramping, 3) deformation in same instances facilitated by the ding and the strike—slip movement contemporaneous to development of slip cleavage parallel to bed- gneissic foliation, and L1.) metamorphism of waning stages of the orogeny. basic intrusives during �flTI1jSITy OF IvtENNESOTA Center titute k for Continuation Study Minneapolis 14 April 1 — 2, 1955 prior Geology ON THE ORIGIN OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR IRON ORES Stanley University A. Tyler of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin The origin of the Lake Superior iron ores has intrigued geologists for the past one hundred years. Concepts pertaining to ore genesis advanced by Foster and Whitney, Whittlesey, Lapham, Brooks, Irving and Van Hise, Van Hise and Leith, Gruner and Tyler are briefly summarized as a basis for discussion Although many diverse opinions have been expressed regarding the origin ores there seems to be more or less general agreement among the more of the recent 1. workers upon the following points: The iron formations of the Lake Superior region were originally comquantities of iron posed dominantly of silica, with important but subordinate carbonate, iron silicate, iron oxide and iron suiphide. 2. The iron ore is largely a residual product formed by alkaline oxygen— bearing solutions which oxidized the ferrous minerals to the ferric state and removed the silica in solution. . Migration of iron and replacement has played an important part in the development of some — perhaps many — ore bodies. 4. Fractures, faults, joints, breccia zones, bedding planes, dikes, sills and impervious sedimentary horizons have exerted a marked control upon the path that the ore forming solutions took through the iron formation. 5. The period of ore formation was largely if not entirely restricted to the pre—Gsxnbrian. In contrast, general lack of agreement, diverse opinions and some controversy has centered around the following points: 1. Whether the solutions that oxidized the iron and leached the silica were rising hydrothermal waters or cold descending meteoric waters. 2. Whether the silica that was leached from the iron formation during the process of ore formation was largely in the form of chert (quartz)..:or largely in the form of iron silicates such as ninnesotaite, stilpnomelane, chlorite and grunerite. Thiphasis placed upon hot waters, alkaline waters or a silicate facies of the iron formation as necessary requisites for ore formation calls for the most optimum conditions for ore formation. Since the time factor is unknown it seems more probable that the ores may have developed rather slowly under less optimum conditions. Mineralogical and chemical evidence is cited to substantiate the concept that both acid and alkaline solutions have passed through some of the iron ore bodies of the Lake Superior region. is The iron formation is considered to be a peculiar sedimentary sensitive to the presence of oxygen and to the loss of silica. cept leads to the conclusion that the ores may have formed under differing sets of environmental conditions. rock which This con- at different times �UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA Continuation Study Minneapolis 14 Center for Institute on Lake Superior Geo1 April 1 2, 1955 THE WORK OF TEE RIBBING LABORATORY OF THE DIVISION OF LAND AND MINERAlS M. P. Walle Division of Land and Minerals, Department of Conservation, Ribbing, Minnesota Following is a list of the more Important activities: 1. Geophysical work In connection with state-owned properties, or along public roads to check possibilities for ore or rock materials, largely magnetic and resistivity surveys. Of special Importance are areas south of the Iron formation Involving Cretaceous ore possIIiitiee, for example In the region between Buhi end Kinney. Resistivity tests are uscful west of ovey where the xnagietIc survey does not help, because of the nonmagnetic character of the iron formation. 2. Exploration work on state permits and leases. This Includes visual classification for separating the formatIon into Its four main divisions and for sorting of ore materials Into mercharitable ore, wash ore, jig ore, and magnetic and non-magnetic taconite. Stratigraphic work in the mines is also carried out. 3. An important service is supplying Ir.formaion on drill records and access to drill cores of work done on state lands. The sample library at Hibbing supplements the U. S. Bureau of Mines core library at Fort Snelling. 4. Development of a circuit on the Dinge-Davis magnetic separator permitting separation of samples Into high-grade concentrates, magnetic middlings, arid non-magnetic tailings. This separation facilitates microscopic and spectrographic examinations. 5. Ground mapping of certain areas of state-owned land where anomalies are shown by aerial magnetic surveys. 6. Study of the Duluth gabbro contact areas of Interest for copper, nickel, and other metals. 7. Cooperation with various organizations in the preparation of symposiums on mining and geology. �UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA Center for Continuation Study Minneapolis Institute iL April 1 — on Lake Superior Geology 2, 19% ORIGIN OF THE BIWABIK IRON—FORI&ATION, MESABI RANGE, MINNESOTA D. A. White Carter Oil Company, Tulsa, Oklahoma The later Precambrian Animikie group in northeastern Minnesota consists of three sedimentary units: the Pokegama (quartzite), Biwabik (iron—rich rock), and Virginia (argillite) formations. "Mesabi range" designates the preglacial outcrop belt, to 3 miles wide and 120 miles long, of the Biwabik formation. Varieties of iron—rich rock ("taconite") are either granular or slaty and consist dominantly of chert, iron silicates, magnetite, and siderite. The Lower Cherty, Lower Slaty, Upper Cherty, and Upper Slaty members of the Biwabik formation, which averages 600 feet in thickness, can be further subdivided into smaller lithic units. These members are relatively uniform along most of the range, but only one cherty and one slaty member exist on the Westernmost Mesabi, where the lithic units are intertongued. The Pokegama, Biwabik, and Virginia formations are considered conformable. Chert, greenalite, ininnesotaite, stilpnomelane, and siderite probably formed rocks are essentially unmetamorphosed. magnetite, some hematite, The either during or shortly after deposition. The Poke galna and Biwabik formations were probably produced by the migration of a series of coexisting environments of deposition during an advance, a retreat, and a second advance of the Animikie sea. The deposits formed, during the retreat, in successive environments seaward from shore, were clastic material, carbonaceous—pyritic mud, chert—siderite, chert— magnetite, and iron silicate. Fine clastics of the Virginia formation, perhaps furnished by an outburst of volcanic activity, spread across the former environments of chemical sedimentation. Possible conditions of iron sedimentation were as follows: derivation of iron and silica by weathering of a low—lying land mass, perhaps under an atmosphere rich in carbon dioxide, and a seasonal climate; tectonic stability; and deposition in a shallow, quiescent epicontinental sea. �UNIVERSITY OF NNESCJIA Center for Continuation Study Minneapolis 14 April 1 Institute on Lake Superior Geolojr 2, 1955 SIJNMRY OF THE SUB—DIVISIONAL CORRELATION OF THE MLDDLE HtJRONIAN IRON—FORMATIONS OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR DISTRICT J. F. Wolff, Sr. Duluth, Minnesota For a generation or more there has been general agreement among of the Lake Superior District, that, based on general geologic associations, the major iron—ore producing formations of the (older) Middle Huronian series of iron bearing rocks were of the same general age and broadly of similar character. geologists A great many geologists have known, especially of later years, that fairly comparable subdivisions of this Middle Huroniari iron—formation can be found in the different districts. The presenter of this brief contribution is not aware of the publication of any correlation diagram which shows major subdivision of the older iron—formation of Mesabi, Cuyuna, Gogebic, Marquette and old Menominee districts into four main layers and even the division of some of these into minor layers having similar characteristics. This contribution presents such a correlation diagram in color, projected on a screen for convenience of the audience. Four major divisions of the iron—formation are shown,—from the top down being — Upper Slaty, Upper Cherty, Lower Slaty and Lower Cherty, lying between a basal quarteite and quartz—slate and an overlying very thick black—slate and graywacke in places, which locally has a conglomerate and quartzite—quartz—slate at its base, A very great erosion period intervened between the top of the Upper Slaty and the beginning of deposition of the Upper Huronian conglomerate— quartzite—slate series of rocks so that in places only remnants of the Upper Slaty Division are left. In the main area of the Marquette District there is no remnant of it so far as the writer knows but north of Crystal Falls at the Arnasa—Porter mine, was found at the top of the Negaunee iron—formation. A few of the minor subdivisions are shown on the diagram. it The major unconformity between Upper and Middle Huronlan rocks is shown graphically, and the relative position of the Upper Huronian iron— formations of the Iron River, Crystal Falls, Florence, Menominee, Marquette— Gwinn, Gogebic and cuyuna districts is shown also on the diagram, which was compiled from aU available sources, including the author's work or visits in all the districts and interviews at different times with geologists active in the several areas. Minor details may be controversial especially with respect to the greenstones in the Iron River, Crystal Falls and Florence districts whose position in the geologic column may still be open to question and further exploration evidence. �UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA Center for Continuation Study Minneapolis l Institute April 1 — on Lake Superior Geology 2, l9S EXPLORATION FOR NICKEL AND COPPER IN NORTHERN MINNESOTA GEOCHB1'1ICAL Donald H University of Minnesota, Yardley Minneapolis, Minnesota Geochemical tests for nickel and copper in glacial soil from the Ely district show that pronounced anomalies overlie mineralized Duluth gabbro The geochemical pattern demonstrates that the mineralization is parallel to the gabbro—granite contact, but 300 feet or so from the contact. The profiles of copper distribution are similar to the nickel profiles, with copper present in greater amount. Both metals are confined to the finer soil fractions. The processes by which the heavy elements migrate is not clear. It is believed that natural earth currents may play some part in distribution of the heavy elements. The vertical distribution is being tested to facili- tate investigation of the process of migration. �UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA for Continuation Study Minneapolis iL Center Institute on Lake Superior Geolor April 1 — 2, 19SS STUDIES OF STRATIFIED ROCKS OCCURRING BELOW THE HtJRONIAN SUCCESSION IN THE MARQUETTE DISTRICT, MICHIGAN Justin Zinn, Gerald L Brooke, Theodore Engel, and Richard Hagni Michigan State College, East Lansing, Michigan Several remnants of metamorphosed stratified rocks are known to occur along the margin of the Marquette syncline or adjacent to nearb;,r Huronian synclines in the Marquette district. greater These remnants are age than the Mesnard quartzite apparently all of Three such remnants have been restudied so far and they are the Lake 'nchantment (Mud Lake) sediments, the Holyoke formation and the Kitchi schist. The restudies included detailed mapping and petrographic examination of the rocks of each area in the attempt to eatablish more definitely the age and origin. The Holyoke formation and the Lake Enchantment sediments overlie the Keewatin greenstones with marked tion unconformable contacts and the Kitchi forma- is believed to have a similar relationship. belong These formations therefore to the time interval between the Keewatin and in Michigan. Each of these sedimentary the base of the Huronian remnants is distinctly different from the others and they are not believed to be of the same age. The Holyoke formation appears to be tillite and it may provide a clue in correlating the Michigan Huronian with that on the north shore of Lake Huron. �UNIVERSITY Oi MINNESOTA Center for Continuation Study Minneapolis iL'. Institute April on Lake Superior Geology 1 — 2, 1955 BOTTOM CORING IN LAKE SUPERIOR James H. Zuinberge University During sediments the of Michigan, Ann sruner of 1953 of Lake Superior. several Arbor, Michigan cores were recovered from the bottom The research was accomplished through a coopera- tive venture between the U. S. Fish and Wildlife Service and The Great Lakes Research Institute, a research organization of the University of Michigan dedicated to scientific investigations of the Great Lakes. The cores were obtained with a gravity coring rig which consisted of a weighted 5—foot length of 3—inch diameter pipe to which two 10—foot sections of 2—inch I. D. diameter pipe was attached • The maximum core recovery was about 8 feet. Ten cores were taken at Stations between Keweenaw Bay and Isle Royale, and Grand Marais, Minnesota and Bayfield, Wisconsin. fine grained ranging from clay to silt size. cores is their color variation. The core material is The chief difference in the Sortie are reddish, ranging from 10 R 3/2 to 2.5 YR 5/2 (Munsell), while others are grey. is red and the lower 1 foot is grey. In one core the upper 6 feet No relationship between color and depth of water or color and geographic location is apparent. A mineralogical study of one core recovered in 630' of water showed that the composition is about 75 clay minerals. percent quartz and feldspar and only 25 percent The latter group include kaolinite and a possible interlayered chiorite—illite mineral as indicated by X—ray diffraction studies presently under way at Ohio State University. � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology Text A resource consisting primarily of words for reading. Examples include books, letters, dissertations, poems, newspapers, articles, archives of mailing lists. Note that facsimiles or images of texts are still of the genre Text. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology: Proceedings, 1955 Description An account of the resource Proceedings of the Institute on Lake Superior Geology, University of Minnesota, April 1-2 1955. Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1955 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource PDF Language A language of the resource English https://digitalcollections.lakeheadu.ca/files/original/319737665e4e4e9fe870d76d13c8daee.pdf 497c207e45c1c9701e58ec0f9bc66e67 PDF Text Text Institute on Lake Superior Geology GEOLOGICAL EXPLORATION A collection of twelve papers and three panel discussions presented at the Institute on Lake Superior Geology, Houghton, Michigan, 1956 The Michigan College of Mining and Technology Press �2 (5100x6600x16M tiff) �Copyright 1957 by The Michgan College of Mining and Technology Noughton, Michigan Lithoprinted in U.S.A. EDWARDS BROTHERS, INC. Ann Arbor, Michigan �A Publication of Papers Delivered at the Institute on Lake Superior Geolopy Houghton, May l!-12, 1956 on Geological Exploration Steering Committee A. K. Sneigrove, Chairman; Michigan College of Mining & Technology L. 0. Bacon, Michigan College of Mining & Technology W. Been, Michigan College of Mining & Technology B. H. Boyurrt, Cleveland—Cliffs Iron Company A. T. Broderick, Inland Steel Company W. L. Daoust, Michigan State Geologist J. P. Dobell, Michigan College of Mining & Technology, Treasurer R. W. Drier, Michigan College of Mining & Technology C. 1E. Dutton, U. S. Geological Survey G. A. Hoffman, Jones & Laughlin Ore Company V. E, Kral, Ford Motor Company W. A. Longacre, Michigan College of Mining & Technology A. N. Macintosh, Michigan College of Mining & Technology N. H. Manderfield, Michigan College of Mining & Technology J. M. Neilson, Michigan College of Mining & Technology J. R. Rand, White Pine Copper Company i. Royce, Pickands Mather & Company L. C. Smith, North Range Mining Company K. Spiroff, Michigan College of Mining & Technology M. E. Volin, Michigan College of Mining & lechrtology K. L. Weir, U. S. Geological Survey Cosponsors Michigan College of Mining and Technology Geological Survey of Michigan Exploration Subsection, Upper Peninsula Section) American Institute of Mining, Metallurgical and Petroleum Engineers 'UI �Contents Regional Structural Setting of the Michigan Native Copper District by Walter S. White, U.S. Geological Survey Copper Mineralization at the White Pine Mine, Ontonagon County, Michigan by John R. Rand, Consulting Geologist, White Pine Copper Company Comments on Preceding Papers Page 3 17 18 by T, M. Broderick, Calumet, Michigan Geology and Mineral Deposits of the Man itouwadge Lake Area, Ontario by E. G. Pye, Ontario Department of Mines The Blind River, Ontario, Uranium Area by S. M. Roscoe, Geological Survey of Canada Magnetic Prospecting for Iron Ores by W. George Wahl, Consulting Geologist, Willowdale, Ontario Relationship of Gravity to Geologic Structure in Michigan's Upper Peninsula by 1. 0. Bacon, Michigan College of Mining and Technology Geological Factors Affecting Beneficiation of Lake Superior Iron Ores by M. E. Volin, Bureau of Mineral Research, Michigan College of Mining and Technology Geological Characteristics of Michigan Iron Ores Affecting Beneficiation (Panel) by Alan T. Broderick, Inland Steel Company The Relationship of Diagenesis, Metamorphism and Secondary Oxidation to the Concentrating Characteristics of the Negaunee Iron Formation of the 26 40 49 54 59 60 63 Marquette Range (Panel) by G. J. Anderson and Tsu Ming Han, The Cleveland—Cliffs Iron Company The Nature and Beneficiating Properties of Michipicoten Siderites (Panel) Part I. Distribution and Nature by A. M. Goodwin, Algoma Ore Properties, Limited Part II. Beneficiating Properties by D. R. Dorrance, Aigoma Ore Properties, Limited Distribution of Trace Elements in Soil Fractions by D. H. Yardley, University of Minnesota Trends in Geochemical Exploration by H. E. Hawkes, Massachusetts Institute of Technology Applied Photogeology by W. Warren Longley, Consultant, Aero Service Corporation, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania Modern Techniques of Photogeology and Photogrammetry in Natural Resource Development by John C. Bayless, Abrams Aerial Survey Corporation, Lansing, Michigan 70 74 76 86 94 102 �FOREWORD This publication is the record of the Institute on Lake Superior Geology which was held at the Michigan College of Mining and Technology, Houghton, Michigan, on May II and 12, 1956. The theme of the Institute was Geological Exploration and its purpose was to review exploration developments on both sides of the international border in both practice and theory. The Institute was made possible through the full cooperation of governmental agencies, the mineral industries, the institutions of higher education represented, and by private consultants who gave freely of their rich background of experience. All of the speakers were specially invited as leaders in their fields. The Institute is particularly indebted to the United States Geological Survey, the United States Atomic Energy Commission, the Geological Survey of Canada and the Ontario Department of Mines. The considerable task of transcribing the tape—recordings of several of the papers and all of the discussions was efficiently performed by Mrs. Marian 1. Hoyt, Secretary of the Department of Geology and Geological Engineering, Michigan College of Mining and Technology. These discussions are reported in semi—colloquial style. The three cosponsors, The Geological Survey of Michigan, the Exploration Subsection of the Upper Peninsula of Michigan Section of the American Institute of Mining, Metallurgical and Petroleum Engineers, and the Michigan College of Mining and Technology, join in thanking most cordially the participants and are glad to share with them the satisfaction of service to the profession of Geology. A. K. Snelgrove ��REGIONAL STRUCTURAL SETTING OF THE MICHIGAN NATIVE COPPER DISTRICT* by Walter S. White Introduction The native copper deposits of Michigan ore in mafic lovas and conglomerate beds of middle Keweenawan age. These rocks crop out all around the Lake Superior basin (Fig. I). Although Fig. — Generolized geologic mop of the Loke Superior region. Modified ofter Leith, Lund, and Leith (1935, pl. I) I *Publ;cation authorized by the Director, U.S. Geological Survey. 3 �the lavas, in particular, contain small amounts of copper almost everywhere, over 97 percent of the native copper mined from the region has come from a single area less than 30 miles long and only 2 or 3 miles wide — about I percent of the total area in which lavas of middle Keweenawan age form the bedrock. This paper proposes a possible explanation for this apparent concentration of economic deposits. The explanation is admittedly a very great oversimplification of a complex problem, but though we may not know all the reasons for localization of an ore deposit or district, we have useful if not infallible, tools for exploration when we know one or more of the most fundamental reasons. If the explanation proposed here is a correct one, it suggests one measure of the relative promise of various parts of the Lake Superior basin, and may even have application in other areas of the world with thick accumulations of basaltic lava. The general characteristics of the native copper deposits of Michigan have been described many times, and need not be reviewed in detail here. The most complete description is by Butler and others (1929), and briefer summaries can be found in Lindgren (1933, p. 517—527), Bateman (1950, p. 496—498), and other textbooks. The copper district (Fig. 2) lies on the south flank of the MILES GENERALIZED GEOLOGIC MAP OF MICHIGAN COPPER DISTRICT SHOWING PRINCIPAL MINES IN PLAN 0 Fig. 2 - Middle Keweenawan lavas (unshaded) dip 25 0 — 70 NW. Mines, shown by dark shading, are numbered as follows: I. Baltic amygdaloid mines (Champion mine at south- west end); 2. Atlantic mine; 3. Isle Royale mine; 4. Quincy mine; 5. Calumet & Hecla mine; 6. Osceola amygdaloid mine (workings partly beneath Calumet & Hecla mine); 7. Kearsarge amygdalod mines. The village of Houghton is just north of the Isle Royale mine and the village of Calumet is underlain by workings of the Calumet & Hecla mine. Keweenawan basin, and the stratified rocks of the district dip northwest toward the center of this The lavas of middle Keweenawan age (unshaded in Fig. 2) have dips that range from 25° to 70° NW., with the steeper dips prevailing near the Keweenaw fault. The sandstones of late Keweenawan age dip more gently. The Keweenaw fault is a reverse fault that separates the lavas of middle Keweenawan age From the more or less flatlying Jacobsvilte sandstone, of upper Keweenawar or Cambrian age. basin. Native copper occurs as fillings in the amygdules and interstices of the Fragmental tops of individual lava flows. This copper is associated with a number of other secondary filling minerals, principally chlorite, calcite, prehnite, epidote, and quartz, with subordinate red potash feldspar and zeolites. Some copper is found as interstitial Fillings and replacements in rhyolite conglomerate beds lying between a few of the lava flows; nearly 40 percent oF the copper from the district came from the single major conglomerate ore body discovered to date. 4 �Individual ore deposits are large in terms of area (Fig. 2). The amygdaloidal top of the Kearsarge flow has been continuously mined for six miles along the strike, and for nearly a mile down the dip, on the average. The ore body in the Calumet and Hecla conglomerate at Calumet covers an area of more than three square miles in the plane of the conglomerate bed. The thickness of the individual flow tops and conglomerate beds in these and other ore bodies ranges, at most places, from about 5 to 25 feet. The average grade of ore that has been mined from the lavas is probably a little less than 1 percent, whereas that from the Calumet and Hecla conglomerate averaged between 2 and 3 percent. The origin of the copper deposits has been debated for many years, as befits a district that has been prominent in the literature of mining and geology for more than a century. Some features of their origin, however, now seem well established. The copper is definitely epigenetic where it is present in sufficient abundance to make ore deposits. There is also good presumptive evidence that the copper moved up rather than down the dip of the amygdaloidal layers and conglomerate beds to reach its resting place in the present ore deposits. Detailed evidence on these important points has been presented by Butler and others (1929, p. 101—127) and Broderick and others (1946, p. 690—693, Knowledge of the reasons for the location of individual ore deposits and of the district itself, therefore, must stem at least in part from an understanding of what lies down the dip from the present deposits, where the copper presumably came from. This area is deeply buried, and we cannot hope to inspect it, but we can make some educated guesses about it, based on what can be seen at and near the surface. 696—697). Keweenawan Paleogeography The Keweenawan basin or syncline was formed primarily by downwarping during or since latest Keweenawan time. Even the youngest Keweenawan rocks locally have nearly vertical dips. The basin is also a basin of accumulation; that is, the downwarping began during the time the lavas and sediments themselves were filling the present basin. This s shown by the fact that the malorstrati— graphic units thicken down the dip toward the center of the basin. Evidence for the direction of flow of the lavas nearly everywhere indicates that the lavas have flowed outward from the center of the basin towards the margin. Pipe amygdules at the base of lava flows commonly show southward flow in the Michigan copper district (Butler and others, 1929, p. 26— 27) and westward flow on the Minnesota coast (Sandberg, 1938, p. 818—820). This evidence for flow toward the margin has generally been taken to indicate that the vents themselves were located in the center of the basin, but this need not necessarily be true. As will be shown below, the copper district probably lies closer to the center of the present basin than any part of the Lake Superior region in which lavas of middle Keweenawan age are now exposed, but so far as is known, it contains no dikes that might have served as feeders. In contrast, dikes and sills are fairly common in the Keweenawan series of Minnesota, farther from the center, and many unmetamorphosed basaltic dikes that may well be Keweenawan in age cut the Huronian rocks that surround the Keweenawan basin (Van Hise and Leith, 1911, p. 411). Lava extruded anywhere within, or even on the rim of a physiographic basin would flow to the lowest point and then spread out from there. Outward spreading of the lavas from the center of the basin, therefore, does not necessarily indicate that the feeders were in the center, and the distribution of dikes suggests that many of the vents, at least, may have been at or outside the margins of the basin. The petrology, abundance, and distribution of so—called Keweenawan dikes throughout the Lake Superior region deserve more study. 5 �Some conglomerate beds seem to have been deposited by streams flowing inward from the margins of the basin. This is shown by foreset beds and imbrication of pebbles in the Houghton conglomerate (White, 1952), and by foreset beds in the Baltic (No. 3) conglomerate at the Champion mine (most southwesterly mine on Baltic amygdaloid as shown on Figure 2). The conglomerates and sandstones of late Keweenawan age on the south limb of the basin contain numerous foreset beds, and these consistently indicate northward flow of streams. Finally, the middle, and particularly the upper, Keweenawan sedimentary rocks contain fragments of pre—Keweenawan metamorphic rocks; these could hardly have been carried into the basin by streams flowing outward from the center. If the lavas flowed toward the margin of the basin, and streams depositing conglomerate beds flowed toward the center, we have an apparent paradox — one or the other would seem offhand to have flowed uphill. The paradox can be resolved if the floor of the basin was nearly flat, and if t was being more or less continuously warped downward by tectonic movement to form the basin. As long as filling by lava kept pace with downwarping, the lava surface would be essentially flat or slope very gently toward the margins (cf. Sandberg, 1938, p. 818, 820—821), and streams could not extend out into the basin. They would presumably be ponded at the margins (cf. Fuller, 1950, p. 67, and Pardee and Bryan, 1926, p. 15—16, on the Columbia River basalts), or be diverted to flow parallel to the margin of the basin. When extrusion of lava was interrupted for any extended period of time, however, continued downwarpng would then produce a topographic basin into which streams could flow, depositing conglomerate beds. Conglomerate beds, therefore, represent interruptions in the steady accumulation of lava flows, It may be very significant that the first flow of lava above conglomerate beds, that is, the first flow after such an interruption, is very commonly a flow of extraordinary thickness (Broderick, 1935, p. 553—554); if the steady downwarping of the basin was more or less compensated isostatically by lava filling the basin, the longer such compensatory filling were postponed during an interruption, the greater might be the outpouring that terminated the interruption. Although in a general way the present tectonic basin probably coincides with this ancient basin of accumulation, the margins of the first are not everywhere parallel to the margins of the second. In the Michigan copper distrct, the present strike of the beds is northeast, but the flank of the old basin of accumulation seems to have had a more easterly trend here. Several criteria suggest this more easterly trend. (I) Though reliable data are scarce, the best available evidence indicates that major strati— graphic units generally increase in thickness down the dip (Butler and others 1929, pI. 20, provides the best example), as would be expected in a basin, If this thickening is more or less normal to the basin margin, lines of equal thickness, or isopachs, should be more or less parallel to the basin margins. Figure 3 shows the general orientation of isopachs at two places; the symbol at Calumet is based on the stratigraphic distance between the Allouez and the Calumet and Hecla conglomerates in the Calumet and Hecla mine; the symbol farther northeast represents the trend of lines of equal thickness of the Greenstone flow at the Allouez No. 3 mine. A dike, apparently fed from the interior of the flow while it was still molten, cuts the upper I. All the orientation features of Figure 3 have been corrected for the present dip of beds; they are shown with the orientation the features would have if the beds were tilted back to the horizontal. 6 �Fig. 3 — Features suggesting orientation of ancient margin of the Keweenawan basin part of the Greenstone flow 9 miles northeast of Calumet. This dike is at a place where the Green— stone Flow thins abruptly from over 1000 Feet to less than 500 Feet (Davidson and others, 1955), and seems to be more or less parallel to the axis of thinning; it is here assigned the-same significance as an isopachous line, though the apparent parallelism may be just a coincidence. (2) Another feature, here called pinchand_swellh1, has the same general east—west orientation. The fragmental tops of individual lava flows are typically thicker in some places than in others, as has been described at some length by Butler and others (1929, p. 31—32). An amygdaloidal flow top can range in thickness from less than 5 feet in the thin places to over 60 feet in the thick. An isopach map of a given arnygdaloidal flow top, plotted in the plane of the top, might show either irregularly interspersed patches of thick and thin fragmental amygdaloid or highly elongate bands of thick amygdaloid separated by parallel bands of thin. The widths of individual bands of thick or thin flow top range from a few tens to a few hundreds of Feel, and their length may be measured in thousands. These alternating bands of thick and thin amygdaloid are presumciby primary features that originated as the lava flowed. The orientation of elongate patches of thick and thin fragmental amygdaloid (pinch—and—swell) can be measured locally where the patches happen to be well exposed in accessible mine workings, but the evidence for their orientation at most places is indirect. Thickness of fragmental amygdoloid is at least one important factor affecting the location of ore shoots within the major deposits; the thicker parts of a copper—bearing flow top are generally more favorable than the thinner (Butler and others, 1929, p. 109, 192, 200—201, 219), and lean or barren streaks that are controlled by thinness of the flow top are conspicuous on stope maps and grade maps of some mines (Butler and others, 1929, pls. 39-49). Though for many reasons it would be most hazardous to use a grade or stope map as a faithful representation of the distribution of thick and t}in fragmental amygdalod, most large and prominently elongate rich and lean streaks probably reflect differences in thickness (pinch—and— swell) where they are not related to faults or crosscutting veins. The orientation of pinch—and—swell of flow tops as inferred from stope and grade maps is shown in Figure 3. Assuming that this structural feature formed during flow of the lava, one w"-' 7 �it to be either a feature that lies parallel to the direction of flow or perpendicular to it. The general parallelism of the pinch—and—swell with the two isopachous lines is apparent, so it is assumed that the pinch—and—swell lies perpendicular to the direction of flow of lava, and generally parallel to the margin, or shoreline, of the basin. (3) The three arrows in Figure 3 show the direction of stream flow as suggested by primary features in certain conglomerate beds interbedded with the lavas. The arrow north of Catumet represents the direction of flow of the streams that deposited the Houghton conglomerate as shown by imbrication of pebbles and foreset bedding (White, 1952). At the Allouez No. 3 mine, where these measurements were made, the Houghton conglomerate attains thicknesses of more than 25 feet along an axis striking slightly west of north, and thins to a foot or less within 1500 feet to the east and west of this axis. This axis is presumed to coincide, more or less, with the direction of flow of the stream or streams that deposited the conglomerate bed. Similar axes can be drawn parallel to thick parts of the Calumet and Hecla conglomerate in the Calumet and Hecla mine (Butler and others, 1929, p1. 38, "Plan showing thickness of lode"). The arrow west of Calumet represents the orientation of these axes. The absolute direction of stream flow — whether north—northwest or south—southeast — has not been established beyond question in the Calumet and Hecla mine, and the workings are inaccessible at present, so the head of the arrow may conceivably be shown at the wrong end; the head is shown at the north—northwest end by analogy with the arrow for the 1-loughton conglomerate because the lens of Houghton conglomerate at the Allouez No. 3 mine is in many detailed respects a small—scale replica of the lens of Calumet and Hecla conglomerate at Calumet. The arrow southwest of Houghton represents the direction of stream flow shown by foreset beds in the Baltic congtonierate at the Champion mine. The direction of flow here seems to have been nearly at right angles to the direction at the other two localities. At the other two localities, the direction of flow is normal to isopachs, and is presumed to be normal to the basin margins. The direction of flow at the Champion mine would thus seem to have been parallel to the basin margin, and may represent a stream diverted along the edge of a lava flow that spread out from the center of the basin. To sum up the evidence afforded by primary features of the lava flows and conglomerate beds, these features have two distinct trends at right angles to one another (Fig. 3), one slightly north of east and the other slightly west of north. These features can be logically related to the orientation of the ancient basin margin or "shore lines", and indicate that the margin trended slightly north of east in the area of the Mchigan copper district. The present strike of the rocks is northeast, diagonally across the trend of the ancient margin, so we may infer that the rocks northeast of Calumet, for example, represent more central parts of the ancient basin of accumulation than the rocks southwest of Houghton. The useful application of these orientation data will be discussed after consideration of the gross structure of the basin as a whole. Structure of the Keweenawan Basin Tangible evidence for the configuration of the Keweenawan basin is only fragmentary. The Keweenawan rocks are completely buried by younger sediments in the vicinity of Minneapolis and farther southwest, and perhaps also in parts of the peninsula between Lakes Superior and Michigan (Fig. I). East of Ashland, Wisconsin, the whole central part of the basin is covered by the waters of Lake Superior, and even the rim is under water in over 95 percent of the area east of the longi— 8 �hide of Keweenaw Point (40 miles east of Calumet). Attempts to determine the shape of the basin, therefore, must be based primarily on extrapolation from the attitudes of the rocks in the relatively small proportion of the whole area where they are exposed. When magnetic and gravmetrk data ace available for the whole region, particularly the area covered by Lake Superior, our present guesses can be considerably refined. The general attitude of bedding is known in all the areas where middle and upper Keweenawan rocks are exposed (Fig. ). In places like the copper district and a few others it is also possible to measure locally the rate at which the dip flattens toward the center of the basin. West from the longitude of Keweenaw Point, therefore, cross—sections can be constructed with some degree of control on both sides of the basin, In drawing sections, one has some latitude in the selection of curves used to connect the dips on opposite flanks. One can, as one exfreme, assume that the dips flatten rapidly toward the center of the basin, and that the beds are horizontal over most of the basin, beginning just a few miles in from the upturned margins of the basin; this construction gives a minimum depth for the structural basin. At the opposite extreme, one might assume that the curvature s more or less evenly distributed across the entire width of the basin; this construction gives a maximum depth for the structural basin. The second extreme — uniform distribution of curvature — is demonstrably in error in the copper district, where not only the dip but also the rate of flattening (rate of decrease of dip) generally decrease toward the center of the basin. Another rough limit is set by the known thickness of the Keweenawan rocks; the lavas of middle Keweenawan age are probably of the order of 20,000 feet thick in the copper district2, and these are overlain by at least 15,000 feet of sedimentary rocks of late Keweenawan age. The minimum depth of the base of the lavas in the center of the basin is therefore of the order of 35,000 feet, and may be greater if the stratigraphic units thicken appreciably toward the center of the basin, as they seem to do. Within these various limits, the most reasonable constructions that can be made suggest that the base of the lavas lies somewhere between 35,000 and 50,000 feet below sea level in the middle of the basin. By drawing sections across the basin at intervals, assuming some particular type of curvature, one can develop a structure contour map that shows the shape of the basin. Figure 4 shows such a structure contour map; this particular example is based on the assumption that the sharpest curvature is on the south limb, where the dips are steepest, and gives almost a minimum depth — the horizon contoured lies 15,000 feet or more above the probable base of the lava series. The general shape of the basin is about the same if other assumptions are made, and the principal difference introduced by these other assumptions is in the absolute depth. The general position of the deepest part is not materially changed. This is a logical consequence of the fact that the dips are gentler on the north limb than on the south - this asymmetry makes the deepest part lie nearer the southern limb almost regardless of the type of curvature assumed. Over 15,000 feet of lava are exposed in a single section in the Delaware quadrangle (Cornwall, 1954), a little east of the main part of the copper district, and here, as in the copper district proper, an unknown but probably large thickness of lavas at the base of the middle Keweenawan is cut out by the Keweenaw fault. 2. 9 �6- -0 \— LL0UEZ CONGLOMERATE BED DIAGRAMMATIC STRUCTURE CONTOUR MAP OF PART OF LAKE SUPERIOR BASIN 50 MILES Fig. 4 — Contours in thousands of feet, represent the approximate depth below sea level of the horizon of the Allouez conglomerate; this bed is probably at least 15,000 feet above the base of the lava series over most of the contoured area. The principal chance for error in a construction like Figure 4 lies in the possibility that there are important faults or reversals of dip out in the basin. Little can be done to evaluate or attack this particular problem without geophysical data in the area covered by Lake Suprior. Figure 5 is a highly simplified and locally modified version of Irving's map (1883, pl. 28) TED. Hibbing MIDDLE KEWEENAWAN LAVAS EXPOSED .— —' Minn€ois/ ( St. Paul 0 _- / GENERAL OUTLINE OF MIDDLE KEWEENAWAN GEOSYNCLINE. Form line contours, generalized after Irving, suggest configuration 200 Miles 00 Fig. 5 — Form—line Contour Map of the Lake Superior Basin Northeast of Minneapolis. Numbers refer to areas mentioned in text. 10 �showing the general configuration of the whole basin or geosyncline northeast of Minneapolis3. The heavy line outlining the area of lavas of middle Keweenawan age has been added. Though the interval between Irving's form lines represents strafigraphic thickness rather than vertical depth, these lines are virtually synonymous with structure contours where the dips are gentle. The most central line (deepest contour) of Figure 5 is taken from Irving's map without modification, except for a little smoothing at the east end; the oval area outlined by the dotted line is the area enclosed by the 20,000—foot contour of Figure 4, reproduced here to show the general correspondence. The form lines at the east end of the basin are, of course, based on very scant data. Metamorphism in Depth We have no first hand evidence to tell us what modifications, if any, deep burial in the center of the basin may have induced in the Keweenawan rocks, particularly the lavas. The present thermal gradient at Calumet is remarkably uniform to a depth of 5,488 feet, and averages 18.1 ± 0.23° C/km (Birch, 1954, p. 19). Extrapolating this gradient to depths of 35,000 to 50,000 feet suggests that the present temperatures at those depths may be somewhere in the vicinity of 200° to 285° C. If the lavas accumulated fast enough to preserve some of their original magmatic heat wIthin the pile, temperatures in depth may well have been considerably higher in the late Keweenawan or early Paleozoic time than they are now. Temperatures of the order of 300° C probably characterize the higher grade parts of the green schist facies, if not actually the epidote—amphibolite facies. The fragmental tops of many of the lava flows must originally have been rather loose, rubbly After burial, their open spaces were presumably filled with ground water, and this water would be carried on downward as the lavas became ever more deeply buried. One can only speculate about the ultimate fate of this water and the permeable rock containing it when it was carried downward into a region where the lithostatic pressure was of the order of 2700 — 4000 atmospheres, and the temperature between 2000 and 3000 C, or higher. 5ome of the water would certainly combine with the rock minerals to form hydrous metamorphic minerals such as chlorite and perhaps actinolitic hornblende. The porous fragmental flow tops would be least partially crushed. The combination of crushing of the rock and heating would presumably drive some 9f the contained water toward the surface along the relatively open channelways afforded by the fragmental flow tops and conglomerate beds. aggregates. If we make the assumption, without attempting here to further bolster it with arguments from theoretical and experimental work on hydrous systems, that this water of essentially metamorphic origin was the principal agent of native—copper deposition in the middle Keweenawan rocks, we can develop from this assumption a logical structural reason for the location of the principal copper deposits. Location of the Copper District Perhaps the most interesting feature of Figure 4 is the position of the deepest spot. In any given bedding plane or flow top, the shortest path to the surface from this deep spot would lead to an area 3. A large positive gravity anomaly suggests that the syncline, with its associated lavas, extends southwest into central Kansas, where it abruptly terminates (Thiel, 1956, pl. I). •11 �at the southwest end of the copper district proper, which ends about 10 miles southwest of Houghton. If water of metamorphk origin were driven directly up the dip by heating and crushing in this deep spot, the maximum amount of water should emerge in the vicinity of and lust southwest of the mines on the Baltic amygdalod (Fig. 2), with decreasing amounts farther southwest and northeast. It is considered highly significant that all the important and most of the minor native—copper mines of the Lake Superior region are within 25 miles, horizontally, of the oval area bounded by the 20,000 foot contour in Figure 4. Less than 2 percent of the native copper from the region has come from beyond this 25 mile limit. Within this area of malor production, there is notably asymmetric geographic distribution of the producing mines. As noted above, the shortest path up the dip from the deepest spot would reach the surface 10 or 15 miles southwest of Houghton, at the southwest end of the copper district proper. The productive mines northeast of this point of emergence have yielded over 97 percent of the native copper produced in the region, whereas those to the southwest have yielded less than 2 percent. This proportion may be changed as exploration finds new deposits or as lower—grade ores are mined in the future, but it is nonetheless a remarkable difference, and one that requires explanation. The following explanation of the asymmetry is suggested. Earlier paragraphs described certain primary features oriented parallel to the basin margin. These include a structural feature here called pinch—and—swell", consisting of elongate patches in which the thickness of fragmental material in certain fragmental flow tops is appreciably greater or less than average. In the mines of the copper district, this linear element seems to be typically oriented nearly east—west (Fig. 3). In terms of permeability, the pinch—and—swell structure should make a flow top notably anisotropic — flow of solutions in a given flow top should be far easier in an east—west direction than in a north—south. Solutions moving up the dip from the deep spot shown in the center of Figure 4, therefore, would be continually steered off towards the east in their upward passage, producing the copper district proper where we now find it, rather than farther southwest, more nearly up the dip from the deep spot. To the extent that this explanation is correct, the lack of parallelism between the present strike of the rocks and the strike of the ancient basin margin is an important element leading to the localization, and perhaps even the existence of the Michigan copper district. Where the ancient basin margin and the present strike of bedding are parallel, the trend of the pinch—and—swell structure would not have a component parallel to the dip of the bedding, and up—dip movement of solutions would be relatively inhibited; flow should take place more readily, under the same hydrostatic pressure, where the pinch—and—swe1 rakes up the dip. Summing up, two structural conditions may govern the very limited distribution of native copper deposits. First, the copper district proper is very close to, and almost up the dip from a particularly deep part of the Lake Superior basin. Second, the copper district lies on the limb of a major identation in the flank of the Lake Superior basin (see Fig. 5), in a place where the present margin is not parallel to the margin of the old basin of accumulation. Primary structural features like the pinch—and—swell structure rake up the dip in this area, providing conduits leading from the deep spot to the surface. In places where the present and original basin margins are parallel, as they may be elsewhere, channels governed by the pinch—and—swell might be far less favorably oriented; these places would capture a smaller amount of the solutions moving out from the bottom of the basin. It should be emphasized at this point that the enrichment of-the Michigan district in copper is only relative; as was pointed out in the introduction, there are minor amounts of natve copper in 12 �the lavas all around the Lake Superior basin. In many places enough copper has been found to encourage extensive prospecting. In addition, the amygdaloids and conglomerates are filled with secondary minerals throughout the basin, lust as they are in the Michigan district. So mineralizing solutions have apparently moved upward and outward in all directions from the deeper parts of the asin4. The Michigan district seems to be unique only in that it may have captured more mineralizing water from the deepest parts of the basin than other areas — enough more to make the deposits commercial. As one possibility, more water may actually have flowed through the productive amygdalods of the copper district than through those of other areas because of the favorable system of channelways. Or, as another possibility, the water that fiowed through the rocks of the copper district may have contained more copper than elsewhere because it came from the deepest part of the basin, where the most crushing and metamorphism presumably occurred. Deposits in Other Parts of the Basin If channelways leading efficiently to deep spots in the Lake Superior basin are the chief factor in forming ore deposits, the chances for deposits in other parts of the basin can be at least roughly appraised. We can look first for other places in the region where the pinch—and—swell structure in flow tops rakes diagonally down the dip towards a deep spot. The type of information needed to definitely establish the trend of the pinch—and—swell structure can only come from rather extensive underground exposures, so outside the copper district one must depend on indirect evidence. The copper district lies on the west flank of a major indentation in the present basin (Fig. 5). The form lines that define this indentation in Figure 5 are arcs, and the trend of the pinch—and— swell structure in the copper district can be approximated by chords of these arcs. This is perhaps tc be expected if the indentation is not a feature of the ancient basin of accumulation, but is a later feature of tectonic origin — the trend of features like the pinch—and—swell that are presumed to be parallel to the ancient basin margin should have a course that follows the gross configuration of the basin, unaffected by the indentation. A basis therefore exists for inferring an orientation of the original basin margin, and of the pinch—and—swell structure that seems to be parallel to it, where other indentations are superposed or the broadly arcuate form of the basin as a whole. Two such indentations appear on Figure 5, one just west of Michipicofen Island (Area 9) and another at Isle Royale (Area 7). Chords across the arcs in the form lines at Michpicoten Island strike northwest, and at Isle Royale they strike east— northeast. Channels with these orientations at these places would not, apparently, rake down into particuJary deep parts of the basins. Solutions would have to cross the inferred trend of channels at both places to reach the surface from the deepest adjoining part of the basin. So in respect to channelways governed by pinch—and—swell, at least, the ideal conditions of the Michigan copper district do not seem to be repeated in any other place where middle Keweenawan rocks are now exposed at the surface. The most promising place for a repetition of the ideal condition is on the east flank of the indentation which bears the copper district on its west flank — unfortunately this 4. The ubiquitousness of the native copper and its associated secondary minerals in the lavas hroughout the area of the Lake Superior basin — an area over 400 miles long and 100 miles wide — an important reason for looking to some process of regional extent, such as is suggested here, ither than to local intrusive bodies, as a source for the copper and associated minerals. I3 �area is well covered by Lake Superior. In one other area, about 45 miles west of Ironwood (east end of Area 5, Fig. 5), channelways probably rake down the dip, but the structure of the basin in this area is too little known to permit an estimate of the relative depth of the basin into which such channelways might lead. Proximity to deep spots is the second basis for search for other favorable areas. Southwest of the copper district proper, in an area 15 to 40 miles southwest of Houghton, there are a number of mines which have produced over 5 million pounds of copper apiece, even though the total production from this area is less than 2 percent of the total for the region. This indicates that commercial deposits can be found even where channelways controlled by the pinch—and—swell structure may not be favorably oriented. This area lies directly up the dip from the particularly deep spot in the center of Figure 4, so proximity to a deep spot alone may give some promise of productive deposits. This makes worthwhfle a general appraisal of other parts of the Lake Superior basin in terms of simple proximity to deep spots, neglecting the factor of the channeiways. Even a crude structure contour map such as Figure 4 or 5 shows that because of the asymmetry of the basin, the deepest spots are probably down the dip from the places where the dips at the surface are steepest. If the dip on one side of the syncline is 10 degrees, as it is along most of the Minnesota shore nort,east of Duluth (Area 6, Fig. 5), the trough of the syncline is probably closer to the southern shore, where the dips of the lava flows are everywhere steeper. So in a very rough way one can conclude that the steeper the dip, the better the chance that a given area is close to a deep spot. Other things being equal, furthermore, the basin is probably deeper in places where it is wide than where it is narrower. Using dip and width of the basin as our main criteria, therefore, we may roughly appraise the promise of individual areas around the basin. In the area IS to 40 miles southwest of Houghton (Area 2, Fig. 5), the lava flows dip between 45 and 700. This area, which has produced over I percent of the copper from the region, is probably second only to the copper district proper in terms of future promise. Between this area and Ironwood (Area 3, Fig. 5), the dips are gentler, and the normal homo— clinal dip toward the basin is interrupted by the Porcupine Mountain dome or anticline, 30 miles northeast of Ironwood. Only the uppermost lava flows of middle Keweenawan age are exposed at the surface in this anticline, and the core of the fold is rhyolite (Butler and others, 1929, p. 47, 50 and pl. 14). This whole area in and south of the Porcupine Mountain uplift would seem to be distinctly unfavorable for important near—surface copper deposits in amygdaloidal flow tops and associated conglomerate beds. In terms of steepness of dip alone, the most favorable place in the region is north and northwest of Ironwood (Area 4, Fig. 5) where the dips are nearly vertical. Another factor complicates the evaluation of this area, however: A little farther west, in Area 5 (Fig. 5), both the north and south limbs of the Lake Superior syncline are separated from the center of the basin by thrust faults that repeat the middle Keweenawan section (Fig. I). The fault shown alona the. northern boundary of the lavas of middle Keweenawan age west of Asmand is calieci tne Douglas fault, and the fault separating the two slivers of the lavas 10—40 miles southwest of Ashland is called the Lake Owen fault (Aldrich, 1929, p. 125—126). The Douglas fault divides the north limb into two belts, in both of which the rocks dip southeast. In the same way the Lake Owen fault divides the south limb into two belts, in both of which the rocks dip northwest. These faults effectively separate the outer belts from the center of the Lake Superior syncline. Exposures are very poor in the area of younger sandstones east of Ashland. If the Lake Owen fault continues farther northeast, the lavas north of Ironwood may not be physically continuous with those in the center of the syncline, and the favorable 14 �conditions are not fulfilled. In Area 5 (Fig. 5), south and southwest of Duluth in Douglas and Bayfield Counties, Wisconsin, both limbs of the Lake Superior syncline have dips ranging from 30—45° (Grant, 1901, p. 21). Although these dips are of favorable steepness, the syncline is rather narrow here, so the maximum depth of the lavas may not be much more than 25—30,000 feet. This is distinctly less favorable than the areas farther east, where the basin is much wider and probably deeper. A number of showings in Wisconsin have been explored by small prospect shafts, but none have developed into mines. Along the Minnesota shore (Area 6, Fig. 5), the rocks dip between 10 and 15°. The dips are even gentler around Nipigon Bay (Area 8). These are the least favorable parts of the Lake Superior basin on the basis of dip. On Isle Royale (Area 7, Fig. 5), most of the lavas dip between 15 and 25 degrees (Lane, 1898, pl. I). This area is more favorable than any other on the north shore, but is less favorable than most of the south shore. At the east end of Lake Superior and on Michipicoten Island (Area 9, Fig. 5), dips locally exceed 40 degrees. Information on the east end of the basin is extremely sketchy, because so much of the Lake Superior sync line is covered by water, but unless there are unknown structural or stratgraphic complications, this area should be more Favorable than anywhere along the north shore, including Isle Royale. It may well be more favorable than the Wisconsin area (Area 5), though explorations do not seem to have been very successful to date (see Thomson and others, 1952, p. lO- II). To sum up, the basis for appraisal used here suggests that the most promising area outside the copper district proper is the area southwest of it (Area 2), extending to a point some 40 miles southwest of Houghton. The area north of Ironwood (Area 4) may be even more favorable, but its promise is clouded by the possibility that it may be separated from the deeper parts of the syncline by a fault. Michipicoten Island (Area 9) and the areas in Wisconsin (Area 5) on both limbs of the syncline south of Duluth are next in order of favorability. There is one small area 45 miles west of lronwood, on the south limb of the syncline, that is a more favorable prospect than the rest of Area 5because of the possibility that the pinch—and—swell structure may rake diagonally up the dip there. Isle Royale (Area 7) is probably less promising than any of the areas mentioned above, but distinctly more promising than the areas of gentle dip on the north shore in Minnesota and Canada. Acknowledgments A speculative essay of this sort necessarily draws on the work, some published and some unpublished, of many people. So far as I know, I am solely responsible for the particular uxtapo— stions of fact and theory presented here, but individual elements have come from many sources. am much indebted to my colleagues in the U. S. Geological Survey's study of the Michigan copper district, particularly Henry R. Cornwall and Richard E. Stoiber, for the contribution their researches along different lines have made to development of the ideas expressed here. I owe special thanks to Dr. Thomas M. Broderick of the Calumet & Hecla Inc., not only for his willingness to share with the Survey party his unequaled knowledge of the geology of the Keweenawan series, but also for the challenge his well—founded advocacy of a magmatic origin has kept before us. I 15 �References Cited Aldrich, H. R., 1929, The geology of the Gogebic iron range of Wiscbnsin, Wisconsin Geol. and Nat. History Survey Bull. 71, 279 P. Bateman, A. M., 1950, Economic mineral deposits, 2d ed., New York, John Wiley & Sons, 916 P. Birch, Francis, 1954, Thermal conductivity, climatic variation, and heat flow near Calumet, Michigan, Amer. Jour. Sci., vol. 252, P. 1-25. Broderick, T. M. 1935, Differentiation in lavas of the Michigan Keweenawan, Geol. Soc. America Bull., vol. 46, p. 503-558. Broderick, T. M., HohI, C. D., and Eidemiller, H. N., 1946, Recent contributions to the geology the Michigan copper district, Econ. Geology, vol. 41, p. 675-725. Butler, B. S., Burbank, W. S., and others, 1929, The copper deposits of Michigan, U. S. Geol. of Survey, Prof. Paper 144, 238 p. Cornwall, H. R., 1954, Bedrock geology of the Delaware quadrangle, Michigan, U. S. Geol. Survey Geologic Quadrangle Map GQ 53. Davidson, E. S., Espenshade, G. H., White, W. S., and Wright, J. C., 1955, Bedrock geology of the Mohawk quadrangle, Michigan, U. S. Geol. Survey Geologic Quadrangle Map GQ 54. Fuller, R. E., 1950, Structural features in the Columbia River basalt, Northwest Science, vol. 24, p. 65-73. U. 5., 1901, Preliminary report on the copper—bearing rocks of Douglas Co., Wisconsin, Geological and Natural History Survey Bull. 6 (2nd ed.), 83 p. Irving, R. D., 1883, The copper—bearing rocks of Lake Superior, U. S. Geol. Survey, Monograph Grant, 5, Lane, 464 p. A. C., 1898, Geological report on Isle Royale, Michigan, Michigan Geol. Survey, vol. 6, 281 p. C. K., Lund, R. J., and Leith, Andrew, 1935, Pre—Cambrian rocks of the Lake Superior region, U. S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 184, 34 p. Lindgren, Waldemar, 1933, Mineral deposits, 4th ed., New York and London, McGraw Hill Book Co., 93Op. Pardee, J. T., and Bryan, Kirk, 1926, Geology of the Latah formation in relation to the lavas of Columbia Plateau near Spokane, Washington, U. S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper l4OA, P. 1—16. Sandberg, A. E., 1938, Section across Keweenawan lavas at Duluth, Minn., Geol. Soc. America Leith, Bull., vol. p. 795-830. Edward, 1956, Correlation of gravity anomalies with the Keweenawan geology of Wsconsin and Minnesota, Geol. Soc. America Bull., v. 67, P. 1079—1100. Thomson, J. E., and Resident Geologists, 1952, Preliminary Report on copper, nickel, lead, and zinc deposits of Ontario (Second edition, May 1952), Ontario Dept. of Mines, Preliminary Report 1952-4, 21 p. Van Hise, C. R., and Leith, C. K., 1911, The geology of the Lake Superior region, U. S., Geol Survey Monograph 52, 641 p. White, W. S., 1952, Imbrication and initial dip in a Keweenawan conglomerate bed, Jour. Sed. Petrology, v. 22, p. 189-199. Thiel, 16 �COPPER MINERALIZATION AT THE WHITE PINE MINE ONTONAGON COUNTY, MICHIGAN by John R. Rand (Abstract) The White Pine orebody lies in gently—dipping laminated to massive shaley siltstones at the base of the Nonesuch formation of Upper Keweenawan age. Fine— to coarse—grained sandstone lying within and immediately below the ore column is generally not of commercial interest, although locally such sandstone may be quite strongly mineralized, primarily with native copper. Copper mineralization over most of the know orebody consists of an extremely fine—grained dissemination of chalcocite, with native copper occurr-ing in amounts of secondary importance; bornite, pyrite, and chalcopyrite occur in minor or trace quantities. Native silver is present in sufficient quantity to be of commercial interest. Within a 20 foot ore column, the heaviest mineralization is restricted to four distinct lithologic units with an aggregate thickness of about six feet. A significant amount of copper occurs in two additional units with a total thickness of about four feet. The remaining units are only slightly mineralized. The four units carrying the heavy copper mineralization are dark gray to black, thinly laminated shales or siltstones, with some fine—grained sandy zones in two of the units. All other units in the column are medium gray or lighter in color, or are red or brown, and range litho— logically from thinly laminated shale through laminated or massive siltstone to sandstone with or without shale laminae. The striking association of copper with specific lithologic units over a wide area suggests that mineralization occurred essentially contemporaneously with sedimentation in a restricted shallow basin, and that the chemical environment in which certain beds were deposited controlled precipitation of copper from the overlying waters. The copper is considered to have been derived originally from the Lower Keweenawan Portage Lake Lava Series, released by weathering and oxidation into surface and ground waters. For a detailed description the reader is referred to White, Walter S. and Wright, James C., "The White Pine Copper Deposit, Ontonagon County, Michigan:" Economic Geology, Vol. 49, No. 7, pp. 675-716, November, 1954. — Ed. 17 �COMMENTS ON PRECEDING PAPERS by 1. M. Broderkk I think we should first discuss the source of the copper. Mr. 1, R, Rand; Copper is an original constituent n the Javas about the Lake Superior dstrkt, and by weathering and erosion of these lavas copper could be oxidized and liberated into ground wafer or surface wafer for the purpose of eventually going to form the deposits in the muds and clays of the present shales. It is not necessary to erode an ore body but mereiy to break down a large volume of rock which contains a small amount of copper. Dr. Broderick: True enough, both White and Rand agree on the source of the copper being the small dissemination in the lavas. Some years ago I very carefully sampled "traps" in this disfrct as we had them exposed from top to bottom in hundreds of drill holes; did not do the sampling in hundreds of drill ho'es but rather picked out places where the sampflng through several of the flows could be made very accurately. I had chemical analyses made; the Geological Socefy of Amerka gave me a grant for this study which was mainly on differentiation of the flows and I came up wth an average copper content of these traps of /lOO of a percent. If anybody could sample them any better, I would like to see it done. Dr. Goldkh of the University of Minnesota Laboratory used those same samples for a more exacting study of minor and trace elements and he checked that amount. Now I had recently gone through Washington's tables1 and as I suspected the copper content of these traps was not at all unusual; just recently I wrote again to Dr. Goldrkh and asked hm about the latest figures that he had seen and been able to assemble on the average copper content of rock and we find that the copper content of these traps s still rather low. He gave me average figures, quoting: the content of copper n igneous rocks in general, .007% average and in basaltk rocks in general, a recent figure .0085%. Steiger found 0.0155% copper in a composite of 71 Hawaiian lavas. Michigan tavas contain less than that. The greenstone flow has .012 and, if you do not like taking a flow that does not cont&n an ore deposit, the Kearsarge flow has .009, lust under the /OOth of a percent. So I do feel rritated with references to the copper content of these lavas to explain an unusual district. Other than that, we are in pretty good agreement; the deposits are epigenetic, we agree, not speaking of the White Pine, but in generaJ the deposits are epgenetic — they are formed by ascending hydrothermal solutions and there was a structural control of some sort. I would think of the structural control as both introducing or allowing the copper to be introduced into the channeiways I at depth and Dr. White has hs sfructura control as ndicatng where the flow of solutions would take place. We both agree that on the way up there would be deflection of solutions by barrier conditions of various sorts. Now 1 think that there is considerabTy more thcrn a fortuitous conjunction of affairs envisaged by White if some other orign s to be considered. That is, the same conditions in depth that would cause this metamorphk exhalation of solutions, might be the explanation that I am lookng for as to how and where solutions from some magmatic source got into the lavas. I would think that the deeper the port of the section involved, the more likely there would be to be a tongue of some underlying intrusive that we like to call upon to furnish these solutions. Now how about I. Washington, H. S., "Chemical Analyses of Igneous Rocks, 1884 — 1913." Survey Prof. Paper 99, 1917. U. S. Geologkai �this underlying intrusive? There are some who do not like to think of a gabbro as giving off much water because they think of it as a comparatively dry melt. We do have one tongue of this Duluth gabbro which is the handy one to call upon. We have one protrusion of it here at Mount Bohemia and it is thoroughly altered, uralitized, and it has an association of chalcocite fissures around so that it is competent to give off solutions which bear copper. In recent years in the Duluth gabbro itself there has been a study of the suiphide content and it is sufficient for the several governmental geological surveys and bureaus to do a lot of sampling along the base for copper and nickel, and several companies have gone in there and had respectable drilling campaigns. Large sums of money cipparently have been and maybe still are being spent so far as I know. This puts the Keweenawan in a sort of metallogenetic province. The epoch started in the late Huronian and extended through the late Keweenawan. I have written Dr. Marsden of Duluth, Minnesota, regarding the age of the Sudbury norite; did not know but that we could make it late Keweenawan but I guess not. He says that t is post— Huronian and pre—Keweenawan or words to that effect; so it is pretty close to Keweenawan. And in the Sudbury area you have the differentiation of that norite giving you the red—rock facies, and you have the copper and nickel, and in the center of the basin you have the lead—zinc differentiation. In Point Mamainse, north of Sault Ste. Marie, Ontario, an exploration is now going on trying to develop commercial ore and they succeeded in doing it in cross fissures in the Keweenawan which contain chalcocite. In the Copper Mine River area, Northwest Territories of Canada, there are again basaltic lava flows and there are wide cross fissures that in places are very rich in copper in the form of chalcocite. I am making the point that in this metallogenic province native copper with associated chalcocite is a widespread thing. While genetically the White Pine situation may be a very attractive tree to look at, I am trying to see the bigger woods and it is pretty hard for me to take some interleaved deposits, inter—larded deposits, here in a shale with chalcocite, here in sandstone with native copper, here again in another shale with chalcocite, and pull them apart and say there is a syngenetic origin for one and an epigenetic Origin for the other. I In discussing objections to a hypogene epigenetic origin for copper in shale at White Pine, the points are made that had they been epigenetic the nose of the anticline would be a natural collecting dam, that the chalcocite deposits should have followed up that nose, and that they should be rich just underneath that pitching anticlinal nose. Well, there was considerable structural readjustment after those Nonesuch shales were deposited around the Porcupine Mountains; they are turned up vertically and I guess almost overturned in places. Once you get away from the local disturbance around the Porcupine Mountain uplift, the dip of the shales becomes normal, 10 to 12 degrees. I do not see why you will not allow me to lust have tFat little post—ore folding there in view of this steep upturning of the beds around the Porcupine Mountain fault only a couple of miles away. I have pointed out some of the things on which as 'defender of the faith" still want to base my thinking. It is along the lines announced long ago by Irving when he pointed out the native copper I ?n sediments, conglomerates, shales and sandstones, amygdaloids, cross—fissures and chalcocite in cross fissures and in the Nonesuch shale, and said that any acceptable explanation for these deposits must explain them all. Consequently lam looking very critically at anything that deviates from that. Maybe I will have to change my mind but I have not been induced to do so yet on the basis of anything that has been presented. I am giving up the idea of presenting comments on this series of papers as they are presented; I have lust written a brief announcement in Economic Geology referring to the fact that I am going feel that I would like to defer my written presentation until the major portions of these to do so; articles by the United States Geological Survey appear in print. find that it is very profitable because the longer I wait the less I have to criticize. I I 19 �COPPER DEPOSITS OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION2 Sir: In 1946 I and my associates (I) published a paper in this Journal bringing up to date the facts and deductions of the Calumet & Hoc Ia geological group concerning the Keweenawan copper deposits of the Lake Superior region. This paper included a discussion of origin and reiterated a concept long recognized as fundamental by various geologists including Irving, Van Hise, Leith and Steidtman and the Calumet & Hecla group, namely, that a theory to be acceptable must explain all of the deposits of the district. These include the native copper deposits in amygdaloids, sediments, and fissures, and the associated sulphides, of which chalcocite s in great predominance, likewise in amygdaloids, sediments and fissures. In addition are the associated deposits of copper nickel and cobalt arsendes and antimonides, largely in cross fissures. The theory of the Calumet & Hecla group, formulated in the early twenties, still seemed to be the only one that satisfactorily explained the facts. Over a decade ago, a group from the United States Geological Survey started a study of the district and they are presenting a series of papers in which the origin of the copper deposits is treated. They do not share the belief that one mode of origin must explain all of the several types of deposit. Their papers, presented already (2), propose several modes of origin including both syngenetic and epigenetic and they have not yet treated the most important deposit thus far mined, the Calumet conglomerate, nor the mass copper, chalcocite and arsenide fissures. I have already discussed (3) the treatment of origin as given in the Cornwall papers I wish to discuss the more recent U.S.G.S. papers but in order to make it more definite that the evidence thus far presented does not lead me to abandon the idea of a single origin for all the occurrences, prefer to postpone the discussion until a larger number of their series has appeared. published in 1951. I Friends in teaching say they have a problem in that students show a tendency to accept the latest material published and realize that this is only natural. As soon as the Cornwall-White paper on "Native Copper Deposits" and the Stoiber—Davidson paper on "Mineral Zoning" appear, I shall try to publish some comments promptly. My discussion even then will be handicapped because a convincing presentation includes a treatment of the Calumet conglomerate and the mass copper, arsenide and chalcocite deposits in fissures. The U. S. Geological Survey treatment of these, I understand, will not appear for some years but I do not feel that I should wait that long for at least a preliminary comment on the papers listed (2). I In the meantime, students and others are referred to our 1946 paper (1) and my 1952 discussion (3). In these papers they will find that I have anticipated and commented upon most of the arguments which are being advanced for other explanations of the origin of these deposits. In addition to this discussion of origin which I hope to present as soon as a few more 2. Reproduced from Economic Geology Vol. 51, No. 3, with the permission of the Editor. 20 �of the Survey preliminary papers appear, I hope later to review the results of their entire project in the district. A start has been made on publication of their results of underground mapping in the mines and of quadrangle folios with the usual factual matter presented in such media. A local study of details of sedimentation led them to conclusions as to the source of the materials involved which are different from those hitherto regarded as most likely from evidence obtained on both sides of the Lake Superior syncline. It is hoped that before the Survey publishes further on this subject it will send in some specialists on processes of sedimentation and on significant characteristics of lava flows to study the broader aspects of the problem not only in Michigan but all around Lake Superior since the matter of location of the source of Keweenawan lavas and sediments is of fundamental importance. As stated by White, the determination of the source of the sedimentary material and "of the direction in which the ancient streams flowed is essential to a reconstruction of the physiography of the Keweenawan basin of deposition . . (which) in turn may prove helpful or even necessary to the geologic search for new copper deposits" (4). Perhaps before the final publication of conclusions, the evidence afforded in the openings of the Calumet conglomerate mine will again become accessible for study. . feel that my review of the topics of the survey other than those connected with the origin of the copper deposits had better be postponed until the final publication is out. An earlier discussion would be premature and would not be occasioned by the feeling of urgency offered by the debatable character of the topic of origin. In my final review I shall express appreciation for the completion of a long and tedious task, carried out with persistence and faithfulness and which at last provides the district with a set of useful topographic and geologic maps. 1. M. Broderick Calumet, Michigan I December 21, 1955 References I. Broderick, 1. M., HohI, C. D., and Eldemiller, H. N., 1946, Recent contributions to the geology of Michigan copper district: ECON. GEOL., v. 41, p. 675-725. 2. Cornwall, H. R., 1951, llmenite, magnetite, hematite and copper in lavas of the Keweenaw Series: ECON. GEOL., v. 46, p. 51—67. ——, 1951, Differentiation in lavas of the Keweenawan series and the origin of the copper deposits of Michigan: Geol. Soc. America, v. 62, p. 59—202. ——, 1951, Differentiation of magmas of the Keweenawan series: Jour. Geology, v. 59, p. 151-172. White, Walter S., and Wright, James C., 1954, The White Pine copper depost, Ontonagon County, Michigan: ECON. GEOL., v. 49, p. 675-716. Cornwall, H. R., and White, W. S., 1954, Native copper deposits: (not yet published) abs. Geol. Soc. America, v. 65, p. 1242—1243. Stoiber, Richard E., and Davidson, Edward S., 1955, Mineral zoning in the Portage Lake lava series, Michigan copper district: (not yet pub'ished) abs. Am. Inst. Mi & Met. Eng. Abstracts Mining, Geology, & Geophysics Div., p. 24—25. 3. Broderick. T. M., 1952, The origin of Michigan copper deposits: ECON GEOL., v. 47, p. 215-220. 4. White, Walter 5., 952, Imbrication and initial dip in a Keweenawan conglomerate bed: Jour. Sedimentary Petrology, v. 22, p. 189-199. 21 �POSTSCRIPT3 Since the foregoing was submitted for publication, it has been announced that Dr. White would The regional geologic setting of the Michigan native copper district" at an 'Institute on Lake Superior Geology" to be held at Houghton, Michigan, May II and 12. He has very kindly sent me an outline of his paper and it presents a treatment of origin of the deposits including source of copper, source of solvent, broad structural controls and other features. Any discussion of the ideas on genesis being presented in the series of U.S.G.S. papers should certainly await the publication of this latest one by White, in addition to those by Cornwall and Stoiber referred to present a paper above. Dr. White: I want to make only one point at this time. Dr. Broderick spoke of the .01% copper content of Keweenawan lava as though this was the source without any intermediate process. think should say that he himself pointed to one possible clue to this problem of getting a 100 to I enrichment. This is approximately 100th of the concentration that now forms an ore deposit so we have to look to some process or processes that will give us concentration of roughly 100 to I. Dr. Broderick found in his study that he referred to earlier that the individual flows were quite notably differentiated and he pointed also to the fact that one of the constituents that tended toward enrichment at the top think that this may give us a clue to at least a substantial fraction of this 100 to was copper itself. concentration that we are looking for, If, for example, the copper content of the massive flow that he sampled is .01 or .007, it may well be that this represents somewhat less than the average original content of copper in the flow itself. As he himself points out, some of this copper tends to work its way to the top, enriching the top and by the same token depleting the central portion of the flow. If the tops are enriched only by a factor of 2 or 3, say .02 or .03, we would have a good start toward 100 to I enrichment. This reduces the factor from 100 to to say 50 to I, maybe even down as low as 25 to I. This is a very hard thing to get hold of because it is almost impossible to sample a flow top, as think we all realize, and be sure that we are dealing with this enrichment which we can postulate took place at the time the flows were extruded. I am on thin ice as well in suggesting what the figure might be, but I do think that this initial concentration in the parts of the lava flow which are the porous flow tops if in reaction with the contained water, might yield copper to a solution in sufficient concentrations to form the hydrothermal solutions that we all agree form the ore I I I I I I deposrts. Mr. Rand: On the basis of Dr. Broderick's .01% copper it would require an area of traps 30 miles square to be eroded 12 feet deep in order to supply the 6 billion pounds of copper considered to be known in the White Pine orebody. This erosion and transport do not invlove movement of placer copper; it is a matter of oxidizing copper, taking it into solution and then carrying it, presumably in ground water, into or onto the flat basin area where muds are being laid down. It may be carried out over the muds in the surface waters or It may be carried beneath the muds in the ground water and in the sands underlying the muds. The movement of copper from the waters into the muds may take place essentially at the same time as the copper arrives over or under the muds or it may fake place at some time after consolidation of the muds into rock. Dr. J. W. Gruner (University of Minnesota): How does it happen that there is so little sulphur associated with the copper ores here if they are of regular hypogenefic origin? Ordinary copper 3. Economic Geology vol. 51, no. 3 22 �sulphide ores are very high in sulphur. In this region we have a very low sulphur content, relatively speaking of course, and this has rather bothered me for some time because the chemistry of these deposits evidently is different from the chemistry of the regular sulphide deposits. Dr. Broderick: Of course that is one of the big problems, why the copper is native and not suiphide. Without going into the history and details there are two obvious answers that might be considered; one is that the solutions that deposited the copper were different from those that brought them in at Butte, Morenci, and other places, and the other is the rock into which those solutions were introduced. If you examine the assays of the Butte batholith and of the monzonites and allied rocks in which the porphyry coppers are deposited, you will find that the iron content is very low. Total iron I believe is less than 2%. The total iron in the amygdaloids and in the conglomerate deposits in Michigan is from 6 to 9% and a large part of that iron is in the ferric state. Proceeding from there, if the iron was a precipitant, does it show any effects of having entered into a chemical reaction when the copper was deposited? It is a matter of common knowledge amongst those who have worked in these deposits that in certain zones, over a vertical range of thousands of feet around the copper, there is an alteration of ferric iron. The rock is red normally and around the copper is a halo of bleached material and that bleached material has been sampled and assayed; polished sections have been studied running across the boundary of the bleached and unbleached and it is low in iron. Little needles of hematite have been absolutely removed so that iron has entered into that reaction. Removal of iron is therefore associated with the deposition of native copper. As a further clue, the iron that does remain in some of these altered areas is much higher in the ferrous state than in the surrounding rock. If you have 4% ferric iron and 2% ferrous in the normal amygdaloid in the zone around the copper those ratios will be reversed — it will be much higher ferrous and lower ferric. Chlorite will be formed which has iron in the ferrous state so that the deposition of copper in certain parts of the zonal column, not the stratigraphic column, is associated with the reduction and removal of iron. Now if iron was reduced it means something was oxidized and we threw the ball to the chemists and asked them, "Supposing that we had copper—bearing solutions coming in here of the sort that deposited suiphide elsewhere, what might happen to the sulphur? Could it react with the ferric iron, reduce it, and go out of the system as a soluble sulphate, leaving native copper?" That work was taken up in the laboratory of the U. S. Geological Survey and a paper was put out by R. C. Wells.4 If you will go back and refer to that bulletin you will get this story that have just told you in brief. In summary, one answer to the question is that the solutions were the same as those which deposited copper in the porphyries but they hit a different rock, a rock that had oxidizing possibilities. I Dr. G. M. Schwartz (University of Minnesota): I suppose I might start by saying that I am probably the oldest timer of all because I worked in the district before Dr. Broderick, and probably before Dr. White was born and I would like to make two or three comments, because I find myself in agreement with both men, in part, and in disagreement with both, in part, and incidentally might say that, for thirty—five years since left this distrkt, have worked mainly in the Keweenawan in Minnesota. I was very much interested in Dr. White's comment as to why we do not have copper deposits in Minnesota to amount to anything. further say that think his is the best explanation have heard. I I I I I I I would like to point out on the problem of getting the copper out of the basa Its that in Minnesota 4. Wells, R. C., "Chemistry of the Deposition of Native Copperfrom Ascending Solutions." U. S. Geological Survey, Bull. 778, 1925 23 �at Susie Island, for example, there was a very nice copper Vein with calcite, bornite, chalopyrite and pyrite which is below the flows. Now I will grant Dr. White that the mineral—bearing solution possibly could have leaked out to the side, or downward, or something of that sort but I have a sneaking Suspicion that it did not. think that there is still a good argument for a hydrothermal origin rather than the old idea of lateral secretion which is essentially of course what Dr. White is proposing and is, incidentally, popular for many other deposits at the present time. I In regard, however, to the shale, I had a good look at that when I was fortunate enough to be called upon to examine the work in connection with the White Pine loan and I must say that there it is a lot easier for me to imagine the copper in the shale having been deposited with the shale, in other words being syngenetc. So there I would disagree with Dr. Broderick and agree with Dr. White and Mr. Rand. It does seem to me, however, that we are asking an awful lot of these weathering solutions to concentrate this minute amount of copper out of these flows and get it all in one place. There again I think that it is a little easier to imagine that the copper which is in the White Pine deposit probably came from the weathering of some of the copper deposits and if understand the geologic history correctly I think ths is entirely possible. I I would like to have either Dr. White or Mr. Rand comment on this. Of course we might even consider that there was a direct contribution to the water of copper From hydrothermal sources. This would be essentially going back to Van Hise and Leith's explanation of a possible origin of the iron in the iron formations. These are the points that have occurred to an old timer on this problem and I think it just keeps us going around more or less in a circle on how to explain these things. Dr. White: I would like to make one comment in answer partially to Dr. Schwartz and partially also to Dr. Broderick. This has to do with uniformitatianism. Mustwe explain everthing with the same set of rules? We have in this Keweenawan province an area of 50,000 square miles or more underlain by Keweenawan rocks. For an area of crystalline rocks this is substantial port of the earths crust. If we assume that ore deposits can be formed as we have suggested, does this preclude this area from being cut here and there by veins of magmatic origin? This is pretty hard to pin down but I cannot feel the same compulsion that others seem to share that we have to explain everything by exactly the same set of circumstances. The deposits are different; the Whte Pine deposits are about as unlike any of the lode deposits as one can imagine. The arsenide veins that cut some of the lodes are quite different from the normal types of veins which cut the lodes. I do not personally see any reason why we have to explain all these things by exactly the same set of rules when the area involved is so large. Dr. C. H. Burgess (Bear Creek Mining Company): It seems to me that the percentages of copper contained in the igneous rocks of various kinds, as Dr. Broderick read to us, indicates that both in 'traps" and in granite that might have differentiated from themare very small. They are of the same order of magnitude and therefore the production of a copper deposit depends upon the efficiency of concentration. In that regard the explanation of the White Pine by Messrs. White and Rand is somewhat in the framework of the pyrite and marcasite in the black shales of coal measures. I wonder if sulphides in coal measures must also have a hydrothermal origin. Dr. J. W Gruner (University of Minnesota): The explanaton that Dr. Broderick offered I had already read but I do not understand whether the solutions were acid or basic. Basic solutions do not bleach or leach iron at all; however basic solutions dissolve copper quite readily. Of course acid solutions both bleach and carry copper. That I think is one of the fundamental questions we have here. Dr. Broderick: Regarding sulphur and organic matter I cannot say very much, but I can take Dr. 24 �Burgess out into the bogs and stir up hydrogen suiphide. or igneous rocks around those bogs. I do not think that there are any lava flows I do want to say something about the adequacy of a large volume of rock with a small percentage of some constituent for furnishing concentrations. It is an easy matter to sit down and figure how many cubic feet or yards or miles of rock containing 1/1,000 or 1/1,000,000 or 1/10th ofa percent will, if you could get that all together, form deposits much richer, but the entire process studied in its entirety seems to carry rather some unlikely implications. We picture these lavas as being exposed, weathered and eroded, and nearly everything going into solution. Along with the copper, the zinc, lead and cobalt components will enter into solution. Let us imagine these traps being sublected to that process not over one season but certainly over centuries and maybe hundreds of centuries. Weathering goes on and the copper, lead, zinc, cobalt, etc., are carried by streams down wherever they go; weathering is not lust in the vicinity of the White Pine basin, it proceeds all along the Keweenaw Peninsula and all around Lake Superior. Now at some time and at some place in this area of hundreds of miles being eroded during thousands of years of time a sudden opportunity presents itself and you get this deposit. The White Pine depost is contained within a relatively few feet and is said to contain 300 million tons of rock carrying over 20 pounds of copper per ton; that is 6 billion pounds and it is only partly explored. This whole district in the hundred years that it has been mined has only produced 10 billion pounds. Here we are asked to believe that a minor episode in the erosion, weathering and solution of rock containing less than 0.01% of copper that have proceeded over the thousands of years and throughout the thousands of square miles of Keweenawan lavas around Lake Superior, suddenly, in a small fraction of the area and during a relatively few of the seasons involved has resulted in the precipitation of a deposit containing nearly as much copper as the whole district has produced to date. That is a difficult thing for me to understand. Mr. H. W. Pfeffer (ARASCO Exploration Company): I do not know this district very well but I would like to mention an area in Nova Scotia which has certain similarities to White Pine. There we have Carboniferous rocks that are mostly red beds but in some small spots within the red beds are sandstones, conglomerates and shales. The shales are grey to blackish and they contain carbonaceous matter, usually remnants of wood, etc. Associated with these beds are nodules, sheets and dissemina— tions of chalcocite. To the south of this area are the Copper Cliff Mountains which contain some pyrite and a little chalcopyrite in various spots throughout the volcanics. It appears from the way the Late Pennsylvanian rocks were laid down that the source was from that area and it seems quite likely that the copper must have come from there. There is no evidence whatsoever of intrusion into the Carboniferous rocks; the features are definitely sedimentary. One can visualize water carrying in solution copper sulphate in minute quantities and running off into this area of sediments and percolating through the sandstones, and then the copper sulphate reacting with the carbonaceous matter. Actually the occurrences are very simUar except for quantity. These grey rocks lens out so that economically they are not of interest but in their manner of occurrence and chemistry they are very similar to White Pine. 25 �GEOLOGY AND MINERAL DEP/OSITS OF THE MAN ITOUWADGE LAKE AREA* by E. G. Pye Introduction In 1931, the Manitouwadge Lake area was surveyed for the Ontario Department of Mines by Dr. J. E. Thomson, now Assistant Provincial Geologist; and on his geological map, published in 1932, he noted an occurrence of gossan and sulphide mineralization at the site of the now famous Geco mine1. But despite this it was only rently that any interest was paid to the discovery. This may be owing to the commonly held opinion that "greenstone" belts of small area do not lend themselves to the occurrence of large mineral deposits — the favourable prospecting area at Manitouwadge Lake is only about 35 miles square. It may also be because of the highly metamorphosed condition of the rocks— many prospectors consider that schists and gneisses are unfavourable to ore deposition. In any event, the area was avoided until as late as 1947, when the sulphide deposit at Manitouwadge Lake was first staked. But even at that time, it was difficult to arouse interest ine discovery; and after two years, the prospector, Moses Fisher, was compelled to let his claims lapse because of failure to attract a mining company to undertake development. In 1953, two prospectors, Roy Barker and William Dawidowich of Geraidton, Ontario, decided to visit the area. Upon relocating the sulphide deposit, with which they were much impressed, they decided to stake. The sulphide deposit was examined by W. S. Hargraft, consulting mining engineer, and upon his recommendation, the property was quickly taken up by General Engineering Company, Limited; Consolidated Howe>' Gold Mines, Limited; and H. W. Knight and associates on a partnership basis. Diamond drilling in August and September indicated the possibility of a copper—zinc—silver ore body. Geco Mines, Limited, was incorporated in October, and it was not long before the results of further drilling indicated a deposit of such importance that the biggest staking rush in the history of Ontario, and one of the biggest in the history of Canada, was precipitated. Location of Area, Means of Access The Manitouwadge Lake area forms a small but very important part of the Heron Bay - White Lake region along the north shore of Lake Superior. As shown in Fig. I, it lies about midway between two transcontinental railways, the Canadian National Railways line on the north and the Canadian Pacific line on the south; it is 170 miles east—northeast of the Canadian Lakehead, and 200 miles northeast of Houghton, Michigan. * Published by permission of the Provincial Geologist, Ontario Department of Mines. I. Thomson, Jas. E., uGeology of the Heron Bay - White Lake Area,' Ont. Dept. Mines, Vol. XLI, pt. 6, pp. 34—47 (with map No. 41), 1932. 26 �• Q:N 'I T.A A. • OLFX—LOOKO UT' A FORT rRANcES GRAND HARM MINNESOTA I SCALE OF MILES 40 80 120 ISO — S —• 0 MICHICAN Fig. I. S°' Key map showing location of the Manitouwadge Lake area. The area is accessible by an Ontario Department of Mines access road connecting Manitouwadge Lake with the Trans—Canada highway along the north shore of Lake Superior; by a spur railway line cuilt south from Hillsport y the Canadian National Railways; and by a second railway line, built north from Hernie by the Canadian Pacific Railway. General Geology All the consolidated rocks exposed in the Manitouwadge Lake area are of Precambrian age. They have been divided into three main groups: (I) A system of closely folded and intensely metampophosed volcanics and sediments, which, together with horizons of amphibole — biotite gneiss and banded iron formation, are believed be of Early Archaean age; (2) An assemblage of igneous rocks, of post—Early Archaean and possibly of Algoman age; and (3) Diabase dikes, which have been correlated tentatively with basic intrusives of Keweenawan age exposed around Lake Nipigon and along the northwest shore of Lake Superior. to The area! distributions of these principal groups of rock formations are shown on the generalized geological map of the area (Fig. 2). Early Archaean Volcanics: A prominent series made up largely of hornbiende schist is exposed south and east of 27 �___ MILES 0 r, 4 a a e as I 2 3 rç OIAtASE METAGABBRO IRON FORM. SEDIMENTS (I V0LC4(CS + 444'..(S) "t3++++++I :n:rr JWOWIJN flV it hair ++ UA++++t oaac.+++ nrrwt*r( .it'4i-i-t+ -+4* •fl. L.0+++4j T++++ +++ t* 4 iw'44+44+++c;44.atj.. ,4+ 4 444444++J(*4t _)i9( it +4 4+++ +4+ t + 4+4+ •t.P.#++ 1 4+5 p iJ so I Fig. 2. Generalized geological map of the Manitouwadge Lake area. Wowun Lake. It forms a well—defined belt, up to and possibly exceeding two miles in width, which extends from this locality southwest to Manitouwadge Lake, and thence westward across the southwest corner of the map area. Two varieties of hornblende schist are present. One shows little evidence of banding; the other is characteristically finely laminated and resembles a thin bedded sediment in structure. Excellent exposures of the non—laminated hornblende schist are found in the west part of the belt. In places where shearing has not been too intense, vestiges of original pillow structures can be seen. The pillows are somewhat irregular in shape and do not permit satisfactory top determinations. But their presence is significant, for they indicate that the hornblendeschist is of volcanic origin. In consideration of the mineralogical composition — the typical schist consists of about 50 percent hornblende with lesser amounts of andesine and a little quartz, sphene, and magnetite — it is probable that the rock is the metamorphosed equivalent of original basic lava. Thin horizons of laminated hornblende schist separate the lava flows. They are particularaly well developed in the vicinity of Manitouwadge and Mose lakes. The rock itselfis similar mineralogically to the variety just described except that, at the expense of plagioclase, quartz is an essential rather than an accessory constituent. A further and more striking difference, of course, is the thin bedded structure — black layers of material rich in hornblende alternate with grey layers rich in plagioclase and quartz. These layers range from a small fraction of an inch to several inches in thickness. The laminated hornblende schist is found in places to contain lenticular fragments of greenstone, from less than an inch to six inches in length arid up to about three inches in thickness. The two characteristics — stratification and fragmental structure — indicate that the original rock was a tuffaceous sediment deposited subaqueously during the period of volcanism. Sedimentary Gneisses: As the north margin of the volcanic series is approached, well—developed 28 �horizons of sedimentary gneisses are found to alternate with bands of hornblende schist. These increase in both number and thickness to the north so that, within a short distance, the series gives way to one in which the principal ferromagnesian mineral is biotite. Four principal varieties of sedimentary gneisses have been recognized. They are biotite gneiss, quartz—oligoclase—biotite gneiss, quartzite, and quartz-microcline gneiss. In view of the evidence presented by petrologists to the effect that clay minerals corbine to form chlorite and sericite, and that these in turn combine to form biotite during metamorphism , it is thought that the biotite gneiss, the quartz—oligoclase—biotite gneiss, the quartzite, and the quartz— microcline gneiss are the altered equivalents of shale, argillaceous sandstone, quartz sandstone, and arkose, respectively. Amphibole—Biotite Gneiss: In many places throughout the series the sedimentary gneisses are found to be ;nterrupted by lenticular masses of amphibole—biotite gneiss of dark colour, coarse to very coarse granularity, and striking appearance. This rock is made up largely of anthophyllite, hornblende, and biotite, with small amounts of quartz, oligoclase, and magnetite. Red garnets are also commonly present. They occur as large porphyroblasts, ranging from about one—half inch to two inches or more in diameter, and in places make up 25 percent of the rock mass. The amphibole— biotite gneiss is frequently found to grade, by disappearance of amphibole and, when present, also of garnet, into typical biotite gneiss. Because of this it is considered to be sedimentary origin — it may represent the highly metamorphosed equivalent of a calcareous, chloritic grit or basic tuffaceous sediment that was developed at the same time as the enclosing rocks. It is included with the sedimentary gneiss on the generalized geological map. Iron Formation: Commonly intimately associated with the amphibole—biotite gneiss is a peculiar banded rock. Tk1 banded rock consists of layers of coarse—grained quartz, from a fraction of an inch to a foot or more in thickness, alternating with equally thin or thinner layers of one or more of amphibole schist, garnetiferous amphibole—biotite schist, and a very coarse amphibolite. In the field it has been variously termed quartz—chlorite rock, quartz—amphibole rock, quartz-amphibole—pyroxene rock, and iron formation. Since the rock is distinctly banded, since the schist or amphibolite layers contain disseminatee crystals and thin seams of fine granular magnetite, since individual horizons can be traced by dip needle and magnetometer, and since these horizons are very persistent and follow the folded pattern of the sedimentary gneisses, it is thought that "iron formation" is the most appropriate term. Post-Early Archaean (Algoman?) Basic Metaintrusives: Small lenticular bodies of metagabbro are fourd in a number of places within or close to the belt of volcanic rocks. These bodies have intrusive relations with the Early Archaean formations, but are themselves cut by granite and pegmatite. For the most part they consist of a medium—to coarse—grained rock made up of about equal amounts of dark—green hornblende and plagioclase, with small amounts of biotite, quartz, and magnetite. This rock is generally quite massive in the outcrop. Granitic Rocks: The most abundant igneous rock found in the Manitouwadge Lake area is biotite Harker, Alfred, "Metamorphism, A study of the Transformations of Rock Masses," Methuen & Co. Ltd., London, pp. 45-61, 1950. 2. a 29 �granite gneiss. Together with massive granite, migmatite, and pegmatite, it occurs in three principal localities: (1) the extreme southeast corner of the area; (2) the extreme northwest corner; and (3) the whole of the northeast quarter. The granitic rocks to the northwest and southeast are telieved to represent a single large mass, in which the Early—Archaean rocks form a deeply infolded inclusion; those in the northeast quarter of the area are believed to represent a satellite of the main mass, which has been localized along the major synclinal axis (see Structural Geology). Associated with the granite gneiss, migmatite, and the medium—grained, massive, intrusive biotite granite, and cutting the Early Archaean formations, are dikes and sills of pegmatite and aplite. The pegmatite is of three ages. It occurs as: (1) dikes which cut metagabbro inclusions in, and which are themselves truncated by, the massive biotite granite; (2) irregular bodies which grade into, and hence represent a phase of, the massive biotite granite; and (3) dikes which cut the massive biotite granite. Some of the pegmatites are pre—ore in age, and on the properties of Geco Mines, Limited, and Willroy Mines, Limited, they were instrumental in the localization of the ore deposits. Algonkian The youngest rock exposed is diabase. The diabase forms a number of narrow, but fairly persistent north—south dikes, some of which are localized along transverse faults (see Fig. 2). In that these dikes cut sharply across all the other consolidated rocks, including the various granitic rocks, it is thought that they are of Algonkian or Late Precambrian age. It is possible that they could be correlated with similar rocks, of Keweenawan age, that crop out to the west of the area in the vicinity of Lake Ntpigon. Structural Geology Folding: The rock type described as iron formation is the only one that occurs in sufficiently distinct and persistent horizons to be useful in outlining the structural geology. Examination of the generalized geological map of the area shows that, in the vicinity of Wowun lake on the east, the iron formation and the gneisses strike southwest and dip vertically to steeply north. Proceeding westward to Fox creek and the GQco mine, however, the formations assume an east—west strike; and still farther west, midway between Fox and Nama creeks, they strike northwest and dip N. Finally, at the west side of the map area, the formations assume first a northerly strike and then double back on themselves to strike northeast again. They delineate a large trough or synclinal fold, which dip measurements indicate to be assymetrical and overturned to the north. Other dip measurements, at the nose of the fold, indicate a plunge to the northeast of from 15 to 25 degrees. In the eastern part of the area, lineation and drag folds indicate a steeper plunge of about 40 degrees. Faulting: After the major foiding, the Manitouwadge Lake area suffered a series of disturb'Dnces that iul1ed in the development of a large number of faults. These faults are of three types: (I) longitudinal or strike faults, which more or less parallel the formations along the south limb of the syncline; (2) transverse faults, which strike in a general north—south direction; and (3) diagonal faults, which strike northwest, obliquely to the other faults. All are represented in the field by deep linear depressions in the topography. An example of a major strike fault is the Agam Lake kiult, which strikes due west, from north of Manitouwadge lake to almost the west boundary of the map area, lust north of and roughly parallel to the belt of volcanic rocks. This fault is pre—ore in age, and is represented by a wide zone of graphitic schist, in places mineralized with pyrite and pyrrhotite. The magnitude and direction of 30 �movement along this break have not been determined. However, the fault appears to truncate a flumber of pre—ore, right—hand transverse faults, and at the same time, appears to be terminated by the north—south, post—ore, left—hand Fox Creek fault. At least three periods of movement are thus indicated. A possible fourth period of disturbance may be responsible for the fault that extends diagonally across the area from northwest to southeast. In regard to this fault, the offsets shown by the rock formations are of interest. In the northwest section of the area, the formations dip rather flatly to the southeast. Here the displacement was left— hand, or east side to the north. In the southeast section of the area, the formations dip about 650 to the northwest. Here the displacement was right—hand, or east side to the south. To the east of the Geco mine, the formations dip vertically. Here the formations have been traced across the fault to Wowun lake without any great apparent offset. Such anomalous conditions can be explained satisfactorily by assuming that the displacement along the fault was mainly vertical, and that the relative movement was up on the west side. South of Mose lake, a diabase dike was localized along this diagonal fault. But the diabase has been brecciated. Further, north of the Geco mine, the fault cuts and offsets two diabase dikes. In view of these facts and the simple vertical displacement indicated, it is thought that the two or more movements represented occurred in Late Precambrian time. Mineral Deposits All the important mineral deposits discovered to date are sulphide replacement bodies. Their locations are shown in Fig. 3. They strike and dip parallel to the formations that contain them, and have been found in or closely associated with either iron formation or a variety of sedimentary rock. A determination of the lead isotope ratios of a sample of golena, from one of the occurrences, by mass spectrometer is reyorted by J. T. Wilson of the University of Toronto to indicate an age of 2,600 + 120 million years. According to Wilson, the indicated age is close to that of leads found in the — Golden Manitou and Barvue deposits in Quebec and1 the gold ores of Timmins in Ontario. The lead from Manitouwadge lake, and those from the other deposits, are all much older than the Sudbury nickel—copper ores, which are believed to have been formed in Late Precambrian time. In view of this, it is reasonable to assume that the ore minerals were deposited during the period of granitic intrusion, and that they are of Late Archaean or Algoman age. Deposits in Iron Formation: Sulphide replacement deposits in iron formation have been found on the properties of Lun—Echo Gold Mines, Limited, about the nose of the Man itouwadge sync line, and Willroy Mines, Limited, on the south limb of the syncline. As mentioned previously, the iron formation is a banded rock, in which layers of quartz alternate with layers of amphibole schist, garnetiferous amphibole schist, or coarse—grained amphibolite. In the replacement dcwosits found in this rock, the metallic sulphides heal fractures in the quartz and occur as either masses or disseminqted crystals and grains replacing the minerals of the schist or amphibolite layers. Where massive replacement has occurred, the deposit is a strikingly banded one, in which layers of sulphides alternate with layers of mineralized quartz. On the other hand, where disseminated replacement has occurred, the sulphides appear to be localized along planes of foliation, which they accentuate. 3. Wilson, J0 T.,personal correspondence. 31 ��across widths ranging from 7 feet to over 15 feet. This section forms somewhat of a core in the ore body, and both to the north and to the south, the sulphide content of the host rock diminishes and th€ material drops rapidly below grade. The No. 2 zone has been traced for a length of 800 feet by surface drilling, and is reported to average 5.88 percent zinc and 1.71 ounces of silver per ton across an average width of 19.6 feet. Willroy No. 3 Zone The No. 3 zone lies 500 feet south of the shaft at the surface, and parallels the No. 2 zone closely in attitude. Again, near its west extremity, it curves sharply to assume a more northerly st.ike and a somewhat flatter dip. It is also very similar to the No. 2 zone in character. But here the principal sulphide is pyrrhotite rather than pyrite; chalcopyrite is present in significant amounts; arid galena is absent. The zone has been traced for a length of 1200 feet. It is reported to contain, to a vertical depth of 700 feet, 719,000 tons having an average grade of 1.27 percent copper, 10.3 percent zinc, and 1.5 ounces of silver per ton across an average width of 3l .5 feet. Deposits in Sedimentary Gneisses: Two types of ore bodies are found in the sediIentary gneisses, and may be classifiedas disseminated replacement deposits or as lode fissure deposits . Disseminated deposits occur on the property of Wiliroy Mines, Limited. Wiltroy No. I Zone The No. I ore zone on the Willroy propertg is also a body of disseminated ore. Near its west extremity it trends northwest and dips 45° — 50 N ,E. However, throughout the greater part of its length of 1900 feet, it strikes roughly east-west and dips 70° N. to vertical. The ore body ranges up to about 50 feet in width. It lies within the central portion of a horizon of highly sericitized, porphyroblastic quartz—feldspar—biotite gneiss, and consists of crystals and grains of metallic suiphides fisseminated throughout the host rock. The pyrite has no preferred orientation. But the chalcopyrite and pyrrhotite, as well as occasional stringers of quartz, tend to occur as individuals elongated parallel to the foliation of the gneiss. Because of this orientation, the chalcopyrite and pyrrhotite zi Iso tend to be concentrated in thin layers and streaks, with the result that, in drill cores, narrow sections rich in copper alternate with sections poor in copper. The sphalerite, in part at least, replaces the pyrrhotite. A feature of particular interest is the fact that the ore body is paralleled along ts north side by a band, about 15 feet in thickness, of white, crenulated quartz—sericite. This schist, unlike the less altered gneiss, is only sparingly mineralized and is extremely low grade. The Willroy No. I ore body is estimated to contain, to a vgrtical depth of 500 feet, 796,000 tons grading 1.5 percent copper, with low values in zinc and silver G11o Ore Body The Geco ore body is exposed about 600 feet south and 1800 feet east of the Willroy No. I zone, and from here extends eastward for a horizontal length of 2,650 feet. Like the Willroy No. I zone, 4. Bateman, Alan, M. "Economic Mineral Deposits," John Wiley & Sons, Inc., N.Y., p.111, l942. 5. Hooke, Eric, Chief Geologist, personal communication. 33 �it lies within the horizon of highly sericitized quartz—feldspar—biotite gneiss, which is bordered on the north by garnetiferous amphibole—biotite gneiss and biotite granite, and on the south by quartzite. It is a lode fissure rather than a simple disseminated replacement deposit. As shown in Fig. 4, it can be divided conveniently into three sections: the West, Central, and East. c7 (40 CENTR&.. Ii DIAI3ASE DISSEMINATED ORE MASSIVE ORE PEGMATITE, GRANITE N It FEET .. 400 - SERICITE SCHIST 800 IRON roRMAnow CAR.—AMPH.--øI. ONEISS SEDIMENTARY CNtDS Fig. 4. Surface plan showing generalized geology in the vicinity of the Geco ore body (modified after company plans). The West section of the ore body lies west of Fox Creek. It has a length of 1,200 feet at the surface, ranges up to 220 feet in thickness, and rakes to the east at about 40 degrees. In part it is in every respect similar to the Willroy No. I zone, and consists of highly sericitized gneiss mineralized with metallic sulphides, chiefly pyrite and chalcopyrite, and cut by occasional quartz stringers. But here the sulphides replace the host rock outward from a narrow, tabular core of massive ore made up of pyrite and sphalerite, with considerable pyrrhotite but relatively small amounts of chalcopyrite. This core occurs near the south wall of the ore body, within a few feet of the sericitized gneiss — quartzite contact. It decreases in width and tends to pinch out both to the west and with depth. To the east, the West section is cut off sharply by the Fox Creek fault, so that east of the creek, the extension of the ore body lies approximately 250 feet to the north. This extension, or Central section, extends eastward from the fault for a distance of 850 feet, to a point where it is truncated sharply by a zone of north—south diabase dikes. Near the surface the middle section has an average width of 58 feet. Like the West section, it consists of a core of massive sulphides, chiefly pyrite and sphalerite. This is enclosed by an envelope of iron, copper, and subordinate zinc sulphides disseminated throughout sericitized gneiss. But here the core is much wider than in the West section, and the envelope of disseminated material is narrower and, in places, below ore standards. Near the surface, the ore of the Central section is thus rich in zinc but poor in copper. With depth the core of the ore body decreases in width and tends to tongue out, whereas the bordering disseminated ore increases in width and grade. The net result of this is a gradual transition from a high—grade zinc and low—grade copper ore near the surface. to a high—grade copper and low—grade zinc ore at depth. This deep ore, rich in copper but containing low values in zinc, is identical in character to that found in the West section of the ore body, and there is little doubt that it represents the eastward extension of the West 34 �ction down the general rake of the ore body. As mentioned above, the Middle section of the ore body is truncated by a zone of north—south labase dikes. The East section of the ore body lies east of these dikes and extends for a horizontal ength of about 600 feet near the surface. It is identical to the central section in character, except ror three features: (I) both the core of massive sulphides and the envelope of disseminated ore are narrower and tongue out eastward; (2) the core of massive sulphides attains its maximum thickness of bout 50 feet at a depth below the surface of 700 feet, and pinches out upwards;. and (3) at the east margin of the zone of diabase dikes, the core is represented by massive pyrrhotite and pyrite, and sphalerite does not become an important constituent until a depth of about 500 feet is reached. The East section, at or close to the present erosion surface, thus represents the upper limit of the east— raking ore body. The Geco ore body has been tested by diamond drilling to a vertical depth of 1300 feet. To this depth, the three sections are estimated to contain 15,227,251 tons of ore having an average grade of 1.76 percent copper, 3.48 percent zinc, and 1.77 ounces of silver per ton6. Mineralization and Paragenesis The principal ore minerals in all the known deposits are chalcopyrite and sphalerite. Galena is often also present, and is particularly prominent in the Willroy No. 2 ore zone, but nowhere does it occur in sufficient quantity to be of economic importance. Silver is present in every deposit. It has not been recognized as such. Assaying of samples from the Geco ore body indicates that high values in copper are usually accompanied by high values in silver, and the thought has been expressed that the silver is present in solid solution in the chalcopyrite7. A qualitative spectrographic analysis of chalcopyrite from the Geco ore body indicated the presence of tin, which may also prove to be of economic importance8. Associated with ore minerals in all the deposits are quartz, in small veinlets, pyrite, and pyrrhotite. Small amounts of cubanite and marcasite have been found. The paragenesis, as given by Langford9 for the Geco occurrence, is as follows: (I) formation of pyrite; (2) fracturing and introduction of quartz; (3) formation of pyrrhotite; (4) formation of chalcopyrite, overlapped in part and followed by; (5) formation of sphalerite; and (6) formation of galena. The presence of ex—solution textures of sphalerite in chalcopyrite and of chalcopyrite in sphalerite indicates that the Geco ore minerals were formed at high temperatures, and that the deposit, according 6. The Northern Miner, April 5, p. 4!, .56 7. Langford, F. F., "Geology of the Geco Mine in the Iv¼znitouwadge Area, District of Thunder Bay, Ontario," Unpublished M. A. thesis, Queen's University, Kingston, Ontario, 1955. 8. Op. cit. 9. Op. cit. 35 �to LJndren's1° classification, is of the hypothermal typeU. This conclusion follows from the work of Buergerl2, who points out that chalcopyrite unmixes from sphalerite at temperatures of 350 to 4000 C, and from the work of Edwards13, who states that sphalerite unmixes from chalcopyrite at temperatures of 500 to 6000 C. Structural Controls of Ore Deposition One of the most interesting aspects of geological survey work is speculation as to the reasons why ore deposits are where they are after the ore deposits have been discovered and partly developed. Such speculation, in the hope that it may prove useful to further exploration, will constitute the balance of this paper. The structural controls of ore deposition in the Manitouwadge Lake area may be considered under two headings: malor controls, and minor controls. Major Controls The major controls over the deposition of the ores were the folded structures and certain pre—ore fa u Its. Folded Structures: In regard to the folded structures, dip determinations, and measurements of Iineatio made apparent by the parallel alignment of elongate biotite flakes and prismatic crystals of amphibole, indicate a regional plunge of the formations to the northeast. This plunge ranges from 15 — 25° in the west section of the area to about 40° in the east section. Of interest is the fact that the rake of all the known ore bodies or mineralized zones, and in the case of the Geco ore body, also of the zonal arrangement of sulphides, is in the same direction and at the same angle as the plunge of the formations. Pre—Ore Faults: One of the most interesting features of the area is the localization of the Geco and Willroy No. I ore bodies along a very persistent horizon of sericitized quartz—feldspar—biotite gneiss. At the Geco mine, this horizon is cut by north—south dikes of pegmatite, which are terminated abruptly by the massive suiphide core of the ore body and do not appear in expected positions on the other side of the core. This indicates that the massive suiphides were localized in a fault zone, and that this zone served as a channelway, along which the hydrothermal solutions, that effected the sericitization of the gneiss and the deposition of the ore minerals, actually migrated. At first consideration, it would appear that this fault zone, which is post—pegmatite in age, was developed after the formation of the major syncline. But the horizon of sericitized gneiss has been traced continuously across the area for a distance of 4 miles, and throughout this length it is everywhere conformable to the folded unaltered sediments enclosing it. Because of this, and because the alteration indicates the presence of a continuous channelway during the epoch of mineralization, it 0. Lindgren, W., "Mineral Deposits," McGraw—Hill Book Co. Inc., N.Y., 1933. II. Langford, F. F., op. cit. 12. Buerger, M. W., "Unmixing of Chalcopyrite from Sphalerite," Am. Mineral., Vol. 25, pp. 534— 538, 1934. 13. Edwards, A. B., "Textures of the Ore Minerals," Aust. Inst. of Mn. and Met., Melbourne, Australia, 1947. 36 �s concluded that the sericitized gneiss represents a bedding fault that was deformed with the other rock formations during the regional folding. The other ore bodies or mineralized zones in the area do not occur along persistent horizons of cltered rock. Nevertheless, it is thought that they also may have been localized along folded bedding :aults — faults that were of limited lateral extent and were formed as parallel structures merely sub— sdiary to the break" represented by the sericitized gneiss. In this regard, it is to be noted that mineralized zones containing pyrite and pyrrhotite have been found in numerous localities throughout the area, but that it is only close to the horizon of sericitized gneiss that such zones contain any significant amounts of copper, zinc, or silver. Minor Controls The minor features which are known to have exerted some influence in the localization of the ore codies are: (I) intrusive—sediments contacts; (2) local curves or bends in the formations; and (3) the oresence of flat—lying bodies of granite pegmatite. Intrusive—Sediments Contacts: Examination of Fig. 4 shows that the Geco ore body lies within sericitized gneiss, which iidordered to the north by biotite granite and by garnetiferous amphibole — biotite gneiss. Where the sericitized gneiss is bordered by the granite, the best widths and values in copper have been found. On the other hand, where it is bordered by the garnetiferous amphibole— biotite gneiss, both to the west and to the east, the widths and metallic content decrease, and even the sericitic alteration becomes weak. It would thus appear that the contact, between the granite and the sericitized gneiss, localized the structural adjustments that provided the open spaces necessary for the migration of the ore—forming fluids and the deposition of the metallic sulphides. A second example, illustrating the effect of intrusive—sediments contacts on the localization of ore, is found in the Willroy No. 3 zone. Here the mineralization lies in a band of iron formation. This iron formation, and the sulphide mineralization within it, have been traced for 2300 feet. But the zone only attains ore grade where, over a length of 1200 feet, the iron formation is bordered along its footwall aide by a narrow, sill-like body of pegmatite. Local Curves or Bends in the Formations: A second minor but nevertheless important control over the localization of the ore bodies was the presence of local curves or bends in the formations. As shown in Fig. 4, the formations in the vicinity of the Geco ore body strike roughly east—west for a considerable distance, and dip vertically to steeply south. Near the west boundary of the area represented, however, the horizon of sericitized gneiss assumes a strike of N. 550 W. and a dip of 650 to 750 N. E. The ore body occurs where the sericitized gneiss strikes east—west and has a vertical or near—vertical dip. Similar conditions are found on the Willroy property. Here there are three ore bodies, all of which trend roughly east—west, and all of which terminate westward at points where their respective host rocks curve sharply to assume northwest strikes and flatter dips. The reason for the localization of the four ore bodies, along the east—west portions of their favourable host rocks, close to points of deflection in attitude, is found at the Geco mine. It was mentioned previously that the massive sulphide core of the ore body is localized along a fault zone which truncates iiixfies of pegmatite. In the sericitized gneiss adfacent to the massive sulphides numerous drag folds have been mapped. These drag folds are of two types: one type is "Z" — shaped in plan and is compatible with thy major Manitouwadge syncline; the other type is "S' shaped in plan and hence is a "reverse"structure incompatible with the major fold. Such "reverse" — 37 �drag folds have been found only in the horizon of sericitized gneiss, and it is logical to assume that they are expressions of the movement which culminated in the post—pegmatite faulting. They plunge at about 400 E., and indicate that the block of ground north of the fault moved down and to the west. A relative displacement of this type would result in the development o'favourable open spaces along the steep—dipping portions of the fault zone. Thus, as pointed out by Newhouse, 14 if one portion of a fracture surface dips steeply, and the other portion has a lower angle of dip, and if the hanging wall moves relatively down, the hanging wall will ride on the flat—dipping portion as a supporting surface. This will separate the hanging wall from a footwall along the steeply—dipping portion of the fracture surface to form an opening. Presence of Flat—Lying Bodies of Pegmatite: The third minor control over the localization of the ore bodies in the area was the presence of small, flat—lying bodies of pegmatite extending across horizons of favourable host—rocks. At the Geco mine, the north—south pegmatites that are truncated by the massive sulphide core dip at flat angles, in places eastward, in other places westward. These pegmatites are typically massive, pink, unaltered varieties. But, within a foot or two of their contacts, they are somewhat sericitized, and display fractures healed by metallic sulphides. According to Walter Clarke, chief geologist of Geco Mines, Limited, the disseminated ore in the sericitized gneiss tends to improve in grade as the contacts of these flat—lying bodies are approached. Similar pre—ore pegmatites cut across the ore zone at the Willroy No. I ore body. As each of the two pegmatites are approached from below, an increase in the width and/or grade of the ore body is apparent. Because of this it is thought that the flat—lying pegrnatites served as relatively impermeable barriers, which inhibited the migration of the ore—forming fluids and thus effected sulphide deposition in the sericitized gneiss at or close to their contacts. Conclusions Exploration and development work at the various properties permits tentative acceptance of certain valuable conclusions about the mineralization in the area. These facts are as follows: ) The mineral deposits are of Archaean age and may be related genetically to the granitic rocks. (2) All the known mineral deposits are replacement deposits, either disseminated or lode fissure in character, and occur in either iron formation or sedimentary gneiss. (3) The mineral deposits were formed at high temperatures, and may be considered as representative of Lindgre&s hypothermal class. (4) The deposits are controlled in their attitudes by the major folded structures, and rake flatly eastward horizon close parallel to lineations. They lie within a pre—ore folded fault zone that is represented (5) in the field by a persistent parallel structures of sericitized quartz—oligoclase—biotite gneiss, or they lie within smaller, to the horizon of sericitized gneiss. (6) adjacent strike roughly east—west, and where those formations curve sharply to assume a northwest strike and All the important ore bodies are found where the formations to and east of places relatively flat dips to the north. Two ore bodies, the Geco and the Willroy No. 3, are localized along the contacts between (7) granite or pegmatite and their respective favourable host rocks. Newhouse, W. H. "Structural Feature Associated with Ore Deposits," in Ore Deposits as Related to Structural Features, Princeton University Press, Princeton, N. J., p. 17, 1942. 14. 38 �(8) In two cases, at the Geco mine and in the Wiliroy No. I ore body, flat bodies of pegmatite served as relatively impermeable barriers, which inhibited the migration of the ore—forming fluids and effected sulphide deposition in the host rock at or close to their contacts. It is of interest to note that in several localities in the area, the horizon of sericitized gneiss has been found to disappear beneath outcrops of flat—lying pegmatites. Such occur at west end of the Geco ore body, in the extreme northwest corner of the Willroy property, and again between the Nama Creek and Lun Echo properties. In each of these places favourable ore structures may exist. But it seems unlikely that sulphide bodies can be located beneath the pegmatites by geophysical methods. Rather, it is concluded that successful exploration will necessitate detailed geological mapping, to determine the approximate location and trend of the sericitized gneiss beneath the pegmatites, followed by expensive diamond drilling. 39 �THE BLIND RiVER, ONTARIO, URANIUM AREA* by S. M. Roscoe The development of a major uranium mining field near Blind River, about 100 miles east of Sault Ste. Marie, Ontario, has doubtless been watched with considerable attention by those connected with the mineral industry here in the Lake Superior region. This new mining district is very different from any other mining district in Canada. It is, in many respects, more like an oil field than a mining area. From a geologist's point of view this has had several interesting effects. Probably more than in older mining areas, the services of numerous well—trained geologists are recognized as indispensible not only in controlling exploration work but also in helping to maintain profitable production from known ore— bodies. Most of the mining geologists, coming from other mining areas, have had the stimulating experience of having to re—orient their thinking from an emphasis on structure to an emphasis on stratigraphy and on concepts of sedimentation. Interesting also is the keen interest workers in the area have in problems of genesis — that is: are the deposits syngenetic or epigenetic? An important byproduct of the Blind River discoveries is the promise of a wealth of new geological data pertaining to Huronicsn rocks in the region north of Lake Huron. The Blind River uranium deposits are in pyritic quartz—pebble conglomerate beds within and near the base of Huronian sedimentary rocks. They are very similar to the gold-uranium deposits of the Witwatersrand in South Africa. The first discovery of this type of uranium deposit was the Pronto, near the shore of Lake Huron about 10 miles east of Blind River. The uraniferous conglomerate at Pronto was found at the base of a sequence of quartzite and other sedimentary rocks which unconformably overlies granite and green— stone. This discovery triggered intensive prospecting activity throughout the region in 1953. The search was concentrated along the contact between Huronian and pre—Huronian rocks. A number of deposits similar to the Pronto were soon discovered in basal Huronian rocks in the Quirke Lake — Elliot Lake sector about 25 miles northeast of Blind River. All of the important uranium deposits discovered to date in the Blind River area (other than the Pronto deposit) are in this sector. Numerous other occurrences of radioactive conglomerate have been found in other parts of the region, but in most of these the radioactivity is due principally to thorium. Possibilities of finding uranium deposits in these other areas, however, cannot, by any means, be considered exhausted. General Geology In the Quirke Lake — Elliot Lake sector, the Huronian rocks are folded into an open syncline * Published by permission of the Acting Deputy Minister, Department of Mines and Technical Surveys, Ottawa. 40 �which plunges gently to the west. The belt of sedimentary rocks preserved within the syncline is about 9 miles wide and about 5,000 feet thick in the central part (Fig. l).* Pre-Huronian Rocks The pre—Huronian rocks, where overlain by Proterozoic formations, are principally greenstones invaded by granodiorite. These basement rocks are averlain with unquestionable unconformity by the Huronian sedimentary rocks. Immediately beneath the unconformity, in most places, the basement rocks are altered in a manner very suggestive of a weathering profile. The altered zones show gradations upwards from normal basement rocks into highly sericitic rocks which are interpreted as residual deposits, or paleosols formed prior to deposition of the Huronian sediments. This residuum is thickest — locally up to 50 Feet tkick — where it overlies granitic rocks. It seems probable that such deeply—weathered zones were extensive over the pre-Huronian surface and provided the source of detrital material for the basal Huronian sediments. Huronian Sedimentary Rocks The Huronian sedimentary rocks of the North Shore of Lake Huron region were divided by Collins (1925) into a lower, Bruce series and an upper series called the Cobalt series. The Bruce series was divided from bottom to top into: the Mississagi formation —mainly quartzite; the Bruce Boulder conglomerate; the Espanola formation — limestone and greywacke; and the Serpent quartzite formation. Numerous drill—holes have now provided much more detailed information on the succession in the Quirke Lake — Elliot Lake sector than was obtainable from the original surface mapping. Stratigraphic correlations are very important in exploration for uranium ore iii this area, so it seems very desirable that some of the rock-stratigraphic units be redefined in the light of these new data. It is proposed that the Huronian rocks be divided into groups on the basis of cyclic repetitions of boulder conglomerate layers throughout the sequence. The Mississagi unit is elevated from formational rank to group rank and its base is defined as the bottom of the lowermost boulder conglomerate. The Elliot group, below this boulder conglomerate, is subdivided into two formations, the Matinenda formation and the Nordic formation. (Table I). Matinenda Formation The Matinenda formation contains all of the uranium deposits of the area and will be described in some detail. It is not possible within the scope of this paper to describe other stratigraphic units. These are illustrated diagrammatically on the accompanying composite columnar section. The following general features shown on the diagram might be noted in passing: The succession is characterized by layers of boulder conglomerate, each overlain by fine—grained sedimentary rocks which are in turn overlain by coarse grained, clastic sedimentary rocks. Both the Elliot group and the Mississagi group thicken rapidly to the south and also show a pronounced decrease in grain size in this direction. Note also that the Mississagi group overlaps the Elliot group in the northern part of the area. Such * Unfortunately it is not possible to reproduce more of the author's maps in this publication. reader is referred to the bibliography. — Ed. The �['441J to may o 0 (;ucIbcry !r'ipL tee) some oinr rentLe (i) cc 1eweenawan pooke Grcnttio Iva roo 4. ruc, tnoluctc, Ii GriinLr Fniaoocoio S 10 'OR N 14. N 1 A V >< -7 -I ' < V .7 V C & - N > A L '7 - - -7 N -, 4 r- ., , N .3 074(1 L -' ., >r — N < >V '1 N- Lrc -7 I A 4- LnkC take L >4 4-7 4 ( 3 4- -4 -7 V 4- / /4. L .4. >1 -7< ,J .7 -, F -1 4.. <-7 V< > 4 - r A < (- 200 4- -77<4<1- A < I- ç 4- N N N- 4 + -4- -4- 4- 4 + + '-+ .4- -4 + + + 4- + 4 4 4 N 4 -4- -N + 4- 4. + .. + -4 -4 + + 4- 4- -4- + +c,l + + .4. 4 .4. •+ + + + + + + N N + + .4. 4 + + + + + + + + 4. + 4- -N -4 + 4- + - + + -4- - N 4 + -N L4 4. 4- -4- 4- + -f'4 cli -4 4 + ) -4 4- 4 -N 4- 4. + 4- 4- + + + 4 -4. + + -4-. + N + A 000,lrr1in000 -N 4 4 -4 + 4 + 4 + 4 -f -I- + +LN -4- 4- -4 + + 4- + + + 4 Group nt rrtdtorloltve .4. + + -4. liIJROR <N A F 1> N- N ' 3 3 L- 1 F' N J '< V LAKE N4,4 A 1 -4 <V OF mnt4morphio rooks. rooks. -'-Elliot - iflQ(l4O5 some yornper st-cniLe (4) 'I - 1< < 1- -i '7 .37 ) v >1F-44- 4-IA A L-< , 14- F' i Al 41 N 4 1 1A -4> N N V -4 V. Nt-'7 -- V 41 A, N -4 N N 'J >t1N),J and mntamOrphto _4. -. 4-1 7 1, j, AN <N < N 7N '7> -< Imonlitry, voloania, and Fq. sail OrmimOOtone, rmoat "Ituronicin' OrflnlL' tome - -7 <" 1> A 4- -< ) N V/N -, -' N l0O mtls L -4.4 j." -i -' f -1 V •1 N <N< v NORTE 7,<A AL- >L RE000N 4r N SCALE A - A ,j - 4- N ,.4r '.rL I<-7 4- N7 INL- I- A > THZ >L- < l'4 - —< > - >' 4V 'l 2-7 N -4 IN 'J-Iuronian" sedImentary, voloanic, ----*- N - 1- '> N-I N < <4 4V< <7 F' N RO0I(S ¶7> LNt) I<1 "4-74., < L- , SAIJLT STE. MARX] -7 -J DISTRIOUIO1 0 'HUROI4iAN" 4- -N 4- -N + -4. 4 4- ÷ 4- .4 4- + + 4. 4- + + 4- + 4. 4- 4 + .4. ÷ + + 4- • 4- + 4- + -N -f + + 4 �(A) . it 0 31 aNkDtN pnSau.CuIaN ouNce IZPAi1CLA MISSISSAQI QUIRSIE SERflNT COWO.ASIbA F.MATIaL PRJ UNCONFM1TY C QUNLO) ;RouI' caanmas 0) }'MOiMED )MICC.ATIJtE AND OLDtR NOIISNCIA!VN* g Qrtenatuaa as gentle Pairotol (granite ao& greenotone residuum on pre -Ituronlan erosion surface) PuIyeniutI balder conglomerate OligSnduttc (quautaptbb1.1 conglomerate qitartatte Quit uuarsu-graiurd 1e1dapaIc F.ldupsthft quartuliN, uubgrsynckr Oreywuckr-uMjatoa ci Ai-gILlit. sIIttoiN g)Ny*&)kD SAmsnan. I) H NDflS SouthH ELLIOT LAKE AREA STRATICRAP}IIC SEQUENCE AND FACIRS VARIATIONS. QUIRKE LAKE-ELLIOT LAKE A)DtAtnD QUIRKE LAKE AREA �overlaps towards the north of lower formations by succeedingly higher formations is characteristic of the Huronian succession throughout the region. The Matinenda formation is composed of coarse—grained, clastic rocks including: quartz grit, feldspathic quartzite, arkose, and quartz—pebble conglomerate. These rocks are poorly bedded and poorly sorted, for the most part. Torrential cross bedding, seen on all outcrops of the formation, shows dips which were originally southeast to east (prior to folding). The formation shows pronounced local variations in thickness as well as a general regional thickening from north to south (0 to 700 feet). These local variations in thickness are believed to reflect the original topography of the pre— Huronian surface. The thicker parts can thus be interpreted as representing filled valleys, while adiacent thinner portions overlie hills and ridges on the buried pre—Huronian surface. Isopach maps show these valleys and ridges to have a southeasterly trend. The formation is believed to have been of alluvial origin, deposited by streams which flowed in a southeasterly direction. The Matinenda formation is distinctly radioactive. The radioactivity, apparently due mainly to monazite and zircon, is highest in coarse—grained pyrite—bearing beds. Closely packed quartz—pebble conglomerate is particularly pyritic and radioactive, with the radioactivity due to disseminated high— grade uranium minerals — brannerite, uraninite and 'thucolite' — as well as due to thorium in the more ubiquitous monazite and zircon. The thickest, coarsest—grained, most closely packed and most uraniferous conglomerate beds are found in relatively thick parts of the formation — that is, within or overlying pre—Huronian "valleys". Uranium Deposits Two such "valley" structures contain most of the uranium ore deposits discovered to date in the area. One extends southeastward from the Algom—Quirke mine and contains ore deposits along a length of about 5 miles which include the Algom—Quirke deposit, the Consolidated Denison deposit, the Spanish American deposit, the Zenmac deposit, the Panel deposit, and the Can Met deposit. The other extends northwestward from Algom's Nordic mine and contains ore deposits along a known length of about 4 miles which include the Nordic deposit, the Lake Nordic deposit, the Milliken Lake deposit, and the Stanleigh deposit. Algom's two mines are approaching production with plants that will have a combined capacity of 6,000 tons per day. Denison is constructing a 5,700 ton plant; Can Met, a 2,500 ton plant. The other companies mentioned are either sinking shafts or have announced plans to sink. Pronto is in production with a plant rated at 1,250 tons per day capacity. Thicknesses of ore zones are about 10 feet, and individual ore sections up to 32 feet thick have been reported. The ore deposits most typically consist of interlayered beds, one to three feet thick, of quartz—pebble conglomerate, conglomeritic quartzite, and pebble—free quartzite. The selection of the sections of such conglomeritic zones which are to be mined must be carefully controlled by sampling. Some of the highly pyritic conglomerate layers contain several tenths of one per cent U308, and rare seams, a fraction of an inch thick, may contain up to several per cent U308. Conglomeritic quartzite contains less uranium than the highly pyritic conglomerate, and pebble—free quartzite contains only very small amounts of uranium. In places, however, such quartzite contains a very high uranium content associated with pyrite along seams which follow cross—bedding planes. The ratio of thorium to uranium varies widely. ln quartzite and pebbly quartzite it is about 3 to I. In most ore deposits it is less than to I. In general, pyrite content, uranium content and thorium content all show close relationships to sedimentary features but show no clear cut relationship to features such as folds, faults, or contacts of diabase dykes. Places have been discovered, however, where uranium values appear to cut across sedimentary contacts and where rocks, not normally very I 44 �radioactive, contain ore where they are in contact with rich conglomerate. Pyritic Quartz-pebble Conglomerate The ore conglomerate contains pebbles of quartz, a few chert and jasper pebbles, and, very rarely, pebbles of argillite, greenstone, and granite. Pebbles are from 1/4 inch to 2 inches in diameter, and fairly well sized within individual layers (Fig. 2). They are moderately rounded and, in the Fig. 2. Hand Specimens of Pyritized Conglomerate from, left to right; Pronto Uranium Mines, Ontario; Algom Uranium Mines, Ontario. 45 �richest conglomerates, are tightly packed. The matrix contains abundant grains of pyrite, poorly— sorted granules and silt—sized particles of quartz and feldspar, and small plates of muscovite, sericite, chlorite, and epidote. The poorly sorted matrix of the conglomerate was probably not greatly modified by diagenetic Secondary quartz is found at the rims of some quartz pebbles. Overgrowths are found on a few quartz and feldspar grains and a little carbonate is present in the matrix of some conglomerate samples. It is difficult, however, to distinguish between secondary minerals of authogenic origin and those related to later metamorphism and hydrothermal alteration. processes. The conglomerates and adjacent rocks have been markedly deformed, probably concomitantly with folding and thrust faulting in the Huronian rocks. The following effects of such deformation are observable in thin sections: undulatory extinction in quartz grains; fractures with displacements; rotation of grains; and comminution of matrix material. The crushed rocks have been re—healed by secondary quartz, mica, chlorite and other minerals. Serrated boundaries between grains and granular texture within pebbles are common. Much of the pyrite has clearly crystallized or has been recrystallized subsequently to the deformation. Some of the uranium mineralization is also post— deformation in age. Most of the uranium in the ore is within grains of an amorphous, or metamict, material. This material contains abundant inclusions of anatase and gives an X—ray powder diffraction pattern similar to that of anatase; after strong heating, it gives the pattern of brannerite — a uranium titanate — as well as an anatase pattern. This material is therefore referred to as 'brannerite', although it cannot be considered certain that it was ever in the form of crystalline brannerite. The brannerite' occurs as discrete rounded grains and also as irregular intergrowths with pyrite. Uraninute is abundant in some ores and is found as angular to subangular grains. Brecciated uraninite grains have been noted. Thucolite', a uraniferous hydrocarbon, is common along fractures in the ores and also in rocks a considerable distance away from ore conglomerate beds. Pitchblende has been reported. Monazite and zircon, abundant in most ore samples, occur as rounded grains of detrital origin. Radioactive epidote (possibly allanite) and radioactive titanite have also been noted. Marcasite occurs in place of pyrite in some ores. Pyrrhotite and chalcopyrite are common, particularly in conglomerate at the very base of the Matinenda formation. Magnetite has been reported associated with pyrite. Cobaltite has also been identified. Galena is common. Molybdenite is found along slip planes in adjacent country rocks. Sphalerite is commonly associated with thucolite and carbonate in veinlets. Trace amounts of gold, silver, chromium, nickel and vanadium are also present in the ores. Origin Our knowledge of these deposits is still far a theory of their genesis. credible too incomplete to allow any forceful advancement of nevertheless, to give a brief summary of the more It might be interesting, hypotheses of origin which have been advanced. The placerists suggest that the original quartz—pebble gravels contained hematite, ilmenite, magnetite, rutile, titanite, epidote, pyrite and other sulphides, monazite, zircon and many other heavy minerals, including uranium minerals (possibly 'brannerite and uraninite). Subsequent diagenetic and metamorphic processes effected a certain amount of solution, redistribution, and recrystallization of constituents with little change in bulk chemical composition or addition of new 46 �elements other than sulphur. Large quantities of the latter are, of course, required to convert iron oxides to pyrite. The most serious criticism raised against this theory is that uranium minerals, particularly uraninite, are very unstable under weathering conditions and could not possibly have survived to become important constituents of the gravels. The most resistant radioactive minerals, such as monazite, contain much more thorium than uranium. Such minerals are also the most abundant radioactive minerals in most granitic rocks, which most commonly have a thorium—uranium ratio of about 3 to I. If it be granted for the moment that it is unlikely that there were in the source area any large bodies of rock which contained resistant uranium minerals in greater abundance thati thorium minerals, then it seems unlikely that extensive placer deposits which contain more uranium than thorium could have been formed. It is necessary, therefore, to consider possible mechanisms whereby the conglomerates could become enriched in uranium relative to thorium. Hydrothermal solutons or ground water, for example, may have dissolved uranium from adjacent country rocks and re—precipitated it in conglomerate; thorium might, at the same time, have been removed from the conglomerate. The hydrothermalists, seizing with glee upon the fact that the placerists are forced to admit that huge quantities of sulphur must have been added to the conglomerates, suggest that the relatively minute quantities of uranium in the conglomerates were introduced in the same manner, probably at the same time and probably from some deep seated source, rather than from adjacent rocks or from surficial waters. This later hypothesis requires that the conglomerates were preferred exclusively to all other rocks and structures as hosts for the introduced uranium. Such a preference could be attributed only to a much greater permeability or much more dilatant condition of the conglomerates as compared to other rocks at the time of the postulated uranium mineralization. Prior to consolidation, the quartz—pebble gravel with its poorly-sorted matrix was probably not greatly more permeable than overlying and underlying sands. It is difficult to evaluate how the relative permeabilities of the two rock types might have been changed by diagenesis, by cataclastic deformation and by metamorphism. Most of our present knowledge of these uranium deposits is of a qualitative nature. Quantitativa data on mineralogy, chemical composition, structural relationships, ages of mineralization, and so on, may resolve the problem, but a consideration of the length of time that the same problem has been argued in South Africa would warn us against expecting a speedy solution to the problem of origin of the Blind River Uranium ores. Bibliography Abraham, E. M.: Geology of Parts of Long and Spragge Townships, Blind River Uranium Area, District of Algoma; Ont. Dept. Mines, P.R. 1953—2, 1953. Arnold, R. G.: A Preliminary Account of the Mineralogy and Genesis of the Uraniferous Conglomerates of Blind River, Ontario; M. A. Sc. Thesis, 1954, University of Toronto. (On file at Library, University of Toronto). Collins, W. H.: North Shore of Lake Huron; Geol. Surv. Can., Mem. 143, 1925. Hart, R. C.; Harper, H. G.; and Algom Field Staff: Uranium Deposits of the Quirke Lake Trough, Algoma District, Ontario; C.I.M.M. Bull. Vol. 48, No. 517, 1955, (pp. 260-265). Joubin, F. R.: Uranium Deposits of the Algoma District, Ontario; C.I.M. Trans., Vol LVII, 1954 (pp. 431-437). Traill, R. J.: A Preliminary Account of the Mineralogy of Radioactive Conglomerates in the Blind 47 �River Region, Ontario; Can. Mm. Jour., Apr. 1954. Discussion Dr. A. W. Jolliffe (Queens University, Kingston, Canada): I would like to comment very briefly on this paper. One thing that I think the speaker did not emphasize that is worthwhile stressing is that here is an unusual deposit with some hundreds of millions of tons worth something in excess of a billion dollars. That is not lust a pious hope; it has been blocked out and a great deal of the ore has already been sold. So here is one of the great deposits of all time and it was found by a geologist, Mr. Franc. R. Joubin. The staking that followed the initial find was entirely guided by a geological map prepared by the Geological Survey of Canada - Dr. Collins' original map of this area made in 1924. think that point is worth stating; perhaps Dr. Roscoe did not want to stress it because he is a member of the Geological Survey of Canada himself, and I know from talking with the people who are developing these mines how great a contribution they feel that geology in general, and the Geological Survey of Canada in particular, have made to the development of this amazing camp. I Dr. J. W. Gruner (University of Minnesota): If we could imagine that the Colorado Plateau were metamorphosed as the Bruce series is we might get something similar to the Bruce series and to the Blind River deposits but there would be certain differences which would be very marked in the Plateau. We have no thorium whatsoever and of course that is one reason why the Plateau deposits are easy to explore because thorium does not interfere with any of the radiometric counting. We would also have another difference — that would be the presence of organic—plant trash as they call it out there. This is fossil material which of course would not be present in the Bruce series. But one thing we would have that would correspond to the thucolite, except for the thorium, would be asphaltite. The largest deposits on the Plateau are associated with this supposedly oil—derived, asphaltic hard material which you call thucolite in Canada. The clastic nature of the brannerite which have seen in microsopic sections has been compared with the clastic grains of uraninite in the Witwatersrand. However that is the greatest objection, as you all know, to epigenetic hydrothermal origin of these deposits, if these clastic grains exist. If they are really clastic grains we must change our ideas of the climate of the Precambrian because uraninite is not stable, we are sure, under the present conditions of oxygen in the atmosphere. I Mr. Wm. Belobraidich (Oliver Iron Mining Division): I understand that airborne magnetics were flown over the area. Was there any significant correlation between the magnetics and the orebody itself? Dr. Roscoe: No, there was none whatsoever; even scintillation airborne surveys have not been outstandingly successful in the area. They in general simply show outcrop areas of the tv¼itinenda formation or other radioactive formations and the aerial—magnetic surveys show diabase dikes and gabbroic bodies in basement rocks. There has been some thought of attempting to trace basement structures by use of magnetic information with the view that the basement structures would have a bearing on the topography of the basement floor and one might be able to get some clues about drilling in that manner, but nothing successful has been done that I know of. 48 �MAGNETIC PROSPECTING FOR IRON ORES by W. George WahI Iron—rich minerals forming ore deposits can be detected by all of the commonly used geophysical techniques except those based on radioactive decay. If the necessary geophysical contrasts exist, iron ore deposits can be mapped by electromagnetic, resistivity and self—potential surveys. Gravity surveys have outlined non—magnetic ore bodies but magnetism is the natural field force most commonly measured in the geophysical prospecting for iron ores. In general it may be stated that either iron ore deposits or the iron formations from which the deposits are derived are magnetic. This is true of the deposits in Michigan, Minnesota, Labrador, Quebec, and Ontario, but not of the Steep Rock and Michipicoten, Ontario, and Wabana, Newfoundland districts. The increased competition for new iron ore deposits caused by the depletion of reserves has forced instrument modifications and changes in field procedures which would speed up the mapping of magnetic data. Interpretive techniques had to be devised which would satisfy the demand for a rapid appraisal of magnetic anomalies. The field and interpretative methods and instrument modificatbns which will be discussed encompass the whole range of magnetic instruments from the first geophysical tool, the compass, to the latest, the airborne magnetometer. The compass is being used more and more as a reconnaissance geophysical tool because of its portability and ease of operation. The type of compass commonly wned by the prospectors can be used to gather data on the direction of the horizontal component of the magnetic force. If sufficient care is used, the results obtained can map magnetic deposits in great detail. The least a compass survey can accomplish is to delimit the area for more involved surveys. The compass may be used as a geophysical tool by measuring the azimuth of a line at fixed intervals across the area to be mapped. Pacing along surveyed property boundaries, claim lines, or picket lines will give sufficient control for this type of mapping. The local magnetic deflection may be plotted by arrows pointing in the direction taken by the compass needle. Figure I shows the results obtained by measuring the azimuth of north—south claim lines at 200 foot stations across an iron formation. This illustration shows that traverse lines 1/4 mile apart will map an iron formation in sufficient detail to enable certain deductions to be made as to the location and size of the causitive body. In this particular case, the data show that the iron for— mation reaches its greatest width towards the east side of the area mapped. This survey showed that the formation had a large potential volume and minable width. Prospecting in the area outlined by this survey uncovered an iron formation of sufficient promise to warrant further work. The compass survey, besides delimiting the area to be covered by a magnetometer survey, also shows the direction which the traverse lines should take to yield the most informative results. 49 �The data obtained on a compass survey may be shown in another manner, lithe amount of deflection from regional magnetic north is computed and if a negative value is assigned to those de— flections which are east of regional magnetic north and a positive value to those deflections west of regional magnetic north, the data may be contoured. The contoured results will show approximately the location, length, and width of the causitive body. The depth may also be approximated. A line drawn along the crest of the positive and negative anomalies will mark the extreme outside limit of the magnetic deposit. These lines will also tend to define the length of the causitive body. The zone across which the greatest rate of change occurs marks the axis of the magnetic body and also gives an indication of the depth of burial. The dip needle is another reconnaissance geophysical tool which will return excellent results if properly used. The lack of control on the survey, misorientation and improper leveling are in direct relationship with the care exerted by the operator. It has been found that a spot bubble on the face of the instrument will be a great aid in orienting the dip needle in a strong magnetic field. It can be shown that if the needle is counter—balanced so as to come to rest in a position normal to the earth's magnetic field the instrument is much more sensitive to small changes in that field. The confusion of positive and negative values, which are actually at odds with the normal conception of up and down can be eliminated by reading zero when the north—seeking end of the needle points vertically up, 900 when horizontal and 1800 when pointing vertically down. A Schmidt—type magnetometer is by design a delicate instrument of great sensitivity but cumbersome to use. Magnetometers have been or are being designed which will speed up the mapping of the data in the field. The null type, torsion magnetometers which do not have to be oriented or leveled and which have a great range of values are a step in the right direction. A practical solution to the time—consuming practice of changing auxiliary magnets in the Schmidt type instruments is to increase the size and weight of the sensitivity screw so that the scale constant is increased to around 400 or 500 gammas per scale division. It has been observed that little information is lost by using such a large scale constant when the results have to be contoured in 5000 gamma intervals. A detailed interpretation of magnetometer results obtained on a closely controlled survey will describe the causitive body as to location, depth, length, width and approximate grade or susceptibility. This is time consuming but the results obtained are usually sufficient to enable a conclusion to be drawn as to the relative worth of the causitive body. The following interpretative techniques have been devised which will rate the relative significance of magnetic anomalies on a preliminary appraisal of the magnetic data. Location: The causitive body is directly below the peak of a magnetometer anomaly. Depth: The depth can be approximated by measuring the horizontal distance between points where isomagnetic lines of equal intensity are evenly spaced and closest together. Area: The size of the causitive body can be approximated by sketching a line which loins the points of zero curvature around the anomaly. Grade: The relative grade or susceptibility of a magnetic body can be determined by comparing the intensity per unit area of its anomaly with other anomalies of the same shape in the immediate area. A discussion of this technique together with illustrations is presented later on in this paper. 'I An airborne—magnetometer survey is the most rapid method by which large areas can be mapped. The unit cost is low and the accuracy of the data obtained on a well controlled survey is equal to that 50 �obtained by the most sensitive ground instruments. In Canada airborne-magnetometer maps are available at relatively low cost from several government agencies. These maps show the magnetic data as mapped at the flight elevation and along certain flight lines. The data are contoured and as a result the placement of isomagnetic lines between the flight lines is interpreted. This causes some of thediscrepenciesencountered when comparing the results of a ground survey with those found on an airborne map. It is mere chance that a flight line passes directly over the peak of an anomaly. During a field examination the area between flight lines on either side of the peak of the anomaly mapped should be investigated. In some areas the lack of identifiable ground control causes some errors in the plotting of data. It is therefore advisable to cover additional ground to insure the adequate mapping on the ground of the cause of the anomaly found by the airborne—magnetometer survey. No additional work such as drilling or test pitting should be based on the results of an airborne survey alone. When examining a magnetic trend on an airborne sheet it may be observed that the peak values are not constant. This may be caused by a differing tenor of magnetite along the strike of the formation, by thickening and thinning of the formation, by differences in depth of the burial of the formation, by different flight elevations on adjacent flight lines, or by combinations of any of the above. Any interpretation of airborne mangetometer data must be made with a realization that the intensity varies inversely as the square of the distance and that closely spaced anomalies on the ground may resolve into one anomaly at the flight elevation. All interpretative techniques apply equally as well to airborne data as they do to ground data. The intensity per unit area method of comparing anomalies is especially useful when examining an airborne magnetometer survey. This consists of recording the intensity of an anomaly and dividing by the surface area of the anomaly. Comparison should only be made between anomalies of the same shape and depth of burial. For example, in the vicinity of Marmora, Ontario there is a 7,000 gamma positive anomaly found over the magnetite deposit now being mined by Bethlehem Steel Company, (Fig. 2). Approximately 10 miles northeast of Marmora another 7,000 gamma anomaly is located whkh is caused by a basic intrusive carrying about 5% magnetite, (Fig. 3). The anomaly over the magnetite deposit has approximately 10 times the intensity per unit area of the other anomaly. It may be assumed that magnetite comprises 50% of the mass causing the Marmora anomaly. This approximates the average grade of iron (35%) as shown by drilling. Anomalies whose causitive bodies are at different depths of burial can be evaluated in a like It is assumed that the intensity varies inversely as the square of the distance. Figures 2 and 5 show the Marmora anomaly as mapped at 500 feet terrain clearance. Figure 4 shows the anomaly mapped at 5,000 feet terrain clearance. manner. The following formula can be applied: distance squared xintensity area Figure 2 (500)2 x 6,700 104 16,000,000 sq. ft. Figure 4 (5,000)2 x 140 = 70 S0,000,000sq. ft. 51 �FigvreZ (500)2 x-,l0O 70 14,500,000 sq. ft. The discrepency in the above results is caused by the inability of the airplane to duplicate the flight paths. The results are sufficient to show that the method has merit. In comparing anomalies by this method only those anomalies of similar shape should be compared. Great discrepancies can result if long linear anomalies are compared to circular anomalies. Differences are also great when linear anomalies trending north—south are compared to east—west trending anomalies. 52 �— :t. C ...iat:- r / 44i't • I. '*C - - 1¼ CG.S. ANOMALY p / 0 2 Fig. 2. Seven—thousand gamma anomaly Fig. I. Compass survey across iron formation. at Marmora, Ontario. 5000 14.0 C Fig. 4. Marmora, Ontario anomaly at 5,000 feet clearance. Fig. 3. Seven-thousand gamma anomaly ten miles northeast of Marmora, Ontario. 500' 4100 !. 7 dnotndlvat 53 �RELATIONSHIP OF GRAVITY TO GEOLOG1CAL STRUCTURE IN MICHIGAN'S UPPER PENINSULA by L. 0. Bacon Introduction Gravity measurements were begun in the Upper Peninsula in 1950 in an attempt to determine the relationship between gravity variations and known geological structure, the final purpose of the work being to increase our knowledge of major geologic structures which in the most part lie hidden beneath glacial drift in the western half of the peninsula or beneath the Paleozoic sediments of the eastern half of the peninsula. This paper is a composite of work carried out by the writer and that of four students who investigated selected areas as part of their graduate programs. The area which was covered is shown in plate I. area of about 17,000 square miles. The Upper Peninsula of Michigan comprises an Station density varied considerably, a total of 4000 stations being occupied; however, station density varied from approximately one per square mile in the Iron River mining district to as little as one per township in the eastern end of the peninsula. In almost all cases stations occupied were along existing roads which in some areas are not very plentiful Field Work The gravity measurements were made with a Worden geodetic instrument which has a very low instrumental drift rate. Probable error in determination of latitude of the stations was± 0.1 mile. The majority of the stations occupied were U. S. Geological Survey or U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey bench marks or along Michigan highways where elevation control was better than ± 1 foot. In areas where few bench marks were available, elevations were obtained by altimeter, using a station microbarograph to monitor air pressure fluctuations. Elevations determined by altimeter have a probable error of ± 5 feet in much of the area. Some elevations determined in this manner may be in error by—I— 10 feet. Topographic corrections were made for a limited number of stations; and such effects at other stations probably do not exceed 0.2 or 0.3 milflgal, since the area is not rugged. Effects of curvature of the earth are of the order of 0.3 to 0.6 milligal, depending upon elevation of the station. indirect effects are essentially constant over the area covered. In view of the above probable error, it is believed that the precision of the reduced data is of the order of—i-- milligal. I 54 �'cv —'N \ - . k S: , DcvtItl#4 *IIU*4$. 4 - K . I-,- S*tV4 -:M194fl EC$U$W$W NE CWEEw*Wsi S IW11GIIIIM 1110$ flJfiIntIOIt * = StAte - MLCS 1= to Plate I. Gravity-geological map of Upper Michigan. All stations values are calculated relative to the pendulum station at Iron River1, having a Bouguer value of —5 milligals. Plate I shows the gravity data of the Upper Peninsula contoured at a 10 milligal interval with the 5 milligal contour indicated in part of the area. I. Numbers refer to bibliography at end of paper. 55 �Geology is taken from the Geologic Map of the Upper Peninsula of Michigan2 and is somewhat generalized for the purposes of portrayal. The Huronian iron formations are shown, not primarily because they in themselves are deemed so important for their contribution to the gravity picture but primarily as a marker horizon; it is quite obvious, however, that upper Huronian sediments in sync linal structures do produce positive Bouguer anomalies. Maior gravity anomalies occur in the Keweenaw Peninsula associated with the middle Keweenawan lava flows. Other anomalies in the western half of the peninsula are generally associated with Huronian synclinal structures. A broad regional gravity anomaly exists in the eastern half of the peninsula. On the Keweenaw Peninsula gravity values vary from —1—10 milligals along the north side of the peninsula to — 70 milligals about t6 miles to the southeast along the southeast side of the peninsula. The contact between the sandstones and the flows is a fault. This is a fairly steeply dipping reverse fault having a throw generally considered to be the order of a few thousands of feet. A conservative estimate, from calculations based upon the observed gravity data, is a throw of the order of 12,000 feet, using a density contrast of 0.48 between the Keweenawan flows (density 2.86) and the sandstone (density 2.38). The very large gravity anomaly of the order of 100 milligals is strikingly similar in appearance to the mid—continent gravity high through Wisconsin, Minnesota, Iowa and Kansas.3'4 At the western end of the Upper Peninsula the malor feature is still the anomaly associated with the Keweenawan flows. However in the northern portion of the area a gravity terrace occurs on the flank of the anomaly. This is in the Porcupine Mountain region and is associated with the acid intrusives, granites and felsites which invade the area. The Huronian iron formation in the western end of this area is the iron—producing Gogebic The Huronian sediments here do not give rise to any pronounced gravity effect, a fact which may be attributed in part to lack of sufficient gravity stations as well as the narrowness of the band of sediments, which dip steeply northward between the Keweenawan flows to the north and the Archean granites to the south. There is, however, a warping of the gravity contours produced by the flows to the north and the less dense Archean rocks to the south. range. The south central area is almost entirely underlain by Precambrian sediments. The Upper Huronian sediments which occur in synclines such as the Iron River—Crystal Falls district of the Menominee range produce positive gravity anomalies because of the density contrast of about 0.3 between the Upper Huronian sediments and the surrounding Pre—Cambrian greenstones. Calculations indicate that the sync line which comprises the Iron River—Crystal Falls district has a depth of the order of 6000 feet. The deepest mines in the area extend downward only about 2000 feet. To the west of this district occurs a gravity anomaly which is about of the same order of magnitude. In a paper by Wyble and the writer in l95l the probable presence of a Huronian sedimentary basin in this area similar to the one to the east was postulated. There are no outcrops in the area, and seismic refraction surveys have indicated that glacial drift is from 60 to 300 feet in thickness. Drilling on a magnetic anomaly at the south edge of the gravity anomaly in 1955 encountered an amphibolite.6 This may be responsible for the gravity anomaly, although the writer does not believe that the limited work done is adequate to discount the original postulation. The gravity anomaly associated with the Marquette Iron Range, which is a synclinal structure somewhat similar to that of the Iron River—Crystal Falls district, has a maximum of 12 milligals in a surrounding field of —20 milligals. Calculations of the depth of this basin gives a figure of the order 56 �of 8,000 feet. Between these two synclinal basins lies a dome—shaped structure roughly 15 by 20 miles in extent. This structure is called the Amasa Oval after a nearby village. The core of this structure is Archean granite which gives rise to a negative anomaly of approximately 10 milligals with respect to the surrounding area. The offset of the negative anomaly may well be only apparent, as there is an extensive area which has not a single gravity station in it. Contouring of the area was done on the basis of the data available. In general there are positive anomalies associated with the synclinal structures which contain the Upper Huronian sediments. The Menominee district shown to the south and east of the Iron River—Crystal Falls region does not produce any pronounced gravity effect. The beds here dip to the south, and their east—west trend is reflected in the warping of the gravity contours. Magnetic measurements have traced the east—west belt as far eastward as Escanaba on the shores of Lake Michigan where a gravity high of —11 milligals within a surrounding —35 milligals exists. Actually, this gravity high lies to the north of the eastward extension of the Menominee Range; the writer believes that it is due to either a synclinal basin containing Upper Huronian sediments or a topographic high on the Precambrian surface, which at Escanaba lies about 800 feet beneath the surface. The anomaly may be a combination of both the above possibilities. A few magnetic stations in the northeast corner of this gravity anomalous area outlined a magnetic anomaly of about 10,000 gammas. To the south of the Menominee Range the gravity values decrease rapidly and are probably due to the thickening of the Paleozoic sediments as well as to the presence of granitic basement. The gravity values in the eastern half of the Upper Peninsula are in the area covered by Paleozoic The maior gravitational anomaly is the one associated with the Marciuette iron formation and the broad gravity high extending to the southeast across most of the eastern half of the peninsula. sediments. A number of smaller local anomalies are evident either as closed contours or as warping of the gravity contours. These are evidently a reflection of either the structure or the topography of the Precambrian basement below the Paleozoics. The area is now undergoing active exploration by one of the mining companies. Returning to consideration of the broad southeast—trending gravity and magnetic anomaly, we observe that it practically disappears where the Paleozoics thin out to nothing, that is, where the Archean rocks crop out, which suggests that the negative values to the north and south are caused by thick accumulations of lighter sediments. As we go eastward, the anomaly increases in magnitude. The few exposures of Paleozoic rocks have dips generally towards Lake Michigan, except in the northern part where the rocks on the north side of the anomaly dip to the north toward Lake Superior. This fact seems to indicate that this anomaly may be a reflection of the ridge or dividing line between the two basins. This is supported in part by deep drilling in the eastern end of the peninsula. Farther to the east we observe primarily only the continuation of this anomaly, which seems to continue across the straits of Mackinac into lower Michigan where it probably merges with the gravity high extending nearly the lepgth of the Lower Peninsula. There is also a swing of the anomaly due northward, indicating that the positive anomaly extends perhaps across the eastern end of Lake 57 �Superior. This northward trend seems to tie in with some of the dense lavas exposed along the north and east shores of Lake Superior in Ontario. There is a definite possibility that it is a continuation of these lavas which produces the anomaly running down through the Lower Peninsula of Michigan. The anomaly through the eastern Upper Peninsula and down through the Lower Peninsula is strikingly similar to the mid—continent gravity high which extends from the western end of the Lake Superior basin down through Minnesota, Iowa, Nebraska and Kansas. This latter anomaly is considered to be caused by a basic rock within the basement complex. Conclusion We see that the gravitational picture can be very complex in the region where Precambrian rocks are near the surface. The dense iron—bearing sync linal formations produce positive gravity anomalies, and much information can be obtained about major structural features from gravity investigations. Bibliography I. Pendulum Gravity Data in the United States. U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, Spec. Pub. No. 244. 2. Martin, Helen M., "Geologic Map of the Northern Peninsula of Michigan." Publication 39, Geologic Series 33, 1936. 3. Black, W. A., "Study of the Marked Positive Anomaly in the Northern Mid—Continent Region of the United States." Presented at Geological Society of American Annual Meeting, November 9, 1955. 4. Thiel, Edward, "Relationship of Gravity Values in Lake Superior Region to Geologic Structure." University of Wisconsin, PH. D. Thesis, 1955. 5. Bacon, L. 0. and Wyble, D. 0., "Gravity Investigations in the Iron River — Crystal Falls Mining District of Michigan." Trans. AIME, Mining Engineering, pp. 973—979, October 1952. 6. Seymour, 0., personal communication. Discussion Dr. W. S. White (U. S. Geological Survey): If you were to complete your profile between Isle Roya land the Keweenaw Peninsula by extrapolation, do you think it would produce a gravity high or a gravity low? Mr. Bacon: I would expect the Bouguer gravity anomaly to be larger in magnitude; however there might be a trough near the center due to thickening of the Upper Keweenawan sediments. Dr. White: This large anomaly supports the contention as outlined in my paper on the source of the lavas and mineralizing solutions. Would not the apparent lack of such an anomaly near the eastern end of Lake Superior preclude the presence of Keweenawan lavas in this area? Mr. Bacon: Not necessarily. The indicated low gravity values in the eastern end of Lake Superior may be due primarily to the thickening of the Lake Superior sandstone. 58 �GEOLOGICAL FACTORS AFFECTING BENEFICIATION OF LAKE SUPER! OR IRON ORES by M. E. Volin The geologist finds it convenient to classify formations according to mineral constituents, origin, texture, color, and many other significant features. In evaluating his discoveries or expectations for discoveries towards reaching a decision on how far to pursue his exploration objectives, the geologist applies some general cut—off factor related to the economics of utilization of the ore minerals, be it grade, metallurgical response, or a combination of many such things. Thus he brings to bear an appreciation of the principal problems involved in converting his potential raw material into a marketable product. The mineral dressing engineer who receives the samples sent by the geologist is singularly interested in their response to his techniques of beneficiation methods. He assumes that the samples represent the average character of a mineraNzed body of significant size, and it is his objective to find an economic way to recover the minerals in a useful form. Some of the geological records may be helpful to him in guiding his first estimate of how the mineral dressing problems can be attacked; the degree of usefulness will depend on the geologist's understanding of the problems in applying the beneficiation processes. Our panel subject may seem somewhat of a departure from the theme of geological exploration, but in proposing this subject it was my hope that the discussions would emphasize some of the geological information about the Lake Superior iron formations that can be of interest to the mineral dressing engineer and would point out factors that the geologist can bring into clearer definition as a help in attacking the mineral dressing problems. Exploration is an initial and very important phase of building and maintaining mineral enterprises, but the successive phases in reaching production are a series of logical steps in overcoming interrelated problems. The best possibility of success is teamwork by people who are experts in their particular lines but are informed on all the phases, and the need for this kind of coordination is more apparent as the problems become increasingly complex. The changes that have taken place in iron ore mining in Minnesota set a pattern for this industry in the Lake Superior region. We have seen the production picture change from all direct—shipping ores to increasing tonnages of beneficiated ores from larger and more corrvpJex plants until today we have the first huge taconite plants. This same trend with some different characteristics is underway here in Michigan, and it is being hastened by the competition from premium grade imported ores. As the low—grade iron resources come more and more into the picture, it is evident that a greater degree of teamwork between geologists and mineral dressing engineers is needed to resolve the problems of utilization. Just as the geologist has developed classifications of the iron formations to aid his search for ore, the mineral dressing engineer needs classifications of the formations, or other resource segments, in terms of metallurgical response. The geologkt can provide a lot of information helpful in dealing with the mineral dressing problems. The need for this sort of approach was pointed out as long ago as 1933 by Dr. T. M. Broderick, then research professor at the Michigan College of Mining and Technology, in his AIME publication entitled "Application of Geology to Problems of Iron Ore 59 �Concentration. We have for speakers men who have worked on the many problems of the Lake Superior ron ores and have an appreciation of the complex character of the low—grade resources. Each has been closely associated with the particular phase of the subject he will present. Although our discussions will largely be concerned with the Michigan iron formations, we are fortunate in having two of our Canadian neighbors here to tell us about the problems of the siderite ores in their locality; their information should be helpful to us in appraising the possibilities of the Michigan siderites. Pane I GEOLOGICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF MICHIGAN IRON ORES AFFECTING BENEFICIATION by Alan T. Broderick (Abstract) The amenability of an iron—bearing rock to beneficiation by physical methods depends principally on its mineralogy and grain size. In the case of sedimentary iron formation, these features were determined by events in geological history which can be conveniently divided into three periods. During the sedimentation—diagenesis period the original mineralogy and texture were established in response to the sea bottom and pre—lithification environment. If the principal iron mineral were magnetite in coarse enough grains, the amenability of the rock to magnetic concentration was established then without any later geological process being necessary. If, on the other hand, the principal mineral were hematite rather than magnetite, the formation would not be workable today without the grain—coarsening effect of metamorphism because the fine grind necessary for liberation is too fine for the flotation process. In some very restricted areas the siderite in carbonate—facies iron formation is pure enough to be of possible interest as a source of sintering ore. Silicate—facies rocks, since the iron in them is chemically bound to silica, cannot be made to yield a desirable product by physical methods regardless of the grain size. The grains of pyrite in sulfide—facies rocks are too fine to be upgraded by known physical methods. During the metamorohism period, the iron minerals adjusted to the new environment by increasing in grain size and/or by forming new minerals. In centers of high—grade metamorphism (garnet zone and above) the hematite and magnetite in iron formation of the oxide fades were so increased in grain size that the rock was made amenable to beneficiation by flotation. Under intense metamorphism, silicate, carbonate, and locally oxide facies rocks alter to coarse grunerite and are therefore not treatable physically. There is no appreciable volume of sulfide—facies rock in high—grade metamorphic areas in Michigan. During the oxidation period, the hematite of the oxide facies rocks was not altered. Magnetite altered to martite. The carbonate—and—silicate—facies rocks, particularly in low—grade metamorphic areas, were profoundly altered. If the carbonate and silicate layers simply oxidized in place with little or no addition of iron, the result is a banded rock containing layers of earthy hematite and/or goethite which is not treatable by gravity or flotation methods. However, magnetic roasting may be applicable. If, on the other hand, iron moved during the oxidation period and locally enriched the 60 �iron layers sufficiently, the result is a rock made up of bands of hard, dense direct—shipping grade material alternating with lean cherty or argfllaceous layers. Some of this type of formation can be and is being treated by gravity methods in Michigan. Table I shows graphically the relationships between the products of these three periods of geologic history. In order of decreasing tonnage available in significant widths at ledge in Michigan, the geological types of iron formation are listed below. Where a beneficiation plant is in operation or has been contemplated, it is listed with its type. I. Oxidized/Low-grade metamorphic/Carbonate and silicate facies 2. Unoxidized/Low-grade metamorphic/Carbonate and silicate facies 3. Low-grade metamorphic/Oxide facies 4. Unoxidized/High-grade metamorphic/Silicate fades, silicated carbonate and oxide facies 5. High—grade metamorphic/Oxide facies Book Mine, Iron County Empire Mine, Marquette County Humboldt, Republic Mines, Marquette County Groveland Mine, Dickinson County 6. Unoxidized/Low—grade metamorphic/Sulfide fa c I e s 7. Oxidized/High—grade metamorphic/Silicate facies, silicated carbonate and oxide facies 61 Ohio Mine, Marquette County �Minerals resulting Minerals resulting from OXIDATION from Principal Mineral Minerals resulting in from Minerals resulting from METAMORPHISM *-SEDIMENTATION 3 METAMORPHISM 3 OXI DATION and (Biatite Lane & (Garnet Lane & Diagenesis Facies Below) Specularite E Specularite (3) Martite 4— Magnetite (3)* Abave) — Hematite -3 't-l—5i02—3 Specularite (S)t> Specularite Hem. & Lim. Grunerite —3 e Magnetite —3 Magnetite (5) — Martite Hem. & Lim. Grunerite -.3 '>-I-5i02 -3 * * Hem. & Lim. ())<Siderite (2) <— Siderite Hem. & Lim. (1)4—Silicates (2) 4 Silicates 3 Grunerite (4) -3 Martite Hem. & tim. e Pyrite -9 Pyrite & Pyrrh?3 Limanite Limanite E Pyrite (6) Grunerite (4) —3 Martite (7) Hem. & tim. (7)* * Existing & contemplated beneficiatian plants in Michigan Numbers shaw approximate order of decreasing volume available at ledge in Michigan. Table 62 1 �THE RELATIONSHIP OF DIAGENESIS, METAMORPHISM AND SECONI)ARY OXIDATION TO THE CONCENTRATING CHARACTERISTICS OF THE NEGAUNEE IRON-FORMATION OF THE MARQUETTE RANGE by G. J. Anderson and Tsu Ming Han Introduction Over the past few years all of the major mining companies in the Lake Superior District have been focusing a great deal of attention on methods and techniques to benefic late the large low—grade reserves of iron formation distributed in this area. The Cleveland-Cliffs Iron Company has conducted extensive research on the Negaunee Iron Formation of the Marquette Range, and as a result have three properties in operation and a fourth which will be developed within the next few years. We have found that microscopic studies have played an important part in this research and have contributed considerable information to the development of the low—grade ores. These studies reveal that the methods and degree of concentration are governed by the geological processes to which the primary iron formation was subjected. The purpose of this report is to discuss the various types of iron formation produced by these processes and their concentrating characteristics. There have been at least two major theories regarding the origin of the iron formation. The earlier of these proposed a single—facies theory which suggests that all the iron was deposited as iron carbonate. A recent theory by Dr. Harold James may be considered a multiple—facies theory in which he proposes primary sulfides, carbonates, silicates and oxides. We are not advocating any particular theory; however, according to the information we have derived from our studies, we feel that we are in position to make some suggestions. We have found that the iron in the iron formation was largely deposited as iron carbonate which has been completely re—crystallized. There are virtually no sulfides present on the Marquette Range, so we cannot consider this type. There are iron silicates present in large quantities, but we believe they have probably formed by diagenesis of the carbonate iron formation plus fine clay and/or fine clastics. This is suggested because the silicates are intimately associated with fine clastic sediments and the plates penetrate into carbonate grains and replace clastic materials. A large portion of the iron formation is in the form of magnetite chert which may be formed either by the diagenetic replacement of the carbonate iron formation or by the diagenetic recrystallization of the primary magnetite iron formation, if it is present as Dr. James has indicated. There has possibly been some primary hematite and magnetite deposited locally, but they are present in very minor quantities. The hematite is usually associated with clastics and occurs as submicroscopic plates or grains. The magnetite is usually associated with chert and carbonaceous materials and occurs as irregular sub—microscopic grains. In summary, the information that we have available suggests that the iron formation, to a large extent was primarily deposited in the form of iron carbonate with some clastics, followed by diagenetic 63 �and metamorphic processes, ond then subiected to secondary oxidation. The mineralogy and mineral grain disposition of several samples from the Marquette Range are described below exemplifying the various types of iron formation. Types of Negaunee Iron Formation A. Diagenetic Iron Formation — Direct Magnetic Separation Magnetite—chert with some carbonate 2. Magnetite—silicates with carbonate chert 3. Magnetite—silicates with clastics 4. Cherty magnesium-iron carbonate 1. B. Oxidized Iron Formation - Magnetic Oxide Conversion I. Martite—chert 2. Martite—clastics 3. Goethitic hematite—chert 4. Goethitic chert C. Metamorphic Iron Formation — Froth Flotation I. Specular—hematite—chert with or without sericite 2. Magnetite—chert with some chlorite and locally garnet 3. Grunerite wth chert magnetite or garnet General Description and Concentrating Characteristics of the Various Types of Iron Formation A. Diagenetic Iron Formation — Direct Magnetic Separation The metallurgical characteristics of this type of iron formation are governed by the magnetite content, magnetite size, and mineral association. I. Magnetite—Chert with some Carbonate — The results of our studies which included both microscopic and metallurgical testing have shown that this material has the most favorable concentrating characteristics. The reasons for this are the simple mineral composition, uniformity of grain size, and sharp boundaries between the magnetite and the chert, Fig. 1. 2. Magnetite—Silicates with Carbonate Chert — Our studies have shown that this material can be concentrated, but is not as favorable as No. I because of the presence of fine silicates and finer magnetite which necessitate longer grinding for liberation. The magnetite is more closely interlocked with the gangue minerals, Fig. 2. 3. Magnetite—Silicates with Clastics — In this material the magnetite is not uniform in size some being as coarse as —65 mesh and some as fine as a few microns, Fig. 3. As a result, this material is treatable, but yields a low percentage iron recovery with a high mineral loss in the tailings in comparison with No's I and 2, due to the loss of fines embedded in the matrix. 64 �4. Cherty Magnesium—Iron Carbonate — A large part or the total of the iron in this material is tied up in the form of carbonate, Fig 4. The magnetite can be liberated when present, but generally the percent iron recovery is extremely low and the iron loss in the tailings is great. B. Oxidized Iron Formation - Magnetic Oxide Conversion The metallurgical characteristics of this type of iron formation are governed by the degree of oxidation, particle size, mineral texture, and the mineralogy. 1. Martite—Chert — Microscopic and metallurgical studies have shown that this material appears to be the most favorable for concentration by magnetic oxide conversion because of uniform crystal size and sharp boundaries between the martite and chert, Fig. 5. 2. Martite—Clastics — Studies have shown that this material is moderately favorable and that the martite can be concentrated; however, a large part of the iron is tied up as hematite in the matrix of the clastics, Fig. 6. As a result, the percentage of iron recovery is comparatively low and the iron loss in the tailings high. 3 & 4. Goethitic Hematite—Chert and Goethitic Chert — Studies have shown that, atthe present time, this material is undesirable for beneficiating by magnetic oxide conversion. This is due to the irregular forms, the fineness, and softness of the mineral particles, Fig. 7. As a result, the concentrates always contain an appreciable amotnt of silica and there is a considerable iron loss in the tailings. A microscopic statistical sampling study on the —65, -1- 100 mesh portion of the oxidized iron formation samples from one of the Cleveland—Cliffs Iron Company drill holes has been conducted. The results are indicated in Plate I which reveals the concentrating characteristics of the materials in this particular hole. C. Metamorphic Iron Formation — Froth Flotation The metallurgical characteristics of this type of iron formation are related to the crystal size of the minerals and the mineral assemblage. I. Specular Hematite—Chert with Sericite — The specular hematite in this material occurs as fairly oriented plates ranging from as coarse as 48 mesh and as fine as a few microns, Fig. 8. This material is the most favorable for concentrating by froth flotation because of good liberation of the ore particles and the fact that a very high grade concentrate can be obtained by grinding to approximately —65 mesh. 2. Magnetite—Chert with some Chlorite — Because this material is coarse—grained, Fig. 9, it can be treated by standard flotation methods or magnetic separation, but at our operating properties, it is being treated only by flotation. 3. Gruneritic Rock — This rock varies from pure grunerite to magnetite—grunerite, and grunerite— chert, Fig. 10. Locally, garnet appears as one of the chief constituents. This material is not economically treatable at the present time, based on the magnetite content; and it is not favorable for flotation. A correlation has been made between the mineral assemblages of the metamorphic iron formation 65 �PLATE I 0 MATERIAl. CLASSIFIED %SILICA WI COlIC. I$T*_o GMlMIIII 20 40 OVE$SUNOEN Most Ot$ul*etL — P1$IR*$Lt — WIOESIAA$4E MOST 111025111*$LI — — MIGROSCOPC SAMPliNG p10 METALLURGICAL. CHARACTERISTICS OF THE OXIDIZED PdEGAUNEE IRON-FORMATION -10 - IS TYPE OF $ATERIAb IN SO ClIENT LOOM OMMIEO MRTIOZ QLWr = IS AO % FlIM GOSOEC MARQUETTE RANGE CHARACTER8TICS OP THE MATERIAL RTITE -GOETH. clIENT MAflOt cmci MM1UT. cWlIT SO MANTttt'CH(Rt 3$ II 3 $$(7$IO45$ 34 3 12 tOMTtFE -OlIERT II MRTLV OXIDiZED 11231491 cR011120 MARTITE I 32511 #400*) NETALLURMCAL RESUISS EXPECTED DESIR*OLE lOG 2O 140 77 45 N*2tITE -OIlER? 34 SI TI1t- 0N.-CH. 40 24 I3' I I NT-S1W GiL GOETNITE IS FINELY INTERL000EC SlIM CHERT I 3 I $ 15 INIQI$IVEL* OXIOIEED cR$L 5#MIID NANTITE (lOOM - 325W) MU MOST UNOE$AILE CC$*MU IE)PT MS MART 0* S MART QOCITIL 011 SANE AS l30-I4DEXCGPT IT CONTAINS *002 NEMAIIIC-CHERI I uiosio.st 110 3 4 MAWflTE IS FAIRLY COARSE - ONOLILD *440 INTENSIVELY OXIDIZED ISO I I SAME AS 140- 445 (20011 T 44011) MARTITE -ClIENT DESIRAILE : . 200 3 47 TWO 2*702112 SIZES OF MAFTITE 2) ft 1 2*0 lOOM TO 400 N 1 i - _jj *440 400 N * l-bO' E!CEt 11 cONTAINS (5IH4TE }-IE44SEP1 IT COIITAINS GOCYMITE 540 IU U 250 Il. *00 IS MARTITE - 3) 40 30 3 I00 NT: NJ Oc:I:ITITE 19101510454.1 $00 310 $40 IAIITSIT - ClIENT 2 IMMATITE -ClIENT ISO 14lITt -Q*fit 310 ILW*TUE-CHEWT 24 MARTITE 0112441 MIXED WITH HEMATITE ClIENT . 30 SI lO $0 101Th1T2 S SOIL I** 102 FINELY INTE0I.OCNETi WITH DENT 33 ILMAT1TE *440 WETIII?2 ARE F$IELY INTERLOCKED SlIM DLXI HEMATITE ClIENT *11(20 *1111 11*17171 ClIENT 36 33 23 42 MOST UIID€$1NAILE UNOESI090LE MOST 491IE$IA*SU 400 420 31 3) 21 45 24 6$ 3$ IIEMI*T1T( ClIENT MIXED WISH 00*912 20*1025 NARTITE OHIO? UIPE$I44*$LL 00*1)42 ORAIIIED .ARTIT$ CIIERT MIXED WITH NIIMTFTC 0*41*5 0CMLE NARTITE GNENT $ HEMATITE -ClIENT . • 440 400 2* IMMATITI -OW S - $oImlT1-aIlRT MMTITE—GNCRT 450 S 4EMAT1TE $ SOETINTE ARC NIT449!ELT 1111(0200200 51141 ClIENT MARTITE SIZE MIlLS FROM 15W TO 32$ N MOST LIMCEINSIU MOST OCIINULE �in one of The Cleveland—Cliffs Iron Company diamond drill holes and their actual metallurgical test results obtained from the Cleveland—Cliffs lron Company Research Laboratory. The correlation is diagrammatically illustrated in Plate 2. Conclusion ln reviewing the types of iron formation it may be concluded that the diagenesis and metamorphism are constructive processes of ore beneficiation while secondary oxidation is not a favorable process. NOTE: The term "chert" mentioned in this paper optically is a fine—grained to medium— grained quartz which was re—crystallized from chert by diagenetic and metamorphic processes to various degrees. PLATE CHARACTERISTICS CONCENTRATING OF THE METAMORPHIC %SILICA IN CONCENTRATE 0/ IRON CONTENT IN TAILING 10% I-FM 0 0 20% 10% fERBURDEN SERICITE SCHIST 0 100 r rz (I) C) 200 I- SPECULAR - HEMATITE - CHERT L&i Iii Li 2 — 300 r MAGNETITE -CHERT C- DIA BA SE I- LU MAGNETITE -GRUNERITE DIABASE C MAGNETITE -GRUNERITE DIAGRAM SHOWING THE MINERAL ASSEMBLAGES TO THE DISTRIBUTION OF SILICA AND IRON PRODUCED BY FLOTATION. 67 IN RELATION IN THE PRODUCTS 2 �41 '44 4 r Fig. I Fig. 2 - Magnetite-carbonate—silicate. l25x Polished Section. Magnetite, white; carbonate, light grey; silicate plates, grey; and pits black. — Magnetite—chert with some carbon— 125x. Polished Section. Magnetite, ate. white; chert, grey; carbonate, light grey; and pits, black. It ' N pa Fig. 3 - Magnetite—clastics. Polished Section. Magnetite, white; gangue (quartz, Fig. 4 — Cherty magnesium iron carbonate. 200x. Thin Section. Carbonate, granular chlorite, etc.) grey; and pits, black. grey; and chert, white. Fig. 5 - Martite—chert. 125x. Polished Section. Magnetite remnants, greyish white; martite, white; chert, grey; and pits, black. Fig. 6 — Martite—clastics, screen openings: —400 mesh. Polished Section. Magnetite remnants, light grey; martite and hematite, white; gangue, dark grey; and pits, black. 68 �p. ft fr. 4 0. S 0 ': , a a d;f2 A.ti 'P 1F Fig. 8 — Specular hematite—chert. 125x. Polished Section. Specular hematite, white; gangue, grey; and pits, black. Fig. 7 — Hematite—goethite—chert. 125x. Polished Section. Hematite, white; geothite, light grey; gangue, dark grey; and pits, black. •r p I -l p N :' ' Th A Fig. 9 — Magnetite—chert. 125x. Polished Section. Magnetite, light grey; martite, Fig. 10 — Grunerite—chert. 100x. Thin Section. Grunerite, grey; chert, white; and white; gangue, grey; and pits, black. magnetite, black. 69 �THE NATURE AND BENEFICIATING PROPERTIES BY MICHIPICOTEN SIDERITES PART I - DISTRIBUTION AND NATURE by A. M. Goodwin Distribution A principal iron formation of the Michipicoten district extends in faulted segments from the Helen Mine northeastward to the vicinity of the Algoma Central Railway, a total distance of II miles. From west to east the individual segments are, a) Helen — Victoria — Alexander — presently producing 1.4 million tons annually; b) Siderite Hill — presently being prepared for production; c) Lucy; d) Ruth; e) Josephine — a former producer of hematite ore; and f) Bartlett — representing a reserve of siderite ore, Plate 1. Structure The iron formation is situated on the south limb of an east—west trending sync line which, at the Helen Mine, rakes eastward at 60 to 70 degrees. The limb has been overturned. Thus, the formation dips southward yet tops are to the north. Northerly trending, vertical faults and flat thrust faults are common. Offsets on the vertical faults, which are generally east side to the north, range up to 2 miles and on the flat thrusts in the order of 200 feet. Stratigraphy at the Helen Mine The iron formation is enclosed in volcanic rocks. Basic volcanics typically overlie the iron formation and acid volcanics typically underlie it. Overlying basic volcanics The basic volcanics overlying the iron formation have the appearance of normal pillow andesite. Pillow structures are well preserved and consistently indicate tops to the north. The contact between basic volcanics and underlying iron formation is generally abrupt. Iron Formation The iron formation consists of the following ternary succession in descending order, Fig. 1. Top Bottom Banded chert member Pyrite member Siderite member Banded Chert Member: This member ranges in thickness from 200 to 1000 feet and averages 500 feet. it consists of thin—bedded chert interbanded with siderite, pyrite, and magnetite. Local zones of graphitic chert contain up to 14 percent carbon. In contrast to other Precambrian iron formation, jasper is negligible. 70 �r / c aanzr4Y SARI fI tLJC/7X' I ,tj • - • -— SIDERI'E HILl. 1 /7 atZLAKE ,Th //< DSTRtBkJTION OF HELEN-BARTLETT IRON FORMATION. Heron LEGENO: — J. scole:- 60 MiFes Ob4.QSEME. 1—0_EG-WRE fr*o VOCSSTIOJI1 see eti.c #oi.cn,ct ;t $CMI - P tUOI3MII$$ Plate I — Distribution of Helen—Bartlett Iron Formation. Pyrite Member: This member is consistently located at the contact between chert and siderite. It ranges from 10 to 50 feet thick and consists of mixed pyrite, siderite, and chert. The member increases in thickness and purity towards the west end of the range. Sulphur has a marked limiting effect on the sintering process as will be described later. Siderite Member: This member averages 200 feet thick within the limits of present mining. There are variations in thickness of considerable magnitude as a result of faulting and original thickening and thinning. The siderite, for the most part, is of massive, uniform structure. It contains variable siliceous impurities which are present either as, a) evenly disseminated grains and patches of chert, or b) relatively thick, uniform chert zones. One such zone in the Victoria mine, called the Central Silica zone, ranges in thickness from 10 to 60 feet. It is formed of relatively coarse grained, essentially structureless chert. A persistent zone of banded chert typically separates siderite from the underlying acid volcanics. It is 5 to 15 feet thick and is similar in appearance to the main banded chert member. It contains considerable amounts of argillaceous impurities. Two principal diabase dykes transect the ore body. The siderite adjacent to the dykes has been partly altered to magnetite. The zone of alteration ranges in thickness from 10 to 50 feet. Magnetite presents certain beneficiating problems as will be described later. 71 �4OE..LIZED GROSS-SECbON OF IRON FORMATION — AFItA COLLINS & QUIRKE — —BAS1C VOLCANICSr E"CO CHERT MEMBER ). —iRON FORMATlOi— PYRITE MEMBER MEMBIR -/ , 1 —Ac1D YOLC*NJCS'— 200 O Feet Fig. I — Idealized Cross—section of Iron Formation. Chemical Composition Table I illustrates the chemical composition of a) average siderite, b) siderite-magnetite complex ALGOMA ORE PROPERTIES, LIMITED Jamestown, Ontario A B C 5.26 0.82 3.40 6.56 AlO Fe 36.7 510 1.65 0.16 43.8 40.2 1.44 Mn 2.20 2.30 MgO CaO 6.31 6.67 3.10 S 1.74 3.88 0.79 Ignition Loss 25.32 10.22 2.44 0.20 22.9 29.20 A. Siderite ore. D.D.H.U-3-57; 960-970 ft. B. Siderite—magnetite ore alongside diabase C. dyke. D.D.H.U—3-56; 930—940 ft. Pyrite-bearing ore. D.D.HI 256; 680—690 ft. Table alongside 1 — Analyses diabase dykes, and c) pyrite—rich siderite. The table illustrates, I) the sintering action of 72 �diabase dykes, 2) the abundance of magnesium in the ore relative to calcium, 3) negligible aluminum, 4) the manganese content. The ore is essentially a self—fluxing, manganese—bearing iron carbonate. Wall—Rock Alteration in Underlying Volcanics The chemical and spectrographic characteristics of wall—rock alteration in the underlying volcanics are being investigated at present. Alteration consists essentially of the addition to the volcanics of iron, manganese, magnesium, sulphur and carbon dioxide, together with the removal of silica and calcium. The degree of alteration increases upwards through the underlying volcanics and is most intense in the 100 — foot interval below the iron formation. There are also lateral variations in intensity away from the area of the present mine working. Origin The available evidence indicates that the iron formation originated in a submarine, volcanic environment. Iron, manganese, sulphur, and carbon dioxide are considered to represent products of fractional crystallization which occurred toward the end of a volcanic cycle. Acid volcanics likewise represent end products of the same fractionation, hence their persistent stratigraphic location beneath the iron formation. The iron formation is considered to have formed at the chemical plane on the sea floor where ascending, acid groundwaters of volcanic origin came in contact with alkaline to neutral sea water. The broad, horizontal chemical plane separating these two contrasting chemical environments is considered to have resulted in formation of the ternary succession which is so characteristic of the iron formation. In this manner banded chert was deposited as a chemical sediment on the sea floor. Siderite and pyrite members formed largely by replacement of basal portions of the banded chert member; replacement was controlled by increasing pH and decreasing pressure as the sea-water environment was reached. 73 �THE NATURE AND BENEFICIATI NG PROPERTIES OF MICHIPICOTEN SI DERITES PART II — BENEFICIATING PROPERTIES by D. R. Dorrance Introduction At the Helen Mine, the ore is beneficiated by two processes, namely heavy—media separation and sintering. All the ore is sintered, but that part which will not make sinter grade is first put through the sink—float plant. The cut—off between sinter grade and sink—float grade is between 7.5 and 8.0 percent 5i02. The sink—float operation will be described first. Sink—Float Operation The sink—float operation consists of separating minerals of different specific gravities by immersing them in a medium of high specific gravity. Minerals having a higher specific gravity than the medium will sink and those of lesser gravity will float. Siderite has a specific gravity of 3.60 and the gangue has a specific gravity of 2.40 and 3.10. By using a gravity of 3.30 a separation is made of ore and gangue. The heavy media used consists of finely ground ferrosilicon suspended in water. The ferrosilicon has a dry specific gravity of 6.9 and contains approximately 15 percent silicon. Theorebroughtup from underground is minus 4 inches in size and is stocked on either low—sulphur or high—sulphur piles. The ore is further reduced to I 1/2 inches by a system of screens and crushers in the sink—float plant. It is then subjected to intensive washing in order to remove all fines. In the separators the gangue material floats to the top bath and discharges out the end through a chute. The sink material sinks to the bottom and is raked ahead by means of a spiral to the head of the separator where it discharges onto screens. The excess medium is drained off to a 20—foot thickener. The underflow from the thickener is pumped to a 48—inch Dings magnetic separator where the ferrosilicon is reclaimed. Specific gravity determinations are taken on the separator every half hour. The specific gravity is kept around 3.30. Samples of the feed, sink, float and sands are taken each shift. The plant handles both high and low sulphur ores and makes a good separation. The ores high in magnetite give the most trouble because the magnetic fines cannot be cleaned out of the ferrosilicon and they then lower the specific gravity. The maximum magnetite that can be handled is 15 percent. Ores in which silica and pyrite are intimately mixed present a problem since the relatively heavy pyrite causes siliceous rock to sink. 74 �Sintering Operation The sintering operation consists of roasting siderite in order to drive off carbon dioxide and induce oxidation, thereby producing a high grade sinter ore in a physical form suitable for furnace feed. Roasting is accomplished by putting crushed ore and coke on oil—fired sintering machines. Hiah ignition temperatures result in dissociation of siderite. The gases are withdrawn by forced air drafts. Ore is brought from the Helen Mine to the sintering plant by means of an aerial tramway 15,000 feet long and by railroad cars. The tram carries approximately 3,600 tons per day and the railroad about 2,500 tons per day. The ore is transported by a system of conveyors to crushers and screens to produce a 1/4—inch feed. The feed to the sintering machines is made up of a mixture of screened siderite ore and screened coke. Proportioning of the components is done at each individual sinter— ing machine. The operator controls the rate of flow from the bins to a pelletizer where water is added. Mixing of the feed must be done so that an intimate blendng of ore, coke and moisture is obtained; in addition, the mixing should be done so that the mixed feed is thoroughly aerated and is in such physical condition that maximum porosity is obtained. The mixed feed is fed to the machines through reciprocating swing chutes. The finished sinter is dumped over bar grizzlies into bins and thence to railway cars. Maximum permissible limits in the sinter are 5102— 11.20 percent; 5— 0.100 percent. In order to stay within these limits, the feed must not contain more than 7.90 percent 5i02 and 4.0 percent S. Considerable care must be exercised both in mining and beneficiating to remain within these limits. Discussion Mr. Volin: The information in all of these papers is very gratifying to me. To have this subject included in a purely geological symposium was somewhat of a concession but I think we can see that geology ties up with beneficiation processes and of course the two of them go together in order to achieve the final result of bringing a property into production. 75 �DiSTRIBUTION OF TRACE ELEMENTS IN SOIL FRACTIONS by D. H. Yardley Geochemical prospecting is a relatively new scientific tool in the search for hidden ore deposits. It is so new that more papers have been published in this field since 1951 than in all preceding years. An investigation of some aspects of geochemical exploration was begun near Ely, Minnesota in late 1953. The test area is near the Kawishiwi River along the basal contact of Duluth gabbro with Giant's Range granite, Fig. 1. Funds for the study have been provided by the Graduate School of the University of Minnesota and the Minnesota Institute of Research. Fig. I — Index map, and outline of the Duluth Gabbro (after Schwartz & Davidson). The primary object of the investigation to date has been to obtain data on the distribution of trace elements in glacial materials in northern Minnesota. It was felt that such data would demonstrate whether or not soil samples would reflect the presence of a known mineralized zone below glacial till and some idea might be gained regarding the pattern of distribution to be expected in soils with a 76 �similar climatic history and of similar origin. To date the study has concerned itself with data on the distribution of Cu and Ni in glacial soil, Summary of Geology The Duluth gabbro is one of the world's largest basic intrusives and has been defined as a lopolith (4)*. It intrudes rocks which range in age from Keewatin to middle Keweenawan. Within the test area the gabbro is in contact with granite except for short sections where the gabbro is in contact with remnants of iron formation. Sulphide mineralization occurs very near and parallel to the basal contact of the gabbro for a distance of several miles. Schwartz and Davidson (10) have described the geologic setting of the mineralization and roted that the sulphides occur at the base of the thickest part of the gabbro. The sulphides occur disseminated n all the silicates and also as small interstitial masses but are most abundant in the plagioclase. A few tiny veinlets of sulphide are present but these may be deuteric. The sulphides found include chalcopyrite, cubanite, pentlandite, pyrrhotite and minute amounts of bornite. The sulphides are repor'ed to be syngenetic (10, p. 702), (II). The ratio of Cu:Ni is about 4:1. This ratio of copper—nickel content is based on analyses of samples from various outcrops. The average of seven surface samples (10, p. 702) is 0.57% Cu and 0.13% Ni. The average of 29 grab and chip samples from about 12 outcrops was 0.59% Cu and 0.17% Ni. The average for 30 surface samples obtained from 20 different 40—acre tracts (II) is 8.72% Fe, 0.44% Cu and 0.11% Ni. The average content of the above 66 samples is 0.53% Cu and 0.14% Ni, a ratio of 3.8:1. Test Procedure The chromograph method (13), which was used for all tests, makes use of a reaction between the metal being tested for and special reagent paper to form a colored spot. The colored spot obtained is compared to colored spots prepared from samples of known metal content. The chromograph enables one to apply a fixed volume of test solution to a fixed area of reagent paper under a fixed suction head. The variable is the amount of metal present in the test solution. Sample Treatment The dried soil samples were screened, a 0.1 gram portion fused with 0.5 grams of potassium bisulphate flux, the fused product digested in 13% sodium citrate solution, diluted to 5 ml and filtered. The pH of the filtrate was then adjusted to >8.5 and 0.2 ml used in the chromograph for the Ni test. The pH of a portion of the remaining filtrate was adjusted to 4.5 and 0.2 ml used for the copper test. Demineralized water obtained from a Barnstead Bantam Demineralizer was used for diluting and for cleaning equipment. Reagents were purified with dithizone solution where necessary and procedures carefully standardized so that the only variable would be the heavy metal content of * Numbers refer to bibliography at the end of paper. 77 �the samples. When it was necessary to prepare new reagent paper, new standard color spots were prepared so that any variation in the strength of the reagent paper would tend to cancel in color spot comparisons. All standards were made up using blank soil from the test area. pH Discussion Repeat tests by chromographic analysis in the early stages of the investigation often failed to check. Quantitative variations of 50% and occasionally more were common. Nickel tests on slightly basic test solutions would sometimes be blank or very low and show a very definite color on a repeat run; less often erratic copper tests were encountered. A series of tests on known samples, and on made-up samples, was run for Ni and Cu for a range of pH values. These samples contained Ni, Cu, and Co ions known to be present in anomalous parts of the test area. Table I illustrates the intensity readings of one series of colorimetric spots on test solution containing 500 ppm of Ni, and 500 ppm of Cu. Table I Ni Cu pH. p.p.m. 0 75 3.0 3.0 500 500 200 4.0 4.2 4.5 4.8 5.4 6.2 6.7 7.0 7.2 7.5 8.8 500 500 p.p.m. 7.0 7.2 7.5 8.2 8.5 9.2 9.5 10. 300 400 400 425 425 II. 425 500 500 450 400 300 300 500 1500 2000 reproducible results can be obtained within the general accuracy limits of ± 30% for the method, over a pH range of about 8.5 to 11 for Ni and 3 to 5.5 for Cu. The results demonstrate that Table I also shows that for either metal tests run at a pH of 5.5 to 8.5 are not reliable. The high Cu readings at pH >7.2 can be explained by precipitation of Cu, Co, and Ni by rubeanic acid reagent in ammoniacal solution (13, p 3). The low readings at pH 5.4 to 7 are perhaps (2, p 79) at which cupric Cu tends to precipitate as hydroxide or basic salt dilute solutions. Leach (7) used this explanation in interpretation of hydrogeochemical tests for Cu near Butte, Montana. related to the pH of 5.3 from The tests demonstrate that the pH of the test solutions is very important and that a standard pH within the ranges given above should be used when testing field samples. This point, perhaps, has 78 �not received sufficient emphasis in the literature, although the chromographic procedure used by the Geochemical Section of the U. S. Geological Survey does adjust the pH to the desired range. Sampling Procedure Sampling was carried out along five north—south traverse lines across the gabbro—granite contact. Insofar as possible, samples were taken at 100 foot intervals. The surface soil samples were taken at an average depth of about one foot which was below the high—humus surface layer and into clean till. At some sampling points, samples were taken at each foot of depth down to bedrock in order to obtain data as to vertical distribution and distrhDution below swamps. An auger and a Swedish type peat sampler were used in sampling down through swamp materials; casing was used where necessary. A hand auger—drill was used in taking samples in till. Areal Distribution Contours and Profiles Plotting of Cu, Ni, and Co content in contour form (Fig. 2) shows that anomalous amounts of Fig. 2 — Total Cu, Ni, & Co, in glacial till — Ely District, Minnesota. these metal ions occur in till over and closely adiacent to mineralized areas of the gabbro. Contouring nickel content alone, or the copper content, outlines the same target area. Contours of the copper 79 �content provide a more distinct anomaly than nickel because of the higher copper concentration: The position of the northern boundary of the anomaly implies that the mineralization is parallel to but not quite at the base of the gabbro. This is confirmed by 3 Bureau of Mines drill holes (3). Distribution by Soil Size Testing of soil samples for any geochemical campaign involves a decision whether the sample should be screened, and if screened what soil fraction should be selected for testing. The glacial overburden in the area displays a wide range of particle size. For this reason it was necessary to select the soil fraction which most likely is representative of the true heavy—metal content. The finer soil fractions generally are to be preferred in soil sampling, because suiphides would tend to weather to finer size (6, p 530). Exceptions to this general rule do occur. Sergeev (12, p 46), comparing the tin, tungsten, and chromium contents of —1mm. fractions with 5mm. and coarser sizes in the part of the halo nearest the deposit states, "The content of the valuable element is approximately the same in both. In places, however, the coarser fraction contains somewhat more of the valuable element. Lean samples (a remote or the train part of the halo) have a lower content of the valuable element (down to zero) in the coarser fraction, although its concentration is stable in the finer fraction. It may be concluded that dispersion takes place chiefly at the expense of the finer materials. And also, "Remembering that halos of saline genesis are characterized by secondary compounds less directly related to the massive rock, the advantages of observing the halos in the fine deluvial fraction become evident. Such samples provide a reliable expression of the dispersion halo in its largest spatial development." Sergeev refers to elements which are resistant to chemical weathering and are dominantly residual in nature. Ground—up coarse fractions which contain one or more large pieces of ore mineral would test high in metal. However, even those elements which occur in resistant minerals conform to the general rule in the train part of a halo. A factor which also favors the selection of the fine soil fractons, in addition to the tendency of sulphides to weather to finer sizes, is the probability that transportation of heavy metals by capillary solutions may be important in the formation of some geochemical halos, and capillarity would be most effective in materials within the finer size ranges. Bischoff (1, p 58), provides some indirect support for this view, "Gravel and coarse sand on the contrary proved very unfavorable, probably because of rapid drainage," and "The depth of favorable overburden through which ground water would bring appreciable quantities of heavy metals to surface was surprising. The practical maximum overburden is now considered to be 30 to 50 feet for clay and 20 to 30 feet for fine sand." Bischoff also noted a blanketing or masking effect of sand and gravel ridges. Distribution in Soil Fractions The much greater number of soil particles in a unit weight of fine materials would be much more likely to include some particles of mechanically derived ore mineral than would the coarser fractions. The finer sizes also provide a much larger total surface area and so could absorb more metal ions from percolating soil solutions. Thus the finer materials would tend to "fix" relatively larger amounts of metal ions; we might say that they have a larger total adsorptive capacity and so would be much more 80 �likely than the coarse fractions to refrect the presence of anomalous concentrations of trace elements. Samples were sieved through a 9 mesh screen and some were sieved into three sizes, —1—9 mesh, —9+80 mesh, and —80 mesh. Stainless steel screens were used to avoid possible contamination. Tests on blank samples of cleaned St. Peter sand before and after screening showed no contamination from abrasion of the screen. The screens used were all Tyler screen scale. Table II compares the metal content of the +9 mesh and —80 mesh fractions from ten sample locations. The +9 mesh material was crushed in an agate mortar before fusion. Table II Nickel p.p.m. +9 mesh Copper p.p.m. -80 mesh +9 mesh -80 mesh 5 7 0 0 30 0 5 15 0 0 10 5 25 375 250 0 250 100 10 100 5 0 120 50 160 25 50 300 400 350 0 70 5 250 10 10 5 15 0 5 830 140 70 Approxrra'e percentage detected in +9 mesh fraction: (compared to -80 mesh fraction) 1977 Nickel = 8% Copper: 7% One can cor'clude that for all practical purposes the heavy metals do not occur in the +9 mesh soil size, at least for the concentration rangesNshown. Table Ill is a comparison of the nickel content of —9+80 mesh and —80 mesh soil fractions. Although the —9+80 fraction contains a distinctly lower proportion of nickel, about two thirds as much, the anomaly would not be missed by testing only the —9+80 mesh fraction. A comparison of the Ni content for 30 samples on a parallel traverse showed that the —9—1—80 fraction averaged 62% as high as the —80 fraction. Again the anomaly was obvious, using either soil size. It seems reasonable to conclude that a mixture of the two sizes (all the —9 mesh material) will give dependable results for field comparisons. The preceding figures show that for most field work the finer soil sizes are more indicative of geochemical anomalies. To confirm this view a study was made of samples known to contain appreciable quantitks of Cu and Ni. The samples were screened to six products and five chromographic analyses were made for Ni and five for Cu. Agreement of analytic results was best in the finer size samples. Fig. 4 illustrates the distribution; in each case the p.p.m. of metal is the arithmetic mean of five analyses. 81 �Table Ill Comparison of Nickel content of -80 mesh soil fraction and —9+80 mesh fraction. 100 foot sample spacing. Line 5 Nickel p.p.m. .948Q me -80 mesh 0 0 tO 20 0 0 0 10 0 0 300 250 300 400 500 300 75 100 350 400 100 150 70 150 400 700 75 2795 0 1865 1000 900 800 Copper 700 600 S z p400 / / Nickel 01 300 4, 200 0' , 100 0 +9 +32 +80 +150 +200 -.200 Nesh Soil Fraction Fig. 4 — Cu and Ni Distribution. Average of 4 samples, 5 tests per soil fraction for each sample. (Each point represents 20 determinations.) 82 �The notable feature is that there is an increase of metal content with decreasing soil size in the coarser materials, but for the —80 mesh and finer fractions there is no increase, but rather a roughly equivalent metal content. The only exception to the above trend was one sample of "rubble—like" material consisting of more than 50% of +32 mesh size. In this case the +9 mesh material tested substantially higher than the —9+32 size. The normal trend applied for the fractions smaller than 32 mesh. Certain general conclusions which may be drawn from the above tests are: 1. —9 mesh material would be satisfactory for most field work but samples of only —80 mesh material will give more reliable results. 2. Use of —80 mesh soil is to be preferred where anomalies of small magnitude might be expected. 3. The levelling off of metal content in the sizes smaller than —80 mesh shows that nothing is gained by any attempt to screen to a size finer than 80 mesh. 4. There is no general distribution relationship between metal content and available surface area of the finer particles of soil. This is significant in any consideration of the processes by which trace elements move and are fixed in soils. 5. Tests of distribution of metal in various soil sizes should be carried out as a preliminary guide in new sampling areas. A pertinent question is whether the 0.1 gms. of soil used in a test is representative of the several grams of soil in the field sample? Or, stating the problem another way, "Is it necessary to use any special methods of mixing to insure that the test portion is representative of the whole sample?" Repeat tests show that sample results can be reproduced within the limits of accuracy of the method without any formal mixing other than that inherent in screening. The accuracy is sufficiently high so that there appears to be no danger of not detecting an anomalous metal content through failure to mix the samples formally. In addition, the test sample is as representative of the field sample as the field sample is of its area of influence. Hawkes and Lakin (5, p. 291) compared ground and quartered bulk samples of 500 gms. with grab samples of 5 gms. and concluded that "there is no significant loss in accuracy of data by substituting grab samples for bulk samples" Scooping of Samples All samples tested in this investigation to date have been carefully weighed on an analytical balance. However, a volumetric scoop designed to provide about 0.1 gms. of soil adds to the speed and ease of field methods for testing soils. Use of a scoop is recommended by several authors and has been found to give satisfactory Held results. The variation in soil sample weight when a scoop is used rather than a balance has been considered by Huff (6, p 531). Huff found that the error caused by scooping ranges from 3 to 11 per cent and averages about 7 per cent in any one area. Table 4 is a comparison of scoop weights for soil samples from the Ely district. The variation of weight for scoops of a particular soil size is small and is well within the accuracy of the test method. However, there are significant weight differences between equal volumes of different soil fractions from the same sample, and also between the same soil fractions from separate areas. Although the study is not comprehensive the results do indicate that scooping samples can lead to 83 �TABLE 4 Weight, in Grams, of Sail Sample Fractions Measured by Using a Valumetric Scaap Na. of Mesh Samples jStd. Deviation Weight (grams) Max. 74in. 2 x Std. Deviation Mean Grams 3T Grams 2.3 0.006 5 % 4.6 -9 40 0.138 0.123 0.130 0.003 -9-1-80 40 .132 .115 .125 .005 4 .010 8 -80 40 .109 .095 .101 .005 5 .010 10 —9 40 0.169 0.145 0.158 0.006 3.8 0.012 7.6 —9-4-80 40 .151 .127 .138 .007 5.1 .014 10.2 -80 40 .130 .114 .120 .004 3.3 .008 6.6 2 rather large variatians in weight af sample with cansequent variations in camputed metal cantent. If a scaap is used far sample measurement ane shauld check the mean weight af the soil size fractian selected far the different sail types encauntered. Then if necessary a carrectian factar can be applied ta the camputed results. Anamalous metal cantents are aften sa much greater than backgraund content that a correction factor for scoop weights usually can be ignored in field work. However, where the anomalous content may be of small magnitude the possible error due to using a volumetric scoop could be significant. References 1. Bischoff, C. T., Testing for Copper and Zinc in Canadian Glacial Soils. T.P. 36761, Trans. A.I.M.E., ppS7-o1, 1954. 2. Britton, H. T. S., Hydrogen Ions. Chapman and Hall, Ltd., London, p 79, 1942. 3. Grosh, Pennington, Wasson and Cooke, Investigation of Copper—Nickel Mineralization in Kawishiwi River Area, Lake County, Minn., U.S. Bureau of Mines R.I. 5177, 1955. 4. Grout, F. F., The Lopolith, an igneous form exemplified by the Duluth gabbro, Am. Jour. of Sci. 46, pp 516—522, 1918. 5. iRvkes, H. E. and Lakin, H. W., Vestigial Zinc in Surface Residuum Associated with Primary Zinc Ore in East Tennessee. Econ. Geol. Vol 44, pp 286—295. 1949. 6. Huff, L. C., A Sensitive Field Test for Detecting Heavy Metals in Soil or Sediment. Econ. Geol., Vol. 46, pp 524-540, 1951. 7. Leach, P., Simple Chemical Tests to Aid Prospectors. Eng. and Mm. Jour., Vol. 148, No. 10, p 79, 1947. 84 �8. Lovering, 1. S., Huff, L. C., and Almond, H., Dispersion of Copper From the San Manuel Copper Deposit, Pinal County, Arizona. Econ. Geol. Vol. 45, pp 493-514, 1950. 9. Salmi, R., Prospecting for Bog—covered Ore by Means of Peat Investigations. Bull. De La Commission Geologique de Finlande, No. 169, 1955. 10. Schwartz, G. M. and Davidson, D. M., Geologic Setting of the Copper—Nickel Prospect in the Duluth Gabbro near Ely, Minnesota. T.P. 33461, Trans. A.I.M.E., pp 699—702, 1952. 11. Schwartz, G. M. and Harris, J. M., Notes on Field Work in the Copper—Nickel Prospect Area, Lake County, Minnesota. Minn. Geol. Surv. Summary Report No. 6, 1952. 12. Sergeev, E. A., Geochemical Method of Prospecting for Ore Deposits. Selected Russian Papers on Geochemical Prospecting for Ores. Translated by V. P. Sokoloff and H. E. Hawkes, U. S. Geological Survey, p 46, 1950. 13. Stevens, R. E. and Lakin, H. W., The chromograph, a New Analytical Tool for Laboratory and Field Use. U. S. Geological Survey Circ. 63, 1949. 85 �TRENDS IN GEOCHEMICAL EXPLORATION by H. E. Hawkes The art of mineral exploration is at the present time passing through a period of revolutionary development. In the brief ten years since the war, radically new techniques of appraising ground for the possibilities of buried ore deposits have not only been perfected but have demonstrated their effectiveness by contributing to the actual discovery of new deposits. Whereas in the past, mineral discovery almost invariably started with the work of the independent and often untrained prospector, the new methods now available make it possible for large, well-capitalized exploration companies to carry out their own programs of primary exploration. The result has been an acceleration in discovery rate comparable with the increase in discovery of petroleum reserves with the development of advanced geophysical methods in the two decades before the war. Two outstanding features characterize the coming—of—age of mineral exploration techniques. The most spectacular of these is the perfection of technical methods of mineral reconnaissance of large tracts of unexplored ground by observations from aircraft. The airborne magnetometer, first of the low—unit—cost reconnaissance methods, has been credited with the discovery of a substantial number of our new deposits of magnetic iron ore. Airborne radiometric techniques have been applied widely in exploration for uranium. More recently, airborne electromagnetic surveys have been effectively used in detecting electrical conductors, a few of which already have led to the discovery of large deposits of basemetal sulfides. Air photographs are now generally used as a guide in interpreting regional geologic structures that may make favorable conditions for the emplacement of ores. The outstanding characteristic of all airborne surveys is extremely low cost per unit area, even though the over—all cost of equipment and operation may seem higher than that of the more conventional methods. The other new development in mineral exploration is the diversify of exploration techniques that is now commonly brought to bear on each individual problem. Whereas conventional exploration has been guided primarily by outcrop search and geologic study, followed immediately by drilling, the tendency now is for independent appraisals of a tract of ground by several or many methods — geological, geophysical and geochemical — and the synthesis of the indications from all methods in the interpretation of the economic possibilities. Geochemical methods of mineral exploration are playing an important part in the evolution of our mineral exploration techniques. The purpose of this paper is to point out the kinds of contributions that can be made by geochemical techniques to exploration with special emphasis on application in the glaciated terranes of the Canadian Shield. A "geochemical" method of mineral exploration is a method based on mapping variation in the chemical composition of some naturally occurring material, and the interpretation of the resulting chemical pattern in terms of possible mineralization in the vicinity. The chemical elements measured are most commonly the ore metals themselves, present usually only in trace amounts; the material sampled may be rock soil, stream sediment or water, glacial deposits, or vegetation. 86 �Geochemical Reconnaissance Probably the oldest method of locating bedrock ore, other than by simple outcrop search, is the panning of stream gravels for resistant heavy minerals such as gold, and the tracing of the trail of increasing values upstream to the bedrock source. More recently the waters of streams have been sampled and analyzed for traces of metals as a method of determining the existence of metalliferous deposits upstream. A similar pattern can be traced by sampling sediments collected from stream channels for traces of "exchangeable" metal (metal that is in equilibrium with the water, and hence that can be dissolved in weak chemical reagents). In all these methods, one sample, properly chosen and properly analyzed, either mineralogically or chemically, will tell the prospector how much of a chance he has of finding an orebody in the area drained by the stream. These potentially are methods of mineral reconnaissance of very considerable power. Within the last three years, geochemical reconnaissance based on determinations of the exchangeable "heavy metal' (mainly zinc) content of stream sediments has been applied on a large scale to exploration in New Brunswick and the Gasps Peninsula of Quebec. This method has, or soon will be, described in detail H the literature (Bloom, 1955; Hawkes and Bloom, 1955 and in press). The present discussion, therefore, will be limited to a brief summary of the principles and operation of the method. Sampling cons!sts of collecting a number of small samples of stream sediment at sites selected on the basis of optimum coverage. Experience has shown that the chances of missing an important zinc— bearing deposit is relatively slight if samples are taken within two miles downstream from the deposit. Common practice is to collect four samples at each site, two from the sedimentary material in the active channel of the stream, and two from the flood plain within a few feet of the active channel. Samples should be collected in non—contaminating containers, such as aluminum tins or waterproof envelopes, and brought back to field headquarters for analysis. One or two ounces of sample is ordinarily adequate. Samples are prepared for analysis by drying and sieving to minus 80 mesh, and discarding the coarse fraction that does not pass through the sieve. Analysis is by a technique described by Bloom (1955), in which a standard volume of the sample is shaken with a cold aqueous solution of ammonium citrate to which is added a solution of the reagent dithizone in xylene or toluene. Exchangeable zinc, and to a lesser extent lead and copper, in the sample is dissolved in the aqueous citrate solution, and then reacts with the dithizone to give a color change that is quantitatively proportional to the amount of metal extracted. The xylene solution of zinc—dithizone is a brilliant red, in strong contrast to the green of the original dithizone solution. Where insufficient zinc is present to react with all the dithizone available, the resulting color is a mixture of green and red, the hue of which depends on the relative amounts of unreacted dithizone and the zinc—dithizone complex. By selecting one of these intermediate colors, such as gray, for a standard endpoint, it is possible to determine the quantity of zinc extracted from the sample by adding barely enough dithizone solution to the system to reach the gray endpoint, and then recording the total volume of dithizone solution added. This test requires only very simple equipment that can, if desired, be packed as a compact kit for field use. lnterpretation of the data is facilitated by plotting the values for exchangeable metal directly on a posting map. In the absence of significant concentrations of metallic mineralization in the drainage basin above a sample site, the sample will ordinarily contain less than 4 parts per million of exchangeable metal. Samples containing over 10 ppm exchangeable metal may be considered a promising 87 �indication, depending on the size of the stream and the general geologic environment. containing over 40 ppm are strongly anomalous. Samples Follow—up of the most promising indications is carried out most conveniently by carrying a portable chemical test kit, and making the tests on the spot without drying or sieving. The original sample site should be revisited, and freshly collected sediment tested again to make sure that the high values were not due to contamination or to a local source of metal of no significance. Then, the trail of increasing metal values should be followed upstream to determine as far as possible the source area. Sediment analysis for exchangeable metals apparently outlines the same geochemical patterns as water analysis. It has distinct advantages over the water analysis in that the analytical technique is much easier and more reliable, the metal content does not fluctuate with the weather, dry stream beds can be sampled, and samples can be stored for future reference. Both methods, of course, have many limitations. All they can tell is that an unusually rich source of metal exists in the area upstream or upslope from an anomalous metal indication in the stream. They rarely lead to the exact location of the source, which must be determined by some other method. They also do not tell whether the source is a high grade deposit, or a broad zone of disseminated metal of no economic value. They cannot obtain a response from a deposit that is not undergoing active oxidation and leaching, such as might occur beneath a lake or swamp. However, even though these methods may miss some deposits, and give strong indications from disseminations of no value, they provide the prospector with extremely valuable ore guides at a very low cost per area covered. Geochemical Methods in an Integrated Exploration Program Although geochemical reconnaissance has certain serious shortcomings and ambiguities, the data of airborne magnetic and electromagnetic surveys also are fraughtwith uncertainties in interpretation. Geological mapping, furthermore, can only point out areas where, by analogy with areas of known mineralization, ore ought to occur. In detailed work in areas of glacial cover, geochemical soil anomalies are commonly associated with bedrock ore; unfortunately, the anomalies are many times displaced for considerable distances downslope or down-glacier from the suboutcrop of the ore. Still more unfortunately, strong geochemical soil anomalies have been found and mapped in areas of no important mineralization, where the source is weakly disseminated metal scattered through a large volume of rock. Geophysical patterns in detailed work can be equally ambiguous, though in different ways. Geology again can only tell where the ore ought to be, not where it Is. Because of this complex of uncertainties, it has become common practice in Canadian exploration work to prepare a series of maps as transparent overlays, each one of which shows the targets indicated by one particular method. Then the localities where the greatest number of target areas overlap is considered for more detailed exploration. The purpose of the entire schedule is the narrowing down of target areas for the final and most expensive phase of exploration, the diamond drilling. The cost of one wasted drill hole could often pay for a very considerable amount of preliminary reconnaissance or detailed exploration work. Mention might be made of a few actual examples of such integrated exploration programs in the Bathurst District of New Brunswick: (I) Airborne electromagnetic surveys were used for primary reconnaissance; electromagnetic 88 �anomalies were checked on the ground by geochemical soil surveys; localities where both methods showed anomalies were drilled. (2) Primary reconnaissance was by airborne electromagnetic surveys; anomalies were checked on the ground by both geochemical soil surveys and gravity surveys; where both ground methods showed anomalies, the localities were drilled. (3) Primary reconnaissance was by geochemical stream sediment analysis; anomalous wreas were detailed with geochemical soil surveys and ground electromagnetic surveys; localities showing both electromagnetic and geochemical soil anomalies were drilled. (4) Areas for airborne electromagnetic surveys were selected on the basis of regional geochemical patterns indicated by stream sediment surveys; anomalies were checked on the ground by geophysical methods. Geological studies accompanied all of the above programs. It should be mentioned that a number of other exploration schedules have been successfully applied in the Bathurst District that did not include the use of geochemical methods. Future Trends in Geochemical Exploration Geochemical methods of exploration, like geophysical methods, are at the present time going through a period of rapid development in which new or improved methods are continually being developed and successfully applied. At the moment, there is no sign that this sharp upward trend is starting to level off. However, it is still possible to make a few guesses as to what the future may hold in store. There is every reason to suppose that methods of geochemical reconnaissance based on analysis of stream water or sediment for metals other than zinc can be developed. Particular mention might be made of copper, molybdenum, and uranium as being particularly hopeful. The sampling and analysis of sediments from the bottom of fresh—water lakes shows promise as a means of locating sources of metal in the surrounding country; this would be particularly attractive in the Canadian Shield where aircraft can land on lakes, and samples can be taken without beaching the plane. Studies of the fine-grained fraction of glacial till holds some promise as a method of appraising the possibility of mineralization up—glacier from the sample site. Additional experimental work on the movement of metals from a source in the bedrock up into transported cover such as glacial moraine may lead to more reliable interpretation of geochemical soil anomalies in glaciated terrane. The most important trend in geochemical exploration is a human one. More and more geologists are becoming familiar with geochemical methods of ore finding, and are learning what these methods can and cannot do. More than ever before, exploration geologists are able to view these new techniques in their proper perspective with respect to the other available tools, and can integrate them into well-balanced exploration schedules. References Bloom, Harold: A Field Method for the Determination of Citrate—soluble Heavy Metals in Soil and Alluvium: Econ. Geology, vol. 50, p. 533, 1955. Hawkes, H.E., and Bloom, Harold: Geologic Application of a Test for Citrate-soluble Metals in Alluvium; Science, vol. 122, No. 3158, p. 77, 1955. 89 �Hawkes, H. E., and Bloom, Harold: Heavy Metals in Stream Sediment as an Exploration Guide; Mining Engineering. (In press.) Discussion Dr. J. W. Gruner (University of Minnesota): Are there any interfering ions in this ion—exchange work? Dr. Hawkes: In the first place, it is well to remember that what you measure with the Bloom Test is the group ofelements thatreactwith the reagent, dithizone. The principal metal is zinc, but the group also includes copper, lead, cobalt, mercury, and platinum, etc. As for interferences, you run across samples on which the method will not work and where you never know exactly why. Such effects can result from excesses of iron and manganese which are known to interfere with the dithizone reaction. Mr. M. P. Walle (Minnesota Department of Convervation): Has any geobotanical work been done in New Brunswick? Dr. Hawkes: I thnk that only a very small amount of experimental geobotanical work has been done in New Brunswick. The reason that the geobotanical method has not been more widely used is that you can usually find the same patterns by soil sampling, and with much less effort than you can with plant sampling. Mr. Neil B. Ivory (University of Minnesota): Would geochemical methods be useful for detecting deposits under the lakes by dispersion of metals into the lake—bottom sediments or water? Dr. Hawkes: This question opens up a field that we know very little about. On the surface of it, yu would say "No", but yet the fact is that you do find strong anomalies in some lakes that must be due to mineralization lying beneath the lake—bottom sediments. There are two possible ways that this could come about: one is that metal—rich glacial material derived from the pre—glacial outcrop, is deposited around the lake, then leached by modern ground water and the extracted metal deposited in the lake bottom; the other explanation is that perhaps solution and migration actually do occur in the reducing environment under the lake even though we can visualize no mechanism whereby this could take place. That is not answering your question. I am sorry, I wish I could because I would like to know the answer myself. Dr. W. S. White (U. S. Geological Survey): What has been done with respect to water flowing into swamps and water flowing out of swamps? Dr. Hawkes: Undoubtedly swamps do have an effect similar to lakes in precipitating metal. This effect, however, is not as universal or striking as you would expect. Ordinarily, metal—rich waters will retain most of the metal content on their way through a swamp. You cannot say the same of lakes; you do find strong anomalies in waters going into the lakes, that are absent in the water draining the same lakes. My hunch is that the effect in the lakes is due to plankton that scavenge the metal and then die and collect at the bottom; you do not get this condition in swamp waters. Water that filters through the muck of swamps would at first undergo a change in composition but in the course of time the metal content of the muck would come up to an equilbrium value, and then nothing further would happen. One limnologist some years ago published an account of the variation in copper in a glacial lake in Connecticut: he found that the copper content was distributed in three ways — 90 �one was ionic copper, another copper in living organisms (plankton), and the third was copper in dead organic material. The limnologists have technical names for all of these. Depending upon the time of year, the weather, the sunshine, and the composition of water entering the lake, the ratios between these three kinds of copper varied tremendously. The content of ionic copper in the lake was much more a measure of the season than of the copper content of waters entering the lake. Incidentally, he found that the ionic copper content of the inlets went up by a factor of 10 in the middle faIl when the leaves were rotting. Dr. Gruner: Has any work been done on peat with respect to the concentration of heavy metals? Dr. Hawkes: Yes, there has. Empirical work has shown that peat does absorb just about every metal. The agricultural people are also concerned about this same problem as muck farms are very valuable for raising certain kinds of produce. While I can say that a lot has been done, I would not dare try to summarize it here. In general, muck serves as a trap for trace metals. There was one muck farm in New York State adjoining a zinc—bearing Silurian dolomite formation; the zinc leached from the surrounding rocks accumulated in the muck until in spots the dry weight of the muck was as much as 16% zinc oxide; some of the ashed samples contained nearly 100% zinc oxide. In reply to a question from the floor I would say that "heavy metals" refers to a group of minor elements that react with the reagent dithizone. This reagent is most sensitive for zinc which is also the metal that is most likely to be in the stream sediment in major quantities. In our work the only other metals that were present in sufficient quantities to give a positive response were copper and lead; excesses of copper over zinc can be distinguished by the different color of copper—dithizone complex. I am sure you realize that in most ore deposits, metals go together in characteristic groups. Thus if you have a nickel deposit you will probably find copper; if you have a silver deposit you will probably find lead and zinc. Hence even with a method that measures only copper, lead and zinc you can get an indication of the majority of ore types. There are, of course, a good many you may not be able to detect, as for example high—grade silver deposits, tungsten, columbium, tin, etc. Dr. Yardley: I wish to call attention to a paper on "Prospecting for Bog Covered Ore by Means of Peat Investigations" by Dr. Martti Salmi of Finlandt It presents some very interesting data in connection with peat and muck and the effect of humic acid on their fixing powers. Trace elements in these organic materials are multilplied by 7, 8 and as high as 20 times that of clay minerals; they are a very powerful fixative agent. We have done a little work in northern Minnesota on this and we do find anomalies at a depth of 3 or 4 feet, that is considering the vertical profile. The shape of these apparently reflects whether it is essentially a transported anomaly or a non—transported anomaly. That work has not gone very far yet, but there is a little information on these peats. Dr. Gruner: Dr. Yardley mentioned humic acid. Now there is some information on humic acid available from investigations that are being conducted by the Chemical Engineering Department of the University of Minnesota. I got hold of some of it the other day and I thought I would try to see whether I could absorb uranium with this pure stuff because peat absorbs uranium very rapidly. got a negative result with humic acid. I Dr. Dutton: One phase of geochemical prospecting that Dr. Hawkes did not mention is in drill holes. Would you tell us something about it, Dr. Hawkes? * Reference 9, p. 85. 91 �Dr. Hawkes: Several of the oil companies, one in particular that I know of, are using geochemical logs for stratigraphic correlations of their holes. They find that by analyzing for particular elements (1 am not sure which ones they are, but I think there are four that have been found useful) and plotting the values on vertical sections, they can get very good drill hole correlations just as you do with electric logs, gamma ray logs or other types of geophysical logs. They take very large numbers of samples and feed them through an instrument known as a quantometer or automatic spectrograph. The samples are poured in at one end, and the analytical data comes out on punched tape at the other end. Something like this might be helpful in the Iron Ranges of Lake Superior where you want to correlate, or even find out whether you have, a stratigraphic section in the sequence. Some work of this kind has, in fact, been done on titanium. Dr. Dutton: Dr. Hawkes refers to some work in the Cuyuna district in Minnesota. In this area the iron formation, which is primarily interbedded siderite and chert, or silicate and chert, lies between slates and siltstones. The question arose as to methods for distinguishing sediments that were younger than iron formation from those older than iron formation. In a bulletin of the Minnesota Geological Survey, resulting from a cooperative investigation of the Cuyuna by the Federal and the State surveys, several of 12 or 15 chemical analyses have an exceptionally high content of TiC2 for sediments; some of these analyses ran as high as 2%. The samples with high Ti02 were in what was presumed, on the basis of the mapping done in the mines, to be hanging—wall materials. Dr. M. Fleischer of the Geochemical and Petrology Branch in Washington was asked whether or not it was likely that the titanium content would be sufficiently persistent and sufficiently characteristic that it could be used for stratigraphic purposes. He replied that he did not know actually, but it so happened that some of the chemists in the Branch had just perfected a field test for titanium and they were interested in trying it. Two chemists came to the Cuyuna district and in three days made 75 determinations. The determinations can be made in 10 minutes from the time the sample is selected and the cost is 10 cents. In three days they were able to show that there was a very diagnostic split in the titania values for the iron formation, for the rocks below the iron formation, and the other rocks above. The iron formation was the lowest of all three — less than a 1/2%. The rocks below the iron formation were approximately 1 to 1 1/2%, and the rocks above the iron formation 2% or more than 2%. This has been a most useful tool in working in the Cuyuna district inasmuch as within the vicinity of the mines, the only exposures of bedrock are in the pits themselves. There has been much drilling but unfortunately most of it has been churn drilling so only cuttings are generally available. Mr. R. G. Schmidt of the U. S. Geological Survey has run thousands of titania determinations on cuttings and it has been a tremendous help to him in tracing out the stratigraphic sequence in areas between mines and from that the structure in the Cuyuna district. The general method of this field test for titanium was published in Economic Geology*. I think that other things of a similar nature might very well be used. The matter of trace elements for stratigraphic purposes is a tool of which as yet we do not recognize the full potentialities and it is simply a matter of trying to find techniques which are sufficiently perfected that they can be used readily in the field. An offshot of this titanium test came from one of the Oliver Mining Company's geologists and concerned the rapid determination of iron content in a sample. In the titantum test a reagent is added to put the iron into solution so that it does not mask the color by which the amount of Ti02 is determined. In a field test for iron the general procedure is similar, but this decolorizing reagent is omitted. The sample solution is diluted a proper amount in accordance with having calibrated a photographic light meter with chemically analyzed samples. The photographic light *Shapiro, Leonard, and Brannock, W. W.: A Field Method for the Determination of Titanium in Rocks, Econ. Geol. Vol. 48, No. 4, pp. 282-287, 1953. 92 �meter is then used to determine the amount of iron in the digested sample at the same dilution. is a quick, easy method for field determination of iron. A member: How accurate is that? Dr. Dutton: I would be inclined to say within W% accuracy but I am not sure. 93 This �APPLIED PHOTOGEOLOGY by W. Warren Longley (Ira nscription) In the beginning 1 should mention that Aero Service Corporation, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, is sponsoring this talk, and affiliates of that company, Knox, Bergman and Shearer of Denver, Colorado, have assisted me in preparing some of my material. I wish to discuss the general field of Photogrammetry and procedure followed in the Denver office in interpreting photographs. Most people know the value of aerial photographs for geological purposes, but few are familiar with the detailed procedures from the photography through to the final geological report. 1 regard it as a serious matter that so few geologists recognize what can be accomplished in Photogeology. find this is true not only with the general public, but with my associates in the field of Geology as well; and it is particularly annoying that at times 1 am not able to convert my own students who are studying Photogeology. shall, therefore, mention some facts in order that you may recognize the many uses of aerial photographs, and then 1 want to discuss in detail the problems of photo-interpretation in the Canadian Shield. It should be pointed out that geological interpretation of aerial photographs in the Canadian Shield, including western Upper Michigan, is quite different from that in most sections of the oil areas of this country. I 1 In regard to photogrammetry, all branches of interpretation depend on the quality and character of the initial photographs, and for that reason we must have good coverage and good photos in our initial work. Insofar as the historical development of photography in geology is concerned, 1 believe that some of the early efforts were made in the Canadian Rockies where horizontal photographs were taken from one mountain peak to another and in that way some aid was given to geological mapping. As time progressed we find that our first true aerial photographs were taken during World War 1. Following that, the equipment and techniques developed during World War 1 were applied, and in the late twenties and early thirties extensive use was made of oblique photos. Oblique photos can still be used to a certain extent in aiding geological investigations, but they do not have the advantage of the verticals. My first work with vertical aerial photographs was in 1936. From that time on the quality of the photographs and the techniques have been improving. I should mention here that Aero Service Corporation has been among the pioneers in the field of aerial photography and photogrammetry. might make here a distinction usually recognized by geologists: photogrammetry is primarily the compilation of various kinds of maps as contrasted to geological interpretaion. Most geologists do not like the tedious work of photogrammetry — they prefer having maps prepared for them and then proceeding to the geological study. Aero Service Corporation works primarily in the photography and photogrammetry fields. In their organization they now employ over 800 people and conduct project in photogrammetry and photogeology throughout the free world. 1 94 �In photogramrnetry, there are several problems to be considered and one of most importance is that the ohotogaphs must beadaptedto the lob in mind. There are many varieties of photography, of lenses, cameras, and final pictures, and in all of these one cannot do a proper lob unless the proper photographs are available. For instance, if you want to make a planimetric map of a city, photographs taken with a long focal—length lens at considerable height would be most satisfactory. If you want to work on geological interpretation and wish vertical control, then you need photographs taken with a short local-length lens. The lens most frequently used in this country has a focal— length of six inches. The focal—length of the lens has an influence on the pictures, and one should know what lens is best for a particular job. Re con na i ssa n c e In general reconnaissance work one wants a rapid coverage of the ground. Photography will be used in studying only major ground features. For such general reconnaissance there are several things we can do, one of which is to take vertical photographs on a scale of about one to 60,000 or one to 70,000. Taking vertical photos at that scale means that the airplane must be fairly high. When I first started work in photography and photo—interpretation, such photographs would not have been possible because the planes could not fly high enough. Another thing one can now do for this general reconnaissance coverage is to use a so—called tn—met camera system in which three photographs are taken simultaneously — left, right, and along the axis of flight. In that way it is possible to get a wide coverage in a single flight that is quite satisfactory for reconnaissance work. Another system being used for a wide coverage is low oblique. This is at an angle of about 120 that is rectified to the vertical plane for study. Thus, in general reconnaissance there are several choices— the vertical photographs, of a scale around 60,000 or 70,000, the tn—met system, or the low obliques. Detailed Reconnaissance In so—called detailed reconnaissance a different problem presents itself. Detailed reconnaissance yields excellent photographs for geological study. In this work a common practice is to employ scales of around one to 20,000, possibly one to 40,000, or occasionally around one to 15,000. One to 15,000 represents roughly 4 inches to the mile. 0n a.photo of this scale, using a magnifying stereoscope, one should be able to see a log across a creek and to pick out individual trees and objects of that kind. Using a scale of one to 40,000, only the major structural features will appear. The photo—interpreter, therefore, must know the general situation, must know his objective, and know precisely what scales are most adaptable. Of course, it is the problem of the photo—expert to appraise any land area or any particular geological region and to advise what photographs will do the best lob toward the desired objective. Detailed reconnaissance can also be done by enlarging photos, such as one to 60,000, but direct photographs are much better. Detailed Surface Mapping Now we come to another stage — that of detailed surface mapping. Detailed surface mapping is used in many engineering projects and also around a mine or mining prolect. For instance, in mapping for petroleum, usually the project will deal with hundreds of square miles. In mine mapping it might be a matter of a few square miles, and for these we might be using scales down to one to 1,000. The problem involved here, with photographs on a scale of one to 1,000, is that the vertical control will require the use of some of the more complicated photogrammetric devices, such as the 95 �Kelsh Plotter, Multiplex, Autograph, or Planograph, but with suitable photographs and the proper equipment one can get very detailed maps. Also, with stereoscopic study there are many features that the trained photo-interpreter can recognize. It must be realized, of course, that photographs do not solve all the problems of geology. Geological field work must accompany the photo interpretation in order to obtain the best results. That is to say, geological problems not solved in the photographs must be solved in the field, and that again leads to the objective of the job. There are many photographic interpretation projects in which the interpreter never leaves his office. The interpretation may be excellent, but one might say that for the best quality map the geologist should do detailed field checking. The photographic interpretation is merely a means whereby a much better final map will be produced at a fraction of the cost of ground mapping. Films Many new developments in the past few years have served as aids to photogrammetry. Panchromatic film is now being used which has a much greater latitude than film available a few years ago. Interpretation can be much more specific from this film, and I suspect we will find many improvements in film over the next few years. Infra—red is another film which has been used extensively in aerial photography in recent years. Infra-red film has some very decided advantages, particularly in forest survey work in some sections of the country. The primary advantage is where one wants to make a distinction between deciduous trees and conifers. If one wants to recognize species, infra—red is not as satisfactory as panchromatic film. I want to emphasize that because in some sections of Canada the ability to distinguish between deciduous and coniferous trees is very significant in interpreting geology, and a sharp contrast is obtained by using infra—red. Infra—red is also important when working in swamp areas, because the ground moisture is more apparent when photographed with infra—red film than with other films. The branch which 1 believe is presently receiving the greatest research attention is color photography. Color film for the usual 9" x 9" photograph is several times more expensive than panchromatic film. In a newer development, attention is focused on 55 millimeter film, and most of you are familiar enough with color to know that because of the "grain" one can use much smaller negatives of color than of black and white for the same final quality of picture. Interest is generated here, for in studying many geological features with color, detail obtained cannot be matched by black-and-white photography. I believe, therefore, that color photography in Geology has a great future. Some places where color differentiation may have a particular advantage are around metal deposits, particularly those of hydrothermal origin. It might be said on theoretical grounds that there should be extensive rock alteration around hydrothermal deposits. An increase in certain metal constituents in the soil should be reflected in the vegetation. It is believed that the different soil conditions and different metal constituents have an influence on vegetation. It can be demonstrated that certain species oF vegetation do absorb greater amounts of certain metals than other species. An area of primary research now is related to the effect of unusual soil on the initiation of the growing season and on early or late ripening. Another very significant factor is autumn coloration. If any great strides along these lines are to be made, it must be recognized that photography must be done at very specific seasons, and we hope that we can make some very significant contributions along this line. 96 �Control Also to be considered is the control of aerial photography. Any one using vertical pictures taken many years ago undoubtedly has been annoyed by flight strips going apart and coming together and by all kinds of gaps and irregularities. Through the application of radar principles we have developed procedures whereby it is possible to control a flight line. In trackless country a flight line can be laid out by radar which the airplane can follow specifically to get complete coverage and avoid the weaving for which the pilot cannot be blamed. Adding some shoran principles, we can determine the instantaneous position of the airplane, and I believe at the present time with some of our procedures we can spot our airplane position within 25 feet, and the position of the photograph center within 75 feet. Thus, when necessary, not only can we fly very straight parallel lines, but we can determine the precise relative position of the individual photos. With this principle we have tremendous potentialities for precise mapping which, of course, can be used directly with our geological work. Magnetics In connection with geological interpretation, we have new additions in other branches. The airborne magnetometer has contributed very greatly to photo interpretation, and new electromagnetic airborne equipment promises a revolution in magnetic work. Involved with the electro—magnetic work is a wide range of possible applications. This airborne instrument work is lust now in its infancy, and I am sure that over the next few years we are going to find tremendous applications of it as an assistance in photo interpretation. Commercial Photogeological Evaluation Methods Although various applications of photogeologic evaluation are used in ground water geology, hard rock geology, soil analysis and general geology, the major percentage of photogeological evaluation conducted today is directed towards oil exploration. The following discussion, therefore, focuses upon the principal method used today in compilation of data from the stereoscopic examination of air photographs for purposes of oil exploration. Consulting geological firms that specialize in photogeological evaluation are not equipped to compile air photograph coverage. They depend upon commercial and governmental agencies such as Aero Service Corporation and the Commodity Stabilization Service as a source for air photograph coverage. These agencies also offer mosaic coverage. Initial Procedures A three—fold operation initiates a photogeologic evaluation: Geological research, indexing and filing, and base—map construction. Geological research is conducted throughout the project area. This research is aimed towards the compilation of all geological data available from the literature both as regards structural geology and stratigraphy. Inasmuch as the entire geological evaluation must be based upon criteria observable on air photographs, any aid in the way of published field data facilitates the photogeological evaluation. While research is being conducted, the air photographs, mosaics and other materials used in the analysis must be properly indexed and filed. This routine task is important for the smooth operation of a photogeological evaluallon. The third 97 �process, initiated at the inception of a project, is the construction of base maps and accrual of control data for subsequent use in the drafting processes intimate to the final photogeological map compilation. If aerial mosaics are not available from either governmental or commercial agencies, the photo— geological firm must be prepared to construct mosaics. Mosaic construction, initiated prior to the geologic interpretation of air photographs, must be completed prior to geological evaluation so that the photos used for mosaic construction can also be used for geological interpretation. Photogeologica I Evaluation Upon conclusion of research, indexing and filing, the photogeological interpretation of the air photos is commenced. This geological study, the most important phase of photogeological evaluation, consumes a majority of the total time expended. In an area of considerable size the photogeological evaluation proceeds on 15' quadrangle increments. Each IS' quadrangle is assigned to a geologist for photo interpretation. After the geologist annotates every other air photograph and ties the photogeological interpretations within flight lines as well as between flight lines, the annotated photographs are submitted to a second geologist who studies the area to ascertain validity of the initial geological interpretation. At the termination of this geological evaluation, all of the final map data, except for the land network and drainage, are shown on the air photographs. These data include structural geology, stratigraphy, and culture. Mosaic Posting The posting of mosaics is a common step between the annotation of the air photographs and compilation of geological data to a land network. Either semi—controlled or controlled mosaics at a scale of 1/48,000 or 1/63,360 are used in this process. Mosaic annotation is not made directly on the mosaic emulsion surface. Thin acetate overlays, affixed to each mosaic, receive the pencil annotations. This method has two direct advantages: one, the acetate has a uniform surface that is amenable to pencil annotation, and two, upon completion of the acetate annotation, a preliminary print can be made from the annotated acetate for an early examination of the photogeological results. Cartographic draftsmen transfer data shown on air photographs to aerial mosaics. At the completion of geological interpretation and mosaic annotation, a set of preliminary maps printed from the acetate overlays is available to the client. At this time a geological field check of the photo evaluation is conducted. The field check is not aimed towards making a field map out of the photogeological evaluation, but rather to confirm the stratigraphical identification of rock units as well as questionable structural interpretations. All field derived data are shown on the aerial photographs, the aerial mosaics and on the final maps. Drafting Procedures Where photogeological evaluations are used in oil exploration, it is mandatory to orient the geological data with respect to sections, townships and ranges. Hence, compilation of photogeo— logical maps is inseparably related to land network identification. During the geological evaluation of air photographs, section tine fences and roads as well as prominent cultural detail are identified, and these control data are recorded on the pictures and 98 �annotated on the mosaics. A fair density of control is, therefore, available for orienting geological patterns with respect to the land network when the drafting stage is approached. If control data are scarce, various literature is used to further control identification. This literature includes topographical sheets, General Land Office plats, County Highway planning maps, and township plats. If mosaic construction is of average quality, an imperial linen base map tracing is placed over the annotated mosaic, and geological data are traced on the imperial linen in ink. The control established prior to drafting is used to orient the base map over the annotated acetate. After the map is completely drafted in ink, a geological and cultural legend and title are affixed thereto. The final map is colored with printer's ink and prepared for submittal. A photogeological report that sets forth the salient features of the evaluation plus conclusions in regard to oil exploration is prepared to accompany the final photogeological map. The Canadian Shield I will now go on to the next stage, that of particular applications of photogeology to the Canadian Shield. In oil areas one usually finds erosion in a satisfactory stage; the most ideal circumstance for photogeology is the mature stage of the erosion cycle, together with arid conditions. In the Canadian Shield there is a general cover of glacial till. Combined with this in many areas is a heavy timber cover. Consequently, conditions for photo interpretation in the Canadian Shield are somewhat undesirable, but there are many things that can be done. Insofar as metal deposits are concerned, we recognize a relationship between these deposits and certain kinds of igneous rocks; we also recogifize the relationship between metal deposits and fault and shear zones. This means that if we can make some distinction between rock types and detect fault and shear zones, we have made a contribution toward the ultimate goal in hard—rock geology of finding a mineral deposit. Another situation I should mention is the great scarcity of outcrops. When we start our photo— interpretation, therefore, we have to rely on slight relief and on drainage. On the photographs the only things we have are color tones and textures. Using stereo photos, the primary features to be searched for are linear structures on the upland areas, linear segments in streams, and also any linear distribution of the vegetation, Steeply dipping faults and shear zones have a rather linear expression, while low—angle faults do not have a true linear expression and will be more curved. In regard to vegetation, it is possible by careful analysis to recognize whether there is a deep or thin covering of soil; a thin one is helpful at times. If all one can do is pick out shear zones, why not pick them out on the ground and save trouble? I might point out one example on which I worked: I knew that there should be a strong fault zone going through a certain area, and I knew within a mile where it should be. When I first went to the field, did not have air photographs, and I searched that place back and forth for over two weeks trying to pick up the fault zone which I knew should be there. On the ground I could not find it because of till, low relief, and timber. finally got the photographs and within five minutes of studying them I was able to pick up the fault zone; there could be no question of its location, and one could trace it through the area. The point that I want to bring I I out is that many features can be seen and traced on the photographs that cannot be seen on the ground. In Precambrian areas careful topographical representation is significant because slight changes can mean a change in rock type. Of prime importance in Precambrian mapping for mineral deposits is complete delineation of sedimentary belts and lava belts, and their relationship to the surrounding igneous masses; minor changes in topography may show up these characteristics. Of course, detailed topographical expression can be worked out only with instruments such as the Kelsch Plotter, but even form—line sketching or contour—line sketching can be a tremendous help in presenting geological 99 �features. Another significant feature is the drainage. In initial geological work a very detailed of all streams is helpful, because even though till covers the bed rock, the stream distribution and the stream pattern may be significant in interpretation. plotting In the Precambrian areas such as I have worked on, the field checking procedures are far more extensive than in ordinary petroleum work. This means that it is necessary to have a photo interpreter in the field with a crew for ground checking and with some liaison between field crew and office men, the latter working with instruments that could not be carried out in the field, e.g., the Kelsch Plotter. plotting devices that Itis proved its accuracy and simplicity and is regarded as one of the more significant of the instruments in geological work. The Kelsch Plotter is one of the years in recent In regard to Canadian work, in summary and conclusion, I can just say that it is a difficult lob; many geologists express the opinion that the details of geology cannot be worked out from photographs. It is my opinion that a tremendous contribution can be made by photography, and at the present time with the use of the airborne magnetometer, we have an additional field. Recently I was rechecking one of my field lobs after airborne magnetic work had been done, and in several places where I was still in doubt after detailed photo study and field checking, I was able to settle the problems without question from the results of the airborne magnetic work. By combining airborne magnetometer work with photography, we are in a position to get a rather detailed map —- one from which we can select the more favorable areas for subsequent exploration. I believe that the application of these procedures will result in geological information, I should say rather than maps, many times more complete than has been available without the photographs, particularly with the additional information from magnetometer work. I believe that the careful application of these procedures will lead us to some new mineral deposits more readily than we have been finding them. In regard to discovering mineral deposits, the previous speaker employed a rather difficult method of approach. The way I have suggested is equally difficult and, of course, it will be recognized that this work that I have taken up will be preliminary to such work as he has suggested in geochemistry. A significant factor in the discovery of a Gaspe', Quebec, copper deposit was the easy way that I suggest you all try. One geologist who used his head more than his feet walked in to see my chief at that time, Dr. I. W. Jones of the Quebec Department of Mines. He lust said, "I want a copper deposit, a large deposit of low—grade ore. Where is one?" Dr. Jones turned to him and told him where to go in Gaspe' to look for it, and there it was waiting. For many years Dr. Jones had done much mapping in that region. Most geologists thought that there were no mineral deposits of importance south of the St. Lawrence River in Quebec, and few had looked there; so when the gentleman came along, it gave Dr. Jones an opportunity to tell him where there really was some copper, and this information led to the discovery. I suggest, therefore, that you try that way first, and if it does not work, you will have to resort to photogeological work along with geochemical work. Discussion Dr. H. E. Hawkes, Jr. (Massachusetts Institute of Technology): In what way does photogrammetric work have an advantage over what the geologists have been trying to do otherwise for some time? Dr. Longley: I can give an example applying detailed photogrammetry to the geologic interpretation. Around 1946 I mapped the Bachelor Lake area in the Province of Quebec and showed the prospectors where the ore was. I did a rough contour job using form lines which helped considerably, but I was criticized because, as the detailed work around the mines showed, the elevations did not check with mine, and the engineers said my map was not accurate. It was not intended to be 100 �accurate. Had that same lob been done with a Kelsch Plotter or Multiplex, for example, it would have been a far superior map and would have been of far more help to the mining engineer in his operations and also helped in geological interpretations. Photogrammetry would have yielded a superior map to the one I was able to produce by the routine procedure of photo interpretation. For the geologist making up a map in critical areas, there would be considerable advantage to a detailed map made by the more precise mapping instruments. That was the only place I did run into severe criticism because my map was not good enough. To the people using the maps, the form lines were interpreted as contour lines and they proceeded accordingly. The general situation is that physiography is very important in the interpretation and presentation of geological features, Detailed mapping of surface features, such as can be done with a Kelsch Plotter or Multiplex, provides an excellent physiographic base to aid in the geological interpretation and presentation. 101 �MODERN TECHNIQUES OF PHOTOGEOLOGY AND PHOTOGRAMMETRY IN NATURAL RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT by John C. Bayless Aerial photography has come a long way since the days following World War I when Talbert Abrams helped pioneer aerial surveying and the cameraman hung over the side of the cockpit with a hand—held camera. Today, a military jet can photograph for reconnaissance purposes a 490-mile strip across the United States in less than four hours. But photography and photogrammetry for geologists and engineers are long past the reconnaissance stage and have become precise tools and desirable components of nearly all mapping operations. The aerial camera is the modern surveying instrument in the search for minerals and fuels to support our national economy. The principal value of aerial photographs is that detailed maps can be made from them. The photogrammetry of overlapping pairs of aerial photographs for quantitative data is so perfected that virtually no ground detail is too small to be measured and plotted. Applications in the fields of natural resource development, engineering planning, and area mapping are almost without limit. Photogrammetrically plotted maps are an important supplement to aerial photographs as contact prints because, in plotting, the radial distortion of scale and displacement of images on the photograph due to tilt or relief has been rectified to an orthographic projection. Thus accurate distances and directions can be measured. Topographic contours or control points for structural contours in absolute elevations are often plotted. For field work in densely vegetated areas or in areas with only faint geologic clues, an accurate topographic map has distinct advantages in locating oneself on the photograph and in the field. A geologic map in the full meaning is a geologic contact map with topographic contours. By relating contacts to contours a detailed interpretation is best accomplished. Reconnaissance contact maps are usually prepared by transferring the pattern of formational outcrops from individual photographs onto photographic mosaics. Geologic maps are compiled by photogrammetric plotting using stereoprojection equipment. The production of geologic maps by photogrammetric methods effects savings by reducing the number of supplemental control points which must be obtained by ground survey. In addition, when higher altitude photography is used, the increased area covered by each model, and the fewer models required with less time spent setting up and joining detail between models, result in savings in stereocompilation. From the viewpoint of the photogeologist, stereoprojection instruments partly solve the problems of relating or transferring geology to base maps. These instruments also combine stereoscopy in orthographic projection with the ability to make many measurements more easily than those he now makes on the ground. The trend today is for specialized teams of photogrammetrists to work with teams of photogeo logic 102 �interpreter specialists to produce geologic maps.* Such joint operations bring together the planes, laboratories, photogrammetric instruments, plotting techniques, field operations, reproduction processes and technical and professional staffs to provide an integrated interpretation and mapping program. This seems to be a reasonable approach to applying two specialized techniques to the expanding requirements for geologic mapping and the need for more detailed mapping. Planimetric maps can be constructed by geologists or engineers from aerial photographs using a system of radial—line plotting based on the usual surveying principles of intersection and resection. These methods are not very accurate and most photogrammetrists and engineers, who are concerned with precision mapping, consider them to be of reconnaissance value only. Greater accuracy is obtained by using stereoprojection plotters. The development of new first— order plotting instruments has hastened the adoption of Kelsh and Multiplex photogrammetric instruments by geologists by making available these less elaborate plotters which today generally have a supporting role in mapping for precise engineering projects. A Kelsh stereoscopic projection plott&r is shown in Figure I. Projectors are mounted above a plotting table in such a way that they exactly duplicate, on a reduced scale, the altitude, tilt, and position of the aerial camera at each picture station along the flight line. Working in a dark room the operator sees a three—dimensional image of the topography. By means of a small tracing table which can be moved freely on the plotting table, he traces the ground plan, controlled by known ground stations and corrected for tilt, radial distortion, and scale. Topographic contours can be plotted by using a floating dot in the stereoscopic image of the topography and some known ground elevation control points. The operator can set the dot correctly at elevation control points and, using the contour scale selected, move the dot and tracing table along the given contour, automatically tracing the line on the map. The principles of photogrammetric mapping also apply to structure contouring. If a topographic contour map is not to be prepared, the geologist selects on aerial photographs evenly spaced points along the formation or marker bed boundaries to serve as structure contour control points. He pin— pricks them through the photograph and identifies each on the back. Depending upon the scale, 15 to 30 points per square mile are selected. The photogrammetrist determines the elevations and sometimes the coordinates of these points so that the geologist can then contour the structure on a key bed. Such methods may be three to four times faster and also are more accurate than plane table mapping. In recent years a trend has developed toward the use of special photography flown to suit the needs of given projects. It is often cheaper to fly new photography correctly designed than to attempt to use older photography designed for some other purpose. The best opportunity to save money and time is at this point. For example, when Kelsh plotters are used with a 5X projection enlargement ratio, 1:60,000 photography can be plotted directly to 1:12, 000 map scale. Three to five 1:60,000 photographs cover the area of about thirty 1:20,000 photographs, the usual available scale. The use of this small—scale photography may save one—half to two—thirds the plotting time, some flight costs, and considerable ground control. On the other hand, there is also a demand for new large—scale photography. Stratigraphic and * Abrams Aerial Survey Corporation, Lansing, Michigan is affiliated with Doeringsfeld, Amuedo and Ivey, Denver, Colorado for integrated photogrammetry and photogeologic interpretation. 103 �Fig. I. Kelsh type stereoscopic projection plotter. Spatial model is created by projection of 9" x 9" glass diapositives made from aerial photographic negatives. Tracing of ground plan and measurement of altitude are accomplished by a tracing table which rolls over the manuscript with a pencil lead directly under the illuminated floating dot. geomorphic columnar sections may be better interpreted from stereoscopic study at large scales. Columns showing hard layers and ridge makers are particulary useful to photogeologists. As in the case of precise structure contouring, thicknesses of stratigraphic units are best measured by photo— grammetric techniques. A convenient medium for speeding the work of the interpreter to the user is a reproducible photo— mosaic on the same scale as the contact prints. A recent development is printing the mosaic image on the under surface of reproduction linen. While viewed over a light table, the geology can be transferred to the clear top surface using a stereoscope and the original annotated contact prints. If topographic and structure contour maps are also accomplished on linen at the same scale, these can be fitted and traced directly onto the mosaic. Topographic contours are usually traced on the back side over the mosaic while structure contours are drawn on the top side with other geology. The result is a photograph of the region and superimposed geology with contours which can be viewed separately or together. There is also the advantage of a durable drafting surface on which changes can be made without affecting the photographic image. 104 �The historical principles of interpretatiai of oiogic maps appty to the interpretation of aerial photcphs. In the training of a geologist todoylt is difficult to determine which should be studied fiat because there are Ixisic similarities, diffe-ences, and limits to each. Culture is shown in full detail on aerial photographs while the geologic map depicts only the landmarks considered essential by the mapper. Tie photograph indicates generally what is at the surface and the geologic map usually indicates an interpretation of bedrock beneath the mantle. However, in this latter regard, aerial photographs frequently revl subtle tones, patterns, forms or relief which are keys to the bedrock or structure not evident to a person on the ground. Photographs when viewed as stereo—pairs under a stereoscope revI relative relief while a geologic map compiled photograrnmetrically has topographic contours which indlte actual relief as detailed as required. The fact is. that modern geologic maps are likely to be based on the it-iterpretation of photographs, and have been compiled photogrammetrically. Pitoto—interpretatlon involves more than the identification of features. The interpreter supplements hi direct observation by deduction and by visualizing obscure or hidden features with the guidance of previous experience and reasoning. This is an essential difference between photo—reading and interpretation. The value of the map increases with the degree to which the latter is applied. Both havi a :ommon starting point, the recognition of diagnostic features. Many extellent emples of photogeology are in company files but generally are not available for publication. However, a good list of outstanding photographs has been prepared by the American Geological Institute as Report No. 5 j95J, and isa source of materials for training programs. There are two basic phases of photogeologk 4nterpretaflon. One is the mapping of rock types and formation units and the other is the determinatton of rock 4ructure. Each of these is somewhat specialized in the several fields of economic geology but the objective in any case is the compilation of a geologic map. Consolidated sedimentary rocks are recognized by their stratification which appears on photo-' graphs as banded outcrop patterns, If the beds are horizontal, the contacts will be horizontal and their surface traces will parallel topographic contours. Beds that have been titled and subsequently truncated by erosion crop out as belts. Where streams cross the outcrops a V—shaped pattern develops with the V1s pointing in the direction of dip. Folded beds are often expSssed at the surface by belts which form parallel ridges and valleys, or looped and zigiag ridges wbh canoe—shaped valleys. Antic lines and sync lines are differenttated through analysis of the dip of beds. If the stratigraphic sequence is recognized, anticlinal axes are located along the oldest beds exposed in the center. In a synclin:e the opposite is true. Sedimentary rocks are distinquished on photographs mainly on the basis of stratification, and differentiated by comparative color and resistance to erosion The latter are suggestive only Color depends on the character of the rock and the vegetation at supports Resistance to erosion depends not oniy.on the physical and chemical characteristics of the rock but on the climatic environment as well, Limestone and dolomite, for example, are very susceptible to erosion in humid regions but frequently form ridges in arid regions. Pure limestone and dolomite are characteristically light but impurities produce darker colors. Frequently, distinctive horizon markers rather than formation units are selected to map structure even through the lithology may be unknown. Extrusive igneous rocks are distlnuished mainly by their surface Irregularity, a ground plan �which suggests a mobile form, and association with vents such as cones or fissures. More recent flows are barren and usually dark in color. Geologically ancient lavas may not be recognizable except by a field check of lithology or structure. Massive, intrusive igneous rocks usually appear to cut across stratified rocks with discontinuous contacts. Dikes are recognized on photographs by their linear form, group pattern and by their cross—cutting relations. Petrographic distinctions are rarely possible even though color tone is used to determine form and structure. Joints and fractures are recognized by angular patterns in the drainage or by a grooved or striated appearance of the bedrock. Faults are conspicuous where the outcrop pattern has been offset or interrupted. Fault traces unnoticed on the ground may be prominent on aerial photographs as linear boundaries between areas of contrasting vegetation and soil coloration. An escarpment and color contrast mark the line of a fault in igneous rocks in Figure 2. Fig. 2 . Huronian lavas in upper part of photograph faulted down against intrusive igneous rocks in lower part, Marquette County, Michigan (Photography by Abrams Aerial Survey Corporation). 106 �Iv'Sore widespread ue of color photography is just around the corner for photo—interpretation. Where browns, yellows and greens may be diagnostic, details in rock strata, soils and vegetation may be lost because these colors photograph as,about the same shade of grey on black-and-white photo- grapiy. Another advantage of color photography is that the eye can differentiate about 200 shades of grey in the tone scale between black and white. In contrast, there are about 200,000 different combinations hi the color scale. Reds and whites, gradations in yellows, and even some gradations in whites can be seen on color photographs. Usually one cannot differentiate features depending on these color cfcnges on black—and-white photographs. In this respect, color photography has been particularly useful in outlining areas of leaching around mineralized zones. In the past few years it has been thoroughly demonstrated that bleaching and discoloration by hydrothermal alteration can generally be mapped more rapidly, effectively and accurately using color aerial photography than by ground methods alone.* In some areas blanket alteration up to four miles across has been mapped on color photographs and in others alteration effects limited to the immediate walls of ore bodies can be observed. Alteration mapping on color photographs is being used as a guide to uranium exploration on the Colorado Plateau. Color photographs must be relatively large—scale to register adequate color separation suitable for alteration mapping. Where individual veins are to be delineated, photography should probably be I" — 250' to I" = 500'. Up to I" z 1500' may be used for reconnaissance of mineralized areas. If stratigraphic boundaries, lateral variations, and structure are to be interpreted, scales as small as I" = 2500' may be used. Proper exposure and haze filtration are always critical in color photography. Colored acetate sheets can be used to correct some errors in color reproduction. Filter sheets are also useful In emphasizing certain colors for interpretation purposes. The trend toward wider application of photogeology and photogrammetry in geologic interpretation and mapping is paying off in better maps at lower costs. The details of areas mapped are commercial secrets of the client. However, it is well known that most of the major oil companies and many mining companies are using these exploration techniques at an accelerated rate. As the integration of photogrammetry and photogeology gains momentum, increasing economies can be expected. Many factors have conspred to make this a very brief discussion of the subject. The literature, such as "Photogrammetric Engineering" published by the Society of Photogrammetry, reports many of the newer applications. I will be very glad to correspond at any time on questions concerning the applications of modern photogeologic and photogrammetric techniques. * Abrams Aerial Survey Corporation is affiliated with Colorado Exploration Company, Golden, Colorado for geological and geophysical contracting to the mining industry. The writer is indebted to that company for some data on interpretation of color photographs. 17 �Di Sc U55 iOn Mr. R. A. Spencer (Consolidated Mining & Smelting Company): What are the costs of color photography as compared to black and white? Mr. Bayless: Color aerial photography costs at least twice as much as black-and—white aerial photography. However, what is the cost of aerial photography? It is the sum of the costs of mobilization of a plane and crew, the film, and laboratory processing and is a function of scale, the size of the project, the geographic location and the contractor's estimate of the expected weather conditions. The latter is of particular import in color photography and the requirement for absolutely clear weather usually necessitates much longer stand—by times. Color film costs four times that of black_and_white film but the laboratory costs may be about the same if only color transparencies are delivered. Very small color photographic projects of a few square miles in Michigan may cost about the same as black-and-white photography because of the high unit area mobilization for all small projects. However, black and white photography of medium size projects at 1:6000 scale costs $60 — $100 per square mile and color photography would be more than this. About $20 to $40 per transparency is a representative cost for vertical color photography. This does not appear at first consideration to compare favorably with "government" black-and-white photography which so many of you use. However, the usual government photography is at 1:20,000 scale and is contracted, for large areas, under very competitive conditions for $3 to $6 per square mite. We are faced with similar problems when giving generalizations on costs of photogrammetry and stereo—plotting. Plotting of topographic maps may range from pennies to dollars an acre depending your scale, contour interval, content and relief of the areas. Ground control is hard to estimate until you know the availability and location of existing control and what must be done to bring it to the project area. Control can cost from 50 cents a square mile to 50 cents an acre. Dr. A. W. Jolliffe (Queen's University, Kingston, Canada): It seems to me that these papers have stressed the geologic interpretation of aerial photographs. I think it should be noted that to some extent the photographs themselves are most useful in geologic mapping. I am speaking now from long experience in the northwestern part of the Canadian Shield where we have a lot of barren outcrop and not much overburden as in the area Dr. Longley referred to. Here it is very difficult to make interpretations despite good exposures and the abundance of linear features, and the chief use of the photographs is as an actual base for geologic plotting. One other point in regard to Dr. Longley's procedures: We utilize every available piece of geologic information prior to the interpretation of the photographs and field check afterwards and I suggest that any geologic interpretation is just as accurate as these two necessary procedures. Again, on the basis of my experience, the use of photographs seems to me to be chiefly as bases for plotting. This is heresy to anybody who makes such extensive use of complicated photogrammetric apparatus but my point is this that the geology does not warrant too much in the way of detailed rectification of plotting. The radial—line method is of sufficient accuracy for mast geologic maps. Dr. A. M. Goodwin (Algoma Ore Properties, Limited, Canada): Are there examples in which the difference in cost between color photography and black and white is warranted in the finding of a mineralized area? Mr. Bayless: There are indeed such examples and I am embarassed for not being able to give you 108 �the names of the districts. The work was done by an affiliate of our organization in some of the old Colorado mining districts. Some of the work was done around Aspen. There resulted a number of new discoveries that were identified by colors associated with leaching in areas that had been walkea over for many years by field men who knew the geology. Of course, there are other aerial survey companies besides those represented here tocav. A ne California firm has a large color contract in South America about which you may have reaa National Geogrphic Magazine. They showed recently in Chicago some of the color photog-ap / that was being done in a copper district. I cannot say whether or not they show anything that was not already known but they were or are photographing and presumably interpreting and mapping many square miles. Color photography is one of those things that is looked upon highly by photogrammetrists. I found this when talking to the Atomic Energy Commission people in Grand Junction, Colorado. Photogrammetrists praised the technique though geologists thought black and white was serving their needs about as well on the Plateau. It may be a reluctance to accept something new. There is also the matter of higher costs. We are doing color photography, but I do not want to over sell color. As a matter of a fact it is so touchy" that we are very happy to work in black and white. I should like to make a comment on radial plotting. I do not mean to belittle it. Certainly there is more radial—line plotting than any other type today by individuals and by mining companies with interpretation sections. Many of the things that I have talked about are on the verge of becoming more universally accepted. The use of stereo plotting instruments as a tool for geologists is something that is coming and developing fast. But it is certainly true that there are many projects in which the accuracy of simple radial control is quite satisfactory. There is another trend that has not been mentioned thus far. That is the integrated program of natural resource development in which bed rock geology, soils, and forest and water resources are mapped for engineering planning and design and for exploitation. This program involves the work of many specialists. Projects of this kind are going on abroad, and similar work is being planned in this country too. A question may be raised as to why foreign photogrammetric equipment is being used by many American aerial survey companies. Swiss, German and Italian instruments are all being introduced because they are more efficient and offer control extension capabilities. 109 � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology Text A resource consisting primarily of words for reading. Examples include books, letters, dissertations, poems, newspapers, articles, archives of mailing lists. Note that facsimiles or images of texts are still of the genre Text. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology: Proceedings, 1956 Description An account of the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology: Geological Exploration. Michigan Institute of Mining and Technology, Houghton, Michigan, May 11-12, 1956. Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Michigan College of Mining and Technology Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1956 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource PDF Language A language of the resource English https://digitalcollections.lakeheadu.ca/files/original/405166bf219ff4b76df37c11e3bf0e6f.pdf 21229acc65385c1616b30862a339fe8c PDF Text Text �TABLE OF CONTENTS Page i Program 1 The Petrology of the Beaver Bay Complex ... . .... 2 3 The Critical and Transition Zones of the Eastern Part of the Bushveld Complex . Harry ......... ... Eugene 11. Gehrnan N. Cameron Electrical Methods of Geophysical. Prospecting in the Lake Superior District ......................... C. V. Keller, C. J. Zablocki, F. C. Frischknecht Magnetic Susceptibility and its Correlation with Magnetite Content in Taconite . .. . , i.,.., • ., Charles E. Jahren 5 Geophysical Studies in 7 Geological Implications of Magnetic and Gravity Data of the Lake Superior Basin 8 9 Geology of the Menominee Michigan District, ..... ..... Gordon Northern Minnesota .,.. • S... 12 Iron.-Bearing RichardW. 15 Carl. E. Dutton Problems of the Division of Precambrian Time •.,.,,.............,...,.. Dating of Precambrian Iron Formation The Relation of Shear Joints to a Fault in the Sturgeon Quartzite Problems -- Solved (?) and S. S. Goldich,A. 0. Nier ........ S. S. Goldich, A. 0. Nier, W. Krueger, J. H. Hoffman Tear Unsolved -- In James Trow the Glacial History of Northeastern Minnesota 17' Bayley Stratigraphy of Pre.-Keweenawan Rocks H. 13 Bath George M.. Schwartz in Parts of Northern Michigan U D• H. E. Wright, Jr. A Study of the Iron Silicate Minerals with Special Emphasis on the Iron.Formation in the Cuyuna District, Minnesota ................... Rolland 18 Petrography of the Western Mesabi Range, Minnesota ...... 19 The Mineralogy .of the Metamorphosed Biwabik Iron Formation,Eastern Mesabi Range, Minnesota J. C. L-. Blake A. Beckman Novotny Gundersen �TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Page 20 Alteration Studies at Helen Siderite Mine ,.,.,,.,.,....., A. N, Goodwin 21 The Anim.kie Sea . 2 The Properties of Silica Gel and its Possible Relationship to the Development of Lake SuperiorType Iron Ores .-.......................... 23 2 W. Bartley M. The Role of Interstitial and Combined Waters in the Development of Lake Superior Iron Ores ....... CedrieL. Iversorr G. H. Spencer, Jr. The Mineralogy, Paragenesis, and Origin of the Cuyuria Sulfide Deposits T. M. Han 25 The Genesis of the Lake Superior 26 Peat Research at the University of Minnesota ,........ Moses Passer 27 Recent Spodumene Discoveries in Northwestern 28 Iron Ores of the Pacific Northwest 2 30 Copper Deposits ... Ontario •4 Finds in Northwestern Ontario ... C, Arnstutz G. W. L. C. Greer L. C. Binon Characteristics of Some Iron-Bearing Formations in Northern Wisconsin Recent Iron .. E. .. .. . L. B*ctner ...... .... E • R. Mead �I UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA Center for Continuation Study Duluth 12 Institute on Lake Superior April 21-22, 1958 Geology PROGRAM Monday Morning-April 21, 1958 SciencØ Auditorium, University of Minnesota, Duluth 9:00 9:15 General Meeting of the Institute .. GeneraJ. Chairman, Ralph W. Marsden J, M Nolte Welcome ••Øi.$Ia• SESSION I Co-chairmen: 9:30 9:55 H, M. Gehman: E.. N. Cameron: 10:20 (3. V. Keller*, 1O:45 C. E. Jabren: Henry Lepp, Thomas E. Stephenson PETROLOGY OF THE BEAVER BAY DIABASE THE CRITICAL AND TRANSITION ZONES OF THE EASTERN PART OF THE BUSHVELD COMPLEX C. J. Zablocki & F. C. Frischknecht: ELECTRICAL METHODS OF GEOPHYSICAL PROSPECTING IN THE LAKE SUPERIOR DISTRICT MAGNETIC SUSCEPTIBILITY AND ITS CORRELATION WITH MAGNETITE CONTENT IN TACONITE 11:10 11:35 (3. 12:00 LUNCH GEOPHYSICAL STUDIES IN NORTHERN MINNESOTA GEOLOGICAL IMPLICATIONS OF MAGNETIC AND GRAVITY DATA OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION MAIN BALLROOM, KIRBY STUDENT CENTER 3, D, Bath: M. Schwartz: Co-chairmen: 2:00 R. W. Bayley: 2:25 C. E. Dutton: SESSION II John W. Gruner, Ralph W. Marsden GEOLOGY OF TH MENOMINEE IRON-BEARING DISTRICT, MICHIGAN STRATIGRAPHY OF PRE-KEENAWAN ROCKS IN PARTS OF NORTHERN MICHIGAN S. Goldich*, A. 0. Nier: PROBLEMS OF ThE DIVISION OF PRECAMBRIAN 2:50 S, 3:15 S. S. Goldich, A. 0, TIME Nier, H. N. Krueger*, H OF PRECAMBRIAN IRON FORMATIONS J. Hoffman: DATING COFFEE BREAK LI: : 10 James Thow: 35 IL 7:00 RELATION OF SHEAR JOINTS TO A TEAR FAULT IN THE STURGEON QUARTZITE SOLVED AND UNSOLVED PROBLEMS EN THE GLACIAL HISTORY OF NORTHEASTERN MINNESOTA MAIN BALLROOM, KIRBY STUDENT CENTER -- E. Wright, Jr.: DINNER Speaker: Howel Williams Topic: "VULCANISM AND GLOWING AVALANCHES" Tuesday Morning, April 22, 1958 SESSION 9:00 III Co-chairmen: Jack V. Everett, Josiah Royce R. L. Blake: A STUDY OF THE IRON SILICATE MINERALS EMPHASIS ON WITH SPECIAL THE IRON FORMATION IN THE CUYUNA DISTRICT, MINNESOTA �ii Lake Superior Geology 9:20 9:40 C. A. Beckman: J. N. 10:00 10:25 A. M. 10: C. L. L15 M. W. 11:05 G. H. 11:25 T. M. 12:00 LUNCH PETROGRAPHY OF ThE WESTERN MESABI RANGE, MINNESOTA Gundersen: THE MINERALOGY OF THE METAMORPHOSE]) BIWABIK IRON FORMATION, EASTERN MESABI RANGE, MINNESOTA ALTERATION STUDIES AT HELEN SIDERITE MINE Goodwin: Bartley: ANIMIKIE SEA Iverson: THE PROPERTIES OF SILICA GEL AND ITS POSSIBLE RELATIONSHIP TO THE DEVELOPMENTOF LAKE SUPERIOR TYPE IRON ORES Spencer, THE ROLE OF INTERSTITIAL AND COMBINED WATERS IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF LAKE SUPERIOR IRON ORES Han: THE MINERALOGY, PARAGEMESIS, AN]) ORIGIN OF THE CUYUNA SULFIDE DEPOSITS - MAIN BALLROOM, KIRBY STUDENT CENTER Jr.: SESSION IV Robert L. Heller,. Fred 1 Jensen Co-chairmen: 1:30 1:50 2:10 2:30 2:50 . C. Arnstutz: 3:10 E. R. Mead: * Passer: W. L, C. Greer: Moses L.. C. Binon: E. L. Buetner: Indicates THE GENESIS OF LAKE SUPERIOR COPPER DEPOSITS PEAT RESEARCH AT THE UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA RECENT SPODUMENE DISCOVERIES IN NORTHWESTERN ONTARIO IRON ORES OF THE PACIFIC NORTHWEST CHARACTERISTICS OF SOME IRON-BEARING FORMATIONS IN NORTHERN WISCONSIN RECENT IRON FINDS IN NORTHWESTERN ONTARIO speaker FACULTY C1 AMSTUTZ •.. M. ,. .. .•..,.. Department of Geology, Missouri School of Mines, Rolla, Missouri , Bartley, Creer g W. BARTLEY Associates, Port Arthur, Ontario, Canada G. D. BATH U. S. Geological Survey, Menlo Park, California R. W. BAYLEY U. S. Geological Survey, Mineral Deposits Branch, Menlo Park, California C • A. BECKMAN ., FRED Z. BERGER , . •,. . ..... Mines ... ,,, . , .. L. C. BINON E • L. of Minnesota Director, Center for Continuation Study, University of Minnesota Northern Pacific Railway Company, St. Paul BUETNER ... . ... . ROLLAND BLAKE Experiment Station, University .. .. . . Jones g Laughlin Steel Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania ...... Graduate Student, Department of Geology, University of Minnesota E. M. CAMERON ,..,,.,.,.. Professor of Head, Department of Geology, University Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin �ila. Superior .Lake Geology MERRILL K. CRAGUN . ., .. Course Coordinator, Center for Continuation Study, University of Minnesota C E. Regional Geologist, U. S. Geological Survey, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin JACK V. EVERETT Geologist, W. S. Moore Company, Duluth H • M. GEMMAN . . , . 0.• • • • . S. S GOLDICII Jersey Production Research Company, Tulsa, Oklahoma Professor of ceology, University of Minnesota A • N. GOODWIN ,... .... .-. Ge'blogist, Algoma Ore Properties, Ltd., Jamestown, Ontario, Canada W. L. C. GREER .. . JOHN W, GRUNER J• Bartley, Greer & Associates, Port Arthur,. Ontario Canada Professor of Geology, University of Minnesota 4. GUNDERSEN Graduate Student, Department cf Geology, University cf Minnesota T., H, HAN Cleveland-Cliffs Iron Company, Ishpeming, Michigai ROBERT L. HELLER Associate Professor F Head, Department of Geology, Duluth Branch of the University of Minnesota C. L. IVERSON Oliver Iron Mining Division, U, S. Steel Corporation, Duluth C. E. JEHREN Assistant Professor of Science, Junior College and U. S. Geological Survey, Austin FRED 'F JENSEN .,........, Snyder Mining Company, Chisholin, Minn. G• V • KELLER H• W • . . . . . . . .. . . KRUEGER HENRY LEPP ... U. S. Geological Survey, Geophysics Branch, Denver, Colorado of . .. . • • . • . . . Department .. .. • .. ... Associate Professor of Geology, of the University of Minnesota Geology, University of Minnesota Duluth Branch RALPH W. MARS DEN Geological ManageD of Investigations, Oliver Iron Mining Division, U. S. Steel Corporation, Duluth E. R. MEAD Bartley, Greer & Associates, Port Arthur, Ontario, Canada J. M. NOLTE ........•.,.... Dean, General Extension Division, University of Minnesota �iv Superior Geology ES PASSER Department of Chemistry, Duluth Branch of the University of Minnesota LREMINGTON .......•.,. Resident Manager, General Extension Division, University of Minnesota, Duluth Branch SIAH ROYCE . ., .. . . , , , , . Geologist, Pickands, Mather Company, Duluth N. SCHWARTZ ............. Professor, Director, Minnesota Geological Survey University of Minnesota H • SPENCER, Jr. . LIIOMAS E. STEPHENSON JAMES TROW ti Xis .. rn Li rmrrtirr flI\.L.3UL, UL\ y' Geologist, Oliver Iron Mining Division, U. S. St'eel Corporation, Duluth Resident Geologist, Jones •g Laughlin Steel Corporation, Virginia Geology Department, Michigan State University,, East Lansing, Michigan Associate Professor of Geology, University of Minnesota �1 THE PETROLOGY OF THE BEAVER BAY COMPLEX Harry N Gehman Three gabbroic intrusions, with minor associated rock types form the Beaver Bay complex in southeastern Lake County, Minnesota. The gabbros intrude the Middle Keweenawan North Shore volcanic group. The oldest intrusion, the Beaver River gabbro, contains calcic plagioclase (An65), medium olivirie Xenoliths of (Fa40-.55), titanaugite (Ca4Mg38Fe22), and accessory mInerals. anorthosite are abundant locally in this unit, together with a few xenoliths of leucocratic granite, The second intrusion, the Beaver Bay ferrogabbro, shows marked composiDifferentiation tional variation from the lowest to the highest exposures. through crystal settling has produced a progressive change in the composition o].ivine, clinopyroxene, and plagioclase. of the primary precipitate minerals: The progressive change in olivine composition from Fa66 to Fagg allows subdivision of this unit into hortoriolite-, ferrohortonolite- and fayalite-ferrogabbro. High-calcium clinopyroxene likewise shows a progressive change in iron and magnesium content from augite (Ca3gMg33Fe28) to ferrohedenbergite Pigeonite, inverted pigeonite, and primary hypersthene are (Cai13t4g02Fe55). present as interprecipitate phases in the lower part of the intrusion; however, rocks with olivine more iron-rich than Fa82, ferroaugite is the only pyroxene present. Absolute iron-enrichment of the rocks is indicated by chemical analyses of samples from varying heights in the intrusion.. Silica— and alkali enrichment become apparent only in the upper fayalite-ferrogabbro where large in amounts of micropegmatite and thick sodic plagioclase rims are present. The Black Bay gabbro forms dikes and small sills surrounding and intruding the ferrogabbro. It is generally coarse-grained with numerous coarser pegIts chemical and mineralogical composition is very similar to matitic zones. that of the numerous pegma-titic veins and schlieren common to fine-grained gab— broic sheets throughout the world. �2 THE CRITICAL AND TRANSITION ZONES OF THE EASTERN PART OF THE BUSHVELD COMPLEX Eugene N. Cameron Structural and petrologic features of the Critical and Transition zones of the eastern part of the Bushveld Complex, disclosed by detailed mapping and study of selected areas, throw further light on the evolution of the complex and suggest additional investigations that may be fruitful. Both Critical and Transition zones vary in composition and sequence of rock units. The Critical Zone, the more intensively studied of the two, is divisible along strike into at least three sectors, differing in sequence of maIn the southern and central jor units. The northern sector is poorly exposed. sectors, the Critical zone consists of a lower pyroxenite series and an upper anorthosite series, but the sequences of units in these series are not the same in the two sectors. Relations between sectors are obscured by faulting and folding along the line of the Steelpoort VaJ.ley. Cognate enoliths, discontinuities, and. irregularities in the layered structure of the Critical tone, together with tepetitions of rock types, indicate formation from a moving rather than a static magma. Penecontemporaneous folding and fracturing indicate local disturbances during consolidation, but clear evidence of major disturbances is not at hand. The occurrence of blocks of metamorphosed sediments at points well above the floor of the complex is a feature deserving further study. The xenoliths may be a part of the more general problem of adjustments of the floor and roof of the complex during differentiation and consolidation. At present, such movements cannot be fully distinguished from movements that took place after consol. idation. Many of the rock types of the Critical zone are satisfactorily explained by a combination of fractional crystallization, gravitative settling, and mechanical sorting of crystals due to variations in velocity of magmatic curThe more extreme types of anorthosites, pyroxenites, and chromitites rents. Possible eactions during and afappear to require supplementary processes. ter burial of settled crystals, and the influence of thermal gradients between the magma-accumulate interface and the roof and floor of the complex appear to deserve further study. �3 ELECTRICAL NETHODS OF GEOPHYSICAL PRCSPECTING IN THE LAKE SUPERIOR DISTRICT G. V. Keller, C. J. Zablocki and F. C. Frischknecht The electrical propertie of ores -and host rocks and Ithe uses of electromagnetic methods of prospecting have been studied in the Lake Superior iron and copper districts, Both borehole and laboratory measurements of electrical properties were made. The investigations suggest that electrical surveys may be a useful sup. plement to magnetic surveys. In many cases, for example, iron ores could be distinguished from the adjacent rocks because of their higher conductivities. Similarly, in the native copper ores from the southern shores of Lake Superior, polarization was found to correlate with the amount of copper. electrical Experimental electromagnetic surveys were made in three areae where the A conductive zone in iron-formation is covered by 100 feet of glacial till. the hanging wall could be traced in these areas, but the effect of the ironThe possibility of distinguishing beformation itself could not be detected. tween the effects of induced and remanent magnetization was also indicated by the electromagnetic measurements. �4 MAGNETIC SUSCEPTIBILITY AND ITS CORRELATION WITH MAGNETITE CONTENT IN TACONITE Charles E., Jabren Magnetic susceptibility measurements have been made on samples of drill. core from iron-formations and'other magnetic rocks in northeastern Minnesota. The relation k = 0.001157 V1.39' where k is the susceptibility and V is the volume percent rnagnetite between the limits 10 and 1i0 percent was found to hold for taconite in the eastern end of the Mesabi range. Susceptibility was measured by inserting each specimen change tite in self-inductance o the into a HelmhQltz coil and recording the coil as indicated by an ac greatly. were Magne- content for each depth interval was determined by magnetic separation. The susceptibility of individual samples from the same rock ed bridge. formation differ- In an effort t get reliable averages, as many as 250 samples measured from some holes, �5 GEOPHYSICAL STUDIES IN NORTHERN MINNESOTA Gordon D Bath The physical properties of rocks in northern 'Minnesota are being studied to obtain a better understançling of the regional geology. A major part of the investigation consists of studying the magnetic properties of large rock units to determine their effects on the earth's magnetic field. Other phases of the work include regional gravity measurements in the Cuyuna district, varius types of electric logging in drill holes, and eJ.ectromagnetie surveys to trace the iron-formation beneath glacial drift. Many of the aerornagnetic anomalies over iron-formations in areas cf moderate to intense metamorphism are attributed to the effects of regional remanent magnetization alone. Such anomalies occur over iron-formations of the East Mesabi, Gunflint, Vermilion and South Cuyuna districts, and in th ironformations of the Cogebic district near Mellen, Wisconsin. In the Duluth area, magnetic lows caused by remanent magnetization are found over thick sequences of gabbro and extrusive rocks near the base of the Duluth gabbro. During tjie past years traverses were run along roads using a totalfield magnetometer. These measurements siow there is remanent magnetization in the lower cherty member of the Biwabik iron—formation in the Main Mesabi. district, and locally in the iron-formations of the North Cuyuna district. �6 GEOLOGICAL rMPLICATIONS OF MAGNETIC AND GRAVITY DATA OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR BASIN George M. Schwartz The great syncline which is partly occupied by Lake Superior presents many problems which have been only partly solved. Geophysical data accumulated In recent years from many sources furnishes evidence regarding some of the problems. There has long been a suggestion responfault the straight shore-line and deep water offshore along the Minnesota coast. Flights with the airborne magnetometer across the syncline including as well as gravity and geological data, fail to confirm the exist- structural sible for the lake, that a is ence of th fault and it is of reasonable certainty that such a fault does not exist. The Douglas fault, which is well defined on geological evidence,, is characterized by a very large negative magnetic anomaly. Another problem has been the possibility of an extension of the Duluth Gabbro beyond the abrupt ending of outcrops to the north of the St. Louis River at West Duluth. Aeromagnetic profiles fail to indicate any large, near surface mass of gabbro south of Duluth. If the gabbro at Duluth were continuous with gabbro on the south limb in Wisconsin, it would be expected that it would also outcrop around the southwest end of the syncline. Such does not seem to be the case. Local details of the aeroinagnetics furnish important data on the geology where the rocks are buried beneath a heavy cover of glacial drift. A local magnetic low occurs along the west contact of the gabbro as was shown by ground work in l9L2 and confirmed by aeromagnetic data. The lower part of the gabbro (layered series) and the flows beneath the gabbro surprisingly are characterized by a regional magnetic low, but the flows above the gabbro and associated diabases generally produce a magnetic high, as expected. .A large, broad magnetic high in the vicinity of Culver, between Cloquet and the Mesabl, may result from a deeply buried iron formation. Work is being continued on these anomalies by the United States Geological Survey. �7 GEOLOGY OF THE MENOMINEE IRON-BEARING DISTRICT, MICHIGAN Richard W. Bayley The Menominee iron-bearing district includes 150 square miles in southern Dickinson County, Michigan. In the period 1877 to 1936, 85 million tons of iron ore were extracted from its mines, most of it of Bessemer grade, but the district is now virtually inactive, The district has been recently studied by geologists of the U. S. Geological Survey and the Geological Survey Division, Michigan Department of Conservation, as a part of a continuing project to re evaluate the Precambrian iron ranges of Michigan. The r'ocks are mostly of Precambrian age, capped here and there by Cainbrian sandstone, and extensively covered by Pleistocene glacial deposits. Two main divisions are recognized, lower Precambrian rocks (Archean of older reports), and middle Precambrian rocks, the Animikie series (Huronian series of The rocks of the two major divisions are separated by a proolder reports). found unconformity. The Animikie series, which corresponds in the middle and upper parts to the Animikie group of Minnesota, is composed of three groups of From oldest to youngest, rocks separated from one another by unconformities. The these are the Chocolay group, the Menominee group, and the Baraga group. Mafic dikes and sills of AnMenominee group contains the major Iron-formation. imikie age cut every formation. The gross structure of the district is a northwest—striking trough. The trough is underlain by steeply folded Animikie rocks, which are flanked by domal areas of lower Precambrian (pre-Aniinikie) gneiss, granite and greenschist. The older rocks north of the trough are chiefly gneiss, overlain unconformably by Animikie strata. The older rocks south of the trough are altered volcanic rocks which are cut, in turn, by quartz diorite, and granite, both large scale in.trusives. The internal structure of the trough is dominated by three major strike faults which separate the Animikie rocks into monoclinal blocks, and separate the Anirnikie rocks from the pre-Aniniikie rocks along the south flank of the trough. The two central fault blocks form northwest-striking ridges, The formations of the ranges referred to as the north and south iron ranges. dip steeply south or are overturned and dip north. Both ranges show second order folds, most of them west-pitching right-lateral folds, some overturned, some faulted along over-extended south limbs. Most of the high grade iron ore bodies mined in the district were related to such structures, particularly to pitching synclines. The iron-formation of the Menominee group is composed chiefly of quartz and iron oxide minerals, and averages approximately 32 percent iron. The prospect for finding new high grade ore bodies is not encouraging, but some favorable areas have not been explored. The economic utilization of the iron-formation entails problems of beneficiation similar to those encountered with Mesabi �e taconjtes. The area of iron-formation close to the surface in the district is roughly 14,000,000 square feet, which equals about 140,000,000 tons of ironformation, or about 70,000,000 tons of concentrate, for a depth of 100 feet. the Brier slate member, which lies between the two iron-bearing members of the Vulcan formation, and which contains an average of 18 percent iron, could also be beneficiated, mining would be simplified and the quantity of oricentrate from a given property would be increased by 30 percent. If �9 STRATIGRAPFIY OF PRE-KEWEENAWAN ROCKS IN PARTS OF NORTHERN MICHIGAN Carl E. Dutton U. S. Geological Survey Professional Paper 3]MC cf the ahove title, pre- pared by H. L. James, summarizes the results of 15 years of cooperative investigation with the Michigan Geological Survey in the study of Eron and Dickinson counties.. The areal and structural basis of the principal nomenclature, as shown in the following table modified from the report, will be discussed. �_____________ _______ ____________ _____________ ___________ 10 LITHOLOGIC SEQUENCE OF PRECAMBRIAN ROCKS IN IRON AND DICKINSON COUNTIES, MICHIGAN Upper LecamL7rlan Dabase dikes and 1 Keweenawan i V sills (probable age about 1100 million years) Intrusive contact V 3rani intrusive, rocks (probable age 1LOO million years) intrusive contact - Metadiabase and V V metagabbro Intrusivecontact— Fortune Lakes slate Stambaujh formation Hiawatha graywacke Paint River V - Middle V V - V Michigamme slate Baraga Animikie series V Wauseca pyritic member Badwater greenstone Precambrian V Rivertoñ iron-forrriation Dunn Creelc slate with Group OUP Amasa formation Fence River formation Hemlock greenstone with Mansfield and Bird iron-bearing slate members I V V Goodrich quartzite V Unconformity Loretto - slate member Curryiron-bearing member Brier slate member formation Traders iron-bearing member Feich formation Vulcan iron- Menominee gr P - - V —----unconformity Randville Chocolay group dolomite Saunders formation Sturgeon uartzite - Fern Creek formation Unconformity — V V Gneissic granite and other crystalline rock Intrusive or replacement contact ? _? Six-Mile Dickinson Lower Precambrian - Skunk Creek member East V V V V -- Lake amphibolite So].berg schist, with V Branch arkose Unconformity Granite V V OrlQ) - gneiss V V Quartzite and schist (small bodies included in granite gneiss) j 0' �11 PROBLEMS OF THE DIVISION OF PRECAMBRIAN TIME S. S. Goldich and A 0. Nier Division of the Precambrian based on rock types or degree of metamorphism is unsatisfactory. A0/K10 dating now in progress supports .a three-fold division of the Precambrian in the Lake Superior region. Although many problems remain to be solved, tentative dates for the three divisions are. as follows: Late Precambrian Middle Precambrian Early Precambrian 1.6 2.5 0.5 b y - 16 b y older than 2,5 b y The oldest A0/K0 date obtained f or rocks in the Lake Superior region It appears likely that present day radioactive dating methis about 2.7 b y. ods may prove inadequate to resolve time beyond 2.7 b y, although geologic evidence clearly indicates that sedimentary processes were activa before this date. The end of Middle Precambrian time is marked by folding and metamorphism of Animikian and equivalent sediments in an east-west belt extending from Minnesota to Michigan. Deep-seated metamorphism was accompanied by intrusion of granitic magma. The Keweenawan North Shore volcanic group and the Duluth gabbro complex are assigned to middle Late Precambrian. The main gabbro intrusion is dated at 1.1 b y, but folding and metamorphism of the extent developed at this time in the Grenville Province remains to be recognized in the Lake Superior region. �12 DATING OF PRECAMBRIAN IRON FORMATIONS S. S. Goldich, A. 0. Nier, H. W. Krueger, J. H, Hoffman Precambrian iron formations have been studied intensively by geologists and problems of origin and correlation have ranked high in these investigations. Progress of an investigation to date the iron formations of the Precambrian of North America is reported. A0/K10 dating indicates that iron formations were involved in each of the major orogenies of the Precambrian of the Canadian Shield. Soudan-type of iron formations in Minnesota and Ontario were folded in an orogeny dated at 27 b y. Mesabi-type of iron formations in Minnesota, Wisconsin and Michigan Iron formations in Quebec (Ungava— were involved in folding at about 1.7 b y. type) were folded in Geologic the 1.1 b y Grenville orogeny. data suggest that iron formations were deposited during each of three major divisions of the Precambrian, as well as at different times within the divisions. Further geologic studies are needed. the Two periods of mineralization are inferred for the Soudan Mine in Minnedates on samples related to mineralization following folding in Early Precambrian times A younger sericite (1.7 b y) indicates that the deposit was reopened at the time of the Middle Precambrian (post-Animikian) orogeny sota by A'40/K40 of sericite. The older sericite (2.5 b y) is �13 THE RELATION OF SHEAR JOINTS TO A TEAR FAULT IN THE STURGEON QUARTZITE James Trow Six miles east of Norway, Michigan, adjacent to a dam across the Sturgeon River, slates and conglomerates of the Fern Creek formation and the Sturgeon quartzite are overturned and dip steeply northeastward. These strata are cut by northeast-trending tear fau1ts that dip steeply southeastward. In the slates, east—striking slaty cleavage anomalously dips vertically and not at a mc'e gentle angle than the overturned beds. In the quartzites, conjugate shear joints strike essentially east; one set dips gently north, the other gently south. A third set of joints is parallel to the faults. This discussion concerns the relation of the conjugate shear joints to one of the faults. A simplified solution for A, B and C tectonic axes in brittle (competent) rocks is here presented: Instead of bisecting the actual acute angle between conjugate shear joints as plotted on a stereogram to find the direction (C) of maximum shortening of the rock, as proposed by Bucher (1920, Jour. Geology, pp. 716-717), here the obtuse angle between the face poles lie on the ACplane; the contemporary B.. fold, axis is perpendicular to this plane. this area, the slaty cleavage (AB—plane) in the Fern Creek formation axis as determined by bisecting the angle between shear joints of the quartzite. Both structures, therefore, are presumed to be contemporaneous; both are presumed to be younger than the overturning of the strata. The angle between shear joints increases from 414 away from the fault In is perpendicular to the C to a maximum of 92° adjacent to the fault. parallel to the fault. Contours of these values trend Two promising hypotheses are examined to explain the geographic relation between conjugate joints and the fault: (1) The more traditional explanation involves uniform stress anisotropism imposed upon a rock unit of geographically varying internal properties; i • e,, the quartz ite near the fault was, more ductile (less competent) than elsewhere during jointing because of aqueous solutions and high temperatures of hydrothermal origin. This hypothesis is rejected because the timing required by the hypothesis does not correspond to the paragenesis of structural events as inferred from field and thin section evidence. (2) A less conventional explanation involves geographica1ly non-uniform stress anisotropism imposed upon a rock unit of geographically uniform properties so that in the vicinity of the pre-existirig fault, rejuvenated fault movement acted as a safety valve to relieve local stress on the rock. Trigonometric stress analysis based on Coulomb's equation for friction suggests that for angles between joints here observed, local diastrophic force farthest from the fault was 2.' times as much as local stress on the rock adjacent to the fault, all other things being equal. The latter hypothesis, reached through inductive reasoning from field data, is further corrobo- �IL& rated by Seigel (1950, Trans. Am. Geophys. Union4 pp 611-619) who reached the same conclusion on theoretical grounds alone4 through deductive mathematical logic. A U-stage petrofabric study of the quartzite and a model experiment are planned for further investigation of these phenomena. The economic applicatioi of this principle lies in the marked savings that should result from such a study of joints in planning an exploratory drilling program for direct shipping iron ore at. the intersection of an iron formation an iron formation should indicate (1) the the most steeply dipping of the conjugate (gently dipping — not parallel to the fault) shear joints, (2) the strike and dip of the tear fault through the quartzite from a statistical analysis of the steeply dipping joints (parallel to the fault), and (3) the expected direction of refraction (if any) of the fault as it passes from the quartzite into more ductile (less competent) beds, and a tear fault. Jointed quartzites, or other brittle roøk, near location of a tear fault nearest to �15 PROBLEMS - SOLVED (?) AND UNSOLVED IN THE GLACIAL HISTORY OF NORTHEASTERN MINNESOTA H. E. Wright, Jr4 Recent field studies of glacial deposits in northeastern Minnesota, pursued with the support of the Minnesota Geological Survey, have revealed the record of fluctuations of three late Pleistocene ice lcbes: (1) The Superior lobe of red' drift, perior basin,. whose source was the Lake Su- (2) The Rainy lobe of dark gray to bro'p. drift, brought by ice from the northeast. (3) The St. Louis sublobe of the Des Moines lobe, composed of yellowish—brown drift of northwestern source. Earlier Pleistocene drifts are exposed in the iron mines but their relations are obscure. As currently interpreted, the sequence of glaciation in the late Pleistocene is as follows: (1) Cary subage of Wisconsin glacial age. Rainy and covered entire northeastern quarter of State.. (2) Cary-Mankato intervaL. Superior lobes Ice retreated into Lake Superior basin. Superior lobe readvanced to Lake Mile Lacs. Rainiiobe may have stood at Vermilion moraine. (3) Mankato subage.. (4) Mankato-Valders interval (Two Creeks interstadial). treated into Canada. Large lake in Superior basin. (5) Ice re- Valders subage. Superior lobe readvanced out of west end of basin, extending west to Lake Mille Lacs and north to Mesabi Range, bringing red clayey till and reworked lake clays. Contemporaneous advance of St. Louis sublobe from west to a broad zone of junction with the Superior lobe extending from Aitkin (Aitkin County) to Aurora (St. Louis County). (6) Late Valders. Retreat of ice, with formation of glacial lakes Aitkin, St. Louis and Duluth. The above sequence is based on stratigraphic and geomorphic relations and is supported by radiocarbon dates from adjacent regions. These dates place the Cary. subage about 13 ,000 years ago for this area, the Mankato about 12,000 and the Valders about 10,500 years. �16 em Some of the major unsolved problems in the glacial history of northeast Minnesota include the following: (1) Relationship between the Rainy and Superior lobes during the Cary. (2) The extent of deglaciation during the interstadial intervals, (3) The source of carbonate in the red Valders drift of the Superior lobe. (4) The relation of the Valders advance to the development of Lake Agassiz in northwestern Minnesota. (ilacial (5) The nature of the junction of Superior and St. Louis sublobes dur— ing the Va].ders, and the associated drainage relations. Discovery of buried soils, bones, peat and wood, in any of these younger glacial deposits will aid in solving some of these problems through their conThe basic task, tribution to climatic reconstruction and radiocarbon dating. however, is field study of stratigraphic and geomorphic relations, accompanied by appropriate laboratory work. �17 A STUDY OF THE IRON SILICATE MINERALS WITH SPECIAL EMPHASIS ON THE IRON-FORMATION IN THE CUYUNA DISTRICT, MINNESOTA Roiland L. Blake Petrographic and mineralogical studies were made on samples of relatively unoxidized, silicate-rich iron-formation from the central part of the Cuyuna District and from the Troy pit, near Eveleth, in the Mesabi District. Most f the open pit and drill core samples from. the Cuyuna District re-a present the thin-bedded facies described by Schmidt of the U. S. Geological Survey. The open pit samples are from the maL' iron-formation and some drill Textures and structures of core samples are from the upper iron-formation. Minerals identified were carbonate, sti]-pnomelane, these rocks are described. minnesotaite, chlorite, a kaolinite-type mineral that is not greonalite, non—. tronite, amphibole, quart, magnetite., hematite and goethite. Evidence will be presented to show that the iron carbonate is usually rich in manganese; this carbonate appears to be the primary sourceof manganese found in the manganifMineral associations as related to metamorerous iron. ores of the district. phism are discussed. Samples of silicate-rich rock from the upper cherty member of the Biwabik iron-formation at the Troy Pit are described. The rock contains a green silicate with a kaolinite-type structure and varying amounts of either fine hematite or of coarse magnetite and martite. Three samples of stilpnomelane and one of minnesotaite were purified from fissure-fillings in the main iron-formation of the Cuyuna District. Their chemical analyses, optical properties, DTA curves, and X-ray diffractometeD powder patterns are. presented and results of several other tests are discussed. �18. PETROGRAPHY OF THE WESTERN MESABI RANGE, MINNESOTA C. A. Beckman About 200 samples from the Western Mesabi (Hibbing to the West Itasca County line) have been studied. Most of the samples are from unoxidized Biwabik formation, with a few samples from the Virginia and Pokegama formations, and with very few samples in or near any known ore bodies. The Virginia formation occasionally shows development of lineation as a result of the recrystallization of clay minerals, and other minerals include quartz, siderite, chlorite, graphite and pyrite. Most of the samples of the Virginia are fresh and show only slight decomposition for a few feet at the very top. Minerals in the Upper Slaty member are mainly quartz, siderite and stilpnomelane, with minor magnetite and chlorite. Quartz, siderite and stilpnomelane are quite often intimately intergrown, with quartz and siderite occasionally present as microspherulites. Granules are rare in the Upper Slaty. Fresh material from the tipper Cherty member is found east of Keewatin, with. very little, if any, fresh material west of Keewatin. The chert granules almost always show some recrystallization. The Lower Slaty member is thin In the West Mesabi, usually about 15 feet thick, locally up to kO feet thick, and pinches out west of Coleraine. The only fresh material was found east of Keewatin. Fresh material from the Lower Cherty member west of Nashwauk is usually found only in drill holes close to the southern boundary of the Biwabik formation outcrop. There appears to be a persistent zone of oxidation west of Nashwauk, which includes the Upper Cherty, Lower Slaty and about the top one hundred feet of the Lower Cherty.. Minerals in the Lower Cherty are chert, minnesotaite magnetite, greenalite, stilpnomelane, siderite, calcite and chlorite. Minnesotaite and greenalite are often intimately associated; carbonate has often replaced the silicates and chert granules; and the chert granules often show syneresis cracks and occasionally appear broken. Thin magnetite bands of tn show minor shearing and brecciation. The amount of carbonates and sillcatés appears to increase toward the bottom of the Lower Cherty.. The "red basal taconite" was found in every hole which cut the Pokegama formation. This was the only unit in which oolites were found. Hematite is very fine-grained, with much of it being less than .005 mm. in diameter. Other minerals are quartz, carbonate and chlorite. The Pokegama formation contains quartz csf igneous, metamorphic and sedimentary origin, usually with some feldspar and, occasionally, a chlorite cement. �19 THE MINERALQ\GY OF THE METAMORPHOSED BIWABIK IRON FORMATION \EASTERN MESABI RANGE, MINNESOTA J. Novotny Gundersen For subdivided cores from ination of the purposes of this investigation, the Biwabik iron formation was into 2L jneinbers that can be identified in. almost all diamond drill the Eastern Mesabi Ranges, In summarizing the mineralogical inforthis brief report, the less appropriate but more common terms, cherty and slaty, will be used Stratigraphic control, presumably by reason of initial composition, is most apparent from the almost ubiquitous occurrence of olivine near the bottom of the Upper Cherty and throughout the Lower Slaty and from the relative scarcity of olivine elsewhere in the strata. Some hypersthene and minor amounts of grurierite may have originated during the formation of these magnetite-quartz-olivine hornfelses. Minor amounts of idocrase, wollastonite and andradite also reflect the initial composition of the carbonate horizons above the Upper Slaty. Metasomatic mineral assemblages occur in all taconite horizons intruded Within the intruded taconite horizons, hedenbergite, CaFe rich carbonate, ferrotremolite, potash and plagioclase feldspar, chalcopyrite and pyrrhotite are the most obvious metasomatic additions. Hypersthene, alinandite and epidote occur only locally adjacent to the pegmatites and are probably controlled by the initial composition of the taconite horizons in The peginatitic veins consist of varying amount of quartz, which they occur. potash feldspar and ferrotremolite with subordinate amounts of biotite (now mainly chlorite), pyrite, chalcopyrite, Ca-Fe rich carbonate, hypersthene and plagioclase and minute amounts of muscovite and molybdenite. by pegrnatitic veins. Olivine-bearing hornfelse, as well as taôonite containing metasomatic mineral assemblages, are of varying grain size, depending upon their proxim.The coarse-grained, ity to the gabbro or pegmatite contacts, respectively. recrystallized or reconstituted rocks are only slightly replaced by grunerite but most of the material bedded between magnetite layers or lame llae of the prevailing less coarse-grained taconite more distant from these contacts now consists mostly of grunerite. Within the transitional rock types between these two extremes, the late replacement or reconstitution nature of grunerite is clearly distinguished from the earlier olivine, hypersthene, hedenbergite and chert-magnetite assemblages that are replaced by grunerite. The chert—magnetite assemblages are commonly present as relics preserving granules and other primary sedimentary structures. �20 ALTERATION STUDIES AT HELEN SIDERITE MINE A• M Goodwin The Helen iron. formation and associated siderite ore bodies is contained in an assemblage of Precambrian volcanic flows and pyroclastics. The asseinblage has been tilted nearly vertical; the erosion surface thus presents stratigraphic cross-section. The nature of the volcanics and their relationship to iron formation are reviewed. Large-scale outpouring of basic volcanics led to explosive discharge of acid to intermediate volcanic types followe4 by development of iron formation4 Attention is directed to wall rock alteration which occurred largely during development of iron formation. Chemical alteration of volcanics underlying iron formation has been investigated by means of chemical analyses of diamond drill core. Principal chemical changes during alteration were removal of silica, calcium and alkalies and addition of ferrous iron, carbon dioxide and manganese; aluminum and titanium remained essentially constant. Volcanics were considerably altered to a stratigraphic depth of 150 to 200 feet below iron formation; below this depth, alteration was reduced in intensity and of uniform degree. Volcanics underlying iron formation are composed of acid and basic zones, the acid zone lying to the west. The degree and nature of chemical alteration varied someThe acid-basic contact zone, though gradational and what with volcanic type.1 irregular, p1unge eastward at roughly '5 degrees with respect to the present erosion surface. The contact zone may be related to original volcanic f issures or similar linear features. Quantitative determinations indicate that the weights of silica leached from volcanics on the one hand and present in iron formation and ore body on the other, are similar in magnitude. Ore constituents, though, have been added throughout anan outside source is indicated. Possible sources are considered. In general, relations suggest that hot-spring type activity operated during development of iron formation and closed the volcanic cycle. �2]. THE ANIMIKIE SEA / M. W. The great sea from which the Animikian sediments were deposited during the Proterozoic era was responsible for major iron ore deposits of the Canad-' Ian shield. The variations in lithology, minera)ogy and, in some cases, attitude of the beds are due to fades changes and differing metamorphism, not to dif- fering ages of deposition. Periods of orogeny, followed by extensive erosion is the cause of the present localization of the iron-bearing hoZizorLs as opposed to previous postulation that the iron formations were deposited in restticted basins by local, small bodies of water. �22 THE PROPERTIES OF SILICA GEL AND ITS POSSIBLE RELATIONSHIP TO tHE DEVELOPMENT OF LAKE SUPERIOR TYPE IRON ORES Cedric L. Iverson It is assumed that the silica in the iron formations was deposited in the form of hydrous silica ge1. a mixture of polysilicic It is suggested that natural silica gels ave acid and hydrated silicates. Adsorption by silica gel and the effect of pH and the chemical nature of the surrounding medium on this property, is discussed. It is suggested that silica deposited under alkaline conditions will contain adsorbed magnesium, calcium, alumina and, possibly, oxygen while gel deposited under acid conditions may adsorb only alumina and carbonaceous matter. The effects of age, pressure and temperature on the dehydration of these gels are considered.. major factor in dehydration Heat is considered to b the Late stage dehydration reactions consist of the release of hydroxyl ions, oxygen and free electrons. It is considered pos- sible that late stage reactions could result in the formation of hot alkaline cxidizing solutions. It is suggested that solutions derived from silica gels which were laid down under certain restricted conditions, may be capable of oxidizing and leaching the iron theyecape during dehydration formation along the •channelways through which �23 THE ROLE OF INTERSTITIAL AND COMBINED WATERS IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF LAKE SUPERIOR IRON ORES C. H. Spencer, Jr A hypothesis is suggested to explain the leaching of silica from iron formation which may explain the development of some of the Lake Superior iron ores. is suggested that connate waters trapped in the original fine-grained, iron-rich sediments under certain restricted conditions were sufficiently abundant to later form a solvent for part of the silica during diageriesis or metamorphism. The conditons necessary to effect solution of the silica are believed to be moderate emperatures in the range of 100 to 1500 C, and suf- It ficient fracturing of the iron formation to aUow escape of the silica charged waters. Magnesium, hydroxyl, and possibly imentation and released during diagenesis may oxygen ions adsorbed during sedhave furnished reagents which Other products of this breakdown, break down iron minerals to the oxide form. notably alkali bicarbonate, assist in the solution of silica in the channelways along which the escaping waters migrate. The necessary temperatures could be furnished by regional metamorphism, shearing, simple depth of burial or intrusives. Fracturing could be accomplished by all of these forces, possibly including differential rates of compaction. This hypothesi is .distinguished from other ideas on the origin of Lake Superior iron ores in that any set of geologic conditions which will produce the necessary temperatures and fracturing will start the ore-making process in an iron formation with the necessary chemical composition, water content, and geologic environment. �2 THE MINERALOGY, PARAGENESIS AND ORIGIN OF THE CUYUNA SULFIDE DEPOSITS T. N, Han in southThey are normally ovenlain by about O feet of gla- The sulfide deposits are located in south cetitra]. Aitkin and western Canton counties. cial drift,. The depoLts are essentially made up of a sulfide-bearing black slate, composed of qta'rtz, senicite, chlorite, biotite, ilmenite, leucoxene, amorphous carbon, calcite, magnetite, pyrrhoUte, pynite, marcasite with traces of chalcopynite, marmatite, arsenopynite, and antigonite. It is believed that the deposits are a metamorphosed sulfide iron formation of the greenschist facies. They are underlain by and gradational into a thin bedded recrystallized chenty carbonate iron formation. The iron is thought to have been primarily deposited as iron sulfide resembling the pyrite in the black slate of the Iron River-Crystal Falls DisSubsequently, it was subjected to regional metamorphism which led to trict. the formation of pynite and marcasite from pyrrhotite. The conclusions are supported by geographic, stratigraphic, mineralogic and geochemical evidence. Core specimens from thirty drill holes in the area were studied. The paragenesis of the iron sulfide minerals and their relationships are pictorially illustrated. �25 b THE GENESIS OF THE LAKE SIJPERIOR COPPER DEPOSITS* G4 C. Ainstutz The Lake Suprior copper deposits are best explained by a uniform single The field evidence and the microscopic, paragenetic statistical and geochemical analyses lead to the conclusion that the copper is a normal co-magmatic syngenetic constituent accumulated in the hydromagmatic phases of the Lake Superior basalt magma. origin.. First, the copper was brought up in and with the lavas and stayed in the hydromagmatic and hydrothermal portions of th lavas or escaped into the sediments and fractures. After the lavas ceased to extrude, the volatile fractions still continued to leak out from the same magma chambers as hydrothermal fluids, most of which reached the surface and formed the exhalative sedimentary red bed coppers of White Pine, etc.. * (The basis for this paper is experience gained while working for the Bear The author acknowledges the Creek Mining Company in the summer of 1957. Company's permission to publish this paper and emphasizes the fact that opinions expressed therein are his own and not those of the Company.) �26 PEAT RESEARCH AT THE UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA Moses Passer About 50 per cent of the United States peat supply is found in Minnesota -- some 7 billion tons in some 7 million acres that comprise about l per cent of the area of the State. With the objective of developing utilization of this resource, the Iron Range Resources and Rehabilitation Commission in l95t established the "Chemical Products from Peat" project at the University of Minnesota. This is a cooperative research project conducted in three departments of the University; Department of Chemical Engineering, Minneapolis Campus Department of Soils, Institute of Agriculture, St. Paul Campus Duluth Branch Department of Chemistry, Duluth Campus The general research activities of these three groups are aimed at de— veloping basic chemical information about peat, its constituents and its derivatives, with the viewpoint of developing chemical. products from peat that may be useful as industrial chemicals and/or in agricultural applications. The project is at Preent engaged in the following areas: (a) Development of processes for preparing high-nitrogen organic fertilizer products nd special amendments for humus—deficient soils. Chemical studies of the products. (b) Agronomic and horticultural evaluation of the experimental soil products. Basic studies of their effects on plants. (c) Fundamental studies of the chemical and physico-chemical nature of peat and its constituents, particularly humic acids Includes functional group analyses, molecular weight studies and solvent-extraction methods. (d) Systematic sampling of Minnesota p.eat bogs. Development of a chemical group analysis for the organic constituents of peat, and analysis of bog samples. (e) Exploratory studies of new and potentially economic chemical applications for peat. (f) A complete survey of the world's literature on peat and related topics has been established in the form of a punched card system. (g) During the summer of 1957, members of the project participated in the "Technical Peat Exchange Mission to the USSR". This mission made a thorough study of the Russian peat industry, visiting their fundamental and applied research laboratories, experimental peat bogs, chemical pilot plants, agricultural experiment stations, and full-scale establishments for the various processes of peat production and its consumption, both as a fuel and for chemical purposes. �27 RECENT SP000MENE DISCOVERIES IN NORTHWESTERN ONTARIO W. L. C. Greer Intensive prospecting following a discovery at Georgia Lake early in 1955 resulted in the finding of at east four major deposits of spodumene. Drilling has indicated reserves in excess of eight million tons, grading 1% Lj20 or better, Most of the showings are in the 1eardmore area. Post—ore diabase sills and dikes have complicated the situation from the mining point of view. production has been had from any deposit as yet. No �28 IRON ORES OF THE PACIFIC NORTHWEST L. C, Binon The existence of iron deposits in the States of Washington, Oregon, Montana and Idaho has long been known. The first use of these ores was as a flux in the smelting of non-ferrous ores. A small iron mining industry has existed intermittently on markets in the non-ferrous smelting, cement and paint industries. Several early attempts to establish an integrated steel industry in the Puget Sound area failed for a number of reasons, one of which The discovery of Precambrian sedimentary was the lack of suitable iron ore. iron formations in eouthwestern Montana and eir preliminary exploration during the past three years by large experienced mining companies indicates that a detailed study of this long-desired goal may now be practical. Fifty or more iron deposits of ten different types are known in the The Precambrian sedimentary iron formation and contact replacement deposits offer the atest immediate economic potential. Large tonnages of ferruginous laterite and titaniferous beach sand ores are available but the complex metallurgy has retarded their development. Ferruginous schists and siderites of sedimentary origin, bog ores, massive sulfide deposits and aSssociated gossans, and veins of primary iron oxide have all been explored or considered as resources for the production of metallic iron. Occurrences of each type are described, together with an evaluation of their economic potenarea. tial. �29 CHARACTERISTICS OF SOME IRON—BEARING FORMATIONS IN NORTHERN WISCONSIN E. L. Beutner Increased. interest in lean ores during recent years has led to re-examination of drift-covered areas in northern Wisconsin where magnetic anomalies had indicated the presence of iron-bearing rocks but here little, direct geological information was available. Exploration drilling was done at Magnetic Center in Iron County and near Butternut, and in Agenda Township in Ashland County. The characteristics of the iron formations and related rocks are described. It is suggested that the sedimentary and volcanic environments in which certain Middle and Upper Huronian sediments were deposited in the East Gogebic Range area also existed to the south and west in Wisconsin. While part of the iron bearing sequence resembles the typical banded cherty iron foniations of the better known ranges, there is also much material which, while iron bearing, contains little welldefined chert. The presence of abundant other minerals such as chlorite and mica seems to indicate that mud, possibly of volcanic origin, as well as silica, was being deposited with the iron-bearing sediments here. The rnagnetite-grünerite iron formation and black slate association in Agenda Township closely resembles the metamorphosed Upper Huronian Bijiki formation on the Marquette Range. �30 RECENT IRON FINDS IN NORTHWESTERN ONTARIO E. R. Mead Modern beneficiation techniques have changed the economic outlook for low grade iron deposits in the Canadian Shield. iron Most of the previously kncwn formations have been staked and inten prospecting has led to many new discoveries, The occurrences are discussed in belts groups according to the sedimentary in which they lie.. Studies of the new finds and their enclosing se- quences should throw new light on the complicate1 stratigraphy of the area1 �UNIVERSITY MINNESOTA Cohtiiuation Study of the General Extension Division . Center for Minneapolis il'. InstItute on April 21 - 22, 1958 Lake Superior Geology Registrants Aase, James H. 207 Christie Building Duluth, Minnesota Mair, Donald L. 2230 East Second Street Duluth, Minnesota Amborn, Ivan 2202 Ogden Avenue Superior, Wisconsin Amstutz, G, Chris Department of Geology. Rolla, Missouri Anderson, Cleveland-Cliffs Iron Company Ishpeming, Michigan 1958. Gerald J. Anderson, Jule R. 107 West Lincoln Avenue Tomahawk, Wisconsin Avery, John U. 551i. Jasper ail1y, Paul A. 3361 Republic Avenue Minneapolis 26,.Minnesota Bakkila, .Bartley, Henry N. U. Street Ishpeming, Michigan 11121 South Twelfth Street Virginia, Minnesota 213 Park Street Port Arthur, Ontario, Canada Bath, Gordon D. k Homevood. Place Menlo Park,. California Bayley, Richard. W. U. S. Geological Survey Homewood Place Menlo Park, California Beckman, Charles A. 635 Belobraidich, William Bennett, Hugh F, 1950 Erie Street Southeast Minneapolis lL, Minnesota 723 Sixth Avenue East Grand Rapids, Minnesota Geophysic Department University of Wisconsin Madison 6, Wisconsin 1957 �-2- Lake Superior Geology Beutner, E. L. Jones and. Laughlin Steel Corporation #3 Gateway Center Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 1957 i6io P. 0. Build.ing Bingham, Janice W. St. Paul 1, Minnesota 1950 Binon, Layton C. Northern Pacific Railway Company St. Paul, Minnesota Bleifuss, B. L. 11r832 Grand. Avenue. Duluth, Minnesota Boyce, Forrest U 11.31 Arlington Roa& Hoyt Boyuni, Burton H. Brernner, .Peter C. 1952 . Lakes, Minnesota 1952 Cleveland-Cliffs Iron Company 1911.1 Ishpeming, Michigan The North Bay Ontario, Canada. Broderick, Alan T. 805 Maurice Isbpeming, Michigan Brinley, Edward. H. 276 North Cumberland. Street Port Arthur, Ontario, Canada Bryan, Russell B.,. Jr. Burgan, Edward C. Burns, B. D. Dyers, Richard. R. Calainan, Joseph 1209 DeYoung Building San Francisco, Qalifornia 239 Bolsam Port Arthur, Ontario, Canada Stanleigh Uranium Elliot Lake) Ontario, Canada 610 Wolvin Building Duluth, Minnesota Box 173 Aurora, Minnesota Cameron, Eugene N. University of Wisconsin. Madison, Wisconsin Campbell, Vernon B. Box 521 Eveleth, Chapman, Rodger H, Minnesot.a 14.0 East 850 South Orem, Utah j Childs, Tappan (Mrs.) 1950 920 East Twenty-first Street Hibbing,. Minnesota 1930 �Lake Suoeior Geology Cotter, Ralph D. -3- i6io P. 0. Building St. Paul 1, Minnesota. Duhling, William N., Jr. 2113 Sixth Avenue East Hibbing, Minnesota Durfee, George A. Box 75 Dutton, Carl E. U. S. Geological Survey Eveleth, Minnesota Madison Effinger, FrederIck D. 1951 6, Wisconsin 14111, North Eighteenth Avenue East Duluth, Minnesota Everett, Jack V. 5325 Otsego Duluth, Minnesota Fegan, 2323- Second Avenue West Hibbing, Minnesota James A. Fetzer, Wa-ilace 1. 14692 West 227th Street Cleveland., Ohio Forbes, Box 711.3 Peter C Wakefield, Michigan Fritts, John 3. white Pine Copper Company White Pine, Michigan 1957 Gair, Jacob E. U. S. Geological Survey Denver, Colorado Gauvin, Jacques Steep Rock Iron Mines Canada Gehnian, Harry M. 3529 East Independence Street 1957 Tulsa, Oklahoma Gulls, Ronald N. 302 West Second Street Duluth Goodwin, A. N. 2, Minnesota Jamestown Canada Ontario, Greer, W. L. .C. 213 Park Street Port Arthur, Ontario, Canada Gross, G. A. eo1ogica1 Survey of Canada Ottawa, Canada Hakala, Harvey J. 5600 London Road. Duluth, Minnesota Rardenberg, Harry J. Michigan Geological Survey Lansing, Michigan 1957 �LakSuDerior Geology Geology Depa'tment Ease, Donald H. State University of Iowa Iowa City, Iowa Heising, Leonard F. Hoppin, Richard A. 1701 Merrrview Lane Ribbing, 1958 Minnesota Geology Department State University of Iowa Iowa City, Iowa Euedepohi, E. B. koO West Madison Illinois' Chicago, Eustad, James B. 616 Wolvin Building 1958 Duluth 2, Minnesota Iverson, Cedric L. 5113 London Road Duluth, Minnesota Jahren, Charles E. 810 Neola Austin, Minnesota Jaksa, Frank Anthony Jensen, Frederick 19)4.9 808 Adams Avenue Eveleth, 1956 Minnesota 370 Third Avenue South Park Falls, Wisconsin, Kelly, 1i11iam. C. 212k Brockrnan Boulevard Ann Arbor, Michigan Kisvarsanyi, Geza Box 631 Aurora, Klinger, P.. L. 521 Eleventh Street North Virginia, Minnesota Koebler, George P. .197 1958 Minnesota 215 Park Street Port Arthur, Ontario, Canada Kral,. Victor E. 1011 North Stephenson Avenue Iron Mountain, Michigan Kundert, Karl H. P. 0. Box ii6, Duluth 7, West Duluth Station Minnesota Leone, Ray J. White Pine Copper Company Lindgren, Donald W. Northern Pacific Railway Company St. Paul, Minnesota Lubker, Robert White Pine, Michigan E. 1728 Huliview Road Minneapolis 21, Minnesota 1957 �Lake Superior Geology Lucas, Raymond C. MacIntosh, A. N, -.5-. 6o. First Avenue Northtest Chisholni, MinnesOta 1957 Michigan College of Mining and. Technology Houghton, Michigan Mancuso, JamesD. Box 631 Aurora, Marsden, Ralph W. Mead, E. R Nillett, Frank Minnesota 6io Wolvin Building Duluth, Minnesota 213 Park Street Port Arthur, Ontario, Canada B., Jr. 1955 3361 Republic Avenue Minueapoli, Minnesota Moerlein, George A. Box 7.2 Mellen, Wisconsin Moore, G. Neely 215 Park Street Port Arthur, Ontario, Canada Moyle, Robert N. 1.032 Robinson Street Duluth, Minnesota Nunter, Yaziner J Eveleth Fee Office, Box 521 Eveleth, Minnesota Mutch, A. D. Falconbridge 1927 Canada Nielsen, Richard Box 606 Mellen, Wisconsin Neilson, J. N. Houghton, Michigan Niles, Harlan B. 917 North Fourteenth Avenue East Duluth, Minnesota Ohie, Ernest L Copper Range Company White Pine, Michigan Orsboro, J. T. 130 Laurie Street Duluth, Minnesota Ostenso, Ned 1950 1957 Geophysics Department University of Wis cons in Madison Owens, John S. 6, Wisconsin Ozark Ore Company Iron Mountain, Missouri 1953 �-6- Lake Simerior Geology palmer, Harris A.. Wisconsin Paulson, H. K. 300 Wolvin Building Duluth, Minnesota- Institute of Technology Platteville, Wisconsin l98 Plumer, Wayne L. 35 Fraser Location Chisho.m, Minnesota Potapoff, P. Falconbridge Ontario, Canada Randolph, B. Richard P. 0. Box I5 Taconite, Minnesota Reaa) William F. Geology Department, Lawrence College Appleton, Wisconsin Reed, Robert 522 Sunrise Court East Lansing, Michigan Reid 5115 Wyoming Street Duluth 14, Minnesota I. L.. Riedel, RobertWRichard Riord.an, . 198 Shuniab Port Arthur, Box 1 Deen'ood, Roberts, Hugh N. 306 Street. Ontario, Canada -Minnesota Lonsdale Building Duluth 2, Minnesota - Rogers, James B. i6io Post Office Building St. Paul, Minnesota Romanuck, Morley S. 1400 Torrey Building Duluth, Minnesota. Royce, J. Pickands, Sadler,. J. Mathers.& Company Duluth, Minnesota Steep Rock Iron Mines Steep Rock Lake, OntarIo, Canada F. Deerwood, Minnesota Sarja, Henry Schmidt, Robert Schwartz, G. G. M. Scofield, Lloyd N., Route 1, Box 19 Lanham, Maryland 237 Bedford Street Southeast nn, Minnesota 14020 Gladstone Street Duluth 14, Minnesota �take Su'erior Geology Sevensma, Pieter II. Slaughter,. Arthur E. 215 Park Street Port Arthur, Ontario, 1111 South Sixteenth Street Escanaba, Sneigrave, A • K, Canada Michigan. Houghton, Niciligan Spencer, George H, Jr., 3512 East Fourth Street Duluth, Minnesota Spiroff, Kiril Michigan College of Mining and Technology Houghton, Michigan Stephenson, 'Thomas E. • Strong, 329 Sixth Street South Virginia, Minnesota Box 126 Crosby, Minnesota Richard Terrel, Ronald L. '3361 Republic Avenue• Minneapolis, Miflnesota Thiel, Edward 2930 University Avenue Madison, Wis cons in Street Torreano, August F. 21.l1 East Fourth Duluth, .Minnesota Torreano, Peter F. Merideü Iron Company. Ribbing, Minnesota Trost, Lawrence C. M. A. rianna Company Crosby, Trow, James Minnesota 2700 Woodruff Avenue Lansing 12, Michigan Tusa, James E. Ishpemlng, Michigan Wade, Henry H. University of Minnesota Mines Experiment Station S Walker, 1958 Harry.C. Minneapolis 14, l955 Minnesota 1915 P.. 0. Box 116, West Duluth Station 1958 Duluth 7, Minnesota • Wier, Kenneth L. Wolff, J. F., Sr. Iron Mountain, Michigan 1515 Vermilion Road Duluth, Minnesota �1 S'Iollenzien, Thomas Peter 719 Great Northern Building St. Paul 1, Minnesota Wverch, U. V. YarcUey, D 1958 216 Second Street Northwest Crosby, Minnesota H 2107 Fairways Lane St. Paul, Minnesota Students Banks, Tom University of Minnesota. Blake, Roland. L. University of Minnesota Buchheit, Richard University Gindzwill, Don Michigan Inztltute of Thnology of Minnesota Gunderson, James in Hendrix, Thomas ti1S COflS Herubin, Robert University of Minnesota Hudson, Iowa' Robert F. State University Johnson, David University of Minnesota Krueger,. University of Minnesota Harold. W. Quirke, Terence T.., Sargent, Kenneth A.. Sato, Ftotoaki Jr. University of Minnesota Iowa 211 Warwick Southeast Minneapolis 1k, Minnesota Scheerer, Paul Wisconsin Trent, Virgil A. 6887 Minock Street Detroit 28, Michigan iihe Ian, James A. Williams, Lyman Gruner, John W. University of Minnesota 0. Iowa State University Iowa State University � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology Text A resource consisting primarily of words for reading. Examples include books, letters, dissertations, poems, newspapers, articles, archives of mailing lists. Note that facsimiles or images of texts are still of the genre Text. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology: Proceedings, 1958 Description An account of the resource Proceedings of the Institute on Lake Superior Geology. University of Minnnesota, Duluth, Minnesota. April 21-22, 1958. Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1958 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource PDF https://digitalcollections.lakeheadu.ca/files/original/1135262d1a5298d29e3c363c4105c2ed.pdf 63c696da89ec3e7d6be8893811b37078 PDF Text Text FTh'PH ANNUAL MEETING INSTITUTE ON LA1 SUPERIOR GEOLOGY April 13 - lIe, 1959 UNIVERSITY OP MINNESOTA Center for Continuation Study of the General Exteneton Division Minneapolis lie �TAJE OF OF CONTENTS CONTENTS Page i. i ii CempuB Buildings Map of CamPUS Parking Facilities FacilitieB Map of CaInPUB Campus Parking 1 Progrwn Program 33 LiBt List 17 of Speakera Speakers Hydrothermal and The Genetic Genetic Meaning Meaning of of the the TerniB Terms Hydrothermal ..... ....,.. Replacement.. .. 2]. • .. . .. .. .. .. .. . . ... ... s1•S .G. CC. • AB1BtUtZ Amstutz in West-Central WeBt-Central Geomorphology in Current Research ReBearch in Glacial Geology and Geomorphology F. Black .•.•••.• ......• ,•, . .... ... .....Robert •1I .Robert F. Wiaconsin..........o. o....o... . 0.. o... e5SGSSG•SS WiBconBin. .. . ..••. .os ai 6 Geology ofof the the Greenwood Mine - Mine - A Hard Ore Producer on the Greenwood The Geology .Alan T. Broderick MarQuette . .. ..,....... .•..•. . MarQuette Range, Range,Micbigan.. Michigan..... 18 H.Dott, Dott, Jr. Jr. Tillite orSubaqueOuB Slide2,..........u.............c..R. H. 25 The The Geology Geology and and S 5 Electromagnetic ..,.......• .••. DepoBitB of the Mount Wright Map Area, Quebec Iron Deposits Duffell •II...S •S •• Duffell ,, ,... SD C ... ••, .. .. .. ... .,• Canada....,..... Canada.... Newfoundland, • Nefodld, ••• ..••.•• . s..... Studies of the Lake Superior Iron RangeB..................c......e.....sF. C. FriBchknecht, E. Ekren Ranges.,.....,,..........c..o..,e.....sF.C.Fri8cfleCht, E. B. B.Ekren 88 AgeB in in the the Northern Northern Cordilleran Cordilleran Region.........PaUl Region........Paul W. W. Gast GaBt precambrian Ages Precambrian 10 Summary of Radioactivity Radioactivity Dating Dating of of the the Precambrian Precwnbrian Rocks Rocks of of Summary of' S. Goldich, A. 0. Nier 2k ProblemB Problems in Northern New England Stratigraphy.....e.,......Johfl Stratigraphy.....e..s.....Johfl C. Green 11 Application of the the Gravity Gravity Method Method to to Iron Iron Ore Ore Exploration....W. Exploration...W. 7. J. Hinze Hinze 7 InveBtigationa Investigations in the Precambrian of the Bighorn Mountains, Mou2tainB, Wyoming..,..................R. A. Hoppin, R. F. Hudson, Wyoming.....................R. Hudeon, K. A. Sargent Origin of Iron Formation...,...............HeflrY Formation,..,,.....,........Henry Lepp 1k The Chemistry ChemiBtry and 27 Structural Structural StudieB Studies in in the the Thom8on Thomson Formation, Formation, Carlton Canton County, County, ,,• • . . .5 MinneBota... ..,,,, ..... . , .•. ,,. ••,•• Minnesota... , .1,Louis ,LouiB •• ...... ...• , . . Mattaon A. Mattson 23 Mineral Exploration Exploration in in Southern Southern Baff Baff in in Island, Island,N.W.T...,JanleB N.W.T....James M. M. Neil8on Neilson 9 Use of Precambrian Precambrian Calcareous CalcareouB Alga]. Algal. Colonia Colonia as a IndicatorB Indicators PoBBible UBe Possible C •• Nordeng £tephan C Nordeng •. . ... .£tephan ,, •• , .. Polar Shifts.. BhiftB........ of Polar ..... . Is•••• . . . ••. ••••• e e s o..,...... �TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Page 19 Geology of the Iron Formation Occurrence Near Keminietikwia, John M. lvi. Ohison Ohlson .. , .• ., • . ..,1John .. . .. .e••, . . . . . ,.... . . . . ,,,.1 . • ., •. Ontario. .. . 11*..... Ontario.... . • . . .. . . .. . . .. 22 Geology of of the the Lake Lake Albanel Albanel Iron Iron Range, Iane, Nistasaini Nistasaini Territory, Territory, Jr. Quirke, Jr. ,Terence Quebec....o..,.................o..s......,....o.TerenCe T. T • Quirke, Quebec... . 12 F. Read Read Geochemical Sampling Sampling of of Lake Lake Bottoms Bottoms in in Winter...,...,..William Winter..,,...,..William F. 26 E. Sloan Sloan The Cretaceous System System of of Ninnesota..00•...,..0•.,..i,o...Iobert Minnesota.00•......0•.,..i,....Robert E. 13 13 M. Swain Swain Amino Acid Acid Distribution Distribution in Lake Deposits..........,..FrederiCk Deposits.,....,..,..Frederick 14. Amino .. .. .. ,•,, ,, ,... . , . . .. • . . .,• • . . . 1 l The Petrogenetic and Economic Implications of the Quantitative Mineralogical Variation Within a Large Granite Complex... Complex. .. .. .. . . . ..... .. . . . .., , . ..... , . .. . ... .E. .E. H. Timothy Whitten ., . . ..,. ......... .. . . .... 20 20 Pleistocene Pollen .fl. E. E. Wright, Wright, Jr., jr., Magnus Magzus Fries Pleistocene Pollen Studies Studies in in Minnesota. Minnesota..H. Fries �\ \\\ S S / p P I R IV ER �I. •IIIIs 1 MINNEAPOLIS CAMPUS PARKING FACILITIES •I C9 096 4— C25 L C - CR3 REA RE NOVEMBER 195B, NOVEMBER 1958, REVISION REVISION CONTRACT PARKING MPLS-ST PAUL BUS ROUTE BUS STOP PARKING LOT -- LOT ENTRANCE $d **V #ItI? �1 OF MINNESOTA MflNESOTA UNIVERSITY OF Center for Continuation Study of the GenerE1 Extension General Extension Division Division 1I Minneapolis l4 Institute on on Lake Lake Institute 114, 1959 April 13 - 14, Superior Superr_Geo]9 Geolo PROGRAM Monday, April 13, 1959 8:00 - Registration 8:"5 8:45 and coffee hour, Center for Continuation Study end SESSION I** Room 14, Room 4, MechLnical Engineering Building Co-Chairmen: E. N. Cameron, Richard A. Hoppin toOrder.....,......,.,......D..........,..,..,...F1'edE. Berger 9:00 Call toOrder.....................D...........,..e..,...FzedE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .George A. Thiel 9:10 Welcome. . ,................... ...... . OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR ON STUDIES OF ELECTROMPGNETIC STUDIES 9:25 ELECTROMAGNETIC . . . . .. . . . . . •1 , • • . . . . .F. Frischknecht, E. B. Ekren* RANGES. . ORE PRODUCER ON TBE PRODUCER ON THE HARD ORE GREEI'WOODMINE MThE -- A HAR]) 9:50 THE GEOLOGY OF THE GREENWOOD 9 5O ... .. . 10:15 MABQUETrERpNGE,MICuIGAN,,.e........o..s.......AlanT.Broderick MARQUETTE RANGE, MICHIGAN,,.,.,...,....,,....,....A1anT. Broderick INVESTIGATIONS IN OFTHE THE BIGHORN BIGHORN )UNTAINS, PRECAMBRIAN OF INTHE TI PRECAMBRIAN A. Sargent A. Hoppin, Hoppin, R. R. F. F.Hudson*, Hudson*, K. K A. Sargent R P. WYOMING NORTHERNCORDULERPN CORDELLERPN REGION,......PaU1W. W.Gast Gast 10:140 ECAJv1BRIANAGES AGESIN INTHE TI NORTHERN REGION,...ae.Paul 10:40 PRECAMBRIAN CALCP1REOUS ALGAL ALGAL COLON IA AS POSSIBLEUSE USEOF OFPRECAMBRIAN PRECANIPsI' CALCP1REOUS COLONIA AS INDICATORS 11:00 POSSIBLE 11:00 Step in C. C. Nordeng Nordeng POLAR 5HIFTS ,s..s. •, •. OF POLAR SUI'1WRY OF OFRADIOACTIVITY RADIOACTIVITY DATJiG DATINGOF OFTKE THE PRECAMBRIAN PRECAMBRIAN ROCKE ROCKS OF OF 11:25 SUMMARY A. 0. 0.Nier Nier MNE3OTA,.,...,.oo..,,,.....o.o.g.......,S,S. Goldich*, S. Goldich*,A. 12:00 Luncheon, Center for Continuation Study 12:00 ..,.. ... ..,.. .. •. SESSION II SESSION 4, Mechanical Room Mechanical Engineering Building Room 14, Marsden, James Trow Co-Chairmen: Ralph W. Mareden, Hinze .W. 3. 3. flinze V1ETEOD TO IRON ORE ORE EXPLORATION. EXPLORATION. .W. 1:30 APPLICATION OF THE GRAVITY METHOD F. Read WINTER0 LAKE BOT'rOMS BOT'IO! IN WINTER........,William 2:00 GEOCHEMICAL SAMPLING SA!PLING OF LAKE 2:00 GEOCHEMICAL DEPOSITS......3....Frederick M. Swain 2:25 AMINO ACID DISThIBUTION DISTRIBUTION IN LAKE DEPOSITS......,.....Frederick 2:50 Coffee Break ORIGfl OF OF IRON IRON FORMATION..,. FORMATION..,.,e..u.......sflenry o e . . .... .. .. .Henry Lepp 3:20 THE CHEMISTRY AND ORIGIN IMPLICATIONS OF THE QUANTITATIVE A1D AND ECONOMIC THE PETROGENETIC 3:45 3:145 LARGE GRANITE GRANITE MINERALOGICAL VARIATION WITHIN A LPIRGE H. Timothy Timothy Whi Whitten tten ,. ... ..E. .E • H. • •. • •• 10 COMPLEX. COI4PLEX. o . cc ore , • eS . ••S e • e . cc eeo AND 4:10 THE THE TERMS HYDROTHERMAL 14:10 TI GENETIC OF T TERMS HYDBOTHMAL GENETIC ?ANING MEANING C, .Amstutz Amstutz REPLACENENT..,cc,ac.c.,.sos....,o,ab,.eo..soG,..I...cG. • .. .. . .G. Ce REPLACEMENT.., • • • . 1013 bIle OS 110 , junior Ballroom, Third Floor, Coffman Memorial Union Building 6:30 Dinner, \inior Presiding: Donald M Davidson Donald M. Davidson Speaker: John W. Gruner "140 YEARS IN COLD "40 YEARS Topic: COLD AND MD HOT HOT WATER" WATER" .......William •., S •. .•• * ** * Indicates Speaker Five minutes for discussion diecussion are allowed after each paper, throughout the program the �Lake Superior Geology 2 Tuesday, April Tuesday, April ].14l959 lI,l959 III SESSION SESSION III Room 14, Mechanical Engineering Building Eo Dutton Co-Chairmen: Jack L. Hough, Carl B0 Co-Chairmen: 9:00 9:25 9:145 10:10 10:10 lO;30 10 :30 H. Dott, Dott, 31. Jr. TflLITE OR TflJLITE OR SUBtQUEOUS SUBAQUEOUS SLIDE?.*....o............i....i..R. H. KAMINISTIKWIA, GEOLOGY OF THE TEE ON FORMATION OCCURRENCE NEAR KANINISTIKWIA, Ohlaon M. Ohison , ... ,,John ,John M. c..s.s . . . .ci. e... •. •a. .o . . . , •• ..o.o. . . so....•.. ONTARIO. .... .... css ,, s.o.s.... Wright, Jr.*, MINNESOTA.........0..H. H. Wright, Jr.*, PLEISTOCENE POLLEN IN IN PLEISTOCENE POLLENSTUDIES STUDIES MINNESOTA........0..H. E. Magnus MagnusFriea Fries Coffee Break Break Coffee INWEST-CENTRAL WEST-CENTRAL GEOLOGY AND GEOMDRPHOLOGY CURRENT RESEARCHIN INGLACIAL GLAC IAL GEOLOGY AND GEORPHOLOGY IN CURRENT RESEARCH F. Black Black F. RANGE,MISTASSDU MISTASSINI LI ALBMIEL lO:O GEOLOGY GEOLOGY OF OFTHE THELANE 10:50 ALBANELIRON INONRANGE, Quirke,Jr. Jr. TERRITORY, QUEBEC..u,..,,...os,po.3..c..c....oTerenceT. QUEBEC,.,,.,,,,......0•3.......,.0TerenceT.Quirke, TERRITORY, BAFFINISLAND,N,W0T...Janies ISLAD,N.WT..James M. SOUTHERN BAFFIN M. Neileon Neilson MDERMJ EXPLORATION IN SOUTHERN 11:15 MINERAL Center for for Continuation Luncheon, Center Continuation Study Study 12:00 Luncheon, SESSION IV 14 Mechanical Engineering Building Room 14, Co-Chairuien Cedric L. Iverson, Ivereon, Donald W. Lindgren Co-Chairmen: 1:30 PROBLE1 PROBLE1 ININ NORTHERN NORTHERN NEW 1:30 NEW ENGLAID ENGLAND STRATIGRAPHY..,s..e..e.oJohn STRATIGRAPHY..., lie . . .0John CC.• Green 1 :55 DEPOSITS OF WRIGHT MAP MAP AREA, 1:55 THE THE GEOLOGY OFTILE TILE4JUNT UNT WRIGHT GEOLOGY ANDON ON DEPOSITS NEFOUDLAIqD,CANADA.c.,.,......,.,,.ç.0...t,..S,Duffell QUEBEC NEWFOUNDLAND,CANADA.cca...............c.ee...e..S.Duffell 2:20 2:20 T] SYSM OF MINNESOTA.0...........,....,Robert MINNESOTA.0.,..........,....,Robert E. E. Sloan Sloan THE CRETACEOUS CRETACEOUS SYSTEM 2:145 FORMATION, CARL'ION STRUCTURAL STUDIES CARLTON COUNTY, STRUCTURAL SIUDIES IN COUNTY, IN THE ThOVEON FORMATION, MINNESOTA. . .. MINNESOTA. .. • ..... ,1 •.• . . . .. ...... I•I •,. ,•. •. .• .. s...., .. .., ,• ... . .. .. .,.. .. . .Louls .Louis AA •• Mattson M * * Indicates Speaker Speaker SPEANERS SPEAKEBS G. C. C. AlTUTZ0................Departxnent AlTUTZ0................Departxnent of of Geology, Miseouri G. Geology, MissouriSchool School of ofMinea, Mines, Rolla, Rolla, Miseouri Missouri FRED FRED E,B, BERGER..,,..........Director, BERGER..,...,,,....Director,Center Centerfor for Continuation Continuation Study, University of University ofMinneBota, Minnesota, Minneapolia, Minneapolis, Minnesota Minnesota ROBERT F. ROBERT F. BLACK........,..oa.oDepartment Wisconsin, BLACK,......,...c.oDepartfllent of of Geology, Geology, Univer8ity of Wisconsin, Madiaon, Wisconsin Wi8consin Madison, ALAN T. T. BRODERICK,.5........,,Chlef BRODERICK,.,,.,..,,,Chlef Geologiat, Geologist,Inland Inland Steel Steel Company, Company, Iahpeming, Ishpeming, Michigan EUGENE N. CAMERON..,.,,,,..,,professor EUGENE CAI4ERON....,........Profeaaor and and Head, Department Department of of Geology, Geology, Univeraity of Wisconsin, University Wiaconain, Madison, Wisconsin Wisconain DONALD M, DAVIDSON.,.,..,,.,.Preeident, Longyear Company, DAVIDSON.,,....,,...President, B. E. JJ Longyear Company, Minneapolis, Minneapolia, Minneaota Minnesota ROBERT H. DOPr, ....,.Departnient of Geology, University of Wisconsin, Wiaconain, Madison, Wisconsin STANLEY DUFFELL......0.50.,...Geologjcal DUFFELL.. . Survey Survey of of Canada, Canada, Ottawa, Ottawa, Ontario Ontario CARL B. E. DUTTON...............Regional Geologist, Geologiat, U. U. S. S. Geological Geological Survey, Madiaon, Wisconsin Wisconain Madison, E. B. B. EI{EN......eo..oe...,s..Qeophysics EI{EN...s..eo...,,....Geophysics Branch, S Geological B. Branch, U S. Geological Survey, Survey, Federal Center, Center, Denver, Denver, Colorado Colorado H. DOTT, ....,.Department of .. .. . ....Geological �Lake Superior Geology SPEAIRS SPEAKERS (Continued) MAGNUS FRIES..................Research A880ciate, MAGNUS FRIES..................Research Associate, Department Department of Geology, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, MinneapoliB, Minnesota FRANK FRISCHKTTECHT.....,.....Geophysics FRISCHKNECHT......,.....Geophysics Branch, Branch, U. S. Geological Survey, Survey, U. S. Federal Center, Denver, Denver, Colorado Colorado PAUL PAUL W. W. GAST............. GAST.................Aaeietant ....Aaeietant Profeesor, Professor, Department Department of of Geology, Geology, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota SAMUEL S. SAMUEL S. GOLDICH.......,.,..Profe8eor, GOLDICH...........Professor, Departznent Department of of Geology, Geology, University of of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota Minneeota JO C.C,GREEN...............,.Department JOHN GREEN................Departznent of of Geology, Geology, Univereity University of Minnesota, Minnesota, Duluth, Minziesota Minnesota Duluth, JOHN GRUNER...,............Profeseor, Department JOUN W. GRtJNER...,..........,,Professor, Department of of Geology, Geology, University University of of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota W. J. HmZE................,..Aeeistant HmZE.............,.,..,Assistant Professor, Profes$or, Department of Geology, Michigan State University, East Lansing, Michigan RICHARD A. HOPPIN............Department of Geology, State University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa JACK L, L. of of Geology, Geology, University University of of Illinois, Illinois, Urbana, Illinois R. F, flJDSON,,.,....,,..,.,...Graduate HUDSON........,...,.,,.,Graduate Student, B. Student, Department Department of of Geology, Geology, State State University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa CEDRIC L. IVERSON.........,..,Oliver IVERSON....,...,,..0Oliver Iron Mining Division, U. S. Steel Corporation, Duluth, Minnesota HENRY LEPP......)..o..,......Aseociate Professor, Professor, Department Department of of Geology, University of Minnesota, Duluth, Minnesota DONALD W. LINDGREN.........,..Chlef LINDGREN.......,,,..Chief Mining Geologist, Northern Pacific Railway Company, St. Paul, Minnesota RALPH W. ....., ,... ..Manager, Geological W. MARSDEN.. MARSDEN......,......Manager, Geological Investigations, Investigations, Oliver Oliver Iron Iron Mining Division, U. S. Steel Corporation, Duluth, Minnesota LOUIS A. A, MATTSON,,..,....,,,..Graduate MATTSON,.....,.,.,...Graduate Student, Department of Geology, University of University of Minnesota, Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minneapol1, Minneaota Minnesota JAMES M. NEILSON.........,....Department NEILSON..,e...e.,,...Department of Geology, Michigan College of Mining and Technology, Houghton, Michigan ALFRED 0. NIER................Head, School of of PhyBics, Physics, University University of of Minnesota, Minnesota, NIER.o..........,,.Head, School Minneapolis, Minnesota 7. N. M. NOLPE..................Deari, NOLPE........,,0,.......Dean, General Extension J, Extension DiviBion, Division, University University of of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota Minneaota STEPRAN C. STEPHAN C. NORDENG.......,...,Assjstant Professor, Department Department of of Geology, NORDENG,..,.,,..,,As9istant Professor, Geology, Michigan College of Mining and Technology, Houghton, Michigan JOHN M. O}ILSON...,,.o..o,.....Asejstant O}ILSON.o..,.o..o......Assistant Geologist, Inland Steel Steel Company, Iron River, Michigan TERENCE T, QUIRKE, JRe.......Assistant JRc....,..Asaistant Professor, Department of Geology, Fork3, University of North Dakota, Grand Forks, North Dakota W, F, F. READ...,.....,....,,,.,Department READ......,.,.....,.,.Department of of Geology, Geology, Lawrence College, Appleton, Appleton, Wisconsin Wisconsin K. K. A, A, SARGENT...g,....,.,...,,State S.ARGENT..,go....g.,,..,State University University of of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa ROBERT E, ROBERT , SLOAN....., SLOAN.o........,.oAasistant ....,... .Assistant Professor, Department of Geology, University of University of Minnesota, Minnesota, Minneapol1.s Minneapolis Minnesota Minnesota �4. 4 Superior Geology Lake Superior SPEAKERS(Continued) (Continued) SPEAKERS F, M. SWAIN..,.e.,,,.,.e...oe.PIOfeSGOr, SWAIN.e..e...,.,.e...oe.P1OfeSSOr, Department of Geology, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota and Chairman, Department GEORGE A, Department of of Geology, Geology, A. THIEL...............Professor THIEL..............Professor and University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota TROW. ................ ..Department of Geology, Michigan State University, JAI4ES JAMES TROW....................Departnlerlt East Lansing, Michigan E. H. H, T, WHITPEN..,...........Departnent WHITPEN.............Department of of Geology, Geology, Northwestern Northwestern University, University, Evanston, Illinois JR...,.,.......Associate Profes8or, H. E. WRIGHT, JR....,,,,..,...Associate Professor,Departixent Department of Geology, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minneapolia, Minnesota �5 ELECTROMAGNETIC STUDIES OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR IRON RANGES F. C. Frischkneoht and E. B. Ekren U. S. Geological Survey, Denver, Colorado In the past two years the U. S. Geological Survey has made experimental electromagnetic studies over several of the iron ranges in the Lake Superior region. The three principal objectives were to evaluate electromagnetic methods as a tool for locating directly oxidized iron ores, to test electromagnetic methods of tracing taconites that are known to have high electrical conductivity, and to determine if electromagnetic methods could be used to estimate the magnetic susceptibility and magnetite content of magnetic strata. In the areas tested in the Cuyuna range it was not possible to locate directly oxidized iron ore beneath the 90 feet of drift present. It was possible to trace the contact of the hanging—wall and iron formation by following a graphitic or other conducting bed along the contact. In the Gogebic range individual members of the iron formation were traced as conductors by conventional electromagnetic methods. The foot-wall quartzite and iron formation contact was readily located, but the hanging—wall iron formation and slate contact was difficult to locate because of conducting strata within the slates. Unless special electromagnetic techniques were used, some drilling control was necessary to define accurately the hanging wall contact of the iron formation. A variable-frequency electromagnetic technique, which was tried on the Gogebic range, showed promise as a practical method for distinguishing between tacoriite, which has high electrical conductivity and high magnetic susceptibility, and graphite, which has high electrical conductivity, but low susceptibility. The same variable-frequency technique was also useful in estimating the magnetic susceptibility and magnetite content of magnetic strata. �6 THE GEOLOGY OF THE GREENWOOD MINE -- A HtBD ORE PRODUCEII ON THE MARQUTTE RANGE, MICHIGAN Alan T. Broderick Inland Steel Company, Ishpeming, Michigan The Greenwood Mine has been a small but steady producer of specularite and magnetite lump ores since 1932, The total production to date has been about two million tons, this ore has come from relatively small, discontinuous bodies which lie in the 1ieinatite-chert facies at the top of the Negaunee iron formation and in the bottom of the overlying Goodrich conglomerate. The The formation strikes east-west and dips about 70 degrees to the north, the garnet zone of metamorphism. rocks are in All of as Structurally, the ore bodies are found in three environments: contact with the Goodrich conglomerate; wall irregular sheets along the hanging as irregular, steeply dipping, rudely tabular masses ("droppers" in the local mine terminology) and as irregular pipes that follow inverted troughs formed by folds or by the intersections of faults and/or dikes and the hanging wall. In textural and mineralogical detail, there are four distinct end member types of ore: conglomerate, i.e. pebble and sand-bearing hematite; "slaty1', i.e. fine-grained, finely laminated, alumina-rich specularite; coarse specularite; coarse granular magnet ite. The first two are found only along the hanging wall, the others are found in all locations. The conglomeratic and "slaty" ores at the top of the formation are believed to have been concentrated by beach and/or stream winnowing during the erosion period which occurred before and during Goodrich time. After folding, faulting and dike intrusion which left the rocks in about their present positions, the chert bands, in the iron formation were locally leached, leaving the iron-rich bands to form ore bodies. In other areas the volume-for—volume replacements of chart bands by iron minerals was the ore-forming process. At the same time, or possibly later, much of the hematite in irregular areas of iron formation, ore bodies and Goodrich conglomerate was reduced to equigranular magnetite. The magnetite areas contain vuggy quartz veins carrying tourmaline, pyrite, chalcopyrite and very coarse specularite. The writer proposes that this chemical activity was accomplished by a fluid medium which entered the mine area from below along channels least, by structural features. This activity therefore took place after these structural features controlled in part, at had been developed. Since the platy hematite in such structually controlled ore bodies deformed around magnetite grains, the same period of deformation either continued during and follpwed mineralization or a later independent spasm of deformation occurred. is �7 INVESTIGATIONS IN TIU HECANBRIAN OF TI BIGHORN MOUNTAINS, WYOMING R. A. Hoppin, B. F. Hudson, K. A. Sargent State University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa In order to better understand the structural evolution of the Bighorn Mountains detailed structural, petrographic, and petrologic investigations, under the direction of the senior author, are being carried out in the Precambrian crystalline rocks. The investigations are directed toward the solution of three intimately related problems: ones to what extent do Precambrian structures control the local Laramide faulting evident along the margins of the range; two, is the regional trend of the range due to the presence of a major Precambrian structural feature or does the trend reflect the prevailing Laramide stress pattern; three, is the uplift due dominantly to vertical tectonics or to folding by horizontal compression. Initial field investigations have been completed along the marginal portion of the east—central part of the range. As a necessary complement to the detailed study of the crystalline rocks, the minor structural Preliminary results features of the adjacent sedimentary rocks were mapped. indicate; a local control of Laramide tear faults, in a NlO—15E direction, by strong Precambrian shearing; no apparent Precambrian structure controlling the trend of the range; an intimate relations of petrography and petrology to structure; and, a difference in the nature of deformation during the early Precambrian and the Laramide. The field work for two investigations, which have the same One is an objectives as the present studies, will begin this summer. east—west section across the range, beginning in the vicinity of the North Fork of Crazy Woman Creek then west approximately parallel to Highway 16. The second is a study of the Precambrian structures of the Horn, where a striking mineralogical layering occurs. To date six Master's theses, dealing with the complicated marginal sedimentary structures, have been completed. Four of these, together with the area of the University of Iowa field courses extend continuously from Little Goose Creek south to the Horn region. The remaining two deal with the northwestern portion of the range in the Five Springs area. A new project is to begin this sumner in the southwestern part of the range. projects now in progress include petrologic studies of a Precambrian rare earth deposit in the Horn region, arid of several small ultrabasic bodies, exposed along Highway 16 close to the eastern margin of the range. .Additional �8 NORTHERN CORDILLERAN CORDILLERPN REGION PRECAMBRIAN AGES IN IN THE NORTHERN PflECA14BRIAN AGES W, Gast Paul W, Pati]. of Minnesota, Minne3ota, Minneapolis, Minneapolis, Minnesota Minnesota University of The ages number of occurrences of The agesof of rooks rooks and and minerals minerals in in aa number of occurrences of Precambrian rocks Precambrian rooks in inWyoming, Wyoming, Montana Montana and and Utah Utah have have been been determined. determined. Detailed izwestigation mdi— Detailed izwestigation of of aa small small area areain in the the Beartooth Beartoothuplift uplift indi- Preliminary studies studies cates aa period period of of rock cates rook formation forniation2750 2750 m.y. m.y. ago. ago. Preliminary upliftssuggest suggest that that Creek—Bridger uplifts in the Wind Wind River, River,Bighorn Bighorn and and Owl Owl Creek—Bridger in the be represented there. be represented there. also also this event this eventmay may uplifts indicate indicate Other studies In in the Bowarid, and Wasatch uplifts Other studies the Medicine Medicine Bow Precambrian rocks in southPrecambrian rocks in southego. another rock rock forming formingevent event1600 1600 my. my. ago. another old m.y. old One occurrence 1350 m,y. occurrence of of 1350 eastern Montana are also also younger. eastern Montana are younger, One has been beenfot.uxd found inincentral Wyoming. rocks central Wyoming. rocks has �9 POSSIBLE USE USE OF PRECA1'il)RThN FRECA)RIAN CALCAROUS CALCAREOUS ALGAL ALGALCOLONIA COLONIA POSSIBLE AS INDICATORS OF POLAR SHIFTS Stephan C. Nordeng Technology,Houghton, Houghton,Michigan Nichigan Michigan College of Mining and and Technology, some i'eliminarvresults results of investigations This paper paper presents presents some preliminary This on calcareous calcareous algae algae recently recently undertaken undertaken at atthe theMichigan Michigan College of on Mining and Mining and Technology. Technology. kona Twenhofel, Collenia icons Twenhofel, 1918, is briefly redescribed. of the the literature literature onon calcareous calcareous algae algae and andofof numerous numerous Study of occurrences besides those those in in the occurrences besides the Kona Kona dolomite dolomite in inNorthern NorthernMichigan Michigan have have which by which conclusions concerning the mechanisms led led the writer writertotocertain certain conclusions concerning the mechanisms by mostimportant important of of these The most these the are controlled, controlled, The the colonial colonial growth growth forms forms are activity of be greatest greatest is believed sunlight. The believed to to be be sunlight. The activity ofthe thealgae algae would would be is on those portions portions of of the the colony colony receiving the greatest greatestamount amountof of sunlight sunlight on those and therefore colonial thedirection directionfrom from and therefore colonialgrowth growth should should be be aa maximum maximum ininthe the vertical vertical which the Thus, the amount sunlightisis received, received, Thus, the maximum maximum amount of of sunlight axes of of the the majority of colonies axes majority of colonies in in aa bioherm bioherni ot' o' biostrome biostronie should should point point toward the equator. equator. toward the Measurements made Colleniakona konaindicate indicate the equator was Measurements made onon Collenia This is essentially 27° North North 200 O West West in in Kona Kona time, time, This is essentiallyininagreenient agreement with with 27° measurements made Mountain—Loretto, Michigan, area measurements madeononalgae algaeininthe the Iron Iron Mountain—Loretto, Ivlichlgan, area bedsofofthe theseine same age. in age. in beds If the If thetheories theoriesofofmany many proniinent prominent workers workersininthe thefield field of of tectonophysics tectonophysics can can be be given given any any credence, credence, changes in position of the poles and equator equator have poles and have been beenfrequent, frequent, if if not not constant, constant,throughout throughout geologic geologic time. It time. Itis, is,therefore, therefore,very verylikely likely that that algae algaecolonies coloniesfrom from widely widely separated separated areas areas growing growing at at the thesame same time time may may have have different different axial axialincliinclinations but should be close agreement agreement asas totothe nations but should be in in close thelocation locationof of the the equator, thus furnishing furnishing a possible equator, thus possible means means ofofcorrelation. correlation. be be Time methods of Timepermitting, permitting, methods of study study disoused. discussed. and proposed proposedfuture futurework workwill will and �10 SUIvIMARY RADIOACTIVITY DATINGOF OFT}E T}E OFOF RADIOACTIVITY DATING SUIvIMARY PECM1BRIAN PECM4BRIAN MINNESOTA ROCKS OF OF I4INNESOTA ROCKS and A. A. 0. 0. Nier Nier S. Goldich Goldich end S. 5. University of of Minnesota, Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota University Radioactivity dating supports aa three-fold Radioactivity dating three-fold division division of the aa two—fold than two—fold Precambrian rocks of the Lake Superior region rather Precambrian the Precambrian division as is is advocated advocated by Canadian geologists for division as for the three—fold division the three—fold division Canada; however, of Canada; however,aaconsiderable considerablerevision revision of of the suggested. used by the the Minnesota Geological Survey is suggested. used by Minnesota Geological Survey is by granitization granitization and a&1 Two major periods Two niajor periods of oforogeny, orogeny,accompanied accompanied by and 1.7 b y y approximately 2.6 2.6 bb yy and 1.7 b intrusionthat thathave havebeen been dated dated at granite intrusion at approximately Knife the Keewatin rocks and the Knife Keewatin rocks and division. the three-fold division. of are the basis of the three-fold are the basis Precambrian. Early Precambrian. Lake are assigned assigned to the Early Lakegroup, group,older older than than 2.6 2.6 bb y, y, are to the in Later Later The Animikie The Animikie group, group, formerly formerlyplaced placedwith with thethe Keweenawan Keweenawan group group in The (Medial) Precambrian. Precambrian, is assigned to the Middle (Medial) Precambrian. Precambrian, is assigned to the Middle Keweenawan group is isretained Late Precambrian. Precambrian. Keweenawan group retainedin in Late The makes the Precambrian, termiThe suggested suggestedclassification classification makes the Early Early Precambrian, termiArchean of the two-fold Archean of the two-fold nated by Algoman orogeny, nated by the the Algoman orogeny,equivalent equivalentto to the the inCanada; Canada; Middle Middle and and Late Late Precambrian Precanbrian are are classification commonly used in classification commonly used The The magnitude magnitude of of the the orogeny orogeny at at 1.7 1.7 b b y y equivalent the Proterozoic, Proterozoic, equivalent to to the uncertainty the uncertainty has appreciated in the past, pact, because because of has not not been beenfully fully appreciated in the of the of the granite intrusions. intrusions. of the age age of of many many granite b yy have have been been Metamorphism Metamorphism and end igneous igneous activity activityat at 1.3 1.3 — — 1.4 b elsewhere. dated region, and dated inWisoonsin, inWisoon3in, Michigan, Michigan, and and the the Sudbury Sudbury region, and elsewhere. of a y),although although apparently apparently not a Similarly not of Similarly the the Grenville Grenvilleorogeny orogeny (1.0 (1.0 b b y), mountain—buildingscale mountain—building scaleininthe theLake LakeSuperior Superiorregion, region, is is represented represented in in igneous activity. structural disturbances and in in igneous activity. disturbances and lesser structural solin solRadioactivity dating assistance in Radioactivity dating promises promisesto to be be of of great great assistance the problems of the Precambrian, although the limitations of analytiving the problems of the Precambrian, although the limitations of analytiving difficulties interpretation may may not cal and difficulties of of interpretation not be befully fully thethe cal procedures procedures and The The major major challenge, challenge, however, however, is is to to geologists, geologists, and and appreciated or appreciated or known. known. result only from the satisfactory solution of many of the problems will result only from the a satisfactory solution of many of the problems will a Fundamental geologic geologicinvestigainvestigaapplication of application of all allavailable availabletechniques. techniques. Fundamental tions, tions,including includingmapping, mapping, petrologic petrologic and and stratigraphic stratigraphicstudies, studies,are areneeded. needed. Results of radioactivitydating datingofofPrecambrian Precambrian rocks rock8 of ofMinnesota Minne8ota Results of radioactivity areas that that have have been beenpresented presentedatatpast pastmeetings meetingsofofthe theInstiInstiand adjacent areas Rb—Sr dating datingnow nowininprogress progress appears appearsto to support support tute are aresummarized. summarized, Rb—Sr tute useful termitermiearlier conclusionsdrawn drawnfrom fromK—A K-A dating. Development of a useful earlierconclusions problems. the Precambrianposes posesmany many problems. nology Precambrian nology for forthe �11 THOD TO OREEXPLORATION APPLICATION TOON ON ORE EXPLORATION GRAVITY METHOD APPLICATION OF THE GRAVITY W, J. Hinze J. Hinze Michigan State University, University, East Michigan State East Lansing, Lansing, Michigan Michigan The gravity The gravity method method has hasplayed playedananincreasingly increasinglyimportant importantrole role in the in the search search for for new new reserves reserves of of iron iron ore ore since since the thedevelopment developtnent of of This highly portable gravinieters gravimeters oapable capable of highly portable of aa high high degree degreeof of precision. precision. This method used in in the for methodhas hasbeen been used thesearch search forand andstudy studyofofdirect direct shipping shipping ores, ores, but has proven proven to be especially especially uaeful useful in in the the study study of of large large tonnage, tonnage, but itithas to be wide, near wide, near surface, surface, tttaconite "taconite typ& typett oreore bodies bodies which whichhave have been been the the priprimaryconcern mary concernofofthe the iron iron ore ore industry industry during during the thepast pastdecade. decade. The Thegravity gravity method methodwas was first first applied applied to to iron iron ore ore exploration exploration as as aa tool tool for fordetecting detectingnon—magnetic non—magneticores, ores, but but advantages advantages of this method over other exploration other exploration methods methods also also have havenade made it it useful useful under undercertain certain geologigeological conditions conditions in cal inthe thestudy studyof ofmagnetic magneticores ores and and regional structures favorable for for the the occurrence occurrence of iron iron ore. ore. However, the gravity method is restricted by which must restricted byseveral severallimitations limitations which mustbe berealized realizedand andunderstood understood In addition, addition, the the theapplication applicationofofthe themethod method is is to tobe be successful. successful. In ififthe full utilization methodisis dependenton onaacomplete complete understanding understanding Lu].]. utilization ofof thethe method dependent of the the density density relationships relationshipsofofores oresand an their contrast with the country count?y of contrast with the their rocks, rocks, This This is made particularly particularly difficult difficultby bythe thewide widerange range of densiis made ties of iron iron ores both positive positive and and ores which which can canlead leadto to the the association association of of both negative anomalies with ore bodies. bodies. The The result that the the negative gravity gravity anomalies with iron iron ore result is is that amount and quality quality of information information interpreted interpreted from the results results of of gravity gravity surveying surveyingisis aa direct function of the infornation the auxiliary auxiliary geological geological information available either either through throughgeological geological or or other other geophysical geophysical studies. studies. �12 GEOCHEMICAL SAMPLING OF LAKE BOTTOMS IN WINTER F. Read Read Williaxi F. William Lawrence College, College, Appleton, Appleton, Wisconsin Wisconsin In recent years, mining companies have carried out numerous stream sediments investigations of the heavy metal content content of of soils soils and and stream in an effort to locate concealed ore bodies. Little attention has been If mineralization is present beneath a lake, paid to lake sediments. heavy metals from this source may reach the lake bottom by groundwater circulation, or, under exceptional circumstances, by direct upward Anomalies produced in this manner should be distinct from diffusion. Anomalies anomalies due to inflowing streams, which are definitely concentrated around points of inflow. Winter sampling from an ice cover offers definite advantages deteriination of location, and (2) relative ease in in (1) precise determination handling of equipment. Severe cold can cause trouble, but this problem may be largely avoided by sampling either early or late in the winter equipment can can conveniently conveniently be be mounted mounted on on aa sma].l small season. The necessary equipment It includes (1) a power ice drill; (2) stainless fleet of toboggans. steel sampling sampling tube, tube, rope, rope, arid and winch; and and (5) (5) a supply of suitable A modified camp stove may be used to de-ice the sample containers. very cold cold weather. weather. sampling tube in very �13 AMINO ACID DISTRIBUTION IN LAKE DEPOSITS Frederick M. N. Swain Swain University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota The bottom sediments of a wide variety variety of of lakes lakes were were studied Free amino acids are rare or absent in for their amino acid content. the lake sediments, but amino acids ranging from less than 2 ppm to more The than k000 4000 ppm were obtained in acid hydrolygates of the sediments. amino acids probably occur as glutelin or scieroprotein scleroprotein types of proteins, substances in in these these sediments. as peptides or tiere to humic acid acid substances Neutral peat peat deposits deposits and and well well humif humified led organic organic lake deposits deposits yield neutral and acidic amino acids in approximate proportions of 85:15; alkaline maria yield neutral and 85:15; alkaline bogs and well humified organic marls oniliamino acids in proportions of about 75:25; acid peats contain basic amino acids in addition to neutral and acidic types. Incompletely hwnified amino huniifiedlake lake deposits deposits yield yield variable variable proportions proportions of all three amino deposits proportions of of amino amino acids acids in in well well huniified humified deposits acids. The stable proportions are believed to be related to the zwitter ion properties of amino acids. Lake sediments of of low low organic organic content content generally generally yield yield small small There is little or no evidence of a amounts of neutral amino acids. relationship between type of lake sediment and individual amino acids. In deep, well huniified humified lake lake and and bog bog deposits, deposits, study study of of the the amino amino acids should help to reveal the depositional environment and history. �:Lli. FORNATION AND ORIGIN OF IRON IRON FORMATION ORIGIN OF THE CHEMISTRY CHEMISTRY MID THE Lepp Henry Lepp Henry University ofoflvlixmesota, University Minnesota, Duluth, Duluth,Minnesota Minnesota remarkUnaltered sedimentaryiron ironformations formationsofofall all ages are remarkUnaltered sedimentary ages are Calculations Calculations based based on on 200 200 analyses analyses of of iron content. in ably uniform in iron content. ably uniform of the theMesabi Mesabi scattered samplesofofiron iron formation forniation fron fron various various parts parts of scattered samples Fe. of from show thatthat 67%67 fall the range range of from 25 25 to to 32.5% 32.5% Fe. and Cuyu.ria ranges show fall in in the ranges and Cuyu.ria ironstone of England of the Liassic Cleveland ironstone of England Similarly analyses of the Liassic Cleveland Similarly of of136 136 analyses averagecompositions compositionsfor for other other Published average Fe. Published between 25-30% Fe. 85 between 25—30% contain 85%contain post—Cambrian type, post—Cambrian type, iron formations, or iron formations, be be they they Keewatin, Keewatin, Huronian Huronian or 30% Fe. Fe. almost irwariably show from 25 25 to 3O almost irwariebly show from normal iron iron Although appreciable leaner than than normal Although appreciablequantities quantities of of leaner billions of the the many my billions that of formationare areknown known to exist, is significant significant that formation to exist, it itis (or at formation there there are are no no (or at least least explorediron ironformation of of tons tons of of geologically geologically explored than 40% Fe, concentrations of more than 40% Fe, examples of mineable prims concentrations of more very few) examples of mineable prim very few) iron of iron important property property of an important This uniformity of of composition conposition is an This marked marked uniformity It suggests It suggests origin. may be a significant clue to their may and it sediments, sediments, main, the the result in the the main, pre—and andpost-Cambrian post-Cambrianiron ironformations formations are, are, in that thatpro— processes. the same same geologic geologic processes. of the be a significant clue to their origin. composition points to aacomplete complete The m6rkeduniformity uniformity of of composition points to The marked inconsistent with with It isisinconsistent sedimentary origin for for the sedimentary origin the iron ironsediments. sediments. It iron. hypotheses involvingdirect direct maginatio maginatic (exhalative) (exhalative) sources sourcesfor for the hypotheses involving the iron. of terms of of composition compositionininterms Attempts to explain explain the regularity regularity of Attempts to are unsatissilica aixi/or abundances of iron and silica are unsatissolubilities and/or abundances of iron and relative solubilities relative iron forforcarbonate iron they do do not not account accountfor for the moreover, they the carbonate factory, and, moreover, At At present present the the most mostlikely likely explanation explanationisis that that iron iron was was availavailable deposition asasFe(HCO3)2 andthat that the the resulting resulting able at at the the site siteofof deposition Fe(HCO3)2 and This should should sediments of CaCO3 sediments formed formed by by coprecipitation coprecipitation of CaC3and andFeCO. FeCO, This Diagenetic replacement of sediment with with about about 24% Fe. Diagenetio replacement of CaCO3 produce produce aa aedinient as would content as Si02would wouldslightly slightly upgrade wouldany ary precipiprecipiupgrade the iron content by by S102 tation tation of ofFe(lJO3)2 Fe(lJO3)2 as as oxide. oxide. mations, mations. �15 QUANTITATIVE ANDECONOMIC ECONOMICIMPLICATIONS IMPLICATIONS OF OF THE THE QUANTITATIVE THE PETROGiNETIC THE PETROGINETIC AND MINERALOGICAL VARIATIONWITHIN WITHINAALARGE LARGEGRANITIC GRANITICCOMPLEX COMPLEX MINERALOGICAL VARIATION E. H. Timothy lt)hitten \t)hitten Northwestern University, Evanston, Illinois A new and very very powerful analytical technique has been used to study the mineralogical variation within a large inhomogeneous granitic This quantitative modal study was made possible by detailed mass. sampling (two specLraens specimens per sampling (two per 1/1+ 11)4.square square mile) mile) of of an an entire entire complex and the In this paper the petrogenetic use of an an IBM IBM 650 6O electronic electronic computer. computer. significance of the mineralogical variation is emphasized, but the success with anai1ses anaises of potentialities in in obtained with of accessory accessory minerals minerals suggests potentialities economic prospecting. The methods are general and applicable to any area, but are to the the extremely extremely well-exposed well-exposed 'older 'older granite' granite' of illustrated by reference reerence to Donegal, been mapped mapped recently recently ]Jonegal, Eire, Eire, because because the the entire entire Donegal Donegal Granite has been The nature nature of of the the complex complex is is outlined outlined so so that that on the scale of 6"/mile. The the significance of the analytical work can be appreciated. The 'older granite', granite'9 the oldest component of the Donegal Granite, is a single single structural structural unit unit measuring measuring some some 24 2k miles miles from north north to south. In the southeast it is characterized by dioritic migmatites which contain innumerable metasedimentary rafts; these relics comprise Northwards and westwards the rafts well—defined ghost-stratigraphy. ghost—stratigraphy. a well-defined granite and the granite changes to aa typical typical two-feldspar two—feldspar granite are lacking and the granite changes to are lacking leucocratic granite (colour kO) leucocratic granite (colour and thence to highly quartzose (quartz ' kO) Contact relationships and flow patterns indicate that away index index << 1o). l). from the inigmatitic migmatitic area area homogenization homogenization was was accompanied by by magmatic magmatic flow flow and stoping. Concomitant with the gradual compositional change to unusual micro-textures micro—textures quartzose granite granite (taking (taking place place over over 5—10 —lO miles), quartzose miles), unusual increase, and and these these suggest suggest that that microcline microcline arid and quartz partially partially replaced replaced increase, these relationships relationships imply imply the the of these minerals crystallized previously. All of Firstly, chemical operation of two successive petrogenetic rhythms. processes created granodioritic magma at the expense of metasediments now represented by relics relics within within the the migmatitic migmatitic diorite; diorite; thi6 this essentially essentially Secondly, another homogeneous magma was intruded into adjacent areas. chemical metasomatic metasomatic phase phase generated generated more more quartzose quartzose granite granite at at the the expense of part of the virtually solidified granodiorite. Eventually such end-products became mobile and were intruded as minor transgressive plutons within within the the 'older 'older granite' granite' parent parent(see (seeWhitten Whittenl957a l97a —— Proc. plutons Nag. vol. vol. 9)+, 9k, Royal Irish Royal Irish Acad. Acad.vol. vol.58B, 8B, pp. pp. 2k5—92; 2L_92; l957b l97b —— Geol. Nag. 2—39). pp. 25—39). A Swift automatic electrical point counter enabled accurate modal analyses to be made rapidly. By the method of least squares linear, quadratic, and cubic cubic area]. areal trend trend surfaces surfaces have have been been computed computed for for each each Strong most accessory minerals within the 'older granite'. major and mo8t �16 and consistent gradients (trends) are apparent. The residuals (difference between the observed and computed surface values) for each phase clearly define palimpsestic ghost-stratigraphy. In some areas the pattern of the residuals can be directly related to metasedimentary rafts visible wi.thin the within the granitoid granitoid rocks. In other parts of the complex, the residuals constitute the only only detected detected relics relics of of the the metasediinents metasediments which which were were extant prior to emplacement of the 'granite'; that is, the residuals reveal previously unsuspected ghost-stratigraphy ghost—stratigraphy which is harmonious with the regional structure. This discovery is of considerable petrogenetic significance. �'7 17 EANINGOFOFTITh TI TRNS TMS GENIC MEA1'IING TI1 GENIC TUE REPLACEKN WDRGiHERivIAL A1D HEPLACEKN Ii'DRG]HERiL AIW G. Amstutz G. C. Ainstutz of Mines and Metallurgy, Rolla, Missouri Missouri School of Mines ard Metallurgy, ways different ways The term hydrothermal h1drothermal has been defined in many difCerent by the authors using it. the shools sool of which reflect the ofthought thought represented represented by which reflect of "hydrothermal" given A cross section through through many many different different definitions definitions shows that practically all during the last one hundred and fifty years shows hydrothermal solutions solutions or or fluids fluids to be hypogene; most of authors assume hydrothermal There is much disagreement confusion There is much disagreement or or confusion magmaticorigin. origin. assume magmatic them assume nature epigenetic nature of hydrothermal however withregard regardto tothe the syngenetic syngenetic or epigenetic however with and processes. processes. deposits and that the theterm termhydrothermal hydrothermal should should proposed that and proposed shown and It isishere hereshown It epigenetic orig1i. origi. Hydrothermal not be Given given aa priori priori aa connotation connotation of epigenetic hypoene physico..chemicalconcept conceptwhich whichalso also includes includes the the concept concept ofofhypogene is aaphysico—chemical notinvolve involveany anytime time concept. concept. Hydrothermal rocks, origin; doesnot origin;but butititdoes (autohydrothermal syngeneti (autohydrothermal be epienetic deposits, alterations, etc. may be epigenetic or syngeneti alterations, etc. may deposits, no proof proof se no Hydäthermal nature is thus per se Hydióthermal nature is thus per processes, exhalations, exhalations,etc.). etc.). processec, epigenetic origin. origin. for epienetic for be said said for for the the term term replacement. replacement. This term same can can be the same Much the wa often wai often loosely loosely used used as has been somewhat somewhat aa ma€ic magic word word in in the the past past aid and take take Epigenetic Epigenetic replacements replacements are are possible possible and and synonymfor forepigenesis. epigenesis. aa synonym syngenetic replacesyngenetic replaceThey require require however however many many more more assumptions assumptions than than place. They ment. Also, in many cases, an assumption of replacement is not justified, physicou.chemically since simple contemporaneous contemporaneoua crystallization offers a physicou'chemiCally Thus also with regard to sound explanation explanation of of origin. origin. and geometrically sound change in time may fall this term it must be said that a compositional classified be claesified as syngenetic. syngenetic. within the time of formation of a rock and has to be igneous e.g. autohydrothermal autohydrothermal changes chawes in in igneous Examples are abtmdant abundant e.g. rocks; doloriitization dolomitization or or other other changes changes in in sediments which often take place from geometric and and geochemical geochemicalcriteria criteria from Various geometric etc. Various during diaGenesis; etc. durin€ diagenesis; deposits, Valley deposits, the Superior copper copper deposits, deposits, from the Lake Lake Superior 'rom the the Mississippi Mississippi Valley the genetic genetic meaning meaning of of and fromother otherore oredepos deposits areuBed usedtotoillustrate illustrate the its are and from terus hydrothermal and replacement. the the terms �18 TILLITE OR TILLITE ORSUBAQUEOUS SUBAQUEOUS SLIDE? SLIDE? it. Dott, Jr. Jr. it. H.H. ]Jott, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin Recent studies of turbidity current and associated slide deposits have opened new vistas to understanding many ancient sediments. sediments moving of sediments flow of Notably, the mechanisms of suspension and mass flow under influence of gravity provide provide means means of of transport transport of shallow marine or terrigenous clastics and organic remains to deeper water. Traditionsediments were ally, geologists geologists have have insisted insisted that that fl geosynclinal sediments deposited in shallow water because of abundant clastics. Furthermore, explained until until these these repetitious graded bedding was not satisfactorily explained Rhythmically-laminated sandstone, silstone mechanisms were evaluated. and mudstone associated with unsorted pebble and boulder beds have been rather universally interpreted as glacial varves and tillites respectively, geotectonics were were (arid (and and elaborate theories of ancient climatology and geotectonics are) erected upon this foundation. Concepts of turbidity current and slide deposition can best be such geosynclinal belts 8uch demonstrated in £n Mesozoic and Cenozoic strata of geosynclinal as the Pacific coast coast and and the the Alps. Alps. However, the interpretations can older fossiliferous older also be extended to certain more obscure and less fossiliferous (1957) reinterpreted reinterpreted Perinian Permian "tillites" "tillites' of northern northern Mexico, rocks. Newell (1957) Cretaceous and and Sanders Sanders (1957) (1957) challenged challenged glacial glacial interpretation interpretation for for boulder beds in Chile. Other examples were questioned long ago, but of the early dissenters dissenters were were little—heeded little—heeded in in the the "glacial "glacialenthusiasm" enthusias& of twentieth century. By analogy with well-documented turbidity and slide deposits of California and and Oregon, Oregon, it it is is reasoned reasoned that that the the famous famous Paleozoic tilliteu near Squantum "tillite" near Boston, Boston, Massachusetts Massachusetts possesses possesses so so many many similarities Submarine sliding of suspect. as to make the glacial interpretation suspect. rapidly deposited, deposited, volcanic—rich volcanic-rich sediments sediments is is proposed proposed as as an an alternate mechanisms of Absolute criteria for distinction of the two criteria for distinction of the two hypothesis. hypothesis. processes produce very poor Both produce very poor deposition are difficult to discover. sorting of fragment size and both can conceivably produce faceting and striation of pebbles. Only a preserved glacial pavement overlain by extensive, poorly—sorted till-like material (as in South Africa) seems unequivocal. General stratigraphic relations and tectonic setting serve In many geosyrigeosyrl— as as secondary secondary factors factors in in judging judging probability probability of of sliding sliding in Extending the reasoning, it appears that all ancient clinal clinal sequences. sequences. "tillites8 must be regarded with suspicion until critically re—analyzed "tillites" (as suggested by Crowell, 1957). Because of striking similarities of many Precambrian sediments and associated "tilhites" "tillites" to younger geosyn— order. clinal deposits, a re-evaluation re—evaluation of Precambrian glaciations seems in order. �19 GEOLOGYOF OF THE THE IRON IRON FORMATION FORMATION OCCURRENCE OCCURRENCE GEOLOGY ONTARIO NEARKAMINISTIKWIA, 1WiINITIKWIA, ONTARIO NEAR M. Ohlson Ohison John M. River, Michigan Michigan Iron River, Company, Iron Inland Steel Company, The iron formation near Kaministikwia, Ontario, outcrops Port within the valley of the Kaministikwia River, 18 miles northwest of Port Arthur, Ontario. Three vertically dipping strands of magnetite iron formation The rocks above and below the strike east-west to northeast-southwest. iron formation are volcanic flows, volcanic breccias, agglomerates, bedded and massive tuffs. The iron formation is highly magnetic and of red red stained stained chert, chert,hematitic hematiticmagnetite magnetite of beds beds1/Li." 1/LI." to to 3' 3' thick of consists consists of The iron formation white laminated laminated chert chert with with scattered scattered beds beds of of tuff. tuff. and white averages 600 feet in thickness. evidence to to determine determine the structural There is not not su.fficient sufficient evidence structural pattern in the Kaministikwia area at present. The three iron formations are either three stratigraphic units, one stratigraphic unit broken into segments by faulting, or two stratigraphic units, one of which is broken by faulting. faulting. into two two segraents segnents by The mineralogy of the iron formation together with the size of the quartz crystals in the recrystallized chert suggest that the iron formation is an original magnetite iron formation. �20 PLEISTOCENE POLLEN STUDIES IN MINNESOTA Fries and Magnus Fries H. E. E. Wright, Wright, Jr. Jr. and University of University ofMinnesota, Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minneapolis,Minnesota Minnesota of A program of study of the pollen content of the sediments of A selected Minnesota lakes and bogs has been initiated in the Geology Depart.. Depart.ment of the University of Minnesota with the aid of a grant from the Hill Family Foundation, for the purpose of working out the late-glacial and Sites have post-glacial vegetational and climatic history of the region. been selected with respect to the distribution of glacial drifts of different substages of the Wisconsin glacial stage and with respect to prairie). the present major vegetational provinces (conifers, hardwoods, prairie). Preliminary analyses for a buried peat layer near North Branch, Chisago County, suggest that the vegetation in this area during the Two Creeks interstadial interstadial interval interval about about 12,000 12,000 years years ago ago was was marked marked by by spruce spruce with many openings of grass, shrubs, and herbs. Analyses have also been made for a lake between drumlins about drwnlins were formed 30 miles north of Two Harbors in Lake County. The drumlins during the Cary subage of the Wisconsin glaciation, and the region was approached approached but but not not reached reached during during two two subsequent subsequent ice ice advances advances (Nankato (Nankato The first vegetation indicated after recession of the Cary and and Valders). ice was grass with perhaps both tundra and prairie plants and some spruce A pronounced but temporary influx of and willows on sheltered slopes. birch along with a reduction of spruce may record the warming of the Two Creeks (Mankato/Valders) interstadial, but the earlier Cary/Mankato interstadial is not recognizable in the pollen diagram. Subsequent changes involved increase increase of of pine pine to to aa maximum maximum about about halfway halfway through through the the post-glacial succession, along with a slight increase of oak, elm, and ash, suggesting a larger number of outliers of warmth-demanding deciduous trees than at present in this region. The latest horizons are marked by a decrease of hardwoods and a corresponding increase of spruce, fir and taniarack. tamarack. Glacial studies in the area indicate that the fluctuations of the Superior lobe and other ice lobes during the Cary, Mankato, and Valders subages of the Wisconsin glaciation probably exceeded 150 miles. Distinct climatic fluctuations are thereby implied, but the fact that only one of of the the two two possible possible interstadia]. interstadial intervals is suggested suggested in in the the implies either either that that the the pollen pollen studies studies are are not not yet yet suffisuffipollen diagraiu diagram implies ciently precise to to reveal reveal all all the the climatic climatic changes changes or or that that fluctuations fluctuations of the ice fronts were controlled not by gross climatic changes near the margin but by changes in conditions of snow accumulation or ice flow far back from the ice front. Continued studies will be directed particularly towards these problems of the late—glacial vegetational and climatic changes. �21 GEOLOGY AND AND GEOMORPHOLOGY RESEARCH IN IN GLACIAL GLACIALGEOLOGY CURRENT RESEARCH WISCONSIN* IN WEST—CENTRAL WEST-CENTRAL WISCONSIN* IN University Robert F. Black of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin A program of research on glacial deposits of Wisconsin and their 1956. The modification by geomorphic geomorphic processes processes was was begun begun in in the the fall fall of of 1956. Research assistant program is carried on part time during the school year. L. A. Bayrock has completed one academic year and Elizabeth H. Kissling and and Thomas Thomas H. E. Berg Berg are are on on their their first first and and second second academic academic years years respectively. respectively. It is yet premature to draw definite conclusions from many aspects of the various studies so this abstract must cover essentially the nature of the program. Airphoto mapping of glacial deposits in Pepin, Pierce, St. Croix, Dunn, Polk, and Barron counties has yielded information on the distribution of various erosional and depositional features such as pro—glacial and marginal channels, pre-glacial drainage ways, outwash and inwash kmes, crevasse deposits, kames, crevasse fillings, fillings, eskers, eskers, kettles, kettles, terraces, terraces, bess, bess, moraines, and areas of thin drift. Field checking during the winter months has established the reliability and usefulness of this approach. Quantitative geomorphic studies of the development of the drainage network in representative parts of the area are underway. It is anticipated that they will wIll aid in correlation of the older drifts. Bottom sampling of kettle lakes and drained lakes has just been started. Youthfulness of Cary-age features in northern and western parts of the area readily readily distinguish distinguish them them from from subdued subdued forms forms of of Tazewell Tazewell and and The has been confirmed by Farindale has been confirmed by Farindale age to the south and east. Farrndale (W_7L47, U. S. Geological Survey) and (W—7'+7, 1000 carbonlLI. dates two carbon—114. dates of of 29,000 29,000 + (Y—572, (Y-572, Laniont Lamont Laboratory) Laboratory) years years B. 3. P. P. from from Hammond and 30,650 + 1640 southeast Pierce County County and and in in Pepin Pepin Deposits in in southeast Woodville respectively. respectively. Deposits and Buffalo counties have eluded positive correlation, but are also thought to be Farindale in age. Widely scattered pebble and heavy mineral counts, which have just been started, and depths of oxidation and leaching of drift have not been reliable measures of age or correlation. Much old weathered drift obviously is incorporated in young deposits. Modification of glacial deposits by gravity movements under climates that produced permafrost is Tazewell ice-wedge casts have diagnostic diagnostic of of Tazewell Tazewell arid and older older drifts. been identified identified in in aa kaiiie kame north northofofRichmond Richmondand andin inaa kame kame at at River River Falls. Falls. Thawing of buried Farmdale ice beneath younger deposits was not completed until after Gary Cary deglaciation. In addition addition to to furthering furthering our our knowledge knowledge of of the the Pleistocene, Pleistocene results of the study study will will aid aid in in determining determining buried buried bedrock bedrock from from indicator indicator erratics, in mapping of soils, in locating locating and and evaluating evaluating supplies supplies of of ground water and construction aggregates, and in analysing foundation problems. *Finced by *Financed by the the Wisconsin Wisconsin Alurni Alumni Research Research Foundation Foundation �22 THE LAKE ALBANEL ALBANEL IRON RANGE, GEOLOGY OF THE MISTASSINI TERRITORY, QUEBEC Terence T. T. Quirke, Quirke, Jr. Jr. Terence Forks, North Dakota University of North Dakota, Grand Forks, Territory is is The Lake Albanel iron district of the Mistassini Territory comprises between l50—l7 and comprises between 150—175 located about 11.00 miles north of Montreal and investigation; square miles. Since 1952 the area has been under intensive laboratory investigations geophysical, geologic, diamond drilling, and out. have been carried carried out. Precambrian age. rocks in in the the area area are are of of Precambrian consolidated rocks All consolidated of the Sam Gunner group to The oldest rocks are sediments and voleanics volcanics These sedimentary rocks have the north north of of the the Lake Lake A].banel Albanel iron range. range. the Takwa Mountains complex. been intruded by granites and gneisses of the complex are Mountains complex are Resting with angular unconformity upon the Takwa conformably overlain turn are conformably overlain the Papaskwasati. Papaskwasati group, rocks of the group, and and they they in turn are All these groups lie to the northwest of the by the Mistassini group. complex to to Grenville metaiiorphic metamorphic complex Mistassini (Grenville) fault zone. The Grenville basic intrusions, arid basic intrusions, the southeast of the fault consists of acidic and orthogneisses and paragneisses. formations. From oldest The Mistassini group consists of five formations. doloinites, Boulder Bay Albanel doloinites, to youngest these are the Lower and Upper Albanel quartzite, Teniiscamie iron—formation and and Kallio slate. The Temiscamie quartzite, Temiscamie iron—formation iron—formation has been been divided into six members. members. iron—formation have formed formed from from the iron-formation iron—formation are are thought thought to tohave Minerals of the The first minerals to and original silica gel rich in iron and carbonate. an an form were chert, siderite and in some cases hematite, magnetite and perinto the the early haps minnesotaite. Due to the incorporation of iron into minerals there was a subsequent enrichment of magnesium, manganese and calcium. These three crystallized into a dolomite structure. of the Chemical analyses analyses have have been been made made of of each each of of the the members members of These analyses are compared with similar Temiscainie iron-formation. iron—formations. Because of the general rocks of other Precambrian iron—formations. similarity of these iron-formations it seems probable that they were formed under similar circumstances. �23 NL!ERAL EXPLORJiTION EXPLORIiTIONIN INSOUTHERN SOUTHERNBJWFIN BFFIN ISLAND, MUIEBAL NW.T. James N, M, Neilson Neilson James Technology, Houghton, Michigan and Technology, Houghton, Michigan Michigan MichiganCollege Collegeofof Iining Iining end The paper The paperpresents presentsananaccount accountofofthe theregional regional geology geologyof of the the features physiographic The main physiographic features The main southernmost partofofBaffin Baffin Island. Island. southernmost part from the from the Kingaite Kingaite Peninsula Peninsula to tothe theFoxe FoxePeninsula Peninsula are are described described and and related in the of mineral related to to the therock rocktypes typesexamined examined in the course course of mineral exploraexploralithology and Precambrian The lithology and stratigraphy stratigraphyofofthe the Precambrian and and Paleozoic Paleozoic tion, tion, The are considered considered in in general general terms, terms, and and the the age age of of certain certain rocks rocks is is rocks are The effects The effects of of glacial glacial onthe thebasis basisofofradioactivity radioactivity dating, discussed on dating, discussed erosion are erosion are described describedtogether togetherwith withthe theeffects effects of of deglaciation deglaciatioriwhich which The resulted in infeatures featuresindicative indicative of both submergencearid andemergence. emergence. resulted of both submergence geomorphic processes thisregion region produce conspicuousexamples examples geomorphic processesactive active in in this produce conspicuous of and lacustrine phenomena, of frost frostaction actionand andsurface surfaceweathering, weathering, fluvial fluvial and lacustrine phenomena, mass wasting, illustrated, mass wasting,patterned patternedground, ground,etc.; etc.;these theseare aredescribed describedand and illustrated. Mineral exploration Mineral exploration procedures proceduressuitable suitabletotothis this pert part of of Baffin Baffin Island Island are discussed diacuøsed with reference to photogeologic interpretation, are withparticular particular reference to photogeologic interpretation, techniques,climatic climaticconditions, conditions,transportation transportationfacilities, facilities, prospecting techniques, prospecting It is is conconother matters mattersthat that affect affect operations. communications, and and other operations. conimunication, cluded that exploration in in this thisArctic Arctic regionpossesses possesses certain cluded that miners], mineral exploration region certain definiteadvantages definite advantages and and also alsosome some obvious obvious disadvantages. disadvantages. It �24 2k ENGLAND STRATIGRAPHY STRATIGRAPHY PROBLEMS IN PROBLEMS IN NORTHERN NORTHERNNEJ NEJENGLAND John C. C. Green Green John University of Minnesota, Duluth, Minnesota University Minnesota metamorphosed The "New Hampshire Hampshire and and Vermont Vermont sequences's sequences" of metamorphosed Paleozoic geosynclinal rocks are separated by a oontact contact of uncertain Because very few geologists have significance called the Monroe fault. worked in both sequences, correlation of the two has been a problem. This problem problem was was increased increased by by the the establishment establishmentin inl94.2 19k2 of of the the Orfordville Orfordville formation beneath the Albee formation, hitherto the lowest in the standard New Hampshire sequence of Billings (1937): many geologists believe that the Orfordville is the equivalent of several formations higher in the New Hampshire sequence. This interpretation is supported by the recent discovery by the writer in northern New Hampshire of a different group of rocks (Aziscohos formation) in the supposed position of the Orfordville. Aziscohos is stratigraphically beneath the Albee, as determined by The Azisoohos graded bedding in in several several localities; localities; the the position position of of the the Orfordville Orfordville was was determined by plunges of minor folds alone. fornation is thus removed from the column, If the Orfordville formation correlation between the two sequences is made much easier, and such a The establishcorrelation is now accepted by many New England geologists. ment of the Aziscohos formation beneath the Albee agrees better with this correlation, since the Aziscohos resembles the formations of the Vermont sequence immediately below the Moretown, which is correlated with the Albee of New Hampshire. �2 MAP AREA. WRIGHT MAP OFTHE THE MT. 4RIGH DEPOSTTSOF MID IRON TIlE GEOLOGY PdD IRON DEPOSITS TIlE GEOLOGY CANADA NEWFOUNDLAND, NEWFOtJNDLAID, Q,UEBEC QUEBEC S. S. Duffell Geological Survey Survey of of Canada, Canada, Ottawa Ottawa ,, Geological Ontario The Mt. Wright map area has been prominent in recent years because of the active active exploration exploration by by major major iron iron and steel companies of the large deposits of concentratable iron ore that lie within its boundaries. The iron iron formation formation includes includes aa nuuiber number of of facies of which the most important granular quartz, specular hematite and isto of is an oxide oxide facies facies that that cons consists rich and quartz rich bands bands nagnetite. magnetite. It is noticeably banded with iron rich and resembles the itabirite formation of Brazil. Friability and coarseness assets in in the the separation separation and and concen-' concen* of grain of the material are important assets tration processes required for marketing. The area covers part of the southwestern extension of the Labrador Trough and lies in the Grenville subprovince of the Canadian Shield but close to the Grenville Grenville Front. Front. equivalents gneisses that represent metamorphic equivalentB Rocks involved are gneisses miles to the north are relatively of units of the Labrador Trough that 50 gneisse8 may be divided roughly into three bands uninetamorphosed. unmetamorphosed. The gneisses that transverse the area in a southwesterly direction. The central and amphibolite facies facie of of metamorphism. metamorphism. southern bands may both be included in the amphibolite associated only with rocks of the is They differ differ in in that that the the iron iron foriiation formation is central band. gneisses, hornblende-' hornblendeThe southern band consists of graphitic gneisses, structurally garnet gneisaes gneisses and and their their migmatitic mimatitic equivalents. These structurally biotite garnet stratigraphica]ly overlie overlie overlie the iron formation and are believed to also stratigraphically central band of acid a synclinal structure between the occur in in a synclinal structure betweexi They occur it, it. souththe southsimilar rocks rocks in in the intermediate biotite—hornblende biotite-hornblende gneieses gneisses and and similar to intermediate iS formation is The neises with which the iron corner of the area. The gneisses with which the iron west corner sct5 about two two sot5 associated form broad anticlinal structures in which folding about associated taken place. place. has taken of axes has rocks of of the granulite €ranulite of rocks northern band band of of gneisses neisses i$ The northern is composed composed of mineralogy and physical facies of metamorphism that strongly resemble in characteristics the charnockite rocks of Precambrian terrains of other continents. The lower grade amphibolite facies of metamorphism appears to and is is interpreted interpreted facies and have been emplaced emplaced on on the the higher higher Grade grade granulite granulite facies being younger. as being younger. as Gravity Gravity surveys in the area by the Dominion Observatory proved extending across across the the existenceof ofa a phenomenally low low gravity anomaly extending the existence phexiomenally gravity anomaly of the transition zone between south of the transition zone between area direction just just south area in in aa southwesterly southwesterly direction being This gravity as being gravity low lowIs is interpreted interpreted as the two the two facies faciesofofmetamorphism. metamorphism. This the surface. below due to granitic batholith batholith not not far far due to the the presence presenceof' of aa granitic �26 T} CRETACEOUSSYSTEM SYSTEMOF OFMINNESOTA MINNESOTA THECRETACEOUS Robert E. Sloan Sloen Minnesota University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota Cretaceoua rocks in Minnesota are Cenomanian to Coniacian age and andare arereferred referredto tothe theColeraine Coleraineformation formation in in age northern Minnesota and the Windrow formation in southern Minnesota. An Early Cretaceous and subtropical to warm temperate humid subtropical interval of deep deep weathering weathering under under humid regoliths on on the the underlying mderlying rocks climate produced a variety of regoliths rocks of two Paleotopographic, paleogeologic, and two Precambrian to Devonian age. Paleotopographic, paleogeographicmaps maps are are presented. The Cretaceous sediments are paleogeographic predominantly sandstones and shales with a few beds of lignite. They epicontinental sea were deposited on the eastern edge of the western epioontinental and include fluviatile, lacustrine, estuarine, estuarine, and and marine marine shelf shelf facies. fades. Out crops are scattered and exposures are poor. �27 STRUCTUB_LSTUDIES STUDIESIN INTTTHOMSON THOMSON STRUCTUBL FORHPTION, CARLTON COUNTY, MINNESOTA A, Mattson Louis A. Louis Univeristy of Univeristy of Minnesota, Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minneapolis, Minnesota Minnesota The Thomson formation formation is is aa thick thick series series of of slates and The Thomson graywackes that apparently accumulated in a relatively deep, quiet basin into which turbidity currents periodically flowed. Subsequently oxposed intermittently the series has been strongly folded and is now exposed belt trending southmiles in a belt trending square miles area of of roughly roughly 500 500 square over an area and Geologic evidence end radioactivity ages indicate from Duluth. westward from westward majordeformation deformationand andmetamorphism metamorphism are that the are pre—Keweenawan. pre-Keweenawan. themajor that Although thestructural structuralrelations relations of of individual individualexposures exposures can Although the formationhas hasremained reniained canbe bedetermined, determined,the theregional regionalstructure structureofofthe theformation can this detailed study During this keybeds, beds, During obscure forwent want of distinctive distinctivekey obscure for miles around arou.ndthe thetown townof ofCanton Carlton aa19 19foot foot of about about 35 square square miles an area area of of an "marker"member member was discoveredand andallowed allowedthe thedetermination determination of of the discovered "marker" was north—south cross—seccross-seclarger structural pattern in this this area. area. A 33 mile north—south reveals 33 large large synclines and 2 antiolines anticlines with many minor minor folds folds tion reveals estimates in in excess excess of of on their limbs. Although earlier thickness estimates 20,000 feet may prove correct for the entire outcrop area of the Thomson of exposed exposed beds in this this restricted restricted area area is is formation, the thickness of formation, approximately 3,000 feet. The Thomson Thouson formation has been intruded by a parallel swarm The numerotis anorthosite One of these dikes contains numerous of "diabase't dikes. dikes. These inclusions range in diameter end anorthositio gabbro inclusions. anorthositic from a few inches to 3 feet and are are believed believed to to be be related related to to the the Duluth Duluth If so, they represent the southwesternmost known occursouthwesterninost gabbro complex. rence of such rocks. Throughoutthe thearea areaevidence evidenceofofgentle gentlepost-folding post-folding deformation deformation Throughout planes have have been beenslightly slightly opened in places, exposed. Cleavage planes is well wellexposed. faults show show near vertical the "NE" joint et enlarged, tlatett faults "NE" joint sethas hasbeen been enlarged, the swarm has has been been emplaced emplaced parallel displacement, the dike dike swarm parallel to and and the displacement, ari1 probably occupying occupyingthe thewidened widened joint joint set.set. These features are probably probably related to the subsidence subsidence of of the the Lake Lake Superior Superiorsync].ine, syncline. � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology Text A resource consisting primarily of words for reading. Examples include books, letters, dissertations, poems, newspapers, articles, archives of mailing lists. Note that facsimiles or images of texts are still of the genre Text. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology: Proceedings, 1959 Description An account of the resource Proceedings of the Institute on Lake Superior Geology. University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota. April 13-14, 1959. Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1959 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource PDF Language A language of the resource English https://digitalcollections.lakeheadu.ca/files/original/b32f9a4e4e14e52651577cfc480442d0.pdf d8ffa2bf8935b7f21a4e08a8d36c6ab2 PDF Text Text �TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1. Building Index Map 1 Program 3 List of Speakers 9) Geophysical Investigation in the Wausau Area, Allinghatn, Robert G. Bates 22 Petrogeny of the Granophyre and intermediate Rock in the Duluth Gabbro of Northern Cook County, Ninnesota....RussellC. Babcock 8 Subsurface Geologic Structure in the Jacobsviile-Gay Area of the Kewesnaw Peninsula as Interpreted fron Geophysical Data....... .. 0. Bacon ,....... .... .,.,.. ... . .Lloyal 27 Magnetic Anomalies and Magnetization Qf Main Mesabi Iron Formation.....,...,.,,,......Gordon D. Bath, George M. Schwartz 15 A 14 Differentiation of the St. Croix and Emerald Moraines in West- Photogeological Study of a part of the Huron Mountain Area of Michigan..... ............,......,..........,...RLcttard C. Beard central Wisconsin.,... . ........... .. ... ... .. .. . . .Thornas E. Berg 13 Pleistocene History of Wisconsin...,..,,,.,..,,,.,Robert F. Black 12 Blac1 Shale Flyach Fades of the Ouachita Mountains, South.eastern Oklahoma..................., ......Lewis M. Cline 23 The Sangu Garbonatite, Karema Depression, S. W. Tanganyika, .Gerrard L. Coetee East Africa.. ,. 19 Geology of Northern Part of Florence, Wisconsin, Area, , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Car]. E. Dutton 6 p... . ... .•.... .... . .. ... . ... Structure of th. East Gogebic Iron Range............T. E. Hendrix of 31 Increasing the Resolving Power Observations. 33 Iron Deposits in Cabon, Equatorial Africa.........Gilbert L. Hole 28 Magtetizations of Iron-formations and Igneous Rocks of Northern Minnesota..,.. ....... ... .. .. .Charles E. Jahren 20 A Change in Sedimentary Facies in the Little Commonwealth Area, Florence County, Wisconsin...,. .,...,...,Robert W. Johnson, Jr. Gravity and Magnetic �TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cant inued) Page 16 Quantitative Geomorphic Analysis of Stream Patterns in Westcentral Wiscornsin.,.................,..,..Elizabethfl. Kissling 26 Geology of the Soudan Mine, Northeastern Minnesota. . 21 ,. . . . . . .... . a,. . •, . . .• . • $ . . . . . . .F. L. 11 inger A Leptochiorite (7) from the Florence, gisconain, Area.. ...... ••••••••• •.................... ....Gene L. LaBerge 24 Pyroxene Paragenesis in a Mafic-Ultramafic ?lutoni. Complex., C. Luth 11 A Regional Gravity Study of Crustal Structure in Wiscon8 in, .,. .. . . . .• . ,. a .,• • *. •. .. . . . . . . . . . .John W. Mack 30 The Stratigraphy' and Structure of the NeCaslin Quartzite Region of Northeastern W'isconsin.....................Joseph J. }lancuso 10 Structure of the Earth's Crust in Wisconsin from Epleeion Seismic Obeervations........................... .a.,e*...,Robert P. Meyer, 3. S. Steinhart, George P. Woollard 5 29 Recent Studies of the Gunf lint Range, Ontario..Willard H. Parsons The Occurrence of carbonates Other Than' Superior iron. at iepth in. Lake IronFormatjoris,......,.............,,... . J..Rbyce 23 AilanIte Ocoorrencein the Horn Area,'BigbornMoüntaini, Wyomiitg. ..•. .• . . . . . . . . . . .., .. . . . ,. . .K. A. Sage'nt a,. . a,. a, a, 18 Lithofacies and Biofacies Variation in the Platteville .. Pormat ion of Southeastern Minnesota.. . . .,...... .Robert E. Sloan 32 Geologic Interpretation of Airborne Magnetometer Profiles Across Lake Superior1...1..0. . ••.. ....... . Edward Thiel 17 How Many Grains Should One Eount in Petrofabric Studies? . . a • • • • • . . • a . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .James Trow ,,. . 7 Geological Investigation Southeast of the Palmer Area, Marquette District. a a *a a a •• a a a a e 0, a a a a .•a a. . . . . . .Just in Z inn �i a a 5 4 6 7 9 0 10 NAME NO. 36. &yoll6oo.o' 2. 64.461*0.1444* (*0,4 640*4) (4.43 37. 44*.s 5,,0. 3. 6g.Iool*ool 9.1164 144g. 4. 69.64413.144 (.96.6499 Eldg. 0.3 3$. 449Nooy Lo6,4.lol.) 9.2 39, iEoo, 3,14. llg$ 40. I14.4o.k.l 46*.. 1.o9) 6. Ag.k44loo*4 41.44 06 & 49.0*4*7 3..d *)dg. Ca 7. 676*04 fr.*oo4. (*6. 11.3 $ A.6l.*i. *0101490 *44g. 14.3 9. 4466*46 114.4 014k. 9.2 99. E.64 4444 1.4 (1. k*N6*l.qy 04 i2. Io.....d 44*9 93. 1*0*0* IloIl 14. k.l Cool. 0*... 44.9 IS Iinh..60q 144 14. *4.9. 14.41 97. I,ol.Co.o 54411494*ooo 9.6 £4 94 0.9 0.13 )t$.oJl.yMo.4)o,9 1.7 49. Co.i)Io.. 110.001 9.9 30. Chodboos..* 44*6 21. 05.14.97194 9.99 12 11 16.... 4og..ook. IL bns*.. I•fl. 042 66. No.4.. 14*.,..k 64 N.oooy kh6 9.3 70 44....' Dooty 0.2. 74. Oko.,..t.46 449 046*. .0.11 36) 41. 1lo.. #4*..*g..bo.l 'Moo,. 94 42. 410*90 9*4.1 0.3 43. Mg 014g. a I¼*.idg 46,.... L'Pooo.40 toWn 4* ltydo.o66. 4th. 14*19) 6 .lIygd.. '4*4* 16.14) 9.3 1141 4*11. 72. O.th,Ø$€ I4.p4I 73. PIo*og*.pl9o lob. Po.4940 boo.o0.thb.'IL O*1*$ .oo.I, la. **b 33) 14 P109044*99 *1d 3.oodtp 046*. 96 03 46. k.ib.oop 49. L.wo. *0144*04 0.*n9o.y 04 77. SoSop, KM 70. $1.6. Bldg 79. 3*6*. M,....64 4*46.1*4 00. 610.1 Cool,. 00.0466, 09. 5i..16o4..d 94. 9*04 i9 02. 54614*94909 34. 0,4041.44 95 1*40 444$3 22. 94041$1g* 00.19.07)444914 94 5.9*. Enogy 00,4*465.6. 0.7 94 33. 06.. )o6.oo4.*p 14*9.) 0.9 0.3 32. too $449 36. 4L..y 5.11*44644 $9. 64.440 44,0 24. 0,6,. 9... 23. 0.19 Cool. 001*0144 C..'.. 24. 94.o,boo 144 37. 94.ob..k *1,01. 94*0 C3 67. M.44. 110.00.4*4 4*6. 69 5o'doo' Ob,,o.so 1.46 39. 19,40.6.4 B0g6oy6q4ldg. 90 51i*1g. .4.l174*4.44144 03 39. MnoM& 9L,o.i 20. 099k.o.Sg Bldg.. (91,4.6,). 04 9134.4... too. 60. 9¼o*4*) 5o4.* 39. Eo.y,.o 1*441,1. 34 60*. 94*1* 9*4*0*0 0io6g 44*44 0.3 9$, 69*4) *0*69*4 39'W 94044 94. 466900.19 96p9.I, 02 144*.. 49*44 96. 9.. 44. 44.44 65140166,90* 94 Vo..,boo 16*6... 444 64. 14*6.44,4 9.7 31. 4o*o6o,. Alooo 04 32.94014044*0 9.4 33. fo..o.y $ *1144)14. 9.i 34 94*0141, *4.46414 9.3 63, )4*o& 4w*..6 t*b. 07. 01*4.4.,, 04.4.04017 90. WI.. C.oow 9)4 C3 64 44,o.( 1090 Aoo,sy 9941.9. 494gI. Sdo*4 I10d P,,(9.y 4o...,,h Lob) 0 93. :(Jg4.41y 04.4 93. 906.Mg 4 NoolIogy Bldg. 30. (,o.4.g )ood 46o.o 9440*111449) 3S0.oo6.94*..0b4,4. C 76 *1. 9,11. 23. C.,oog.o. )5..6.l 5*444*.) Bldg. *4 MooBooko) B 72. P*..booA.g 0IIi '76 9*941, 44.6 940 47. 11.6644*4 oooo 41*4169* 311 2ooon0.. 0444 A NAME 940. 0.6 67. Nook 44*0 E F C THE CAMPUS OF THE H UNIVERSITY OF WISCONSIN • AT MADISON. WISCOMSIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 9 10 11 1: �UNIVERSITY OP WISCONSIN Department of Geology and WISCONSIN GEOLOGICAL AND NATURAL HISTORY SURVEY Madison 6, Wisconsin Institute on Lake 14, Thursday 8:00 - Super4rGeo1o 8:30 April 14 - 15, 1960 . Registration - Wisconsin Center Auditorium Gallery SESSION I** Auditorium, Wisconsin Center Co-Chairman: Lloyal Bacon, Josiah Royce 8:30 0:35 9:00 9:20 9:40 10:00 10:30 Call to order and welcome.,..,,..............Eugene N. Cierott Busneasmeettng..............................RalphW. Marsden RECENT S'UDIES OF THE GUNFLINt RANGE, Parsons . . . .Wil lard H ONTARIO. . • .. STRUCTURE OF THE EAST GOGEBIC IRON RANGE...,.Thomas E. Hendrix GEOLOGICAL INVESTIGATION SOUTHEAST OP THE PALMER AREA, MARQUETTE ... ... . .Justin Zinn .. ,. •.. . ,... • DISTRICT.,.........,.,......... Coffee Break, Snack Bar, Basent SUBS1SRFACE GEOLOGIC STRUCTURE IN THE JACOBSVILLE.-GAY AREA AS INTERPRETED FROM GEOPHYSICAL PENINSULA OF THE DATA. .. . .. . . . . , .. . . . • . .••.. . • .. • .. .. .. . ,. .LloyaI 0. Bacon GEOPHYSICAL INVESTIGATION IN THE WAUSAU AREA, W. Aflingbam, Robert 3. Bates STRUCTURE OF THE EARTH' S CRUST IN WISCONSIN FROM EXPLOSION KEWBENAW 10:50 11:10 11 30 11:50 WISCONSIN.............,..John ... SEISMIC OBSERVATIONS.... ••. . . . .... . .• .. •, , a . ,. •. , P. Meyer, J. S. Steinhart, George . Woollard A REGIONAL GRAVITY STUD? OF CRUSTAL STRUCTURE IN a.. • , • . . • •1 WISCONSIN. . a •i•.• a a a. • , .John W. Mack .....,.,.Robert Luncheon, Snack Bar, Wisconsin Center SESSION II Auditorium, Wisconsin Center Co—Chairman: William Rea4 S. A, Tyler 1:00 1:20 1:40 2:00 2:20 2:50 BLACK SHALE FLYSCU FAdES OF THE OUACHITA MOUNTAINS, SO1JTHEASTERNOKLAUO4A.............,...,....,,.Lew'jeM. Cline PLEISTOCENE HISTORY OF WISONSIN.,.,.,.,......Robert F. Black -DIFFENTIATION OF 1E ST. CROIX AND EMERALD MORAINES IN STCENTRAL WISCONSIN.....................,..Thornas E. Berg A PHOTOGEOLOGICAL STUDY OF A PART OF THE HURON HOUNTAIN AREAOFMIdRIGAN...,.,,.,....,,,.,..........Rjchardc, Beard Coffee Break, Snack Bar, Basement QUAN'flTATIVE GEOMORPHIC ANALYSIS OF STREAM PATTERNS IN WEST—CENTRAL WISCQNSIN.............,...Elizabeth Ki$sling L ** Five minutes for discussion are allowed after each paper throughout the program. �2 PROGRAM (Cont hued) 3:10 HOW MANY GRAINS SHOULD ONE COUNT IN PETROFABRIC 3:30 LITHOFACT.ES AND BiOFACIES VARIATION IN THE I'LATTEVILLE STUDIES?.. , 3:50 4:10 4:30 • ,• • •• •, ••• .•. • •••,.• ., . . . ..... . . . ... .James 'I'row FORMATION OF SOUTHEASTERN NINNESOTA........Robert E, Sloan GEOLOGY OF NORTHERN PART OF FLORENCE, WISCONSIN AREA ,.........................,..,...,......,Carl E. Dutton A CHANGE IN SEDIMENTARY FACIES IN THE LITTLE CC*4)NWEALTh AREA, FLORENCE CoUNTY, WISCONS IN. ....R-obert W. Johns on, Jr. A LEPTOCULORITE (?) FROM THE FLORENCE, WISCONSIN AREA. . •. . .. . . . . . . . . •.. .. . . .. . . . . .. .. .. . .. . . .Gene L. LaBerge Dinner, Main Dining Ball, Wisconsin Center Basement Speaker: R. J. Anderson, Batteile MdiiorUI Institute Topic: "Journey into Ignorance. A Review of the Findings of the International :opbySiøaI Year" . 6:30 Friday, April 15, 1960 SESSION III Auditorium, Co-Chairman: 8:00 8:20 8:40 Wisconsin Center George Schwartz, Jack Everett PETROGENY OF THE GRANOPRYRE AND INTERMEDIATE ROCK IN THE DULUTH GABBRO OF NORTHERN COOK COUNTY, MINNESOTA...,.......................Russe11 C. Babcock, Jr, THE SANOtJ CARBONATITE, KAREMA DEPRESSION, S .W. TANGANYIKA, ...,.•. ,.• ..... .Gerrard L, Coetzee EAST AFRICA.... .. .•, PYROXENE PARAGENESIS IN A MAFIC'-ULTRAMAFIC PLUTONIC C0MPLX, BIGRORN MOUNTAINS, WYOMING,.. . •..,... W. C. 9:00 ALLANITE OCCURRENCE IN THE HORN AREA, BIGHORN MOUNTAINS, WYOMING.....,...........,...,.. 9:20 9:50 Coffee Break, Snack Bar, Basement Lut h ..........,.....K. A. Sargent GEOLOGY OF THE SOUDAN MINE, MORTHEASTERN MINNESOTA. ....... •.•,...•••..••.,,,..... .... .F. L. Klinger 10:10 MA(ETIC ANOMALIES AND MAGNETIZATION OF MAIN MESABI IRON.. 10:30 MAGNETIZATIONS OF IRON-FORMATIONS AND IGNEOUS ROCKS OF NORTHERN MINNESOTA..,.....................CharlêsE. .Jabven TEE OCCURRENCE OF CARBONATES OTHER THAN IRON A'!? DEPTH IN LAKE SUPERIOR IRON PORNATIQNS.... .......... Royce THE STRATIGRAPHY AND STRUCTURE OF THE NCCASLIN QUARTZ ITE REGION OF NORTHEASTERN WISCONSIN. .... ... .. . Joseph J • Mancuso INCREASING THE RESOLVING POWER OF GRAVITY AND MAGNETIC OBSERVATiONS.,.. .. ....., ....,.... .... .... .. .WiIL1 jam J. Hinze GEOLOqIC INTERPRETATION OF AIRBORNE MAGNETOMETER PROFiLES ACROSS LAKE SUPERIOR.....,. "5...,, ..•.... .. . ,.Edward Tidel IRON DEPOSITS IN GABON, EQUA!IORIAL AFRIcA...,..Gilbert L. Hole FORMATION........... .. .. . . Gordon 1). Bath, George 10:50 11:10 11:30 11 50 12:10 N. Schwartz ........J. �3 SPEAKERS JOHN W, ALLINGHAM..,.........,.Geologist, U, S. Geological Survey, Wa*hington, D. C. RUSSELL C. BABCOGK,Jz.......,,.Geologist, Bear Creek Mining Company, Aurora, Minnesota LLOYAL 0. BACON....S.,..... ... ..Associate Professor, Michigan College of Mining and Technology, I4oughton, Michigan ROBERT G. BATES.............U...U, S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. GORDON D, BATHII,...... S. Geological Survey, Menlo Park, California IIQ4ARD C. BEARD...,,41...,..,..,Pickands blather and Company, Duluth, Minnesota THOMAS E, BEIIG.,,.,....,.,,.,.,Graduate Student Department of Geology, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin ROBERT F, BLACK...... . .Professor, Department of Geology, University ....... ...U, .,...,,,. of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin LEWIS M. CLTNE.,,,....,,,........Profesaor, Department of Geology, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin GERRARD L. COETZEE.,,. ,.,,Oraduate Student, Department of Geology, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin .,Regional Geologist, U. S. Geological Survey, CARL E. DUTTON.. Madison, Wisconsin .....Depart'nent of Geology, Indiana University, THOMAS E. HENDRIX.. Bloomington, Indiana ,,Asaistant Professor, Michigan State University, WILLIAM J, HINZE......, East Lansing, Michigan GILBERT L. HOLE....,............Geologist, Bethlehem Steel Company, Bethlehem, Pennsylvania UARLES E. JAHREN.......... Physicist, U. S. Geological Survey, Austin, Minnesota ROBERT W. JOHNSON, JR..,...,....Geologist U. S. Geological Survey, Knoxville, Tennessee ELIZABETH H, KISSLING..,,,.,,.,,Graduate Student, Department of Geology, University of Wisconsin, M&dison, Wisconsin FREDERICK L. KLINGER Oliver Iron Mining ivision, U. S. Steel CorporatIon, Virginia, Minnesota GENE L. LABERGE..,...,,...,....Graduat€ Student, Department of Geology, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin WILLIAM C. LUTH..,,.,,.,....,,..Graduate Student, Department of Geology, State University of iowa, Iowa City, Iowa JOHNW.MACK...,,.,,...,,,.,.,.GraduateStudent, Department of Geology, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin JOSEPH J. NANCUSO. , .. .Graduate Student, Department of Geology, blichian State University, East Lansing, Michigan ROBERT P. MEYER..... .Asaistant Professor, Department of Geoleg University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wiscons in WILLARD H. PARSONS.....4.......Professor and Chairman, Department of Geoioy, Wayne State University, Detroit, Michigan JOSIAH ROYCE...,,. ,Piclcands blather and Company, Duluth, Minnesota KENNETh A. Student, Department of Geology, State University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa .............. ......Qeologist, . ...... .. ..... ..,.,. �4 SPEAKERS (Continued) GEORGE M. SCHWARTZ.... . .. ... .,Director, Mtnne8ota Geological Survey, Minneapolis, Minnesota ROBERT E. SLOAN.....,,..........Assistant Professor, Department of Geology, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota JOHi S, STEflqHART..... ,Graduate Student, Department of Geology, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin EDWARD C. THIEL......4... .,.....Project Associate, Department of Geology, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin .......Professor, Department of Geology, Michigan JNES TROW........ State University, East Lansing, Michigan GEORGE P • WOOLLARD.. .Professor, Dep-artment of Geology, University ......,.. .,.,. of WisonsLn, Madison, Wisconsin USTIN ZINN...... ......., .. ... ..Professor, Department of Geology, Michigan State University, East Lansing, Michigan �5 RECENT STUDIES OF ThE GUNFLINT RANGE, ONTARIO Willard H. TaraonS Wayne State The Gunf lint University, Detroit, Michigan iron..formation is located in Ontario north of Lake Superior. The range trends southwestward froin near Port Arthur to the Minnesota boundary. Throughout most of its length the Gunf lint is largely a arbonate iron-formation, but the western third carries appreciable quantities of magntite and hematite. In this part of the range there are insdse tonnages of low grade taconite. A number of studies have been carried out in recent years as to the economic possibilities of this taconite. Much of the earlier exploration has been confined to the lower Gunf formation. The present investigation suggests that the upper lint carries a higher concentration of magnet ite, Magnetic tube tests of the upper 200 feet indicate that a concentrate carrying 58-60 per cent iroft can be obtained, although it is somewhat high in (12-14 per cent)1 lint inf silica �6 STRUCTURE OF THE EAST GOGEBZC IRON BANCE T. E. Hendrix Department of Geology, Indiana University, Bloomington, Indiana Sttuctural analysis of the major and minor structures within the Keewatin and Huron ian roke stows there have been two periods of pre Keweenawan deformation on the East Gogebic iron range. The older of the two de.ormations is post-Middle, prs..Upper Huronian in age. This deformation local in extent and epeirogenic in nature. Fault block subsidence following outpouring of the Presque Isle volcanics has is resulted in the shifting and tilting of successive blocks of Lower and Middle fluronian a5s an area 8 miles wide in the east half of T.47., R.44W., and the west half of T,47N., R.43W. The subsidence was greatest towards the center of volcanism, causing part of the offset now apparent along the Presque Isle fault. The second and more severe pre-Keweenawan deformation is pestIt is regional in extent and Upper Huronian, pre-Keweenawan in age. orogenic in nature. This deformation appears to have folded also the southern iron ranges of Michigan and Wisconsin. The axis of apparent greatest principal stress is oriented northwest-eutheast. The apparent intermediate principal stress axis ic oriented northeast-southwest. The apparent least printpal stress is essentially vertical. The East Gogebic iron range was tilted to the north in Keweenawan This tilting does not appear to have extended east of Lake Gogebic because the Keweenawan flowS of the southetn trap ranges are is necessary, therefore, to postulate a practically horizontal. "hinge" between the two areas. There is a suggestion, as yet unproven, that this hinge may be the southward extension of the Keweenawan thrust fault, displaced to the south by a late Keweenawan fault that now trends approximately north-south through the center of Lake Gogebic. time. It �7 GEOLOGICAL INVESTIGATION SOUT}IEAST OF TUE PAlMER AREA, MARQUETTE DiSiRI( Just in Zinn Michigan State University, East Lansing, MichLga Thesis research on selected map areas southeast of Palmer during the past three years has been completed by Robert A. Vehrs, Armen Sahakian, and Richard A. Long. These studies have added some informa. tion that bears on several problems in this area, such as the questionable presence of post4uronian granite, the nature of pre-Huronian rocks existing here, and the true nature of the Palmer gnetss, Most of the gnetss of thIs area is a contorted hornbende gneiss with a foliation trending mostly east-*at, Its composition suggests metamorphosed basalt or andesite and it beLieved to correlate with the pre-.Ruronian greenstones found along the north margin of the Marquette district. The greiss is intruded by granite apophyses of possibly two ages, but most of the gtanita is of the pink to gray porphyritic type suggestive of Lamey's "Republic granite". Thin section studies indicate that the gneiss and at least most of the granite was sheared after their development, with some accomparying metamorphic alteration characteristic of the greenachist facies. This would indicate that the hornblende gee isa and the graflite intruding it are of pre-Euronian age. is Associated with the gneiss and granite are small blocks of slate phyl. I ite near Palr and a ridge of quartz rock farther southeast. The quartz rock, which looks like a quartzite ridge in the field, is actually metanovaculite and can not be correlated with any of the Ruronian formations in the district. The phyllite is very similar to pre-Hurontan rocks north of the or an argillite that occurs in Marquette district. A pre-Huronian age for these rnetasedttnentary rocks is suggested. Both the metanovaculite and the phyllite were Intruded by granite. This investigation failed to find any rocks of undoubted Huron ian Since the intruding granite itself age in the gneiss area studied, shows shearing and crude foliations in many piacee along with the development of some chlorite and epidots, it appears that it was Involved in the pos-t-Huronian orogeny. Therefore this granite must be older than the Hurontan. bodias war discovered. No undisputed post-Huronian granite �8 SUBSURFACE GEOLOGIC STRUCTURE IN ThE JACOBSVILLE.GAY AREA OF ThE KEWEENAW PENINSULA AS INTERPRETED FRC GEOPUYSICAL DATA L. 0. Bacon Michigan College of Mining and Techn9logy, Houghton, Michigan Magnetic anomalies occur in the Gay.JacobeviU. area of the Keenaw Peninsula1 an area composed of a thick section of Eastern or Jacobsvilie sandstone. Geophysical data indicate that depth to source is apptoxfinately 8,000 feet, which may be considered as probable thickness of the Jacobsville sandstone. Calculations indicate that one could be caused b material having a magnetic susceptibility of about 3000 x l0 egs units which is in the range of some of the felsites and also of the baslc flows of. the Keenaw Pen insul a. Spatial relationships indicate that the soutte of the anomaly most likely a felsite whlth could then have been the southeastern source for the felsite conglomerate beds as postulated by.W.. S. White of the II, . Geological Survey. is �9 GEOPHYSICAL INVESTIGATION IN THE WAUSAU AREA1 WISCONSIN John W. Allingham and Robert G. Bates U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, 0. C. Contacts and regional structural relations bett*en major rock units tn the Wausau area of central Wisconsin are defined by airberne geophysical data. Interpretation of data from a survey made in June 1956 shows that magnetic and radioactivity pattert tap materially assist geologic mapping. The Precambrian rocks of the Wausau area consist of a complex of volcanic and sedimentary rocks metamcirphoaed to the greenachist and amphibol it. facies and intruded by granite and associate4 granopbyre, and by syenite, diorite, gabbro, and diabase. Bedrock is covered by residual soil, glacial debris, and bess, and the area is now a plain of low relief except for resistant hills of quartzite. Areas of granite, diorite, hornblende gabbro, and diabase can be delineated by distinctive aeromagnetic patterns that are directly related to the magnetite content of these rock units. Arcuate patterns of high-amplitude magnetic anomalies are associated with skarn -and intrusive diorite in the central area of red granite and in the adjoining complex of apt itic syenite. The skarn and diorite are closely associated with pendants of quartzite distribution of which indicates that they are remnants of a large. f 614. and chlorite schist, the Adjacent to the red granite the structural grain of diabase dikes, hornbLlende gabbro, and dior-ite is indicated by the northeasterly trend of associated magnetic anomalies. Across the central part of the area individual diabase dikes of easterly trend can be traced for as much In these dikes, which contain accessory titaniferous as 12 miles. spinel, the remaflent magnetization is reversed and is much greater than the induced magnetization, and a sharp continuous low is produced. Well-def med medium—api jtude anomal its on radioactivity profiles clearly outline the syanite. Radioactivity lows are associated with the quarteite of Rib Mountain as well as smaller nearby quartzite beds. Rivers and swaps complicate the correlation of radioactivity unkts with the geology, particularly in Weston township. The Wausau region can be divided on the basis of radioactivity and magnetic data into areas character ized by (a) high-amplitude radia2 activity features and low-amplitude magnetic features, (b) tediumamplitude radioactivity and magnetic features, and (c) low-amplitude radioactivity features and high-amplitude magnetic features. These areas correspond respectively to red granite, aplitic syenite, and diorite or gabbro. �10 STRUCTURE OF TUE EARTh'S CRUST LN WISCONSIN FROM EXPLOS ION SE3SMIC OBSE1VATIONS R. P. Meyer, J S. Steinhart, 0. P. Woollard University of Wisconsin, i4aison, Wisconsin A series of seismic observations of blasts have been made to determine crustal structure in Wisconsin. A reversed profile 300 km long extends from the Apostle Islands southeast to Wisconsin Rapids and an unrersed. prof Lie 230 km long extends from the tip of Keewenaw Peninsula southwest into Wisconsin. These results together with the earlier work by Schlichter and consideration of the gravity anomalies allow the structure and physical properties of the crust to be deduced. Velocities in the major portion of the Crust are in the range 6.2 to 6.5 km/sac, and formal solutions for the depth to 14 discontinuity yield average dspths of 36 to 38 km. �11 A REGIONAL GRAVITY STUDY CRUSTAL STRUCTURE IN WIScONSIN John W. Mack University of Wisconsin, Madison, WIsconsin A regions], gzafrity Study øf Wiscofisin was conducted the purpose of finding if gravity information would lead to a bttèr understanding of large-scale geologic features and of crustal strt'eture. The data was statistically analyzed using a method developed by R. A. Haubrich (University of Wisconsin) of least squares fitting a two dimensional power series to the actual data points. A seventh degree polynomial fit of the data was assumed to be the regional effect. The residual map was formed by subtracting the regional values from the o-riginal data. The results of the residual maps and profile lines indicate a of the low density (2.67) granitic or acid igneous layer in parts of the State. The gravity picture also indicated the Moho is deeper under the central portion of the State than it is near the edges. The Mid-Continent gravity high, which extends from Lake Superior thickening into central Kansas, may be explained by changes in mass distribut ion above the mantle. �12 BLACK SUALE FLYSCII FACIES OF ThE OUACHITA MOUNTAINS, SOUTELEA$ThRN OKI.AROMA Geology Department, L. H. Cline University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wis. The sedimentary features of the upper Mississippian and lower Pennsylvanian Stan leyJackfork—Johns ValleyAtoka strat igraphic sequence of the Ouachita Mountains of Oklahoma are comparable to the typical black..ehale flyach facies of the Eocane and Cretaceous of the Alps and Carpatbian Mountains ef Europe.. The conclusion is reached that a predominately deepwater biackshale and radiolarian-chert environment was periodically interrupted by turbidity ctrents which debouched 4uartzoae sands derived frorn a nearby shelf environment. The presence of convolute bedding, graded contacts of sandstones and overlying shales, abundant flow casts, flute casts, and groove casts on the under surfaces of the sandstas, the general lack of cross-bedding and ripple tnatks, and the scarcity of fossils except for planktonie and nektonic forms support this thesis. The most characteristic feature of the StanleyJackfork sequence is the repeated alternation of unfossiliferous dark: shales and gray sandstones. The boulder-bearing Johns Valley shale represents what Alpine geologists call wild fiyecb; most of its lime stone erratics are depositional rather than tectonic in origin. The charts and the graptolitic shales of the 1owé Paleozoic represent a period of very slow sedimentation in a deep and starved arcuate trough. The 22,000 feet of post-.Arkansas novaculite sediments represents a period of rapid sedimentation during active tectonism. The Johns Valley shale lies stratigraphically above the Jackfork group, and it contains late Mississippian marine invertebrates indigenous to the low•r part of the formation; thus, the entire Stanley.-Jackfork sequence is pre-Pennsylvanian. �13 PLEISTOCENE HISTORY OF WISCONSIN Robert F. Black University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin Reconnaissance in all cnnties in Wisconsin, local detailed studies, and radiocarbon dates on deposits of the Wisconsinan stage provide data that necessitate a review of the Pleistocene history of Wisconsin. It now seems relatively certain that no Pleistotene deposits at the surface or buried are elder than the Wisconsinan stage, with the possible exception of some gravels ass igned to the Windrow formation, According to workers outside Wisconsin, the Wisconsinan stage began between 50,00 and 70,000 years ago. The earliest dated advance in Wisconsin, about 30,000 years ago, was synchronous in the Lake Michigan and Superiqr lpbes, This advance is here designated the Rock ian after the Rock River which traverses much of the area of deposition in southern Wisconsin and in Illinois. Subsequent deglaciat ion during the Farmdalian substage, 22,000 to 28,000 years ago according to data from Illinois, was incomplete—-ice blocks remained in the deep valleys until after the readvances of the ice during Cary time in southern Wisconsin and during Valders time in northern Wisconsin. These ice blocks subsequently produced many of our large lakes such as Mendota, Green, and Geneva in the south and cear,Twin, and Pelican in the north. Unfortunately, the chronology in Wisconsin of the Farmdalian deglaciation and subsequent readvancea and retreats of the ice up to the Two Creekan substage 11,000 to 12,500 years ago has no svpport of rádioOarbon dates and is imperfectly known. Permafrost was present for a time according to casts of ice—wedge polygons and to well-.developed solifluction and other frost phenomena. Primitive time and possibly somewhat man was in the Stste during Two Creeks earlier. �14 DIFFEREL4TIATION OF THE ST. CROIX AND dERALD MORAINES IN WEST-CEL WISCONSIN Thomas E Berg University of Wisconsin, 4adison, Wisconsin Deposits of three distinct glacial advances of Wtsconathan age are present in westcentra1 Wisconsin. Because of their lithologic similarity, the three drifts are distinguishable most easily on a geomorphic basis. The youngest deposit, the St. Croix moraine, trends SW-NE across the area. The main moraine is characterized by l1 -developed knob-and-kettle topography, unconnected drainage, numerous inwash areas, and lakes. The limit of advance is distin guished by reworked outwash, outwash channels, and thin ice-stagnation features about 4 miles in front of the main moraine. In the northeaSt corner of St. Croix County outside the St. Croix moraine, slightly older drift, here named the Emerald moraine from deposits near Emerald, Wisconsin, is characterized by subdued topography) ntmierous boulder piles scattred over the surface, and poorly integrated drainage. Subdued kettles are present; some are filled and others have been drained. Kames are present on the uplands. The east boundary of the moraine is approximated by the drainage divide separating the WIllow Rivet from the Cedar River. The oldest drift is distinguished by well-integrated drainage, fossil frost benomena, absence of kettles, and a more strongly eroded topography, The basal till in the oldest drift has been radiocarbon dated at approximately 30,000 years before the present, or late Altonian. The Emerald moraine is, therefore, tenatively assigned an Early Woødfordian ae and the St. Croix moraine a Late Woodfordian age. �15 A PROTCICEOLOGICAL STUDY OF A PART OF tuE UURON MOUbTAIN ARE& OF MICRIGAN Pickands Richard C. Beard Mather & Company, Duluth, Minnesota A study was made of the uses and limitations of photo—geology in the mapping of an area of moderately thick glacial cover and relatively complex structure. A part of the Precambrian shielñ are.a ot Michigan was chosen for this study and the procedure employed was one that made full utilization of aerial photographs in all three phases of geological investigation: planning, field Use, and compilation. It was found that the regional structure is quite easily inter- preted from the aerial photos. It consists of several plunging folds, which were easily traced by a sharp escarptent betweet more resistant basement rocks and softer overlying flfles. Thin and discontinuous bands of other sedimentary rocks occur stratigraphically between the basement and the overlying slates. While not easily racognized in the photos, these bands were located by field checks concentrated along the escarpment. Some local folding in the slate area could also be traced thru the blanket of glacial material, without any visible outcrops. Topography and drainage reflects a prominent fracture pattern, especially in the areas underlain by basement; and where these fractures intersect cofttacts, the relative movement was often evident. Numerous basic dikes, although observed in the field, show little topographic expression and. are therefore not recognthable in the photos. �16 QUANTITAT!VE GONORPR1C MALY$IS OF STREAM PATTER1S IN WEST.-CENTRAL W1SCOZSIN Elizabeth H. Kissling University of Wisconsin, Ma4ison, Wisconsin In a quantitative study of first—order streams in westcentral Wisconsin the lengths of streams, basing, and divides, the areas of the basins, the angles at which the streams enter others, and the direction of stream flow were measured in eight areas. Drainage density was calculated and the shapes of the basins analyzed. The data and the calculated quantities were tested statistically to determine whether they were normally distributed, and the groups. were compared and tested for significant differences. Histograms and graphs representing the data allow no definite conclusions Plots of the probabilities that the data for each group were normally distributed suggest the presence of three types of streams. The tests for significant differences also show three different groups, but the members of these groups do not always coincide with the rnembers of the probability types. The results are theef ore inconclusive in attempting to differentiate various ages of tills jn this area. �17 ROW MANY GRAINS SHOULD ONE COUNT I PETROFABRIC STUt)IES? James Ttow Michigan State University, East Lansing, Michigan In an effort to determine the minimum number of grains that one. must count to achieve reliable results in a U—stage analysis of quartz student a measured çrientation of 2,300 quartz grains from one thin with a maximum concentration of 33% per 1% of the area of the hemisphre of projection. The students participating in the std were or ieatat the ion in the Sturgeon quartz ite, the fol lot ing crysa1ographic aecti DavA ings, Mihaal Gorycki, Martin 'Horowitz, David Huthson, Reger K irkpar icic, small grain Thomas Manley, Richard Thompson, an4 James Wallace. The observations were subdivided into 100-, 200-, and 300-grain amp1es for emparison to the distribution in th total 2,300- sample. A chi—square test fr goodness: of itt showed that from 120 to 180 grains must bs counted to attain the conventional 95% confidence limit of classical 8tatistics. �18 LITHOFACIES AND BIOFACIES VARIATION IN THE PLATTEVILLE FORMATION OF SOUTHEASTERN MINNESOTA Robert E. Sloan University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota The variation in facies of the Middle Ordovician Platteville in southeastern Minnesota is related to the major structural features of the area, the south edge of the Twin City Basin and the Red WingRochester anticline, and shows that these structures were fgrmed during the deposition of the Platteville formation. Individual beds of limestone and shale partings are traceable for distances up to 100 miles, and a precise lithostratigraphic correlation network has been. established for the entire area. The principal source for the clastic component is the landmass Siouxia to the northwest. This landmass had a maximum possible width of about 250 miles. Bottom faunas were controlled principally by bottom sediment type, and observed faunal changes are the result of changes in sedimentation. The only fossils that occur in all lithofacles are the conodonts, which are most numerous in shallow water or shoal fades. The density of conodonts per gram of limee stone can be used as an important rock parameter and, when contoured, reflects the structural features of the basin. �19 GEOLOGY OF NORTHERN PART OF FLORENCE, WISCONSIN, AREA U'. Carl E. Dutton S. Geological Survey, Madison, Wisconsin The northern part of the Florence area contains strata of Middle Ptecambtian age. The rocks strike northwesterly, are steeply inclined, and are folded and faulted. The northernmost part of the area is underlain by iron—formation, slate, grayvacke, and greenstone that are the southeastward cont&nuation of part of the Paint River and Baraga groups of Iron County, Michigan. These strata are in a northwestward-plunging syncline, but most of the southwest Unib is missing because of truncation by a fault. Rocks in this syncli.ne are in chlorite grade of metorphism, but those elsewhere in the northern part of the area are in biotite or garnet grade. Another sequence is exposed- southwest of the fault, and a prominent unit is quartzite with excellent cross bedding that indicates top toward the southwest. Sericitic slate is older than the quartzite; slate, graywacke, and some silicate-magnetite ironformation are younger. A third sequence, farther southwestward, has two thin discontinous members of iron silicate-magnetite rock separated by gray slate that locally has graded bedding;' massive and ellipsoidal greenatone is also present. This sequence is in a northwestward-plunging anticline, is probably younger than the quartzite-slate sequence, and is apparently separated from it by a fault. Somewhat similar rocks that are probab1y repetition of the third sequence occur to the west in what is apparently a sotitheastwardp1unging anticline. Between the two anticlines repetition of part of the Paint River group occurs in a southward-plunging synci me that is cut ofE to the south by a fault. A few outcropS in the southwestern part of the area are sericitic slate and probably are repetition of part of the Michigamme slate of the Baraga group. �20 A CHANGE IN SEDIMENTARY FACIES IN TUE LITTLE C'Dt1WLTH AREA, FLORENCE COUNTY, WISCONSIN Robert W. Johnson, Jr, U. S. Geological Survey, Knoxville, Tennessee The Little Comflton**altb exploratIon area ie underlain by highly ferrugthous slate and graywaclce that are closely associated with and extend about 2,000 feet beyond the southeast end of a cross_bedded vitreous quartzite. The close association of these rQcks and the; numerous occurrences of breccia have been attributed to faulting or eros1nal unconformity. The8e conditions may exist locally but they are of minor significance; the character and distribution of the rocks at Little Commonwealth are primarily the asult of a change in sedirnentry fcies. equivalence of the ierruginous clastic rocks with the ttreous ajuartzite appears to be established by adjacent throughStratigraphic going older aericitic phyllite on the north and younger distinctive slate and graywecke on the south. Strata that underlie the villages of Foree and Commonwealth are the southeastern continuation o the Paint River group of Iron County, Michigan, and are in the northeast limb of a syncline. The ferruginous rocks and vitreous quartzite are located on of the southwest limb of the syncline, but continuation cs bedding refutes this possibility. in the Little Commonwealth area are not from the ferrugthous slate of the Paint relations suggest that the former are of upfault ad. the. apparent direction of The ferruginous elastic rocks distinguishable lithologically River group, but structural pre-Patnt River age 'and are �21 A LEPTOC}ILOITE(?) FROMThE FLORENCE, WISCONSIN, AREA University Gene: L. LaBerge of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin An unusual iron-rich chlorite occurs in the Huronian rocks west of Florence, Wisconsin. The principal occurrence is stratigraphically just above the. quartzite at Keyes Lake. The mineral occurs locally as the almost exclusive constituent of a heavy, massive chlorite rock; however1 it generally occurs as metacrysts or veins in the conglomerate, graywack., and slate at the top of the quartzite. Its association with garnet, toirmaline, biotite, normal chlorite, magnetite, pyrtte, and stil.pnomelane also attest to its metamorphic origin. Chemical analys is and thin sect ion stud lea indicate that the mineral is different from other ch]orites in composition and optical properties. The total iron content is about the same as for thuringite, but the ferric iron content is much higher than it would be in a normal chlorite. The birefringence and p1echroism are much more pronôunced than in normal chiorites. In fact, the mineral could be mistaken in thin section for a pale green biotite. X-ray analysis, however, gives a powder photograph that is almost identical with a thuingite from the Soudan mine at Ely., Minnesota. �22 PETROGENY OF THE GRANOPHYRE AND INTERMEDIATE ROCK DULUTH GABRO OF NORTHERN COOK COUNTY, MINNESOTA IN Th Russell C. Babcock, Jr. Bear Creek Mining Company, Aurora, Minnesota The telationship between the granophyre and the gabbro within the northeastern projection of the Duluth gabbro complex was studied to determine the origin of both the granophyre and the associated tsjnternis_ MateH rocks. To best understand theme relationships between rock types the transition from gabbr to granophyre was investigated in detail. The variation in abundance of the common minerals was determined with point counter analyses, and the sequence of mineral formation was determined on the These were then related to both major and minor structtral features of the complex. basis of textural features. The presence of two distinct rock types, gabbro and granophyre, within the notheastern projection of the Duluth complex is thought to be a result of fractional crystallization and differentiation through gravity settling and structural activity. Upon emplacement of magma, the gabbroic minerals plagioclase and pyroxene crystallized, and, owing to their greater density, accumulated in the lower portions of the magma chamber .ihere they were knit together Ly continued crystallizatio1. The liquid which remained in the interstices reacted slightly with the crystalline phase and then solidified in the form of intergrown quartz and potassium feldspar. The resulting rock is a gabbro with minor amounts of interstitial granophyre. The essentially complete crystallization and accumulation of the abbroic constituerts caused the residual liquid to become more acidic in composition and to crystallize as a granophyre. The texture o the granophyre is the result of crystallization of intergrown quartz and potassi feldspar from the liquid surrounding scattered euhedral plagioclase crystals. The mafic minerals which are disseminated throughout this rock are fine, scattered altetation products of pyroxene crystals which formed earlier. The intermediate rock represents the gradational separation of gabbro and granophyre. Upward from granophyrs the gabbro the amount of interstitial and alteration of mafic minerals increases, farming a rock a diabasi texture as does the gabbro but which contains which has abundant thterstitial granophyre. As the granophyre becomes more abundant, the correspondin decrease ip gabbroic minerals causes the diabasic texture to disappear an• the rock appears as a mafic granophyre. Sttuctural activity has compl icated the expected distribut ion of rock types, causing amounts of granophyre to be concentrated bøth locally and regionally in excess of that which could have formed from fractional crystalliaation and gravity settling alone. �23 TIlE SANCU CARBONATITE, KAR4A DEPRESS ION SOUTHWESTERN TANGANYIKA, EAST AFRICPS University Gerrard L, Coetzee of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin The basemmnt rocks of the Karema Depression consist of quartzofeispathic gneisses, amphibolites, metasediments and various intrusives that occur in a large synclinorium which plunges norttnest. Patches of post-basement sediments of several ages occut in the area. Two major subparallel faults in the Depression link the Rukwa Rift Valley on the southeast to the Great Tanganyika Rift to the west. Three lenses of carbonate rock, all aligned on the same northwesterly trend, occur over 16 miles of strike along the northernmost fault and on the south limb of the synclinorium. These are thS Sangu carbonate rocks, previously regarded as basement metasedimflts, but 5ho by detailed mapping to be discordant to the basement rocks which are locally tightly overfolded, The post-basement Ifume series se4jtnentary rocks are intruded by vein-dikes of the various catbonate rqck types. The carbonate rocks comprise white and red calcitic units and a dolomitic unit. These occur as narrow bands, lenses, and irregular masses that commonly trend oblique to the main body. Fine-.grained feldspatbic and siliceous rocks are closely associated with the carbonate rocks. "intrusive" contacts prove the siliceous and feldspathic rocks oldest, followed by the dolomitic, the white calcitic, and then the red calcitic rocks. Apatite and magnetite are ubiquitous in the carbonate rocks but phiogopite, tremolite, quartz, pyrite, and feldspar are common. Soda amphibole, barite, and serpentine occur in small amounts and accessories include zircon, baddeleyite, pyrochlore, rutile, titanite, chalcopyrite and fluor-apatite. Field relationships prove that the carbonate rocks are not basement liniestones. these rocks have a typical carbonatite mineralogy. The I ine-grained feispathic rocks closely resemble fenites, usually associated with carbonatites. The lack of associated undersaturated igneous rocks and the presence of fissure rather than the ring structure are unusual but not unique for carbonatites. �24 PYROXENE PARAGNESIS Th A 4AFIC-ULTR IC PLUTONIC COMPLEX, BI1ORN MOUNTAINS, ¶fONING State W. C. Luth University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa The complex that lies wIthin the Precambrian para—(?)gneiss core of the Bighrn untains is 9.5 miles west of Buffalo, Wyoming, on U. S. Highway 16. It has an elongate subelliptical outcrop pattern trending N.60°E. and enclosing an area of 1.2 square miles. The rock types of the complex may be categorized under the broad headings of peridotite, pyroxenite, norite, diorite, and amphibolite. Major constituents present in varied amounts include orthopyroxene (Of 1748' olivine (Fa1 2s' diopsidic augite, pigeonite, various aniphiboles (cummingoruta, act'inolite, anthophyll its, and hornblende), biotite, quartz, and plagioclase. Minor constitents include chromite, magnetite-ilmenite, pyrite, and apatite. Alteration products in the ultramafic rocks characteristically are antigorite, chrysolite, serpophite, talc, magnetite, hematite, calcite, tremolite and iddingaite. Of particular interest is the anamolous (Hess, 1941) presence of pigeonite in the coarsegrained ultramafic rocks. The intimate association of the three pyroxenes, diopsidic augite, pigeonite, and bronzite, causes very peculiar textures. Textural evidence suggests that diopsidiC augite formed in part prior to, and n part contemporaneously with pigeonite and bronzite. Pigeonitebrorizite relationships are exceedingly complex and appear to result primarily The, available from incomplete inversion of pigeonite to bronzite. physico-chemical data derived from the quaternary system MgOFeO— CaO-SiO also suggests the early and contemporaneous formation of diopsidc augite with respect to pigeonite, and later inversion of pigeonite to bronzite. �25 ALLANITE OCCURRENCE IN THE HORN AREA, BIGHORN I4OUNThINS, WYOMING K. A. Sargent State University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa The Horn area of the Bighorn Mountains is approximately 35 miles southwest of Buffalo, Wyoming. It is readily accessible by secondary roads from U. S. Highway 16. Quartzofeldspathic gneiss covers most of the 18 square miles of Horn and shows a distinct layering throughout the area. Feldspathic rock (albite-.biotite), amphibolite, and calcite marbles are less coamton. Shearing is common in the more competent rocks; contortion, flowage and lenstug are common in the oarbonate layers. Recent areal work suggests that these rooks are metasediments of the atauro1itequartz subfacies of the almandine amph.bo1tte facies. the Allanite is fairly common in gneisses throughout the Bighorn Mountains, in the Horn found in greatest aburt4ance along zones adjacent to the carbonate rock. These zones, ranging in width from zaro to about four area it is feet, also contatn diopside, tremoliteact inolite, epidote, and garnet, They resemble typical skarn however, no igneous rock is apparent. Tabular allanite grains range from submicroscopic to 3 cm in length, they carry 51O% Ce, 3—5% La and noteable ounts of Nd and Tb. Most grains show metamictization:; zoning is common. Some of the allanite is believed to have formed by replacement of epidote; however, the source of the rare-earth elements is unknown. Prospect pits and trenches dug in search of radioactive minerals common throughout the Horn area. Staking was done in 1954—55, along a zone parallel to and inc1uding the carbonate rock, mostly on the basis of geiger-counter investigation and the great abundance of vitreous black minerals. A radiometric survey made by the author in the area of greatest trenching revealed low readings, Further work showed the presence of thorium-bearing allanite, but the largest percentage of black minerals is andradite garnet. are �26 GEOLOGY OF TIlE SOUDAN MINE, NORTHEASTERN MINNESOTA F. L. Klinger Oliver Iron Mining Division, U. S. Steel Corporation, Virginia, Minnesota The Soudan mine is located in the waster part of the Vermilion In this area depoeits district, 2 miles north of tb. Mesabi range. of massivs hematite are found in steeply dipping rocks of Earlier Precambriafl age. The hematite deposits are associated with the Soudan iron—formation, whLch occurs as lenticular beds within the Ely green— stone. The ore deposits are found in a belt of greenstone and iron formation that is flanked on the north and south by sedimentary rocks correlated with the (Medial Precambrian) Knife Lake group. The rocks of the area strike EW to N. 80° E. and dip 75850 N. The greenstone is made up. of a complex group of chioritic and serleitic chists derived from flows, intrustves, fragmental rocks and sedentary rocks. Despite stron.g alteration and the development of schistsity, primary textures and structures are retained in the .greetons and indicate that these rocks are riot extensively sheared. ion from bas j.c to acidic, and the basic The rocks range in compos vartet-ies are notably deficient in lime; this contrasts with the basaltic compgition of greenstone from other parts of the Vermilion distr'iet. A zone of siliceous and sericitic rocks, resembling tuffaceous sediments, is found adjacent to the main belts of iron- it format ion. The iron—formation shows mappable changes in apar lithology, which in a regular order as ehert, lean jasper, and jaspilite. he distribution of lithologies is interpreted as vertical and lateral facies changes. A stratigraphic sequence is proposed, consisting of basal chart uc.ceeded upwards by lean jasper and jaspilite. The main bodies of iron-formation in the Soudan mine appear to be related t a series of complex folds developed in a single belt of iron-formation. Strong folding in the iron-formation is in contrast to the scarcity of recognizable folds in the greenstone. The ore occurs in the iron-formation as replacement deposits of hematite. The occurrence of ore shows stratigraphic control by the jaspilite facies, and other controls include intrusive contacts and structurally thinned portions of the iron—formation. The origin of the ore is suggested as hydrothermal. �27 MAGNETIC ANOMALIES AND MAGNETIZATION OF MAIN MESABI IRON-FORMATION Gordon D. Bath and Ge.ore M. Schwartz U. S. Geological Survey, ?nlo Park, Calif crnia University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota It has long been known that the magnetic effects of the Biwabik iron—formation are complex. It was not, however, until the dLstrict, along with most of northern Minnesota, was mapped with the airborne magnetometer that the full import of the complexity was realized. Large negative anomalies appear where positive effects were expected and positive anomalies appear offset with respect to the geologic map of the formations. As a result of the problems of interpretation encountered, the United States Geological Survey wtth the cooperation of the Minnesota Geological Survey started a detailed research project to attempt to explain the anomalies not only over the iron-formation but over all the igneous and metamorphic complex of northern Minesota. Following are some of the results over the Biwabik iron—formation. Negative magnetic anomalies over magnetite-rich Biwabik iron— formations have been explained as resulting from the low angle of dip which places the formation almost at right angles to the earth's magnetic field. The strength of the earth's field is reduced by the demagnetizing effect of the formation to a degree that the thduced magnetization is less than the remanent magnetization. A direction of remanent magnetization, one that is generally along the bedding planes of the formation, produces the magnetic lows found over the tops of the strongly magnetLzed members. Ground magnetic traverses show the effects of this near-horizontal direction of remanent magnetization. The magnetic lows are much greater in ground an air traverSes over the magnetic taconites of the East Mesabi range. The tendency of alignment of magnetization direction along bedding planes suggests that changes in dip angle would make significant changes A ground profile over the in the character of the magnetic anomaly. Ironwood formation near Mellen, Wisconsin, shows an anomaly that is similar to the one that would be expected for a steeply dipping Biwabik iron-formation 'with a near-vertical direction of magnetization. �28 MAGNETIZATIONS OF IRON-FORMATIONS AND IGNEOUS ROCKS OF NORThERN MINNESOTA Charles E. Jabren U. S. Geological Survey, Austin, Minmasota Measurements of the physical properties of oriented rock eampies co1lect in northern Minnesota show irregular magnetizations for iron—format ions and granites, and. more regular magnet izat tons fr diabase, and flow rooks of the Duluth gabbro comp4ex. the gabbros, The directions of remanent magnetizaUon of the iron-formation are irregular in azimuth but have an average inclination that is close to the plane of the bedding of the formations. Mesabi iron-formations with high magnet ite contents have remanent mcments several times their induced moments, but Soudan-type iron-formations have induced monts that are greater than tbeLr remanent moments. The majority of the gabbro, basalt, diabase, and granophyre samples from the Duluth area have a remanent magnetization with an azimuth of about 2900 and an inclination downward of about 35°. Twenty.-nine sples from seven strongly magnetized diabase outcrops have an average moment of .01 cgs with 288° azimeth aftd 36° inclinatin. Their average susceptibf.lity is 0.003 cgs. Fftyeight samples of Giants range granite collected southeast of Ely show a dotward but scattered direction of remanent magnetization ranging in intensity from 0.0001 to 0,001 cgs. �29 TEE OC RRENQE OF CARBONATES OThER THAN IRON AT DEPTh IN LAKE ST3PEIOR IRON FORNATIONS Pickands J. Royce Mather & Company, Duluth, Minnesota Wide1y sepaated, steeply pitching Lake Superior iron ore bodies enconter an increase in calcium and magnesium carbonates at depth. These carbonates ili voIds in the iron ore, lowering the grade of the iran with a corresponding rise in lime and magnesia. When these contaminants beco sufficiently abundant, the iron formation no longer contains ore even though well oxidized and leached. On the Gogebic range there is evidence that these carbGnates have been replaced by iron oxides at depths of more than 3,000 feet. to indicate that, after the ore was formed, calcium This would and magnesium carbonates were emplaced. At some later time the contaminants were remQved from the top downward. Apparently, in several localities, this removal was aceompanied by replacement in which iron oxides were substituted for the carbonate minerals. At such places very rich oxide ore bodies result, cut off at depth by interstitial carbonates as yet unremoved from the ore. �STRATIORAPHY ANt) STRUCTURE OF THE MeCASLIN QUARTZITE REGION OF NORTHEASTERN WISCONSIN Joseph 3. Mancuso Michigan State University, East Lansing, Michigan The McCaslin Mountain district lies along the parallel 45°22' north latitude aid beten the meridians 88°il' and aaG48t west longitude in northeastern Wisconsin. occupies parts The of Marinette, Langlade, sorest, and Oconto counties and ontain district the MeCas i in Mountain quart zite, the Thunder Mountain quartz ite and the complex of border rocks associated with the quartaites. The district covers an area of approximately 373 square miles. The rock formations and their succession beginning with the youngest are shown in the following table: Pleistocene Glacial drift Unconformity High Fails granite Intrusive contact Hager rhyolite porphyry Unconformity Precambrian McCasiin quartzite Unconformity Waupee volcanics and basement complex The broad regional structure of the McCasiin district can best be described as the north limb of a large synclinal trough., the south limb of which rises in the vicinity of Mountain, Wisconsin, approximately 15 miles south of the main McCaslin range of hills. The axial line of the regional structure trends east-west to N,60°E. and plunges slightly to the The High Falls granite terminates It exhibits intrusive the structure to the north and northeast, relationships to the rocks of the McCaslin district, showing evidence of invasion by a combination of the processes of forceful injection, stoping, and assij1il4tion. st. �31 INCREASI:NG ThE RESOLVflG POWER OF GRAVITY MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS AD William J. Hinze Michigan State University, East Lansing, Michigan Observed gravity and magnetic anomalies normally consist of the sttperposition of effects from two or more sources. This may seriously hamper the 1oation and quantitative study of interesting anomalies. As a result the first and most important step in gravity and magnetic analysis is to separate the anomaly into its component parts. One method of increasing the resolving power of gravity and magnetic anomalies, and thus of separating anomalies into their component parts, is to project analytically the observed anomaly to what it would be at a horizontal level closer to the sources of the anomaly. This downward continuation method is based on the general rule that gravity and magnetic anGmaliea decrease in areal extent and increase in magnitude as their source is approached. Standard methods of downward continuation are difficult and timeconsuming to apply to most mining and regional geophysical surveys. However, an approximation method, based on Peters' Solution of the upward continuation problem and a method of finite difference approximation to Laplace's equation assuming two-dimensional anomalies, greatly simplifies the problem. Calculations on ideal examples suggest that the accuracy of this approximation method compares favorably with standard methods. The usefulness of the method in increasing the resolving power of gravity and magnetic observations is illustrated by theoretical examples and a case history dealing with an iron—formation in the Lake Superior region. �32 GEOLOGIC INTERPRETATION OF AIRBORNE MAGNETOMETER PROFILES ACROSS LAKE SUPERIOR Edward Thiel University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin A Varian proton precessional airborne magnetometer scheduled for use in Antarctica during the 1959-60 field season was test flown in the Lake Superior region during October 1959, Four mag netic profiles aroas Lake Superior were obtained, Two additional profiles were run over the Lake Superior syncline to the southst of the Lalce. The correlation øf magnetic variation and geo]ogy obtained over this known geo3ogical structure on these two profiles served as a guide to interpretation of the four profiles across the water—covered region. The magnet ic pattern obtained over the baa ic Keweenawan lava differs sharply from that of the adjacent sandstone formations. On this basis it is possible to. infer the location of geological contacs beneath Lake Superior.' flows �33 IRON DEPOSITS IN CABON, EQUATORIAL AFRICA Gilbert L. Hole Bethlehem Steel The Company, Bethiemen, Pennsylvania iron deposits in Gabon are associated vith Pracbrian sedimentary iron—formation that, through the leaching of silica and the solution and redeposition of iron oxides, baa been enriched to large concentrations of high-grade iron ore. The unathered ironformation is for the most part a laminated roc called itabirite containing hematite, magnetite, and quartz. There ts a little silicate material, but carbonate minerals have not as yet been found. The formation is strongly folded, and steep dips to the east are generally the rule. The ore bodies are related to the surface rather than to the structure of the underlying rocks, the ore zones conly tran secting the bedding of the itabirite at steep angles, Exploration to date has indicated a reserve of several hundred million tons of direct—shipping, open—pit ore running 62 to 64% Fe and 2 to 3% SiC)2, and it is anticipated that an additional significant amount will be proved through further exploration. The ore is friable and soft and will require agglomeration. Rvntual development of these deposits will requ4re construction of approximately 450 miles of railroad through rough jungle country, much of which is wild and uninhabited. � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology: Proceedings, 1960 Description An account of the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. April 14-15, 1960 Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1960 Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource John W. Allingham Russell C. Babcock. Jr. Lloyal O. Bacon Robert G. Bates Gordon D. Bath Richard C. Beard Thomas E. Berg Robert F. Black Lewis M. Cline Gerrard L. Coetzee Carl E. Dutton Thomas E. Hendrix William J. Hinze Gilbert L. Hole Charles E. Jahren Robert W. Johnson Jr Elizabeth H. Kissling Frederick L. Klinger Gene L. Haberge WIlliam C. Luth John W. Mack Joseph J. Mancuso Robert P. Meyer Willard H. Parsons Josiah Royce Kenneth A. Sargent George M. Schwartz Robert E. Sloan John S. Steinhart Edward C. Thiel James Trow George P. Woollard Justin Zinn Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource PDF Language A language of the resource English https://digitalcollections.lakeheadu.ca/files/original/44f7124d14f12414cf6d4607d9d50899.pdf 596272a38cfdcea234c5d67d1589e6f5 PDF Text Text -&IXTH ANNUAL MEETING INSTITUTE O LAKE SUPERIOR GEOLOGY • APRIL 27th 29th, 1961 SNYSORED13' I tKEFJEAD BRANCH - C NLWJ \N [WI ITUTr OF MENING & METALLURGY 1 EL- — ON'IAfl-iO-DFI-TAhTMI \T OF MINLS PORT EIThJR& FORtW4LE1 \F ONTARIO �SIXTH ANNUAL MEEfl'ING OF TE OF lAKE SUPERIOR GEOLOGY iNSflTflE April 2?, 28 and 29, 1961 PRcOHAM. Provl.ncial Rooms Prince Arhm' Hotel Thurs4ay, April 27 Chairman E• 8,30 A.M. 9.30 10.30 11.00 11,20 1l.O G . SE$SION I Abàtract Na. Pye Page. No. Registration and Social Hour Address of Welcne WL.CS Greer Business Session .Henry Lepp Glimpses of the XXI Injernational a Geó1ogca1 Congress -s A. ic. Snelgrove Geocheidcal Anomalies in Forest Floor Material I Progres Report D.fl Trd1ey The Petrology of the Ge4o Nine R.C..Ee 'ay An Investigation of Sçme GoldQüartz Veins . , V.. Oja iS 18 12 Institute Luncheon 12.30 PJ. SESSION II Co.iChairmen 2.00 PN 2.30 3.00 .3O .O0 Henry Lepp, A. K. .Snelgrova Sublacustrine Topography of Eastern Lake Supe'ior Jack Parker Recent Contributions to the Late and Recent Geological History of Lake Superior John }. Zwnberge Ve1octy and Isotropy Stwltes of Pre cambrian Lameflar Forination2 (to be Dreserred by G, Secor) D. W, 4erritt (o'fee and biscuits (no charge) Granitic Rocks of the Pembine Area, Northeast Wisconsin - J. Allen Cain Tectni Analysis of Some Precambrian Rocks, Horn Area, Bighorn Mountains, John C. Palmquist Wyoming Lithology of the Seine Series in the Vicinity of Crilly, Ontario W. L. Young Friday, April 28 Co-Chairman 6 13 19 SESSION III Henry Lepp, Gerald Anderson 9.OQ A.N, Types of Iron Formation in Western Ontario 9.30 Geology of the Nakina Iron Froperty, 3.0,00 30 ar4 Their Sign ficanc 0. G. Suffel OntariQ W T. Swensen Geology of East Lake St. Joseph Iron Formation A, T. Avison and J. .F. Wbite 4 16 17 3. �Friday, April Abstract No. SESSI0N III 8 Page NQ, 10.30 A,M. 100 Coffea and b±scuit?s charge) The. Erce Lake Iron Formation, Red Lake Mining Division, Ontario •. M. We Eartiey Some PetrQgraphic and Chemical FeatureE 11.30 3 of the 0iinlirtt Iron Range, Pt Arth Area W. W. Mooz'ehouee Institute Cobaiien -' (no Luncheon 12.30 P.M. Trevor Page, R. V. Oja 2.00 P .N. Rem nent 2.30 in recambrian Banded W. A • Gross and D W. Strangway The Use of the Dp Need'e wi1b Specia3. gnctsm and Orgin of Hard Hematite Iron Fortnation Reference to Magnetic Taconite Exp1oraiion — william J. Hne Manganese in the Menonirise Iron Rang€i, Niàhigau (to be presented by gaul Zirnmer) Paul Zimner and G icnatra 3,30 Corfee and bisc4ts (no I 20 Iron The Distribution of Manganese in Sedimentary Iron FoririatjQna and Associated Rocks — ffnry Lepp The Thterpolat±on Parabola Applied t 5e002x1 Deriatve. Interpret&tion — Lloyal 0. Bacon 00 8 charge) Rep1aoment Texture in Negaunee Formation E. L. Beutner I.30 7 b 9 2 �UTHORS Geologist, Ungac; Iran Ores Mxtrea]. A. T. Avison Geologist, Geco Nines 'Manitouwadge K. Abe]. Lloy]. College of Mining and Technology, Houghton, Michigan Michigan 0. Bacon W. Bartley B. L. Beutner R.C.E. gray j Allen Cain . Re Gross Abstract 'a No. UI Consulting Geologist, Port Arthtr Chief Geo1ogist Jones & Laughlin StOl Corporation, Pittsburgh. Pa. Chief Geologist, GecoMines, Deprtment of Geology, Northwestern University, Evanstn, flhlnois 6 Geology, 7 Assistant Professor, Department of University of Toronto Department of Geoipr, Michigan State Univerglty, East Lansing, Michigan C. Kustra Nie1gan College of Mining arid D. W. Merritt Tehnology, Hôüghton, Michigan Associate Professor of Geo)!igy, Univezsiy of Minnesota, Duluth Geologist, The CaliforuiC. Can7 in New Orleans, Louisiana W. W. oorehouse Professox' Department of Geology University of Toronto Consulting Geologist, Port Arthur Ray V. Oa Geologist, Geco Mines, Manitouwadge V. T. Onodera Jo, O Palmquif .Departmont of Geology3 State Univeri.ty of Iowa, Iowa City Michigan College of Mining and Jack Parker Technology, Houghton, Michigan A. K, Sneigrova Professor, Michigan College of G 0. Suffel Aasociate Frofessor Department of W. T, Swensen D• Strangway F. White D0 H. Yadley 1 U, L. Young P J. W0 Zer H. Z'umberge 3 Manitouwadge U. J. Hinze Henry Lepp 2 8 20 9 10 11 12 13 ilL Mining and Technology Houghton Geology, University of Western Ontario, London Asdstant Vice President, The Anaconda 16 17 oIiipany (Canada) Lirnit,e, TorontG Geophysicist, Bear Creek Research 7 Mining Company, Denver, Colorado Ltd., .. Geologist, teep Rock Mines 1 Steep Rock Lake Engineer" Associate Professor of 1ining ing, University of Minnesota, MinneapoliS 18 — Ass±stant Profes sor, Department of neology, Carieon College, Ottawa District Geologist, The M. A, Hanna company, Iron River, Michigan professor, Department University of Michigan, n Arbor of Geo1o 19 20 21 -• �:i. GEOLOGY 0? THE EAST LAKE ST. JEPH ThCI WOPY A, T, Avison and J, F White Magnetite iron formaton occurs in a belt of meta. morphosed Keewatin#ype se&Lments at the east end of Lake at. Josepk in N th-centval Ontario. Two major hwiz ens and nuirm smaller lenseà of iror formation re interbeddéd with a series of quarbz''biotite schists and tLc chlorite and anetifrous schists near the north áomtait of an igieoiis mass of granite and gatbro, The two major h'izone vary betweo 3.O and 1180 feet wide at 8tU' face and are believed to be made up of closely interfthgered lenee rathex than widespread regiilez' beda. �2 THE ThTERPOLPTION PAR&BOL& APPLIED TO S CO DEIVATIVE IEPREL'AT ION Lloyal 0. Eacon • • Numerical second derjvatLe forpuIation is derived for one dimensional (profile) arid tWQ ditnensioua3. (surface) data. Coiu' parison with other methods of second derivative calcjlattrn is px'e.. sented for several minezal exploration areas �THE BRUCE LP1KE IRON FORMATION, RED LAKE MINING DD1ISION, ONTARIO M. W Bartley The history of exploration for treatable iron 'ormation at ruce Lake, Red Lake Mining Divi3ion,, Ontario is described a1cng with a brief review of the general ratigraphy and strueturee The Keewatin..'t37pe iron fonnation has been deliz:ieated by geological nd geophysicai riapping, and diamond drilling has outlined two stthstanr tial iron. çre deposits from which a des±rable peflstized product can be dx'ved. ( �RPLkCEMENT TEXTURE IN NEGAUNEE IRON FORMATION E L. Beutner Studies and Qb5ercations which were iade during th past fifteen years in the curse of field mapping, exploration drilling and mining in a portion of the Marquette Range south of Negaunee, Michigan, point up sonie interesting relations between charatsrstica of the iron romation, geological structure and the localization of soft irn ore deposits Evidence here seems to indicate that much of the. iron forination had undergone oxidation before ore forming processes were actIve and possibly before completion of iiastrophisn, Secondary oxidation, leaching, replacement and sometimes actual inioval of both iron and silica occurred in some zoneLs which had been strongly fractured through folding or faulting ar4 along the contacts between the von formation and in— trsive ocka. Where waters circulated through such disturbed areas they 1et their mark in a distinctive spotty or "leopard" texture which is superirrrposed on the norma]. straight bedded iron formation. Tha avenues of circulation nay be traced from the present surfae through steeply dipping fault zones to the lower thin bedded part if the iron formation where the soft ore bodies are localized. The fact that the hanging wall iron formatibn of many of the ore deposit exhibits the porous "leopard" texture suggests that the game solutions which were responsible f leaching and repaoement in the iron forxna.. tiori may also have brought about nearly completu removal f silida and enr±c}ent o.t iron in e1eted structm'a). situatjox to form the high grade ires, I �THE PPROLCY OF THE QECO MINE R,CE. Mo'e Bray, LK. Abel, V.T. OnQ4e'r. detailed petrographic studies o the rocks with the Geco cop zinc ore deposit at Maz4touwadge,. Ontario, thafl waE previousIy possible have establJshed the sedi. meritary Qrigin of the grey gneiss, The variations in the quartz. ass ociated muacevlte schist and in the horn.fel are escrbed, The intrusive quartz dirites and pegrnatjtea are also described.: The rntainorphic minerals connected with the re zone are discussed. �6 PREGAMBRIAN GRANITIC COMPLEX OF NORTHEASTERN WISCONSIN J. Allan Cain From an area oX soiie 350 square miJes mapped within th Wiconsin Pre canbrian Qorriplex, a rock..uriit was selected for more de ta structural and modal analysis. This unit the Newingham Granite lies jirmiediately 3djacent to the town of Pembin, is .sci$ O square miles in area1 and has intrusive contacts wi±h greenstone, bjotite neiss and horriilende gneies. Nodal data from 70 specimens- for quartz o1or index, feldspax ratio (potash. feldspar/plagioclase), and total feldspa', as well as spific gravity, were analyzed. on..orthoginal polynoird.aJ analycts was used — via 1.3. 650 - to compute linear and quadra tic trexid!..surface8 and deviations for each variable. A comparison of these results with those *tained by lthitten from his similar £tudy of the "older granite" of Dneal (Ireland) indicates the potenttal petrogenetie significance of trend—srn'face analysis. I �7 REMA.NENT MAGNETISM AND THE ORIGIN OF HAiti) HEMATITES IN PRECAMBRIAN BANDET) IRON FOIThIATION W. H, Gross and D W. Str.ngway Because hematite is a mineral with a high degree of znagnetio stabiUty t was considered possib]e that a study of the reman t maget. ierrx of hematite ore bodies In. iron forration 4ght add to a knowledge of their origin. To test this possibility, a number of ,riented spLmens an iron were collected from two hard hematite ore bodis that ocem' formation near. Fort Gouraud, Mauritania. Or of these ore bodies is an elongated ens of hard hematite which occurs in a steep plunging "S' shaped fold. The lens is roughly con cordant 'with the trend of the bedding of the surrounding iron formatiofl. and it is known to extend to a depth of at least .7S0 feetbeiow the present surface without any detectable change in physical or chemical properttee. It was found that the principal directions of remanerit magnetizatoii must have been formed in the hematite whefl the. beds were essentially flat. This is interpreted to mean. that' the bulk of 'the hematite in the ore is either syngenetio and was formed as an Iron rich horizon during sedimen" taton or it was formed by leaching of the flat-lying iron formation. The steep inclination of the magnetization in the beds when. they have been "unfolded" to the flat position suggests that the ore was formed in the Precambrian when the earth's magnetic pole w:as located in Northweatei Africa, magnetic direction on one of the limbs A Second rather is thought to indicate the Lormation of secondary hematite that was formed either by reworking of the primary hematite or by introduction. of hema-. tite into the ore zone at the time of folding. If the ore Is essentially syngenitic, prospecting for additional ore bodies of this type at Fort Qouraud should be governed by a knowledge of the primary features in the oigina. basin of deposition. A second ore body is composed primarily of soft hematite that has a hard hematite capping.. The soft ore is relatively shallow in depth ar4 .s discordant 'wth the bedding in the underlying iron formation, The magnetic dixections in the hard hematite capping were lagely random but hae some preference towards the present magnetic north. These results suggest that this type of hard In re].ati'ly modern times. fii was formed by leaching It is concluded that the hematite ores at Forb Gotiraud have had a complex and multiple origin. �8 USE OF T} DIP NLE T}E WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO MkGNETIC TACONITE William J, PLORAT ION Rinze The dip needle, crie of the oldest of geophysical explora. tion instruments, is skill beig used as an ecploratiori tool particu larly in the arch for magnetic taconite ores0 However, the highly distorted magnetic fields associated with these ores oten produce misleading dip needle anomalies due to the interaction of intensIty and inclination effects0 tase histories and a laboratory investiga-' magnetic fields illustrate the profound. effect that both of these magnetic yariables have on dp needle. readings • Results of a laboratory investigation indicate that large negative normal settings nay be used to subordinate the effect of inclination over high ±ntensit ranges thus forcing the dip needle to give a clearer picture of the rnagnetic character and distribution of the rock formations. The period of oscilJation of the swinging dip needle, which decreases as the vertical magnetic intensity increases 3fld as the inclination decreases, can also be used as an aid to the successful geological interpretation tioia employing controlled of dp needle tnoaliea. Studies indicate that temperature, orientatior, and leveling variations normally encountered in field operation of the dip needle result in negligible errtx*s and a stuclT of dip ieedle reading method indicates that the optimum, reading method varies the requiremezts and conditions of the surveys but that the reading rrthod based on the ritnetic meanof the second, twice wit l i the and the fourth reversals third, most universaU I acceptable. f the oscillating dip needle �9 TH DISTRIBUTION OF MP3ANESE IN SEDINENTARY IRON FORMAT IONS AND ASSOCIATED ROCKS Henry Ipp The average Mn:Fe ratio f Precambr.an iron formations is O.O3! which is essentially the same as that of the average crystal. line rock (' .028) from which these formations were derived • Post Pre. cambrian iron formations, on the. other hand, have an average Nn:Fe indicatIng a pronounced geochemical separation of iron and ianganese as compared to the crutal average. The difference in Mri:Fe of the two age groups of iron sediments nay be due to differences in depositional eivfroninents ( dizing. environment favors the separation o! Mn and Fe, rbonate fie]d does not) ratio of 0.007, ratios en.ces In the nature of their source rocks, or to differ. In Precambrian Iron fornmtions, the oxide horizons have considerably lower' Mn:e ratios than the c'bonate..silicate horizons. There appeai's to be a correlation between Mn:Fe ratio and CQ2 content, The distribution of Nn:Fe ratios for analyses from the Quyuna range 18 bimodal • The rorinangan.U'eroua sections of this iron tr ratio of an show lower than norma'. MzuFe ratios whereas the reverse s for the manganiferous horizons, The average iralu of the Mn:Fe iron formation nay provide an indication of whether or formatIon nt sedimentary manganese deposits can be expected in the same sedi. ment1ary sequence, �10 VELOCITY AMISCIrR0PY STUDIES OF PFECAMBRIAN WLLAR FOR1ATIONS Donald W Merritt A prelimnary field investigation was made of seismic wave velocity arilsotropy in lameilar formations. Results of the shallow seismic refraction surveys in seven different localities on Precambrian metasdimentary and inetaigneous rocks cornprising eight different lithQlogies inciudin schist, granite gneiss, banded iron formatiO, slate and per±dotie altered to serperitiriite show that velocity anisotropy is meaurable in the Zi4d and nay be useful in delineating structural orientation in buried fonna.. tions, Sei'mic vave velocities in steeply dipping formations characterized by beddiig, jointing, cleavage or fractures were foufld to be faster in the directjon parallel to the fractures than perpendicular to theni The ratias between the seirrd.c wave veio'' cities parallel to and perpendicular to these feat1res approached values of two to one, I �SE PETRORAFHIC AND CHEMICAL FEATURES OF THE GUNFLINT IRON RANGE PORT ARTHUR AREA W. W. Moorehouse be results of about 100 spectrochemical analysss of iron fømtion and asociated argillites from the Gunflint and Mesabi ranges are suzmnarized and compared with simiLar ana1yes of ancient and recent marine and non'-marine sediments of varioi typese The results of these analyses are consistent with a marine or bracki3h-.water environment of depo8ition of these iron fcrrmation. The significance of various characteristic textures of the several facies Qf the Gunflint is revieied. The granules ai4 other features of the taconites, as well as their field oharcteris-* tics are indicatIve ef active or tebu1et conditions of depos±ti5n. The variations oftei encountered ri the mineralogy f the taconites point to the mixing of the products of local regimes of varying h and pH. The influence of diageriesis and itamorphism in modifying the mineralogy and texture is discussed. It is voncluded that they have not seriously disturbed the aigriificaxzt environmental criteria. The petrog2'aphic features of the other main facie3 of the Gunflirit are corzsidered, it is concluded that these result from variations in depth, turbulence and organic content in the environ-' merit of sedimentation. Textural and compostiona1 features bearing on the role of volcanic contributions to the accumulation. of the sediments of the Gunflint cQnclude the discussion. I �32 ANVESTIGATIONOFSO GQQUARTZVEIT R V Oja ijwestigation was conducted ort 30 o' 70 ore-. and non!ore.'bearing quartz veins in one section of one of the gold -jnes of the PorQupine Camp, Qntario. Although all 70 veins had been exposed and developed by underground headings, not all con-u This tamed gold in qu'antities'suiTtcierrt to make ore Since both orend non-.ore-beqring quartz veins were identical in appearance in iamond drill interectionD and in the underground eXpQsm'eB, the perpleirg decision, "Should the vein be develope4 further?' zearly always h.d to be faced. This research, therefore5 sought to establish a means Qf distnguishg between ore- and non-.ore-.bearing quartz veins by petrographic, dcrepitation and spectrographic techniques klthoigh it was discovered that ore-.bearing quartz contains more liquid in.. clusiorts and decrepttates 11$ to 3i% more than the non-.ore-.bearing çucrtz, sp much overlap exists in the results of these observationa categorized with as'surance. so that no single secirnen Sir.ilarly, no conclualve differences were revealed by spectrographic cnbe irrve stigation. After reconsiderIng the methods of quartz vein formation the gold, and gold introduction, it is concluded that, apart there need be no major d. erences in the chemical or piysical pro" perties of the ore— and non.orebearing quartz veins considered in this iigation, �33. TECTONIC ANALYSIS OF SOME PRECAMBRIAN ROCKS, i IGORN MOU1TAINS WYOMING Johii C, Palinquist A Laramide blocls"like uplift of the Precambrian basement. resulted in the formation of a faulted mountain. niasa cveririg approxi.. rnatély 27 equare miles, extending southward from the centraL Bighorn unit. The core of this uplift contains complexly folded, £oliated hihgrade metamorphic. rocks Precambrian rock types include pegmatite, anphibolite, calc—siUcate rock, fldspathic rotk, btotite shist, marble, banded ironstonø, quartzite, varieties of garietiferous rock and amphibole' rQC1S in addition to the predominant gneiss. Schistosity, inineraJ_0g1. cl and lithological. layering are conformable throughon the complex with c±oss—cutting pegmattes being the çuly exception. These rocks are believd to have originated from reginaJ. metamorphism and later alkali meta.somai4,vi of supracrustal. rocks. Alkali inetasomatism, apparently a post-tectonte event arid perhaps a late stage of the regional rnetamorp1iism, culmirated in pegmatitizatot.. The staurolite'. quartz s'ubfacea of the almandinei.amph±bolit,e facies is iidioaied. The internal structure of the metamorphic rocks is dominated by a complex anticline plunging to the norrorthwest. Foliation, lineation, reiaton of minor folds and distribution o mapped uiits all point to the existence oi' this fold, but the preoise g&ometryof the fold is elucidated ory after a study involving methods of st&tistical analysis and tectonic profile construction, This study reveals a closed, slightly overturned cyiindric4 anticline dth. planar limbs, Measured lirieatiori cqrrespo4s to the axial line as determined from statistical analysis ot foliation data, and is, there'.. fore, b.Uneation, Sediinentary..covez' structures are believed to result from passive draping cver active basement blocks. The blocks are bounded. by the Horn and Tensleep faults, The attitude of the Horn fault parallels foliation weas the Tensleep fault appears to be a rejuvenated Pre. cambriaxt fault, These relatiàns demonstrate that the strictural grain of the basement may influence later deformation. I �SISBIACUSTRINE TQPCXRAP}1T OF EASTERN LAKE SUPERIOR Jack Parker Interpretation of recent echosoiinding taken by the IJ,S. Lake Survey indicates that the Lake Superior basin has been ice out of relatively soft rocks,. and that inoraines excavated on the south shore hold the water at its present level, Long, nà'rw vaUeys, as much as 700 feet belcw sea level, exteid as in a northau"south directions rrruch as So by inils ros±on of hard arid soft Dock8 and the general liiiiits of lavas, sandstones, and glacial drift, the 4irection of ice mcvernent and. the major faults. Differential shear zones pern.tts mapping of I Of �GLflSES OF T} XXI I1'TERNATIONLGECLOGICAL CONGRESS A. K. Sneigrove A travelogue of the Copenhagen Congress in August, 1960, by one of N.tQhigan Tech's official professional delegates. In additiou to attending the meetings, the speaker yiited the Western Noegian Fjord oouxxbry, and participated in geological exeureicns, in the 0810 area &td in the rnird.ng cezitera of outbern Norway �T!?ES OF IRON FOR1ATION IN WE$TERN ONTARIO AND THEIR ORIGINAL ENVIRONMENT G. G, SiiffeJ. A detailed study of published literature mentioning or describing sedinnta7 iron formation in Western Ontario has con. firnied that there are four types aufficiently different n character and lithologic arid structural envfroruiient that they can be readily distinguished. The Patricia and Port Arthur Mining Div±sions provide a north.south section across the Superior province in Canada. It is suggested that the iron forniations were deposited. in enornents compatible with those supposed to occur during a sequence of geo. synclinal sedinntatioi with the development of jsland arcs. It seems conceivable that the IIars hail Lake series and related rocjcs of Coutchiching type represent ancient shelf deposits, the oldest rocks in the Province The Keewatin type in almost cer-. ainy lagoonal marine, the iron. proba'bly originating i'rc volcanic emanations, The Windigo1an or imniskaming in closely associated with producte of mechanical erosion of eugeosync3.inal rocks. The origin of the iron may have varied with time and. place. The Animikie formations are imiogeosynclinal, blQnging to a new arid uncompleted cycle, Although this area is upposed to represent one of the original continental nucleil, considerable evidence suggests that still older land masses exited, as yet unrecognized. I •1 �TYPES OF IRON FOINATION IN WESTERN ONTARIO AND THEIR ORIQINAL ENVIRONME G. G, SuXfel A detailed study of published literature mgntionirzg or de3cribing sedirnentar-y iron formation in Western. Ontario has con- firmed that there are four types sufficiently different in oharacter and lithologic and structural environment that they can be readily distinguished. The Patricia and Port Arthur Mining Divisions provide a orthisouth section across the Superior province in Canada It is suggested that the iron forT1ations were deposited in erivirormients conpatible with those supposed to occur during a sequence of ge° syciinal sedimentatin with the development of island arcs. It seems conceivable that the Marshall Lake series and related rooks o Coutchiching type represent ancient shelf deposits, the oldest rocks in the Province, The Keewatin type is almost er tainy lagoonai. marine, the iron probably originating from volcanic eirxiations. The WindigoTzan or Tirniskaming type is closely associated -ith products of mechanical erosion of eugosynolinal rocks. The of the iron may have varied with time and place. The Ariimikie formations are iniogeosynciinal, belonging to a new and uncompleted origin cycle. Although this area s suppoed to represent one of the original continental nucleii, considerable evidence suggests that still older land masses existed, as yt unrecognized, I �17 GEOLOGY OF THE NAKINA IRON PROPEIY1 ONTARIO W, T, eisen The Anaconda Ccmpany, through its wholly ned aub sidiary The Anaconda oinpany (Canada) Ltd., has investigated optioned arid partially developed a large tonnage of iron ore amenable to magnetic cocentration0 The reserves are located in north centra1 Ontario and ccur within a twenty.'two mile belt b!' layered arid intricately fo)ded metamorphic rocks close to the north contact of an igneous complex of gz'anite aid pegmatite. There are two main ore deposits.0 Bx'iarclil'fe. is a steep to vrtially dipping body 100 to 500 feet wide and over a mU long. The Tw Nile deposit is flat dipping and confined to an open, asymretric syricline; it is approximately a in:tle wide and 2S0 to 1400 feet thick. On Its flat easterly punge it i aaucer1ike shape and is emanable to open-pltting for an east-west distance in of several thousand feet. Its further extension has been mdi" cated for at leaat three nd.la by xrgnetometer wor1 in conjunobion with diamond drill tests. �18 GEOCHEMICAL ANOMALIES IN FOREST FLOOR MATEEIAIS A PRGRESS REPORT fl H. Yardley Geochemical investigations of forest duff (htunus layer) near ZLy, Minnesota demonstrate that CNi inineralizai. tion in wder13ring gabbro is rZLected by the Ci-Ni content of the forest. duff. The anomalous pattern is more erratic than the pattern in the underlying till but does identify a target zones 8anpLing of forest duff is faster than soil sampling but further simplification of both analybtl arid sanp].ing methods appears neceasary before recommending the method for gerra1 app), cation.. �1, ITHOLOGY OFT}SINE StIES LLYrARI W. L. Yowig The .&tho].ogy of the Seine Series is diused arid the three princ±paL fac.e-s are suggested. Petrologic and geocheincal analyses ef the matrjx of the Seine "Conglomerate" compare favol2rably with the nearby Keewatin. lavas, suggesting a volcanic matrix for the Seine "Conglomerate". Lack or sedimentary features within the matrix: suggests a non.sedimentaz'y origin. It is postulated that the natrlx was a voLcsc flow or glowing-avalanche-'tuff which picked up and ircor.. porated boulcers while it was being laid down, and must, therefore, be thought of as a volcanto r?.ther than a sediment. If the Seine is to be used as a mrke'formation, then, it is impprtant to recogzize that the lithpogy may change from a "boulder conglomerate" to a "sericite..ohlorite 5Chi5t" in a short distance. Near Crilly the Series dips under the Keewatin volcariic6 At Nine center the Series is intruded by the Bad Vermillion granite, It was concluded that the Seine Series is of Keewatin age. I �20 MA.NQANESE NThERALIZATICN IN THE CANNON IRON NINES, IRON RWRaCRThL FALLS DISTRICT ,KECHTG P. W. Zier arid C. R, Kutra Nngane.sa occurs in only one mine in this area in quantities large enough and with gzade high enough to make & manganiferous iron ore product. This paper describes the mineralogy of this mangantferous ore body. The primary manganese mineral s hausmannite accompanied by such mzinezls as manganite, pyrolusite, rhodochrosite, braunite, ar4 rhodordte, as well as email amounts of i.ydrohauannite and maanese'ich sussexith. Other minerals occurring with the manganese mineraii. zation besides the ate, limonite, and goetbite are calnite, siderite, gypsum, qimtz pyrite, chalcopyrite, native copper, chrome, montmorilionite, and other clay minerals such as kaolinite and auxite, Although rrjanr of the above minerals strongly suggest hrth'othermal waters, no firal conclusions are drawn at this time as it is felt ean be made0 ( much more rork must be done before 4euch. concLusione �21 PROPOSED CORING IN LAKE SUPERIOR James I-1 Zumberge Shallow btton cores arid fathometer records óbtained from Lake Superior in 1953 provide the basis for seleothig sites for a coring program in 1961. Cores will be obtaix4 fz'oni several locations in the western, central and eastern parts or the basin through the use of a rotary drilling rig mounted on a ship aquipped to drill in water 1300. feet deep0 Fathometer records frQm a previous cruise reveal areas where more than 60 feet of laoustrine sècthnent occur above denser ntteria1, Glacial till gives the sa fathometer signal as Pro-. c'.mbrian bdrock, A core retrieved from a depth of 612 feet, 13 miles east of Grand Marais orf the Minnesota shore, contained 105 lamin-' ated couplets of alternating light and dark silty clay layers with an average combined thickness of 8.5 mm. The lighter layer con-. tains more carbonate than the darker layer, but is almost devoid of pdflen. Highest pollen concentration occurs in the darker layer&0 Other material found includes frosted sand grains, agnetc spherules, arid diatoms5 Laboratory analyis of the cores in which all of these eleineats are iwrestigatad should provide the basis for the geological history of the lake since its origin. � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology: Proceedings, 1961 Description An account of the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology, Lakehead Branch - Canadian Institute of Mining & Metallurgy, Port Arthur, Ontario. April 27-29, 1961 Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1961 Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource A.T. Avison M.K. Abel Lloyal O. Bacon M.W. Bartley B.L Beutner R.C.E. Bray J. Allen Cain W.H. Gross W.J. Hinze C. Kustra Henry Lepp D.W. Merritt W.W. Moorehouse Ray V. Oja V.T. Onodera J.C. Palmquist Jack Parker A.K. Snelgrove G.G. Suffel W.T. Swensen D. Strangway J.F. White D.H. Yardley P.W. Zimmer J.H. Zumberge Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource PDF Language A language of the resource English https://digitalcollections.lakeheadu.ca/files/original/238d4ac647a23bdc878175ce30cd2492.pdf bed7e5202588fbfe694e67fe18680f19 PDF Text Text 8th ANNUM MEETING a fitute on Lake Superior Geoióy o, I cC I';' L11 12, 1962 rI 1t; scy - tti 't1 : -. Sponsored by • Department of Geology & Geological rtngineenng in Cooperation with The Institute of Extension Service t . . n 'ucrngan Coiiege ot Minmg & Technology �!LOARD OF DIRECTORS Dr. E. N. Crneron, Madson, Wisconsin Dr. W. I... C. Greer, Port Arthur, Ontario Dr. Iienry, Lepp, Duluth, Minnesota Dr. G. M. Schwartz, Minneapolis, Minnesota Dr. A. K. Sneigrove, Houghton, Michigaz. STEERING COMMIT'IE1' Dr. M W. Bartley, Port Arthur, Ontario Dr. W. L. Daoist, State Geologist, Lansing, Michigan Dr. C. E. Dutton, U.S. eological Survey, Madison, WiScnsin Dr. J. P. Dobell, Michigan Tech., Houghton, Micbigan Mr. R.obert Edwards, InIandSteelCornpany, Iron River, Michigan Iowa Dr. D. H. Hase, T.iveisity of Iowa, Iowa Dr. R., L. HeUr, Duluth Branch, University of Minnesota, Duluth, Minnesota Dr. H. L James, University of Minnesota, Minneaplis, Minnesota Dr. E. G. Pye, Ontario Department of Mines, Port Arthur, Ontario Dr. P. Tychsen, Wisconsin State College, Superior, Wisconsin Dr. 3. Zinn, Mithigan Stat University, East Lansing, Michigan Dr. J. H. Zumberge, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan �EIGHTH ANNUAL MEETING OF THE INSTITUTE ON LKE SUPERIOR GEOLOGY May 10, 11, and 12 1961 Co.!Chairmen: A. K. Snelgroie an4 J. P. Dobell PRQGRAM civil-Geology Auditorium THURSDAY, MAY 10 8:30 Reg.itration Memorial Union Building 9:30 Address of Welcome President 3, R. Van Pelt Biness Session Henry L,epp Chairman - J. P. Dobell 10:30 Current Geological Research i the Palmer Area of the Marquette District, Michigan Jugtin Zinn 11:00 Geological Surveys Pikes Peak Area, Baraga Countr, Michigan Kiril Spiroff 11:30 Petrology of a Pec.mbrian Piuton 3. liai Cain near Pembine, Wiacon1sin 12 - 1:30 Luitch Chairman - L. 0. Bacon 1:30 Geophysical Evidence for the Presence of Kewee-nawan Volcanics in the Area of Upper Michigan be tween Marquette and SuIt Ste. Marie R. W. Patenaude 2:00 Application øf the High Speed Digital Computer to Gravity and Magnetic Analysea R. L. Coon and Peter Wolfe �THU± DAY, MAY 10 2:30 3-3:15 3:15 3:4 Magnetic Investigatios in Iowa A Preliminary Report D. H. Rase Coffee Break Extension of the Normal Distribution to Filtering of TwoDimensional (St.zface) Gravity and Magnetic Data Th Optimum Dip Needle Reading W. W. Johnson* and S. A. Finnegan W. 3. Hinze Method 4:15 Geophysical Investig-ation of a Diabase Dike near L'Ane, R. J. Reuss Michigan FRIDAY, MAY l1 Chairman - M. W. Bartley 9:30 A Regional Verticel Iiitensity Map of the Southern Peninsula of W. J. Hirize. Michigan 19:00 Diagenetic Replacement in Ore of the Empire Mine of Northern Michigan, and Its Effect on Tsu-Ming Han Metallurgical Concentration Footwall Mixeralization of the Osceola Amygdaloid in the Michigan Copper District R. Weege* 1:1:OQ. Induced Polarizatioi Logging in the Search for Native Copper in the Osceola Footwall Zones L. 0. Bacon 11:30 Preliminary Investigation or Late T. VT. Page* Wisconsin Drift North of Lake and 10:30 Superior 1Z 1:30 Lunch and A. Scliihinger D. R. Lindsay �FRIDAY, MAY11 Chairman - J M Neilson 1:30 Precipitation Chromatography in Geo-hemica1 Exploration S. D. Spain 2:00 The Water Prob1em of the Mining. Industry Qf the Upper Peninsula, S. H. Butler Michigan 2:30 Iron Ores of Bthar and Orissa, A. K. Sneigrove India 3:00 Mineral Exploration in the East Glare District of ireland R. W. .Schultz 330 Magne.tite Analysis of Magnetic P. D. Shandley 4:00 Sustptibility - An Investigation of the Remanent Magnetization of the Covi.ngton Dike Indicates speaket C. G Eufe �AUTHORS Page No. L. 0. Bacon C. G. Bufe J. H. Butler J. A. Cain Department of Physics, Michigan Tech., 1 Houghton, Michigan University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan Geography Departrnent, Michigan Tech., Houghton, Michigan Department of Geology, 2 4 5 Western Reserve University, Cleveland, Ohio R. L. Coons S. A. Finnegan Madison, Wisconsin Michigan Tech., Houghton, Tsu-Ming Han The Cleveland-Cliffs Iron Company, Ishpeming, Michigan 7 D. H. Hase Department of Geology, University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa Department of Geology, Mjchigan State University, East Lansing, Michigan Michigan Tech., Houghton, Michigan Lakehead College of Arts, Science and 8 W. J. Hinze W. W. Johnson D. R. Lindsay T. W. Page R. W Patenaude R. J. Reuse A. Schilhinger R. W. Schultz P. D. Shandley A. K. Sneigrove L D. Spain K. Spiroff 6 Michigan Technology, Port Arthur, Ontario Lakehead College of Arts, Science and Technology, Port Arthur, Ontario University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin Michigan Tech., Houghton, Michigan.. Geology Department, Calurnet & Hecla Incorporated, Ca,lumet, Michigan Michigan Tech., Houghton, Michigan Department of Physics, Michigan Tech., Houghton, Michigan Department of Geology aid Geological Engineering, Michigan Tech., Houghton, Michigan Department of Chemistry and Chemical Engineering, Michigan. Tech., Houghton, Michigan Department of Geology and Geological Engineering, Michigan Tech., Houghton, ii 9- 10 11 12 12 14 15 22 16 18 19 20 21 Michigan R. Weege Geology Depart-ient, a1umet & Hecla Incorporated, Calurnet, Michigan Peter Wolfe Madison, Wisconsin Justin Zinn Department of Geology, Michigan State University East Lansing, Michigan 22 6 23 �I INDUCED POLARIZATION LOGGING TN THE SEARCH FOR NATIVE COPPER IN THE OS EOLA FOOTWALL ZONES L. 0. Bacon A prograzn in cooperation with Calurnet and Hecla, Inc., has been. carried out. to adopt e induced polarization rnetrnd to under- ground logging of exploratory holes. The paper discusses equipment, logging techniques, interpretational methods and results. 7 7 / �AN INVESTIGATION OF THE REMANENT MAGNETIZATION OF THE COVINOTON DIKE C. G. Bufe The irwestigation of the remanent magnetization of the C.ovington dike near Watton, Michigan, was begun in September of 1960, and in the course of tha investigation oriented cores were taken froxi the dike and country rock on both sides., thin sections an4 magnetic samples were prepared fron the cores•, a spimer magnetometer was built and used to determine the direction of remannt magnetization, of 'the cores, several of the cores wer partly demagnetized to check their magnetic stability, and the, vertical magnetic anomaly recorded over the dike analyzed. The results f the investigation indicate the following: 1. The dir eCtios of magnetization of the samples ar fairly cons istnt, with mean declination of 1340, inclination of 86 degrees, with a four degree radius of conidenc.e at the 95 percent level. This corresponds to a noxth magnetic pole position of 530 N., 95°W. 2. The intensity of magnetization varies greatly between adjacent samples, even betweert sampl.e.s from the same. core. The intensity is less than the average rear the .suth contact o the dike and. near the center. The- average intensity of magnetization is 4. 35 x 103c g. s emu/cc 3. 60-cycle a. c. partial demagitetization at a peak field of 500 oesteds slightly increases t1 intensity of mnagnetization of samples fro•m near the contact, but reduces the intens ity of the interior samples to about one half oE. their initial value. The 4gher perentages of chlorite and deute.ric hornbiende near the contact indicate late stage oxidation reactions which may have produced a magnetic tonstituent of high coercive force. The percentage of magnetite is the same near the contact as near te oenter of the dike. 4 As theY demagnetizing field strength is irtcreased the directions ot rnagnetization of the- çors converge. After demagnetization at a peak 60- ytte field of 500 'oersted-s, the inean inclinatIon of the samples is -82° and the mean �3 declination is 55°, with a four degree radius at the 95 per" cent confidence level. The results of demagnetization are based upon the data from four s ampies. 5. The difficulties encountered in the intrpretation of the anomaly over the covington dike indicate that care nwt be taken in terpreting vertical field anomaijes over bodies with revere ed remanent magnetization by us e of formulas such as Cook's (1950) which are based on the assumption that there are no anomalous polarization effects present. �4 THE WATER PROBLEMS OF THE MINING INDUSTRY OF THE UPE R PENINSULA OF MICHIGAN J. H Butler The irreversible trend to-ai-d etr action of lcw er-'grade metallic mineral deposits, as localized, high-grade deposits become depleted t13ruh incre acing oneurnption, involves large-s cal&, highly me.chanized mining and mineral processing operations. Such operations normally have very high energy and water requiremet. Year by years the availability of vtater for mineral industries becomes of greater signfficace as growing 7cr:uiation -nd intensification of ecwmIc activity throughout the nation bring about competition for existing water resources Despite the very favvrable hydologic environment of Mihigans Upper PennsuIa, water "probi.em&' appear to be developing 'th respect to the mini and processing of low-grade .ron ore deposits on the Marquette Iron ange. The situation t one plant is éamined and water availability for future regional desrolopment of the Marquette Iron Range is considred. Implications are drawn far the future ot low-grade mineral ecploitation in the subhumid areas of the country. �PETROLOGY OF APRECAMBRIANPLUTON NEARPEMBINE, WISCONSIN A. Cain rock units have been mapped within some 350 square miles of the Precambrian grariiti and metamorphic complex ci northeastern Wiscorisin. The r1ative age-relationships among these units are suggested, primarily from a study of enoliths, as follows: Nine Youngest: Diabase dikes Amberg Granite Newingham Granodiorite }Ioskin Lake Granite Metagabro sills TwIe Foot Fall Quartz Diorite Marinette Quartz Diorite Bitite gneiss Oldest: Quinnesec Formation Structural, modal, and specific gravity data are presented for the Newingham Granodierite to illustrate their behavior within, this terrane. The results of structural analysis are somewhat inconclusive but suggest a ioughly coicentric foliation pattern for the 40 square mile pluton. Data derived from 5 spcimens of Newingham Granodiorite are used tc illustrate the geographic variabilit {br means of trend surface analysis) of quartz percentage, feldspar percentage feldspar ratio potash feldspar/ plagioc1ase) color index, and specific gravity within the mass. Correation coefficie4ts are given for each of the 10 pairs of variates t indicate degrees of assQciation. From thi quantitative analysis, feldspar ratio is Seen to be the one variate which does not conform to "expected" patterns of behavior. �6 APPLICATIONS OF THE HIGH SPEED DIGITAL COMPUTER TO GRAVITY AND MAGNETIC ANALYSIS R. L. Coons and Peter Wolfe Niflety prcent of the time spent in geophysical interpretation is taken up by manipnlating numbers leaving only about ten percent of the time for geologic interpretation of the results. Until the advent of the high speed digital cnputer certain analysis techniques were. t costly or time consuming to perform by hand. The proper applications of computer tecb iques to data reduction and analysis allow the geophysicist to reverse th above procedure spending ten percent of his time on arithmetic and ninety percent of his time on interpretation. Pgrams eoped to date in magnetic and gravity analysis clearly demonatrate sorn of the advantages in using the computer. Magnetic readings •can be electronically recorded on paper tape, fed into a coxnpixter, corrected for drift and. diurnal ariations, and plots of total intensity, second derivatives, and downward continuation, made by the computer.. This eliminates all erors that are normally introduced in recopying nd manipulating the data by hand. The resulting maps o the analysis can be pibtted and in certain cases even contoured by the computer. Gravity readings are cirift corrected by hand along with the s1ireyers notes.. These operatiotis could be. pefo:rmed by the computer but this gives the interpreter a chance to examine the reliability of the data. The computer then calculates the Bouguer Anomalies using several density asumptions, plots profiles, checks før errors, performs least square surface analysis, and plots the residual maps. SeraI types of resdil analysis are thus quickly obtained leaving more time for geologic Interpretation of the results. �7 DIAGENETIC REPLACEMENT IN ORE OF THE EMPIRE MINE OF NORTHERN MICHIGAN AND ITS EFFECT ON METALLURGICAL CONCENTRATION Tsu-Ming Han This paper describes the texture, mineralogical, and chemical criteria of diagenetic enrichment of the low grade irpn-forxation at the new Empire Mine near Palmer, Michigan, and the influence of the diagenetic changes upon nietallurgical response of the ctude ore to benefication. At the Empire Mine, in Section 19, 47-26, the iron-formation is involved in a secondary fold of the. Marquette syclinorium. The strike changes from N-S at the north side of the section to E-W in the southern oart of the section. Dips also change from W to NW to N as the formation swings around the fold. In general the dips average about 300. On the basis of mineral ratio, and mineral assemblage, the iron-formation may be classified into five lithological types: (a) interbedded complex (which includes magnetite -bearing g reywacke, magnetite -hematitic che rt with clastics, and the other four lithological types), (b) magnetite-carbonateche rt, (c) magnetite-silicate - chert-carbonate, (d) magnetite-chertcarbonate, and (e) magnetite -bearing chert- carbonate. Laboratory data revealed that the iron content among the abovementioned nonclastic rocks is fairly uniform averaging 32% in type (c) to 36% in type (c). The ma.gnetite content varies considerably averaging 20% in type (e) to more than 42% in type (b). The iron uni.t recovery averages 44% in type (e) to 88% in type (b). Such variations are, in a large part, attributed to the differential diagenetic enrichment of rn-agnetite in the different lithological types. The following criteria, involving the formation of the mineral magnetite, support the contention that diagenesis has played an important role in the geologic history of the Empire ore: (a) more or less the same mineral assemblage but different mineral ratios; (b) more than one generation of magnetite; (c) cut-off and replacement of carbonate-chert by magnetite larnina; (d) evenly distributed magnetite; and (e) lack of correlation of metallurgical concentration results between samples from the same lithologic horizons. �8 MAGNETIC INVESTIGATIONS IN IOWA D. H. Hase In 1961, vertical intensity magnetic measurements were made in evera1 areas for the Iowa Geological Survey as the initial phase of a project to map the etitir state magnetically. Ground and airborned magnetometer su.veys of the state are currently in progress. The magnetic anomalies are attributed to changes in the lithológy and/or configuration of the Precambrian cyrstaUine basement rocks. The Vincennes anomally is probably due to a body of feldspathized gneiss r diorite which is a few square miles in extent, has a maximum relief of a few hundred feet, and is about 2900 feet below the surface, The Manson anomaly is attributed to somewhat feldspath.ized, znagnetiterich, biotite and augen gneiss. Relief owing to erosion and perhaps partly to faulting in the vicinity of the main anomaly may be of the order of 1000 to 1500 feet along a northeast-trending buried ridge. Large gravity and magnetic anomalies in the Adair area are apparently related to rather shallow, basic igneous rocks. Departures from the smoothed profiles define the Thurman-Redfield and other basement structural ZOne8. A magnetic high without a corresponding gravity high near Greenfield is attributed to ferruginous schists in the base.rnent rocks, - �9 OPTIMUM DIP NEEDLE READING METHOD Wm. J. Hinze A good deal of the confusion surrounding the use arid interpretation of ip needle observation originates from the method by which the instrument s read. The selectjon of the.optimum reading method is dependent on four criteria: accuracy, reliability, simplicity, and rapidity. These are all important; however, their relative importance varIes dependIng or.the requirement and conditions of the survey. Various reading methods are va1uated with respect to these criteria with the aide of a laboratory investigation employing controlled magnetic fields. The optimum readIng method varieS, with the survey, but the reading method based on the arithmetic mean of the second, twice the third, and the fourth reversals of the oscillating dip needle is most universally acceptable. �10 A REGIONAL MAGNETIC MAP OF THE SOUTHERN PENINSULA OF MICHIGAN Wm, J. Hinze A regional vertical magnetic intensity map is presented of the Southern pninsula of Michigan. It is based on a peninsulawide ground magnetic survey with observations made on a six mile interval plus detailed observations in local areas. This map which primarily reflects lithological and structural variations in the Precambrian basement rocks and their depth beneath the surface shows a strong relationship to the trend of sedimentary structures of the Michigan basin and Precambrian trends of Wisconsin and the Northern Peninsula extrapolated into the basin. The magnetic map and the regional gravity map also show a marked resemblance in many areas. In particular the Michigan Gravity High correlates with a major positive magnetic anomaly. �11 EXTENSION OF THE NORMAL DISTRIBUTION TO FITRING OF TWO DIMENSIONAL (SURFACE) GRAVITY AND MAGNETIC DATA W. W. Johnson amd S. A. Finnegan The normal distribution curve has been successfully used in filtering one dimensional (profile) data. This method has been extended to two dimensional measurements of potential fields, both as a smoothing function and as a high-pass filter. The method involves the use of weights determined by different processes operating on a normal curve of revolution. of this method are shown applied to remove regional trends gravity anomalies yielded by a buried spherical body and a buried Results from infinite vertical sheet. �12 r _____ PRELIMINARY INVESTIGATIONS OF LATE WISCONSIN DRIFT NORTH OF LAKE SUPERIOR .T. W. Page and D. R. Lindsay Problems of late Wisconsin chronology have been studied for the past fl years in the Lake Superior region of Minnesota and adjacent States. Work of a similar nature has been carried Qut on the Canadian side of the Lake but has been local and disconnected. Investigations of a regional nature and correlation of new findings with presently known data will help to complete the Canadian picture and pO5Sibly aid in solving some of the admitted problems remaining on the American side. As aioffshoot of work presently in progress and supported by the Geological Survey of Canada, some new data and correlations are presented. The Rainey lobe of Patrician ice is believed to have developed at least two systems within the area discussed after retreat from the Ver' million moraine in Minnesota. They are believed to be post Two Creeks in age. Retreat to and beyond the Hartman-Kaiashk moraine allowed development of Lake Johnson in the Steeprock area and a similar lake in the Wabigoon basin. Outlets to both lakes were blocked by ice to the west during their early history. '—morainal The Nipigon and Dog Lake moraines are both considered younger than the Hartman-Kaiashk moraine and may represent the positions of an ice front during the life of Lake Duluth. While definite conclusions cannot be drawn at present it appears that a large area in northeastern Minnesota was free of ice from Two Creeks time n and was closely followed by disappearance of the ice from adjoining areas in Ontario. A study of plant geography lends further credance to this hypothesis. retreat After of the ice from the Nipigon moraine a later front developed some 30 miles east of Lake Nipigon and trended in a southeaster- ly direction to the White River area. The presence of extensive outwash plains and varved clays east of Lake Nipigon suggest a greatly expanded and possible connection with Lake Ojibway. forerunner of this lake Final retreatof the ice over the continental divide impounded the stages of Lake Ojibway which at this time drained through the Pic early �13 -vr system to the Lake Superior basin. Lake Agassiz II has yet been dtermined. No definite eastern outlet for throughout the area await continuThis and more complete detail of vnt5 vestigat10. �14 GEOPHYSICAL EVIDENCE FOR THE PRESENCE OF KEWEENAWAN VOLCANICS IN THE AREA OF UPPER. MICHIGAN BET WEEN MARQUETTE AND SAULT ST MARIE R. W. Paten.aude During five days in August, 1961, 1100 data miles were flown with an Elsec proton precession magnetometer in the area of Paleozoic sediments between Marquette and Sault Ste. Marie. The magnetic data suggests that the area between Grand Island and Sault Ste. Marie is undr1ain by Keweenawan type volcanics. The magnetic pattern is believed to reflect the influence of therrno- remanent magnetization in the volcanics. �15 GEOPHYSICAL INVESTIGATION OF A DIABASE DIKE NEAR LTANSE, MICHIGAN R. J. Reuss The purpose of the investigation was to determine the relative age of the reversely magnetized, fresh dabase dikes that occur in the area near L'Anse, Michigan. The dike investigated trended from an area of late Huronian slates into an area overlain by red sandstones of Cambrian or late Precambrian age. A magnetometer survey was run across the dike at several places in an attempt to determine whether or not the dike penetrated the sandstone, or was overlain by it. The results of the survey seem to indicate that the dike is overlain by the sandstone, and is therefore of an earlier geological age. �16 GEOCHEMICAL AND GEOPHYSICAL PROSPECTING FOR COPPER, LEAD, AND ZINC IN THE EAST GLARE AREA OF IRELAND RichardW. Schultz The rocks in this area are predominantly lower Carbonilerous limesstoneS and si-tales, underlain by Upper Devonian shales and sandstones. The najor structural feature is a large, shallow, south westerly trending syndilne. The nearest exposure of post-Carboriiferous intrusive rocks lies over one hundred miles from this area. On the north limb of the syndlirie, in an area containing numerous minor folds, re several small base metal suiphide deposits which had been mined in the last century. A small, but geologically significant chalcopyrite replacement deposit has been discovered recently by means of the induced polarization method. The two basic typcs of suiphide deposits found in the area arc: (1) fracture-filling calcite-suiphide lodes with minor walirock replacernrt in competent limestone, and (2) replacement deposits in shaly limestone controlled by upfolded irnpernneable barrier rocks. High pH of stream and ground water throughout the area inhibits the of heavy metals and renders them practically immbile. For that rason, as well as poor drainage conditions in general, stream water and sediment sampling was found to be ineffective. Also, blind deposits could not be expected to have secondary chemical dispersion haloes associated with them. However, glacial erosion has caused strong and clearly discerni ble physical dispersion of metals from subouteropping deposits and, therefore, a method of reconnaissance soil sampling was adopted to search specifically for glacial dispersion patterns. Experimental work showed solubility that all of the known deposits could have been found by geochemical float tr?cing, and several new anomalies have been discqvered. variable-frequency induced polarization method was used in and detailed geophysical prospecting. It was found to be effective in detecting even relatively small amounts of disseminated suiphides and, therefore, to be more sensitive than other electrical methods. Its main disadvantage is poor resolution and geometric definition of anomalies, making The reconnaissance it difficult to spot drill holes. The vertical-coil electromagnetic technique was found to be unsatismost reconnaissance work as it does not respond well to dis- factory for �r 17 :inatd suiphide rruineralization. Howeier, ii has been effective in disrfl1flg flat-lyingblack shale beds coiitaining primary pyrite which give riSe CO strong induced polarization anomalies. Self-potential measurements provided an additional means of recognizing the troublesome pyritic shale. �18 M\GNETITE ANALYSIS BY MAGNETIC SUSCEPTIBILITY P. D. Shandley A transistorized magnetic susceptibility meter which utilizes the balanced transformer principle is described. The instrument has been used to determine the percent magnetite in ores. The results of this• method of analysis are comparable to the results obtained by magnetic separation and cheniical analysis. �19 IRON ORES OF BIHAR AND ORISSA, INDIA A. K, Sneigrove While visiting the University of Sind, Hyderabad, West Pakistan, in 1961-62, as Fuibright Lecturer in Geology, the speaker made a brief tour of the Tata Iron and steel empire of Northeast India. The Iron Ore Series, containing an estimated 8 billion tons of good grade wrkable ore in Bihar and Orissa produced 6,670,000 in 1960. Rocks of the Iron Ore Series range from shales and quartzites to coarsegrained clastics and are associated with pyroclastics, only slightly metamorphosed. The well layered major deposits occur chiefly along ridges. Generally soft, friable and powdered varieties together form the major part of a deposit, and hard, compact varieties are found mostly in the top portions. Depths are about 300 feet. Properties of varieties generally available in one- deposit are hard 33%, soft 16%, lateritic 9%, biscuity or flaky friable 33%, blude dust 10%. Principal minerals are hematite, magnetite, rnartite, and occasionally also lirnonite and goethite, together with some hydrous iron silicates such as greenlite and chamosite. Quality, origin structure, alterations, and development planning, treatment, and economics will also be discussed.. The author is indebted to Tata Iron and Steel Corpor3tion for much information and many courtesies.. �r•__ 20 THE USE OF PRECIPITATION CHROMATOGRAPHY IN GEOCHW CAL PROSPECTING J. D. Spain The use of agar gel columns containing arnmonium sulfide precipitant for mineral identifications and trace element determination will be described. (Spain1 J. D.., AnaL Chern. 32; 1622-1624 (1960), Spain, J. D.,, Ludernan, F. L., and Sneigrove, A. K.,, Econ. Geology, in press). Sensitivity studies showed cobalt, zinc, lead, bismuth, antimony, and to be determined in solutions containing 20 ppm or less. Iron, cadmium, copp'r, and arsenic were determined in solutions containing less than 300 ppm. All analyses involved the standard amrnonium sulfide column with the metal irons applied in 6 M HC1 søluton. In preliminary studies to determine accuracy of qualitative identification, 80 synthetic unknowns composed of tin, three component mixtures of the previously mentioned ions were analysed. iron, lead, cadmium. and cobalt were identified correctly in all unknowns. arsenic. antimony1 and tin gave any extensive difficulty, these having been determiiied with less than 80% accuracy. Only Sixty one mineral samples were analysed by this method and the results were compared with those obtained from the emission spectrograph. It was found that the major metallic constituents of miner als can be det erznined with a high degree of accuracy. How in most cases the minor con- stituents were missed. It'was concluded thatin special cases the method would be a useful field tool. The more recently developed technique of filter paper precipitation chromatography will be described and its advantages over the agar gel technique will be discussed. These advantages include. stability..bf:the precipitation media, speed of chrornatograrn development, quantitative as well as qualitative results in a permanent form, and inexpensive, portable apparatus. �2.] GEOLOGICAL SURVEY, PIKES PEAK AREA, BARAGA COUNTY, MICHIGAN. Kiril Spiroff Unusually high geiger counter readings were detected in outcrops on the west side of Huron Bay, ten miles east of L'Anse, in Barag& County, Michigan. The area was investigated by trenching and diamond drilling. Surface mapping and ir1ormation from three diamond drill holes yields the following geological column (from top to bottom): andstone, iron formationu, quartzite, conglomerate, and granite. The study fills a gap in our knowledge of the Precambrian area of Michigan's Upper Peninsula. It did not reveal any deposits of economic sigrificance. �22 FPOTWI4LL MNERALIZATION I THE OSGEOLA AMYGDALOID MICHIGAN NATIVE COPPER DISTRICT R. J. Weege and A. W. Schillinger Conventional underground mapping methods and diamond drilling are being applied in a study to determine the nature of the copper ore occurrences r.car the footwall of the Osceola amygdaloid. A description is given of the character of the airiygdaloid and the types and location of native physical copper mineralization and associated alteration. Work to date suggests that the footwail ore is formed independently from the hanging-wall ore and tha.t localization at the footwall is caused by impermeable barriers. The barrier concept as advanced by earlier writers to explain the concentration of solutions in the ore body as a whole is carried one step further and is found to be equally as applica!ble for the localization of smaller oreshoots within the Osceola ore body. �________ r 23 CURRENT GEOLOGICAL RESEARCH IN THE PALMER AREA, MARQUETTE DISTRICT, MICHIGAN J. Zinn r Palmer area is structuraUy a distinct syncline containing jirnikean rocks and is separated from the main Marquette synclinorium by the prominent Volunteer Fault. Exposures of the Negaunee iron formation in this area show variations not characteristic of this formation s seen elsewhere. The lower horizons at the Negaunee contain various proportions of clastic debris and some lenses of conglomerate material. 1dso, this fôrrriation rests on Ajibic quartzite locally without the normally intervening Siamo slate. Currently, these sedimentational problems are being investigated by Robert Henny. The investigation to date appears to show that the Negaunee was a near shore deposit in this area, that the chert layers in the formation rapidly solidified into durable beds and that the iron precipitated in trivalent condition. iron forination was deposited continuously with the clastics even in the conglomerate horizons. The implications of .ch deposition encourage speculation as to rate of deposition an. other sedimentary problems concerned with Lake Superior type formations. The Several other problems in the Palmer area deserve attention. Some of these are the extent and nature of the Volunteer Fault, the Eastern limits of the Palmer syricline and the pyroclastics in the iron formation. It is understood that research on some of these problems is being done at the University of Wisconsin. � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology: Proceedings, 1962 Description An account of the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology. Michigan College of Mining & Technology, Houghton, Michigan. May 10-12, 1962 Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1962 Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource L.O. Bacon C.G. Bufe J.H. Butler J.A. Cain R.L. Coons S.A. Finnegan Tsu-Ming Han D.H. Hase W.J. Hinze W.W. Johnson D.R. Lindsay T.W. Page R.W. Patenaude R.J. Reuss A. Schillinger R.W. Schultz P.D. Shandley A.K. Snelgrove J.D. Spain K. Spiroff R. Weege Peter Wolfe Justin Zinn Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource PDF Language A language of the resource English https://digitalcollections.lakeheadu.ca/files/original/7d87a2792037d451dbf6e8c0ff55ab06.pdf c174ae149f6d8beb5546748ab48f1a3a PDF Text Text Field Trip "Stratigraphy of the.Biwabik Iron Formation 11 Sponsored by the Lake Superior Geology Club Duluth, Minnesota May 4, 1965 �,, ~~ G>,._ /<I AUBURN ~t-«~ 1-/19 19/11. G' . G'-'9 ~ )'1- ~ 0 '9</ ~ O,s- +-~ ~ -v~ ~,o -v~~ <? INDEX MAP OF THE MESABI DISTRICT , MINNESOTA �FOREWORD Gentle reader, take heed, the field trip which you are about to take - not a polished affair with textbook illustrations and trip leaders able to J ve glib expla.ne.tions for everything you are going to see. o the gene al objectives for which the Lake Superior Geology In keeping with stitute was or- g nized, that is, to present preliminary r e sults of investigation in new areas of geologic interest, the leaders of this trip plan t o show you their approach tp subdivic1:1.ng the Biwabik iron formation beyond the basic fourfold subdivision ~rst proposed by J. F. Wolff in 1917. That the problem of further subdivision i ls difficult can be accepted si nce such authoritie s as Gruner, Grout and Broderick, E te , Schwartz and Gunderson have all come up with systems that many individuals use but which do not appear to be generally acceptable to all 'rorkers in the ield. In such a situation we may expect considerable discussion and disagreement i th any system proposed. ~Y emerge, Perhaps in the anticipated clash of opinions the truth. but don't count on i t. In any event the trip should be instructive " o both you and the leaders, and perhaps even entertaining to the philosophers rong you contemplati ng the state Of geol ogic knO'£o7ledge concerning this 1 the ,randfather of all iron for-mations. . A secondary but highly interesting part of this trip \d.ll be the 1ppo1~unity to observe the changes vmich take place in unoxidized iron formation rom the Eveleth area eastward almost to the contact of the Duluth Gabbro. T~~s spect of the trip should be of particular interest to students of metamorphism and those less c,o ncerned with the local problems of iron formation stratigraphy. lble controversy exists even in this area, the individualists among you vTontt I q.ave to accept any of our leaders' statements since the rocks themselves \-Till be tvailable for identification and collection. Due to the unexpectedly large number of people participating in this trip, we are antici pating some difficulty in maintaining our schedule of arrivals and departures f rom each stop. ~orn blows . compensation. Please return to the buses promptly a fter the I f you are left i n the pit don •t panic, apply for unempl oyment �The field trip will start at 7: 50 A.M. at Hotel Duluth and proceed rectly to the Auburn Mine property outside of Virginia . Upon completion of tq.e one stop at Auburn , the buses ldll ta.k.e us to the Erie property and proceed through four stops in various parts of the pit. Two stops are planned in the I REf Serve property to complete the program for the day. The buses will return to Duluth via Aurora and deposit passengers at the beginning point. Passengers 'rushing to remain on the Range should make private arrangements for transportation ftam the Reserve property or possibly from Aurora. It is anticipated that we ,dll finish the trip around 6:00 P.M. Lunch ~dll be served at the third stop in the Erie pit and rest stops are planned on ent ering the Erie property and leaving the Reserve property. Please read, consider and observe the regulations on the following page to which ~rJ have agreed in order that we can gain entrance to the various properties. �ruiruuTIONS: Through t he courtesy of the Oliver Iron Mining Division, United States Steel Corporation , Pickands Mather & Co., and the Reserve Mining Company, we have beFn granted permission to enter, inspect and collect small specimens on their rebpective properties. t~ In return for this privilege, we have agreed to abide by following regtuations which apply not only to visitors but also to all company pe~sonnel. l. pits. Safety hats and goggles will be worn at all times while in the various You will be issued such equipment at the first stop. This equipment is charged out to the Lake Superior Geology Club and we will have to pay for it if it is not returned at the end of the trip . 2. Picture taking of equipment is discouraged in all active pits and all pictures forbidden on the Reserve property. at the entrance to the Reserve property. for the fun of it . Arrangements will be made to check cameras Please do not try t o outwit these regulations You may make it difficult for future geologists to enter these interesting areas . 3. Please use caution when approaching rock walls . The talus slopes are notoriously unstable footing and rock slides from the walls above are not uncommon in the spring. While the purists among you will want to remove specimens from the living rock, let us remind you that \dth taconite, it ' s going to take a lot of hammering. We have a long, tO'\.lgh day ahead of us, so save your strength. also applies to potential mountain goats climbing up rock faces. Thi s You may endanger yorrself and other people as well as delay the trip , so stay off high faces. 4. Please use discretion wnen hammering on rocks near other people . Taconite is tough and hard. at high speed. Sharp chips have a tendency to fly in all directions The safety goggles supplied you are not just a bureaucratic detail. Us~ them at all times and make your arm on Minnesota taconite. sure they are on people near you before you t est It is reported to have an average crushing stkength of 55,000 pounds per square inch . �Ea ster n Biwabi k Str atigraphy f rom Gunderson a nd Schwartz .Minnes ota Geological Survey Bulletin 43 -~ z;~a ~ ~~ !I ~~! ;- s ~ -'C-Q; ~ ..~ ~ GENERALIZED COLUMNAR SECTION OF THE BIWABIK IRON-FORMATION ~ ~ -~ ~ ~ £ r: ~-:! == j -!!cri ~ ~ ? ! -0f:i!..._ou E~ ~ r ~ s o ~ ~ -- J: j IN THE EASTERN MESABI DISTRIC T, MINNESOTA i? 1-- - -- - - --------=---,--.,-,--- - - - -- - - - - - - - - l 6 i ·~· ~:g 32: c.5 Descnption of Submembe rs ;; .:...: w - Q (Notations cO - Jf ~ J I B {!6) (eo~t} and (we!:> I) refer to orcas near the easter n and western drill holes) calcite marble,. minor diop side, wollastonite , id oc ro s e, andradit e and quartz j """-;;;;ered (di'op/;ide) chert taconite locally wilh hornblende, hedenberq ite and some cummingtonite a nd oc tmol•te /ami'n aled (ferrohyperslhene - moqnel i le) c;uarl.t ! aconite with hedcnberqite c >~ w (l_ (l_ ::J taconite {west) I /:::,vy laminated (oclinoh'le-moqnefite) chert taconite 1-:---:-::::--fV ··-·tonile ond minor hedenbc rgi te -' (/) cr laminated (cummin91onite - mognetite) chert and loyoli te (east) and (421 "' .D :> <I 0 (71 E 161 F (201 with abundant granule struc tures and locolly w ith quart zfilled seplorio s tructures; m inor magneti te, c ufT'ming tonite and o ttinolite shaly bedded (cumminqtonite-maqnetite) quartz laconile hedenocrgite (cost); locally abundant w•l h minor andradite cumminglanite (west} quartz taconite (ea st) and mol/led (andradite) quartz obundonl magne ltl e - bearing granules throughout G (251 wavy layered (actinolite? -maqnetite) quartz taconite f---:1 J wit~ cumminc;~- quartz taconite r----t--__ond H locally liOl local ly with foyoli te (eas t) taconite (west) with with minor hedenberq:itei and cummingtonite (wes t) .,--+ - - (Sl (l6 ) " ' alq~l (moqnetile) quorlz toconife with abundant magnetite- r ich granules ond "---: ebblcs; conglomcrolic fabric throuc;~houl; minor hematite r---+-_ granule (maqneltle) quartz facomle with obundonl magneti te - rich pebbles ~top and thic kly layered (magnel!le) quoriL tocomle near bottom >- K (351 L (301 near wavy layered (silicole moqnelite) quartz taconite with abundant moQne tite· rich granules ond ptbblcs ; silicates ore actinolite ond ferrahyperslh ene (east) ond cummingtamte (we st) 9 1- cr w I u wavy layered (st'licote-magnett~e) silicate-quartz taconite with abundant mag netite-rich granules ncar bollom; silic.o tes with magnetite ore ferrohypersthcne and hor nblende (e o:o t) and cumming toni te and actinoli te (wes t); silicates wi th quartz ore fcrrohypers thene (cost) ond c umminqtonite (west) cr w (l_ (l_ ::J layered (maqnelt~e) loyolite-quorlz /acon/tc with fcrrohypersthene layered (maqnel/te) cumminqtom~e-quar tz tacom~e (wes t) M (201 N 41 0 (17) foyalde -quartz tacomle tocomle (westli minor with ferrohyp ersthene (eosl) and {eas t) and cumminqlomle-quorlz mac;~ne t ite bedded granule (magnetite) quortz - loyolile tacomle with some fcrrohypers thene and minor cummingtoniti! (cost) to quartz -cumminqtom~e focamle with · moogranules (west} ~et ite -beoring r: sholy quortz- foyoli!e tocomle cumminqlontle taconite 10 foyoltle tocomle (easJI and sholy quorlz- to cummingtont~e tocom~e (west); minor moonetite '!!aceous grophite -sikcote-quortz laconlle with abundant ferrohypersthene and minor foyolite, biotite, olmondilc ond pyrrhotite (eosl) and traces of pyrite, pyrhotit e and cummingtonite (wes t) . layered (magnetJ/e) loyolite -quortz taconite with m inor cumminQtonite ered (moqneflle) quorl.l taconite with minor cummingtonite throuq:hout, and hedenbcrgitc and some l oj!alite (east) ljr;;nule (magnetite) quartz taconite 1---+---+-- --flj r-minor f-,---:-:-:-i(/ (;;ered and granule 'j -, locotly, with minor cummingtonite throuqhout, ond foyolitc least) (moqnetJ~e) cummingtom~e-quorlz taconite with hedenberqite ond some fayolite (cos t) ~rlz f-;-;---;-o;;-( FIGU!\1': 5. - taconite with minor hedenbcrgite and cummingtonitei clastic quartz p ebble zone locally at bose Generalized columnar section or the Biwabik iron-[ormation. };j �sw - sw 28-58 - 1 7 S E -S W 1 7-58-17 ·. N W - NW 20-58 - 1 7 .r. - I . I 1/ v ~I , - ------ -- - ---- ---/+-- ---- / / : I I SW-N W ) 20 - 58-1 7 I I S E - NW 2 0-58 - 1 7 I G E O LOG I C M AP OF AUBU R N M I NE N SC ALE } . 1" - ·4 00' a. 0 --+--· ---- ~----· -·-· -·t--· --+--1 I I I l_ __ L E GE ND GEOLOGIC C O N TA CT S ( A PPRcJX I MA T F) ~ O VE R DU R OEN ____ ...,. CRE ST OF BA NK ..- ___ _... T OE O F B ANK �STRATIGRAPHIC S~UENCE IN THE BIWABIK IRON FORMATION AUBURN mNE 'lhickness in feet 1 UJ PER CHERTY MEMBER 16. 2 Jaspery, conglomeratic and algal chert (G and 15 . 14 13. 12 . + 10. submember I) 10 (est . ) Covered interval 10 (est.) Nodular hematitic chert beds interbedded with laminated hematite-silicate- magnetite beds 48 +'l Laminated hematite- silicate-magnetite beds with subordinate jaspery chert beds and lenses 31 Jaspery, conglomeratic chert beds interbedded with subordinate laminated hematite-silicate~magnetite beds 28 Cherty taconite ld th thin irregular ma.gneti te beds, magnetite mottles and disseminated magnetite 16 143 SIM'Y MEMBER ll. s 3 Laminated silicate magnetite tacom. t e with subordinate silicate chert lenses Laminated non- magnetic silicate taconite, fissile in part. 6 ' of fissile "intermediate slate" at bottom (G and S submember Q) lOl 37 ---:l::-:38=- LOWER CHERTY MEMBER I 9. Cherty taconite with irregular magnet ite beds . Upper 10 ' dark·~ colored silicate rich beds instead of magnetite beds , making base of lower slaty somewhat indefinite . 37 Mottled silicate- magnetite chert with chert "pebbles" and abundant coarse granules. ll Cherty taconite with thick (l"!) magnetite beds and mottles 84 has 8. 7 6. 5. Mottled cherty taconite vlith thin, very irregular magnetite ~ds. u Thick jaspery chert beds interbedded w1 th varying proportions of thin, regular laminated magnetite-hematite- silicatecarbonate beds . 66 �l Thickness in f'eetl CIIER1'I' MEMBER (Cont'd) 4. Thick hematitic chert beds with subordinate la.minated zones. Some clastic sand grains near bottom. Much carbonate. 8 Jaspery, conglomeratic and algal chert w1 th subordinate laminated zones. Sand grains common. 4 2. Massive chloritic (or hematitic) sandstone 8 1. Jaspery, conglomeratic and algal chert 4 3. 236 Total thickness exposed mGAMA ,.. QUARTZITJt~ 517 Base not exposed 1. Units 15 and 16 measured on bank between truck road and railroad near entrance to pit. Units l - 5 measured on SW bank, at SE end of' pit. Remainder measured above railroacl. 2. Unit numbers correspond to numbers pa.inted on the walls of' the Auburn Mine and are not intended to be a new stratigraphic system. 3. The lower slaty-upper cherty contact is not well-marked and disagreement exists as to its position. �__..... ...--- ERIE MINING CO MPANY / MAP OF ? PLANT AND PIT / / / I AREAS LEGEND I COARSE CRUSHER 2 FINE CRUSHER ,3~ CONCENTRATOR 1)PELLET PLANT , §\LOADING POCKET • 6 STOCKPILE 7' GENERAL SHOPS ' ,\ WEST PIT BIWABIK IRON FORMATION VIRGINIA FORMATION ::," 1;- 1 {! { DULUTH GABBRO �STOPS AT ERIE PITS Stor. At this stop, we have the base of the iron formation in the West Pit. The gama quartzite and the basal algal layer and conglomerate can be found in the roa • The alternating chert and argillaceous layers of submember V are exposed in the outer op. ' Fok The bank at the south edge of the pit is the Lower Slaty material P&Q. The r efore, the widt h of the pit here is the entire Lower Cherty member. 1 Sto J 2. This stop shows the upper part of the Lower Cherty ore horizon. The submember R can be seen along the top of the bank. It is greenish in color and !contains much minnesotaite and greenalite. Iead D irectly below this is the wavy bedded submember R. This is more noti ~ eable toward t he west, (containing abundant granular jasper). J The mottled submember S is below this layer. This submember occupies most of the lower part of the bank. It also contains much jasper as well as the con J. picuous pink to red carbonate mottles. J StoR 3. At the east end of the cut, we find the even bedded (U) and the alternating ma~sive and slaty submember (V). The massive layers consist almost entirely of ryedium grained green silicates . Some granular jasper and flinty black chert occ j rs. Minor amounts of sulfides are present. I Proceeding westward, we encounter the lower wavy bedded submember (T) and the mottled submember (S). Here the mottles consist of fine grained sili ~ ates instead of the carbonates seen in Stop 2. StoJ 4, This stop is in the upper part of the Lower Cherty member and shows submembers R & S . It correlates with Stop 2. The effects of the gabbro to the sou~heast are quite apparent. At the extreme east end there are abundant sulfides and Jvery coarse grained dark green silicates. Proceeding westward along the cut the grain size decreases and buff colored silicates (ferrocummingtonite) begin to app~ ar. The cut immediately to the south is in the Lower Slaty horizon (P). This :::t~::::u~ ;~~: ::~::::h::8 :les:;here Sto~ and shows recrystallization. Small 5. At this stop, units 0 through K can be observed. Representative blocks of e t ch subunit are marked. Locally abundant coarse grained silicates and some sulftdes occur. A few blocks show portions of jet-pierced holes. Some septaria are !e vident. �STJ ATIGRAPHY OF THE BIWABIK IRON FORMATION AT THE ERIE MINING CO. Pr oda~l:n~eo:::~ation ,.. A. Calcite - marble layer. B. Lean quartz and silicate as irregular zones and layers. U:PP+r c. s..a t y (3 - 16) (10- 35) & D. Laminated zones of magnetite and silicate interlayered with thinner chert layers. (30 - 50) E. Massive granular chert with disseminated magnetite and occasional magnetite-silicate layers. Septaria. (5 - 10) F. Similar to C. & D. but the chert contains much disseminated magnetite and granular jasper. (25 - 35) G. Massive with much disseminated granular magnetite and jasper. Locally concentrated into irregular granular layering. Conspicuous carbonate or silicate mottles. (15 - 20) H. Similar to above except more abundant granular layering. Layering becomes more laminated toward bottom. ( 10) I. Algal structures and conglomerates. J. Granular. Similar to G. & H. but more abundant disseminated granular magnetite. Carbonate - silicate mottles are very con• spicuous. (5 - 15) ;..!, h (3 - 10) Upple r K. Cherty Thin, irregular and discontinuous magnetite layers having distinct boundaries separated by thicker massive layers of lean chertsilicate. The diabase sill is within this unit. (28 - 48) L. Moderately thick layers of laminated magnetite and silicate separated by equally thick layers of chert with much disseminated magnetite. ( 30 - 40) M. Thin, well defined magnetite layers similar to K. with more magnetite occurring as granular layers and disseminated magnetite (20 - 45) N. Not recognized. o. Alt ernating laminated magnetite - silicate zones and chert layers. Similar to L., but with increasing disseminated granular magnetite in the chert toward the bottom. Conglomerate near base • ( 15 - 3 5) 'l �-2- Pilobable Correlation to Gunderson L~er P. Massive granular silicate unit with vague layering. (75 - 90) Sl/a ty Q. Black, moderately laminated argillite. R. Upper unit is massive with granular silicates in a chert • silicate matrix. Lower unit is similar to above with scattered tnirt layers of magnetite and disseminated granules. (20 - 35) s. Irregular zones and mottles of dense and granular magnetite. Much disseminated magnetite in the massive chert. Abundant carbonate or silicate mottles. (15 - 35) L wer Ta Cherty I . u~ v. (5-45) = L lern?ed, st/1!- Thin irregular layers and granular concentrations of magnetite within thicker massive chert layers. Occasional mottles. (20 - 35) Magnetite occurs in even bedded iaminated zones wfth s~lica~e and argillite and/ or as even bedded concentrations of granules iri the chert. (15 - 30) Thick laminated zones of hematite, magnetite, silicate and argillite alternating with massive granular chert layers. Conglomerate, algal and/ or slate usually occur at the base of this member. (6 - 30) �RESER 'E ' B BABBRlY~ A MONHESOTA LAKE SUPER UOR PNST i'V'Uli'E Of EOLOGY fiElD fRIP MAY 4B ~923 NERAt.: RESER VE MiNING COMPAN~ ~OLUCY DOES NOV PERMIT POSSEIIION OF CAMERAS ON VHE OPERVYa Oft PLEAS£ CHECK YOUR CAMERA WITH PLANT PROTECTION AV VHE MAIN GAV Eo i: PLEASE AVOID SVANDtNG 'tOO CLOSE UNKS ON VOP OF VHE WALL~ 0 YHE NOR'ti'H AND SOUTH WALL o MAKE CLOSE INSPECTION OF THE WALLS ll..ARGt VACON II 'II'[ UN ADDI T ION NAZAROOU~o AYO»O CLRMB ING ON VHE MUC PILES AS THE RE IS A POSSIBILITY or DtSLODGING CHUNKS VACON VV'Eo APPROXIMATELY 85 FEET OF ijpp R CHERTY AND 35 THE BAlE OF VHE NORTH WALL VO THE VOP OF THE YHE ~LWTH GABBRO LSE EN LY VHUS REGUON ABOWV 3 OUVH WALLo TH A FEW ~~NORED FEET TO VHE $0UVH UN VH t EXHUBtV~ EPRE~ENVr O FEEV OF ijpPER St.ATY ARE STRATA AREA o GENER£L L ~ CoN E- A HIGHER DEGREE OF METAMORPHISM THAN STOP No o 2 WH i CH MULE$ VO VHE WE~To ~GNEVITE AND QUARTZ ARE VKE PREDOMI NANT MU NERALSo H DEN8ERGtTE 1 FAYAL ITE, ACV tNOLIVE, FE RROHYPERSV HoWEVER, COARSE GRA U N~ Of NE AND HORNBLE NDE ARE COMMON c UNT BLACK HiSINGERI TE CAN 8E SEE N IN YH£ NORTH WAL lo IT tS ONE OF THE LAST StLICA~ E Tp FORM IN V~E BIWABIK HRON f ORMATION AND CUVI THROUGH ALL PREVIOUS MINERAL ASSEMBLAGE o ~NOERSEN AND SCHWARTZ AVVRUBUVE VHE roRMAVtON ~ OtNBERGIVE 8 FERROHYP£RSVHEN£~ ~EGMAYHTE WEINSo EiSENV4AllY OEFLY ~r Ywo COM~OSED CF HORNBLENDE AND CU VYPES OF VEI NS ARE Q~ARVZ AND ~UNK or MEDIUM fO COARSE GRA INED M~NavONI E~UOENV I TO fHE IN VHtl AREAo ALKAL I FELDSPAR o tNJEC~tON OF THE AC IDIC VE INS fHE MAFIC VEINS CON IIV HORNBlENDEo 2: W[ ARE ABOUV NORVHEA~V 3 WALLo Ml E VO fHE WE@V OF SVO~ Noo ~e A MONOCL WNAL FOLD II VID NV IN �I ~rD NERALLY FINER GRAt MAGNET IV~ SI ZE II PREVALENT I N THIS AREA Q MN ADDITION vo QUARVZ CUMMINGVONRTE, ACVINOLUTE AND ANDRADIVE ARE COMMON MONERALSo OTHER F A URES VO NOTE IN VHOS AREA ARE THE £LG L ZONE &NO A SMALL DIABA E DUKE I ~ICH TRENDS SE-NWo ,,6oo FEET A LARGER DIABASE DIKE ABOUT 35 FE WtD£ OCCURS APPROXIMATELY W SV AL ONG THE PIT CENTER LINE FROM fHE EA T END 'LSO VRENDI SE-NWo or VHE PITo TH~S DIKE � https://digitalcollections.lakeheadu.ca/files/original/535d7f6dfe72cecce1a31043297745d9.pdf 469cd2492591ee36bab1d297d7b4d2d0 PDF Text Text �NINTH ANNUAL INSTITUTE ON LAKE SUPERIOR GEOLOGY University of Minnesota, Duluth May 2-3, 1963 PROGRAM Thursday Morning - May 2, 1963 Science Auditorium, University of Minnesota, Duluth 9:00 General Meeting of the Institute ............ Chairman, H. Lepp Secretary, D. H. Hase SESSION I Co—chairmen: J. C. Green, J. S. Owens 9:30 D. W. Pollock S. C. Nordeng: PRELIMINARY INVESTIGATION OF A PORTION OF THE NORTHERN COMPLEX, BARAGA Co., MICH. 9:55 George Moerlein: STRUCTURE AND STRATIGRAPHY OF THE KEWEENAWAN IN NORTHWESTERN MICHIGAN 10:20 lO:+5 11:10 BURIED EXTENSION OF THE KEWEENAWAN Isidore Zeitz & P. K. Sims: BASIN IN MINNESOTA - A GEOPHYSICAL STUDY P. K. Sims & Isidore Zeitz: GEOLOGIC INTERPRETATION OF AERO— MAGNETIC ANOMALIES OVER PRE-KEWEENAWAN ROCKS IN CENTRAL MINNESOTA THE APPLICATION OF S. C. Nordeng, C. 0. Ensign & M. E. Volin: TREND SURFACE ANALYSIS TO THE WHITE PINE COPPER DISTRICT GENERAL DISCUSSION 11:35 12:00 LUNCH — MAIN BALLROOM, KIRBY STUDENT CENTER SESSION II Co-Chairmen: F. D. Effinger, T. E. Stephenson STRUCTURE WITHIN THE DULUTH GABBRO COMPLEX IN THE 2:00 W. C. Phinney: 2:25 C. N. Hanson, W. C. Phinney & P. W. Gast: THE THERMAL EFFECT OF THE DULUTH GABBRO UPON THE SNOWBANK GRANITE GABBRO LAKE AND GREENWOOD LAKE QUADRANGLES, MINNESOTA �* Hf 2:50 THE RELATIONSHIPS BETWEEN THE DULUTH GABBRO AND DIKES AW SILLS NEAR HOVLAND, MINNESOTA N. W. Jones: COFFEE BREAK 3:15 3:145 :1O G. FORMATION, THE STRATIGRAPHY AND STRUCTURE OF THE ROVE B. Morey: GUNFLINT LAKE AREA, MINNESOTA STRUCTURES OF CONCRETIONS IN THE THOMSON FORMATION, CARLTON AND PINE COUNTIES, MINNESOTA Paul Wieblen: GENERAL DISCUSSION 14:35 6:30 THEL/ DINNER - MAIN BALLROOM, KIRBY STUDENT CENTER Dr. R. L. Heller, Director, Earth Science Project; Head, Department of Geology, University of Minnesota, Duluth Speaker: EARTH SCIENCE AND THE SECONDARY SCHOOL CURRICULUM Topic: Friday Morning, May 3, 1963 SESSION III Co-Chairmen: C. Tychsen, I. L. Reid P. R. E. Hessevick: REFINEMENT OF THE 9:00 R. L. Blake, T. Z. Zoltai 9:25 G. L. Laberge: CARBONATE MINERALS IN THE IRON FORMATION AND THEIR SIGNIFICANCE 9:50 R. E. Randolph: SUSCEPTIBILITY MEASUREMENTS CF EMPIRE MINE MAGNETIC MATERIAL & HEMATITE CRYSTAL STRUCTURE COFFEE BREAK 10:15 Hoppin, J. C. Palmquist & L. 0. Williams: CONTROL BY PRECAMBRIAN BASEMENT STRUCTURE ON THE LOCATION OF THE TENSLEEP - BEAVER CREEK FAULT, BIGHORN MOUNTAINS, WYOMING 10:145 R. A. 11:10 C. M. Gallick: CLAY MINERALOGY OF THE DECORAH SHALE, MINNESOTA 11:35 M. A. Rogers: BIOGEOCHEMISTRY OF MINNESOTA LAKES: 12:00 LUNCH - MAIN BALLROOM, KIRBY STUDENT CENTER CARBOHYDRATES �SESSION IV R. W. Marsden Chairman: 2:00 J. H. Zumberge & 14. R. Farrand: LAKE SUPERIOR CORES AND BOTTOM TOPOGRAPHY ORIENTED LAKES IN NORTHERN ALASKA 2:25 C. E. Carson: 25O 0. M. 'hwartz: 3:15 THE SUBDIVISIONS OF THE BTWABT}( FORNATTON ON THE EASTERN MESABI GENERAL DISCUSSION Saturday, May , 7:30 - Hotel 1963 Duluth FIELD TRIP TO THE MESABI IRON RANGE Field trip leaders: F. D. Effinger, Pickands Mather & Company J. 14. EmanuelsOfl, Reserve Mining Company C. L. Iverson, Oliver Iron Mining Division Richard Strong, Oliver Iron Mining Division �1 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology May 2—3, 1963 Institute on Lake Superior Geology REFINEMENT OF THE HEMATITE CRYSTAL STRUCTURE R. L. Blake.Y, T. Z. Zo1taiY, and R. E. Hessevick!" The crystal structure of hematite has been refined as an initial phase of studies involving atomic positions and vacancies in hematite during reduction to magnetite. Three—dimensiofll diffraction intenItieD were collected and automated on a spherical single crystal of hematite with both manual Buerger single crystal diffractometer. The structure has been refined with R factor of 7.1 pera least squares program and the final structure gave an cent. The structure model of Pauling and Hendricks has been confirmed with essentially no change in the iron coordinates and approximately a 5 percent change in the oxygen coordinates. The interatomic distances and bond angles were also calculated. TMinneapolis Metallurgy Research Center, Bureau of Mines 2! Department of Geology g Geophysics, University of Minnesota �2 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology May 2-3, 1963 Institute on Lake Superior Geology ORIENTED LAKES IN NORTHERN ALASKA C. E. Carson University of Minnesota, Duluth Study of numerous thaw-lakes in the permafrost of the Arctic Coastal Plain has revealed that basin shape and orientation is controlled by winddriven waves and currents with associated thermal effects. The lakes range in size from mere puddles to basins 8 or 9 miles long, and all possess a similar basin morphology. This morphology consists of wide sub-littoral shelves and bars on the east and west sides, with the deeper central basin extending uninterrupted to the north and south ends. The ba- sins are elongated in a north-south direction, and have length-width ratios ranging from 1 to 5.1. Few basins are over 8 feet deep. In the Point Barrow area, most basins taper toward the north. Analysis of wind data from the Barrow weather station has revealed that summer winds are bimodal, being either easterly or westerly, average some 15 m.p.h., and are remarkably steady from one direction for several days at a time. orientation. Their average directions are nearly perpendicular to the axes of Investigation has shown that wind-driven wave action on the east and west sides, and the presence of circulation cells in the north and south ends, has produced the characteristic basin morphology; therefore, orientation. �3 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology May 2-3, 1963 Institute on Lake Superior Geology CLAY MINERALOGY OF THE DECORAH SHALE, MINNESOTA Cyril M. Gallick University of Minnesota, Minneapolis The Middle Ordovician Decorah Shale is exposed sporadically in a 20-. mile wide band, extending from St. Paul to the southwestern corner of Houston It is a green-gray or less commonly a blue-gray shale that contains County. thin (generally 0.1 to 0.2 foot) interbeds and lenses of limestone and co- quina. The limestone layers are widely separated in the basal 10 to 20 feet, but increase in number irregularly upwards. In the middle of the formation, there are two or more zones, 3 to 5 feet thick, which contain limestone beds separated by less than O.i feet of shale; near the top, the limestone beds A few of the uppermost beds are become thicker and more widely separated. The formation is 89 feet thick at St. Paul and thins one to two feet thick. progressively to 25 feet at the Minnesota-Iowa border. The minerals in the grade size less than 1/512 mm were determined with "illite" (a 10 layered silicate with inter— the X—ray diffactometer to be: layers of a lL mineral), kaolinite, orthoclase, and calcite. Where all minerals are present, peak intensities indicate that orthoclase and illite predominate. The material sized greater than 1/512 mm is mostly fossil hash and At St. Paul, illite and orthoclase are present throughrare quartz grains. out the formation, apparently in constant proportions; kaolinite and calcite are sparse in the basal part but occur in significant amounts in the middle and upper part of the section. At Rochester, the basal shale contains illite or-thoclase, and calcite in proportions similar to that in the upper part of the St. Paul section and sparse kaolinite; the middle shales consist entirely of illite; beds in the upper part contain either kaolinite or orthoclase or both, but apparently only in minor amounts. The orthoclase in the Decorah Shale has been presumed to be the result of authigenesis. All illite (001) peaks on the diffractometer from the St. Paul section and from the basal part of the Rochester section are very asymmetrical, extending from 9.BA to slightly more than lLR, possibly indicating a considerIn the middle and able amount of interlayer 1L4X mineral in the structure. upper parts of the Rochester section, the illite (001) peaks are nearly symmetrical. analysis of a shale which had been weathered for possibly more This peak than five years showed only a change of the illite (001) peak. much more asympeak, broader and was lower in relation to the (002) illite X-ray metrical than that of any other shale analyzed. little more than l7R. It extended from 9.8k to a �L. UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology Institute on May 2-3, 1963 Lake Superior Geology THE THERMAL METAMORPHIC EFFECT OF THE DULUTH GABBRO UPON THE SNOWBANK GRANITE G. N. Hanson, W. C. Phinney, and P. W. Gast University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota The effect of the thermal metamorphism of the 1.0 billion-year Duluth Gabbro on the 2.5 billion-year Snowbank Granite can be seen in the changes of the Rb-Sr ages of the biotites and the changes in the degree of triclinof the potassium feldspar in the granite. tion zones parallel the granite-gabbro contact. icity In both cases, the transi- Biotites from the granite within 2.0 kilometers of the contact (map distance) have Rb-Sr ages of less than 1.2 billion years. At distances greater than 2.0 kilometers, the successive biotite ages increase regularly to 2.55 billion years. The change in the ages exhibited by the biotite is shown to result from the loss of radiogenic strontium from the biotite strucThe mechanism for this loss is assumed to be either recrystallization ture. of the biotite structure or volunie diffusion of the radiogenic strontium out By a trial and error process of fitting theoretical of the structure. curves to the data, an activation energy of about 50 kilocalories for recrystallization by a zero—order rate process and an activation energy of 85 kilocalories for volume diffusion are proposed. Potassium feldspars at distances greater than 2.0 kilometers from the contact are maximum mirocline (maximum triclinicity) as determined by mea— Within 2.0 kilometers surement of the 131-131 spacing by x-ray diffraction. of the contact, the potassium feldspars are primarily orthoclase (monoclinic feldspar) except for several samples near the contact which show mixed orthoclase and microcline. The albite content of the potassium feldspar tends to be only a function of the facies of the stock and ranges from 0r59—0r96. The above data raise several questions which as yet are unanswered: (1) Why is microcline the potassium feldspar at distances greater than 2.0 kilometers? Could this be explained by regional metamorphism of the stock during the Algoman orogeny about 2.5 billion years ago? (2) Why did the potassium feldspar within 2.0 kilometers of the contact change to orthoclase upon thermal metamorphism by the gabbro and then not revert back to microcline upon cooling? Could this be a result of a lowering of water pressure in the stock at the time of the intrusion of the gabbro? �5 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology Institute on Lake Superior Geology May 2-3, 1963 CONTROL BY PRECAMBRIAN BASEMENT STRUCTURE OF THE LOCATION OF WYOMING THE TENSLEEP-BEAVER CREEK FAULT, BIGHORN MOUNTAINS, Richard A. Hoppin - University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa John C. Palniquist - Monmouth College, Monmouth, Illinois Lyman 0. Williams - The California Company, Pensacola, Florida angic fdnlt, The Tensleep—Beaver Creek Fault (Laramide in age) is a high The north side 32 miles in length, trending E-W across the Bighorn Mountains. The fault has moved up a maximum of 1350' in the axial portion of the range. presently known is a major transcurrent fracture but is the only such feature this trend, has that crosses the whole range. Why the fault formed and has the eastern 12 miles been a puzzle. This investigation was restricted to The Precambrian rocks were exalong which the Precambrian rocks are exposed. might have been reamined to see if there was any structural anisotropy that sponsible for the localization of the fault. One is best developed near the and dips 500 This foliation varies from N.80°E. to N.80°W. in strike fault. Several zones of pervasive foliation up to 300 feet wide were mapto 70°N. is less well deAs one goes north away from the fault, the foliation ped. in width are preveloped although local zones of a few inches to five feet shear surfaces; In the field, the foliation looks like closely spaced sent. for occahowever, thin sections indicate complete recrystallization except Later, pegmatitic masses cut this sional deformed relict plagioclase augen. In the fault zone, these foliated rocks, and the sedimentary foliation. quartz cementation are rocks, are brecciated and crushed. Quartz veins and 50 feet wide. characteristic. The crushed zone is only about Two strong foliations were discovered. This The second foliation trends N.50°-65°W. and dips 60° to 70°NE. foliation is dominant to the north of the fault but is absent near the fault. This fabthe fault. It is also the main foliation in the Horn area south of plagioric is also completely recrystallized with only a few relict deformed mylonitizatiofl arid quartz veining have clases. Later, zones of crushing, straight A particularly strong cataclastic zone is followed by a this trend. This same zone conportion of the valley of the North Fork of Powder River. is probably responsible for a small detinues southeast into the fault and flection of the fault. It seems reasonable, therefore, that the Tensleep-Beaver Creek fault was formed along an E-W zone of pervasive foliation and deflected in one area along another zone of northwesterly foliation. These foliations were formed under deep-seated conditions of plastic deformation followed by reLaramide took place at crystallization. The later deformation during the shallow depth and was of a brittle nature. �6 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology May 2—3, 1963 Institute on Lake Superior Geology THE RELATIONSHIPS BETWEEN THE DULUTH GABBRO AND THE DIKES AND SILLS NEAR HOVLAND, MINNESOTA Norris W. Jones University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota It is tentatively concluded from onissan'e go1ogic inepping in the vicinity of Hovland, Cook County, that the Duluth gabbro complex does not exand othtend as far eastward as Lake Superior, as suggested earlier by Grout ers (1959). Instead, the gabbro appears to terminate at the Brule River. The mafic rocks along the shore that previously were called Duluth gabbro are the lower part of the Hovland diabase sill. Three other diabase or gabbro units are recognized in the area. Petrographic and x-ray studies show systematic changes in the Hoviand sill. Silica, alkalis, and iron gradually increa3e upward from the base. is present As in the Skaergaard intrusion of East Greenland, an olivine gap and the two pyroxene boundary is crossed. The compositional changes are in- ferred to indicate that the sill formed by crystal fractionation. The relations of the intrusive units in the area can be explained as the result of emplacement of Logan intrusives, followed by intrusion of the Duluth gabbro ccinplex. The Logan intrusives were emplaced along a dominant- ly northeast—trending fracture system, whereas the Duluth gabbro complex in this area strikes essentially east-west. The Hoviand area represents the intersection of these two malor structural trends. �7 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology Institute May 2-3, 1963 on Lake Superior Geology CARBONATE MINERALS IN THE IRON-FORMATION AND THEIR SIGNIFICANCE Gene L LaBerge University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin To allow more rapid identification, a staining technique was used in studying the carbonate minerals in the iron-formation. The procedure is outlined in an to simp- article by Warne in the Jour, of Sed. lifying the identification of the carbonate species, the stain showed beauti- Pet., March, 1962. In addition fully the relationship of the various carbonates to one another, and the association of particular carbonate species with certain other minerals. Some generalizations to which there certainly are many exceptions which may be made, are as follows: Most of the siderite is primary material. The ex- tremely fine-grained carbonate which comprises up to 75 per cent of some slaty layers in the iron-formation is almost certainly primary. ial is siderite and/or very iron-rich ankerite. This mater- Textures indicate that the siderite granules, which are not uncommon, are probably primary. Unques- tionably, secondary siderite is not common. In contrast, most of the ankerite, ferroandolomite, and dary. dolomite are secon- Much of this secondary carbonate is probably a byproduct of the de- composition of the iron-rich ankerite to form magnetite, with which it is usually associated. However, primary ankeritic carbonate in both the slaty material and in granules does occur. �8 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology May 2-3, 1963 Institute on Lake Superior Geology STRUCTURE AND STRATIGRAPHY OF THE UPPER KEWEENAWAN ROCKS IN NORTHWESTERN WISCONSIN George Moerlein Bear Creek Mining Company, Anchorage, Alaska Between the summer of 1955 and the winter of 1960, Bear Creek Mining Company explored the western tip of the Lake Superior Syncline in quest of possible copper-bearing Nonesuch formation. The area covered includes por- tions of Ashland, Bayfield, Douglas, Washburn, and Burnett Counties, Wisconsin. Field mapping, extensive magnetic and gravity surveys, some refraction seismic work, and diamond drilling each played a part in outlining the geology of the area. The normal sequence of Keweenawan sediments, Copper Harbour, Nonesuch, and Freda formations was recognized, and the tratigraphy of each formation will be discussed. The structure of the area is essentially that shown on the 1948 edition of the Geologic Map of Wisconsin, a northeast plunging syncline. however, is locally complicated by faults of major Evidence importance. will be presented which indicates that the formation of the Lake Superior Syncline, at least in Wisconsin, began in an time. This, very late Keweenaw- �9 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH of Geology Department May 2-3, 1963 Institute on Lake Superior Geology THE STRATIGRAPHY AND STRUCTURE OF THE ROVE FORMATION, GUNFLINT LAKE AREA, MINNESOTA G. B. Morey University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota in the South Lake Quadrang1. near Gunf lint Lake in Cook County, was completed in 1962. The area is on the north limb of the Lake Superior structural basin; accordingly, the strata Geologic mapping of Animikie Group rocks strike eastward and dip consistently five to 15 degrees south, except adjacent to the Duluth Complex where the dips increase to as much as 65 degrees. The Rove Formation overlies the Gunflint Iron Formation, apparently conformably, and is truncated by the Duluth Complex; approximately 1,800 feet of The formation consists of two recognizable lithologic units. Rove are exposed. The lower unit, about 400 feet thick, consists mainly of a black, very finegrained, thin-bedded or fissile argillite with abundant graphitic or carbonaceous material and pyrrhotite, interbedded with lesser amounts of gray, mediumThe grained, massive graywacke. Calcareous concretions are locally abundant. argillites, grayupper unit, about 1,400 feet thick, consists of interbedded wackes, and quartzites; the latter two rock types become more abundant upward in the section. Graded bedding, sole marks, intraforrnational argillite fragments, convolute and small-scale cross-laminations and clastic dikes suggest a subaqueous flow origin for much of the upper unit. A south-southwestward movement of material is suggested by many of these structures. The Animikie Group rocks contain several east-trending sill-like bodies, mainly of diabasic gabbro, which range from less than 100 to more than The sedimentary rocks adjacent to the sills are 1,000 feet in thickness. metamorphosed to mineral assemblages. characteristic of the horr1blende-hornfels facies. The sills are correlated with the Logan Intrusives; they are older than and are truncated by the Duluth Complex. �10 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology Institute on Lake Superior Geology May 2-3, 1963 THE APPLICATION OF TREND SURFACE ANALYSIS TO THE WHITE PINE COPPER DISTRICT S. C. Nordeng1, C. 0. Ensign, Jr.2, M. E. Volin3 Over one hundred sets of drill hole data were taken from the files of the White Pine Company and coded on IBM cards. The section was divided into upper and lower halves and linear, quadratic and cubic surfaces of best fit were computed for each half for average copper percentage, thickness, and ounces of silver per ton, utilizing a taped multiple regression program on a medium speed digital computer. The linear surface for the upper half accounted for one-half or better of the departures from the mean and showed slight improvement for higher order surfaces, suggesting that the trends of the quantities under consideration are essentially planar in nature. The best fit was found for copper, The surfaces show an increase in thickness to the the poorest for silver. north and northeast, and in copper content to the southeast. The lower section showed macimum improvement in the sum of squares for the cubic model for both percent copper and thickness. Maps of the cubic surfaces successfully predict the location of a known ore body for which Departures of observed values from com no data was entered in the program. puted values for the lower half are interpreted as resulting from relative thickening and thinning of the upper part of the lower section which is relatively barren, and the lower part of the lower section in which most of the ore is found. 1 Department of Geology and Geological Engineering, Michigan College of Mining and Technology, Houghton, Michigan. 2 Chief Geologist, Copper Range Company, White Pine, Michigan Institute of Mineral Research, Michigan College of Mining and Technology, Houghton, Michigan �U UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology Institute on Lake Superior Geology May 2—3, 1963 STRUCTURE WITHIN THE DULUTH GABBRO COMPLEX, GABBRO LAKE AND GREENWOOD LAKE QUADRANGLES, LAKE COUNTY, MINNESOTA William C. Phinney University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota Mapping and petrologic studies of the Duluth gabbro complex in the Gabbro Lake and Greenwood Lake quadrangles during the summers of 1961 and 1962 have indicated a complex series of gabbroic intrusions associated with antiform and basin-like structures. A major intrusion in the southeast quarter of the Gabbro Lake quadrangle and the north-central part of the Greenwood Lake quadrangle is roughly elliptical in plan, has a long axis of at least nine miles, and is inferred to be cone-shaped. It intrudes anorthositic gabbro and concentric layers that dip nearly vertical at the border and nearly horizontal at the center. Regular variation in mineral assemblages from olivine rich at the border to pyroxene-rich at the center indicate a normal differenNumerous smaller gabbroic intrusions as well as zones of tiation sequence. intrusions have been mapped. has Olivine gabbro with well defined layers having graded olivine concentrations in rhythmic succession forms a broad, shallow basin in the southwest quarter of the Gabbro Lake quadrangle. Within the basin, there are many anorthosite lenses that contain numerous one- to two—inch patches of olivine, apThe eastern boundary of parently concentrated from the interstitial fluid. the basin is in sharp contact (apparently intrusive) with the anorthositic The relative ages gabbro intruded by the cone-like intrusive mentioned above. of the cone-like gãbbro intrusion and basin-shaped gabbro intrusion are not known. Southeast of Gãbbro Lake, a marker zone in the gabbro can be traced around an antiformal structure that is elongated subparallel to the basal contact of the gabbro and has an anorthositic gabbro core. In the same area, a very coarse-grained pyroxene- and ilmenite-magnetite-rich dike, that is as much as one-fourth mile wide, can be traced for several miles. �12 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology May 2-3, 1963 Institute on Lake Superior Geology PRELIMINARY INVESTIGATION OF A PORTION OF THE NORTHERN COMPLEX, BARAGA COUNTY, MICHIGAN D. W. Pollock and S. C. Nordeng Michigan College of Mining and Technology, Houghton, Michigan During the summer of 1962, the writers initiated a study of a portion Some results of the "Northern Complex" which lies in Baraga County, Michigan. of this study are reported herein. (1) amphiboSeveral lithologic groups have been mapped. These are: plagioclase—rich gneis— lite; (2) greenstone; (3) rnesocratic gneisses and (4) varieties. ses. Each of these groups can be subdivided into more specific The groups occur in definite belts and the following gradations were observed in the field: greenstone chiorite-plagioclase gneiss amphibolite mesocratic gneiss plagioclase-rich gneisses A thin "infolded" belt of Michigamme (?) phyllite has been located west of Clear Lake in Sec. 14, R 49 N, R 32 W. The broad structural trend is an arc, convex to the west. In detail, the structure is more complex. Poles to foliation (llsdiagrams) were plotted, but with poor results. The most useful approach was to outline the structure on the basis of vertical foliation trends. The origin of the foliation reMesoscopic linemains in doubt as the origin of the rocks is not yet known. ation is only feebly developed. Investigation is continuing. of some of the many problems raised during this study �13 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology Institute on Lake Superior Geology May 2-3, 1963 SUSCEPTIBILITY MEASUREMENTS OF EMPIRE MINE MAGNETIC MATERIAL E. Richard Randolph Cleveland Cliffs Iron Company, Ishpeming, Michigan The Negaunee Iron-Formation at the Empire Mine on the Marquette Range in Michigan consists, briefly, of magnetic cherty iron-formation, magnetic cherty carbonate iron-formation, magnetic cherty silicate iron-formation and a hanging wall member containing many large clastic facies interbedded with the precipitate iron—formation. The common criterion for grading ore at the mine is on the basis of per cent weight recovery. The ore type which presents the greatest problem in grade control is the clastic facies of the iron-formation which can vary It is very difficult to distinguish in weight recovery from 10% to tl1%. macroscopic means. Close orrich, moderate and poor der magnetometer surveying is an aid to localizing large zones, but a more definitive procedure is desirable for day-to-day control. It was suggested that susceptibility measurements on the cuttings from blast hole drilling might indicate the grade of the ore in that hole more cheaply and reliably than crude Fe analyses or streamlined Davis tube testing. clastic ore material by Susceptibility is the ratio of the intensity of magnetization acquired by a substance to the strength of the magnetizing field acting on the In a rock containing magnetite as the principal magnetizable constitbody. uent, susceptibility is, for practical purposes, the measure of the amount of magnetite present. Because per cent weight recovery of magnetite is the criterion for the cut-off s between rock, lean ore and ore in the hanging wall clastic zone, a program relating susceptibility measurements to per cent weight recovery was started. The conclusions are as predicted: measurements show a broad range of values for the general area but within a limited area correlate sufficiently well to offer a rapid, cheap, reliable method for sampling blast hole cuttings for grade control. �l&1 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology May 2—3, 1963 Institute on Lake Superior Geology BIOGEOCHEMISTRY OF MINNESOTA LAKES: CARBOHYDRATES M. A. Rogers University of Minnesota, Minneapolis Fossil carbohydrates have been found in trypical sedimentary rocks; carbonaceous organic rocks such as peat, coal and lignite; fossilized wood; insect remains; modern lake sediments; modern and ancient marine sediments; and in lake waters. Carbohydrate materials were studied in the aquatic plants, lake waters and lake sediments of two eutrophic-alkalitrOphiC lakes of central Minnesota. Both free sedimentary sugars and sugars liberated on hydrolysis were recovered. Glucose, galactose, xylose and arabinose are the dominant sugars in order of decreasing abundance in aquatic plants of the two lakes. Maxima and minima in these sugars, as well as in the content of cellulose and hemicellulose, show little relation to season of collection and appear to be characteristic of individual plant species. Acid hydrolysis of lake bottom sediments recovered the eight sugars, arabinose, xylose, galactose, glucuronic acid, glucose, rhamnose, mannose and ribose, in concentrations ranging from 19.1 to 0.1 mg/gm of dry wt. sedThe variety and amount of these sugars is believed to demonstrate iment. the importance of microorganisms in altering the carbohydrate fraction prior to stabilization and preservation within the sediment. Acid hydrolysis of lake sediments from a deep core from Blue Lake, Minnesota, recovered in order of decreasing abundance the eight sugars, xylose, glucose, arabinose, galactose, mannose, rhamnose, ribose and glucuronic acid. A natural stability series for carbohydrates in the lacustrine envifairly stable: xylose, glucose, rhamnose, arabinose; moderateronment is: galactose; very unstable: ribose, mannose; fairly unstable: ly stable: glucoronic acid. �15 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology Institute on Lake Superior Geology May 2—3, 1963 GEOLOGIC INTERPRETATION OF AEROMAGNETIC ANOMALIES OVER PRE- KEWEENAWAN ROCKS IN CENTRAL MINNESOTA P. K. Sims, Minnesota Geological Survey, Minneapolis, Minnesota Isidore Zietz, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. in An aeroinagnetic survey completed by the U. S. Geological Survey of 1961 has clarified our knowledge of the Pre-Keweenawan rocks in an area about 3,000 square miles in central Minnesota, extending from the latitude in of Little Falls, in Morrison County, south to the vicinity of Gaylord, of the anomalies In the northern part of the area, sources Sibley County. units have have been identified from scattered outcrops and separate rock been extended, based on geologic considerations and magnetic data. The aeromagnetic data indicate that the igneous rocks of the Penokean orogeny (Woyski, 19L19), which have been quarried extensively for building monumental stone in a broad area centered at St. Cloud, extend in the and eastward beneath oversubsurface south at least to latitude L5°l5' N. Northwestward from St. Cloud, lapping upper Keweenawan sedimentary rocks. and schist appears to be the dominant bedrock. In the southern part of the area, outcrops are lacking and interpretation of the magnetic patterns is more equivocal. Except for an anomaly at above igneous rocks of Lake Washington in Meeker County, which probably is mafic composition, interpretation of the magnetic anomalies intermediate or of the baseis not attempted. South of Hutchinson, a change in the trendmarked discontiby the magnetic pattern, suggests a ment rock, as indicated nuity, possibly a fault or an unconformity, in the Pre-Keweenawan rocks at this latitude. �16 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology Institute on Lake Superior Geo1gy May 2-3, 1963 STRUCTURES OF CONCRETIONS IN THE THOMSON FORMATION CARLTON AND PINE COUNTIES, MINNESOTA Paul Weiblen University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota Calcareous concretions in the Thomson Formation found in the vicinity of Carlton are of two types. The concretions in graywacke and graywacke—iate beds consist of massive calcite, are ellipsoidal, and lack a distinctive internal Those in structure other than bedding, which conforms to the enclosing rock. finer-grained slate beds are zoned; they contain an inner core of slaty mater— ial, surrounded by well—crystallized calcite or by quartz with sutured grain The outer zone has a pseudo cone-in-cone structure, defined by boundaries. bands of slaty material. The calcite in both types of concretions replaces quartz and feldspar. The zoned concretions on the limbs of folds in the slate and graywacke succession are rotated out of the plane of bedding. The c axis of the calcite in the pseudo cone-in-cone structures is oriented parallel to the direction of maximum compression and a cleavage, which is well developed, parallels shear These features afford a promising means for further study of directions. structural relations in the formation. Remnants of concretions are found in the more intensely metamorphosed phases of the Thomson Formation southwest of Carlton, in phyllite, metagraywacke, and mica schist. Quartz has replaced the calcite in phyllite. Well—zoned concretions occur in the metagraywacke. The outer zones of these consist principally of hornblende, garnet, quartz, and andesine; the cores contain mainly epidote, quartz and andesine. Sections of the cores show that they are deformed into boudins. They also contain characteristic S-shaped structures formed by shearing and defined by heavy mineral concentrations. These similarStructures similar to these occur in the slate and phyllite. the concretions can be ities indicate that further sampling may show that Formation. used as stratigraphic marker beds in the Thomson Remnant calcite is found in the concretions in the mica schist, metagraywacke and phyllite. The (211) spacing of the calcite ranges from 3.04 angstrorns in the slate to 3.02 angstroms in the schists, indicating the occurrence of relatively pure calcite (less than 5 percent Fe,Mg) throughout the entire formation. Plagioclase coexisting with calcite ranges from An5 in the slate and graywacke to An40 in the mica scist and metagraywacke. It has been found that radiographs afford a practical method for studying the internal structures of the concretions. Fluorescence excited by electron bombardment provides a mean of distinguishing calcite from dolomite. �17 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology May 2-3, 1963 Institute on Lake Superior Geology BURIED EXTENSION OF THE KEWEENAWAN BASIN IN MINNESOTA GEOPHYSICAL STUDY A Isidore Zietz, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D.C. P. K. Sims, Minnesota Geological Survey, Minneapolis, Minnesota Approximately 30,000 linear traverse miles have been flown eromagnet— ically by the U. S. Geological Survey across the "mid—continent gravity high". This is, perhaps, the most oustanding gravity feature in the United States, extending from near Lake Superior in a southwesterly direction to the Sauna basin in Kansas. Coupled with the gravity measurements and meager drill hole records, the aeromagnetic data strongly, if not unequivocally, imply the existence of a several-mile-thick accumulation of Keweenawan lava flows, extending uninterruptedly for 800 miles, f tanked by Pre-Cambrian sandstones which locally may be more than a mile thick. Total thicknesses of lava flows and neighboring sandstone can be estimated from the gravity data, whereas the aeromagnetic data supply the details of the configuration of the upper surface of the flows. In Minnesota, the magnetic data clearly outline the Twin Cities artesian basin, an elliptical trough 60 miles long in a northeast direction and 30 to 35 miles wide. basin and north of latitude LL°35' N., At the eastern margin of the the magnetic data suggest that the basin is bounded by a narrow northeast-trending horst of mafic volcanic rocks, probably elevated at least 1,000 feet above the adjacent rocks. The horst is the basement manifestation of the Fiudson-Afton anticline, a northeast-trending Paleozoic fold. In southern Minnesota, south of latitude L44°l5' N., the mafic lavas are at considerable depths, but the surface of the flows rises to within 1,500 feet at the Iowa border. �18 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology Institute on Lake Superior Geology May 2—3, 1963 LAKE SUPERIOR CORES AND BOTTOM TOPOGRAPHY James H. Zumberge and William R. Farrand University of Michigan and Columbia University to Cores were recovered from eleven drill holes in water depths of 500 drilling 1,130 feet in Lake Superior in 1961 and 1962. A shipboard, rotary and to lorig was used to penetrate the unconsolidated Pleistocene sediments The sediments were recovered by gravity and piston cate the bedrock surface. coring -- continuously in the upper 30 feet and intermittently below that depth. reaching bedThe longest core penetrated 686 feet of sediments without sediments rock, and it shows at least four alternations of glaciolacuStrifle The other cores penetrated only 7 to 156 feet and the varved), red lacustypical sequence was gray, lacustrine clay (lower part trifle clay (some varved), and red clay till. Below the till, well—washed and red, clayey till. red and sand (outwash?) was found in three holes, and in four other holes white (Cambrian?) sandstone was reached. drill A sub-bottom depth recorder was used in combination with the topography. Near logs for the interpretation of stratigraphy and sub-bottom broad bedrock valthe Minnesota coast, more than 700 feet of drift lies in a valleyIn the eastern part of the basin, strong north-south trending ley. modified stream and-ridge topography appears to be a submerged, glacially system, rather thinly covered with glacial drift. Also, the possibility of strong east—west faults between Keweenaw Peninsula and Sault Ste. Marie is indicated. � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology: Proceedings, 1963 Description An account of the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology. University of Minnestota, Duluth, Minnesota, May 2-3, 1963 Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1963 Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource R.L. Blake T.Z. Zoltai R.E. Hessevick C.E. Carson Cyrill M. Gallick G.N. Hanson P.W. Gast Richard A. Hoppin John C. Palmquist Lyman O. Williams Norris W. Jones Gene L. LaBerge George Moerlein G.B. Morey S.C. Nordeng C.O. Ensign M.E. Volin William C. Phinney D.W. Pollock E. Richard Randolph M.A. Rogers P.K. Sims Isidore Zietz Paul Weiblen James H. Zumberge William R. Farrand Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource PDF Language A language of the resource English https://digitalcollections.lakeheadu.ca/files/original/7338fb743a085a3636f695617419003d.pdf 469cd2492591ee36bab1d297d7b4d2d0 PDF Text Text �NINTH ANNUAL INSTITUTE ON LAKE SUPERIOR GEOLOGY University of Minnesota, Duluth May 2-3, 1963 PROGRAM Thursday Morning - May 2, 1963 Science Auditorium, University of Minnesota, Duluth 9:00 General Meeting of the Institute ............ Chairman, H. Lepp Secretary, D. H. Hase SESSION I Co—chairmen: J. C. Green, J. S. Owens 9:30 D. W. Pollock S. C. Nordeng: PRELIMINARY INVESTIGATION OF A PORTION OF THE NORTHERN COMPLEX, BARAGA Co., MICH. 9:55 George Moerlein: STRUCTURE AND STRATIGRAPHY OF THE KEWEENAWAN IN NORTHWESTERN MICHIGAN 10:20 lO:+5 11:10 BURIED EXTENSION OF THE KEWEENAWAN Isidore Zeitz & P. K. Sims: BASIN IN MINNESOTA - A GEOPHYSICAL STUDY P. K. Sims & Isidore Zeitz: GEOLOGIC INTERPRETATION OF AERO— MAGNETIC ANOMALIES OVER PRE-KEWEENAWAN ROCKS IN CENTRAL MINNESOTA THE APPLICATION OF S. C. Nordeng, C. 0. Ensign & M. E. Volin: TREND SURFACE ANALYSIS TO THE WHITE PINE COPPER DISTRICT GENERAL DISCUSSION 11:35 12:00 LUNCH — MAIN BALLROOM, KIRBY STUDENT CENTER SESSION II Co-Chairmen: F. D. Effinger, T. E. Stephenson STRUCTURE WITHIN THE DULUTH GABBRO COMPLEX IN THE 2:00 W. C. Phinney: 2:25 C. N. Hanson, W. C. Phinney & P. W. Gast: THE THERMAL EFFECT OF THE DULUTH GABBRO UPON THE SNOWBANK GRANITE GABBRO LAKE AND GREENWOOD LAKE QUADRANGLES, MINNESOTA �* Hf 2:50 THE RELATIONSHIPS BETWEEN THE DULUTH GABBRO AND DIKES AW SILLS NEAR HOVLAND, MINNESOTA N. W. Jones: COFFEE BREAK 3:15 3:145 :1O G. FORMATION, THE STRATIGRAPHY AND STRUCTURE OF THE ROVE B. Morey: GUNFLINT LAKE AREA, MINNESOTA STRUCTURES OF CONCRETIONS IN THE THOMSON FORMATION, CARLTON AND PINE COUNTIES, MINNESOTA Paul Wieblen: GENERAL DISCUSSION 14:35 6:30 THEL/ DINNER - MAIN BALLROOM, KIRBY STUDENT CENTER Dr. R. L. Heller, Director, Earth Science Project; Head, Department of Geology, University of Minnesota, Duluth Speaker: EARTH SCIENCE AND THE SECONDARY SCHOOL CURRICULUM Topic: Friday Morning, May 3, 1963 SESSION III Co-Chairmen: C. Tychsen, I. L. Reid P. R. E. Hessevick: REFINEMENT OF THE 9:00 R. L. Blake, T. Z. Zoltai 9:25 G. L. Laberge: CARBONATE MINERALS IN THE IRON FORMATION AND THEIR SIGNIFICANCE 9:50 R. E. Randolph: SUSCEPTIBILITY MEASUREMENTS CF EMPIRE MINE MAGNETIC MATERIAL & HEMATITE CRYSTAL STRUCTURE COFFEE BREAK 10:15 Hoppin, J. C. Palmquist & L. 0. Williams: CONTROL BY PRECAMBRIAN BASEMENT STRUCTURE ON THE LOCATION OF THE TENSLEEP - BEAVER CREEK FAULT, BIGHORN MOUNTAINS, WYOMING 10:145 R. A. 11:10 C. M. Gallick: CLAY MINERALOGY OF THE DECORAH SHALE, MINNESOTA 11:35 M. A. Rogers: BIOGEOCHEMISTRY OF MINNESOTA LAKES: 12:00 LUNCH - MAIN BALLROOM, KIRBY STUDENT CENTER CARBOHYDRATES �SESSION IV R. W. Marsden Chairman: 2:00 J. H. Zumberge & 14. R. Farrand: LAKE SUPERIOR CORES AND BOTTOM TOPOGRAPHY ORIENTED LAKES IN NORTHERN ALASKA 2:25 C. E. Carson: 25O 0. M. 'hwartz: 3:15 THE SUBDIVISIONS OF THE BTWABT}( FORNATTON ON THE EASTERN MESABI GENERAL DISCUSSION Saturday, May , 7:30 - Hotel 1963 Duluth FIELD TRIP TO THE MESABI IRON RANGE Field trip leaders: F. D. Effinger, Pickands Mather & Company J. 14. EmanuelsOfl, Reserve Mining Company C. L. Iverson, Oliver Iron Mining Division Richard Strong, Oliver Iron Mining Division �1 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology May 2—3, 1963 Institute on Lake Superior Geology REFINEMENT OF THE HEMATITE CRYSTAL STRUCTURE R. L. Blake.Y, T. Z. Zo1taiY, and R. E. Hessevick!" The crystal structure of hematite has been refined as an initial phase of studies involving atomic positions and vacancies in hematite during reduction to magnetite. Three—dimensiofll diffraction intenItieD were collected and automated on a spherical single crystal of hematite with both manual Buerger single crystal diffractometer. The structure has been refined with R factor of 7.1 pera least squares program and the final structure gave an cent. The structure model of Pauling and Hendricks has been confirmed with essentially no change in the iron coordinates and approximately a 5 percent change in the oxygen coordinates. The interatomic distances and bond angles were also calculated. TMinneapolis Metallurgy Research Center, Bureau of Mines 2! Department of Geology g Geophysics, University of Minnesota �2 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology May 2-3, 1963 Institute on Lake Superior Geology ORIENTED LAKES IN NORTHERN ALASKA C. E. Carson University of Minnesota, Duluth Study of numerous thaw-lakes in the permafrost of the Arctic Coastal Plain has revealed that basin shape and orientation is controlled by winddriven waves and currents with associated thermal effects. The lakes range in size from mere puddles to basins 8 or 9 miles long, and all possess a similar basin morphology. This morphology consists of wide sub-littoral shelves and bars on the east and west sides, with the deeper central basin extending uninterrupted to the north and south ends. The ba- sins are elongated in a north-south direction, and have length-width ratios ranging from 1 to 5.1. Few basins are over 8 feet deep. In the Point Barrow area, most basins taper toward the north. Analysis of wind data from the Barrow weather station has revealed that summer winds are bimodal, being either easterly or westerly, average some 15 m.p.h., and are remarkably steady from one direction for several days at a time. orientation. Their average directions are nearly perpendicular to the axes of Investigation has shown that wind-driven wave action on the east and west sides, and the presence of circulation cells in the north and south ends, has produced the characteristic basin morphology; therefore, orientation. �3 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology May 2-3, 1963 Institute on Lake Superior Geology CLAY MINERALOGY OF THE DECORAH SHALE, MINNESOTA Cyril M. Gallick University of Minnesota, Minneapolis The Middle Ordovician Decorah Shale is exposed sporadically in a 20-. mile wide band, extending from St. Paul to the southwestern corner of Houston It is a green-gray or less commonly a blue-gray shale that contains County. thin (generally 0.1 to 0.2 foot) interbeds and lenses of limestone and co- quina. The limestone layers are widely separated in the basal 10 to 20 feet, but increase in number irregularly upwards. In the middle of the formation, there are two or more zones, 3 to 5 feet thick, which contain limestone beds separated by less than O.i feet of shale; near the top, the limestone beds A few of the uppermost beds are become thicker and more widely separated. The formation is 89 feet thick at St. Paul and thins one to two feet thick. progressively to 25 feet at the Minnesota-Iowa border. The minerals in the grade size less than 1/512 mm were determined with "illite" (a 10 layered silicate with inter— the X—ray diffactometer to be: layers of a lL mineral), kaolinite, orthoclase, and calcite. Where all minerals are present, peak intensities indicate that orthoclase and illite predominate. The material sized greater than 1/512 mm is mostly fossil hash and At St. Paul, illite and orthoclase are present throughrare quartz grains. out the formation, apparently in constant proportions; kaolinite and calcite are sparse in the basal part but occur in significant amounts in the middle and upper part of the section. At Rochester, the basal shale contains illite or-thoclase, and calcite in proportions similar to that in the upper part of the St. Paul section and sparse kaolinite; the middle shales consist entirely of illite; beds in the upper part contain either kaolinite or orthoclase or both, but apparently only in minor amounts. The orthoclase in the Decorah Shale has been presumed to be the result of authigenesis. All illite (001) peaks on the diffractometer from the St. Paul section and from the basal part of the Rochester section are very asymmetrical, extending from 9.BA to slightly more than lLR, possibly indicating a considerIn the middle and able amount of interlayer 1L4X mineral in the structure. upper parts of the Rochester section, the illite (001) peaks are nearly symmetrical. analysis of a shale which had been weathered for possibly more This peak than five years showed only a change of the illite (001) peak. much more asympeak, broader and was lower in relation to the (002) illite X-ray metrical than that of any other shale analyzed. little more than l7R. It extended from 9.8k to a �L. UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology Institute on May 2-3, 1963 Lake Superior Geology THE THERMAL METAMORPHIC EFFECT OF THE DULUTH GABBRO UPON THE SNOWBANK GRANITE G. N. Hanson, W. C. Phinney, and P. W. Gast University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota The effect of the thermal metamorphism of the 1.0 billion-year Duluth Gabbro on the 2.5 billion-year Snowbank Granite can be seen in the changes of the Rb-Sr ages of the biotites and the changes in the degree of triclinof the potassium feldspar in the granite. tion zones parallel the granite-gabbro contact. icity In both cases, the transi- Biotites from the granite within 2.0 kilometers of the contact (map distance) have Rb-Sr ages of less than 1.2 billion years. At distances greater than 2.0 kilometers, the successive biotite ages increase regularly to 2.55 billion years. The change in the ages exhibited by the biotite is shown to result from the loss of radiogenic strontium from the biotite strucThe mechanism for this loss is assumed to be either recrystallization ture. of the biotite structure or volunie diffusion of the radiogenic strontium out By a trial and error process of fitting theoretical of the structure. curves to the data, an activation energy of about 50 kilocalories for recrystallization by a zero—order rate process and an activation energy of 85 kilocalories for volume diffusion are proposed. Potassium feldspars at distances greater than 2.0 kilometers from the contact are maximum mirocline (maximum triclinicity) as determined by mea— Within 2.0 kilometers surement of the 131-131 spacing by x-ray diffraction. of the contact, the potassium feldspars are primarily orthoclase (monoclinic feldspar) except for several samples near the contact which show mixed orthoclase and microcline. The albite content of the potassium feldspar tends to be only a function of the facies of the stock and ranges from 0r59—0r96. The above data raise several questions which as yet are unanswered: (1) Why is microcline the potassium feldspar at distances greater than 2.0 kilometers? Could this be explained by regional metamorphism of the stock during the Algoman orogeny about 2.5 billion years ago? (2) Why did the potassium feldspar within 2.0 kilometers of the contact change to orthoclase upon thermal metamorphism by the gabbro and then not revert back to microcline upon cooling? Could this be a result of a lowering of water pressure in the stock at the time of the intrusion of the gabbro? �5 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology Institute on Lake Superior Geology May 2-3, 1963 CONTROL BY PRECAMBRIAN BASEMENT STRUCTURE OF THE LOCATION OF WYOMING THE TENSLEEP-BEAVER CREEK FAULT, BIGHORN MOUNTAINS, Richard A. Hoppin - University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa John C. Palniquist - Monmouth College, Monmouth, Illinois Lyman 0. Williams - The California Company, Pensacola, Florida angic fdnlt, The Tensleep—Beaver Creek Fault (Laramide in age) is a high The north side 32 miles in length, trending E-W across the Bighorn Mountains. The fault has moved up a maximum of 1350' in the axial portion of the range. presently known is a major transcurrent fracture but is the only such feature this trend, has that crosses the whole range. Why the fault formed and has the eastern 12 miles been a puzzle. This investigation was restricted to The Precambrian rocks were exalong which the Precambrian rocks are exposed. might have been reamined to see if there was any structural anisotropy that sponsible for the localization of the fault. One is best developed near the and dips 500 This foliation varies from N.80°E. to N.80°W. in strike fault. Several zones of pervasive foliation up to 300 feet wide were mapto 70°N. is less well deAs one goes north away from the fault, the foliation ped. in width are preveloped although local zones of a few inches to five feet shear surfaces; In the field, the foliation looks like closely spaced sent. for occahowever, thin sections indicate complete recrystallization except Later, pegmatitic masses cut this sional deformed relict plagioclase augen. In the fault zone, these foliated rocks, and the sedimentary foliation. quartz cementation are rocks, are brecciated and crushed. Quartz veins and 50 feet wide. characteristic. The crushed zone is only about Two strong foliations were discovered. This The second foliation trends N.50°-65°W. and dips 60° to 70°NE. foliation is dominant to the north of the fault but is absent near the fault. This fabthe fault. It is also the main foliation in the Horn area south of plagioric is also completely recrystallized with only a few relict deformed mylonitizatiofl arid quartz veining have clases. Later, zones of crushing, straight A particularly strong cataclastic zone is followed by a this trend. This same zone conportion of the valley of the North Fork of Powder River. is probably responsible for a small detinues southeast into the fault and flection of the fault. It seems reasonable, therefore, that the Tensleep-Beaver Creek fault was formed along an E-W zone of pervasive foliation and deflected in one area along another zone of northwesterly foliation. These foliations were formed under deep-seated conditions of plastic deformation followed by reLaramide took place at crystallization. The later deformation during the shallow depth and was of a brittle nature. �6 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology May 2—3, 1963 Institute on Lake Superior Geology THE RELATIONSHIPS BETWEEN THE DULUTH GABBRO AND THE DIKES AND SILLS NEAR HOVLAND, MINNESOTA Norris W. Jones University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota It is tentatively concluded from onissan'e go1ogic inepping in the vicinity of Hovland, Cook County, that the Duluth gabbro complex does not exand othtend as far eastward as Lake Superior, as suggested earlier by Grout ers (1959). Instead, the gabbro appears to terminate at the Brule River. The mafic rocks along the shore that previously were called Duluth gabbro are the lower part of the Hovland diabase sill. Three other diabase or gabbro units are recognized in the area. Petrographic and x-ray studies show systematic changes in the Hoviand sill. Silica, alkalis, and iron gradually increa3e upward from the base. is present As in the Skaergaard intrusion of East Greenland, an olivine gap and the two pyroxene boundary is crossed. The compositional changes are in- ferred to indicate that the sill formed by crystal fractionation. The relations of the intrusive units in the area can be explained as the result of emplacement of Logan intrusives, followed by intrusion of the Duluth gabbro ccinplex. The Logan intrusives were emplaced along a dominant- ly northeast—trending fracture system, whereas the Duluth gabbro complex in this area strikes essentially east-west. The Hoviand area represents the intersection of these two malor structural trends. �7 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology Institute May 2-3, 1963 on Lake Superior Geology CARBONATE MINERALS IN THE IRON-FORMATION AND THEIR SIGNIFICANCE Gene L LaBerge University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin To allow more rapid identification, a staining technique was used in studying the carbonate minerals in the iron-formation. The procedure is outlined in an to simp- article by Warne in the Jour, of Sed. lifying the identification of the carbonate species, the stain showed beauti- Pet., March, 1962. In addition fully the relationship of the various carbonates to one another, and the association of particular carbonate species with certain other minerals. Some generalizations to which there certainly are many exceptions which may be made, are as follows: Most of the siderite is primary material. The ex- tremely fine-grained carbonate which comprises up to 75 per cent of some slaty layers in the iron-formation is almost certainly primary. ial is siderite and/or very iron-rich ankerite. This mater- Textures indicate that the siderite granules, which are not uncommon, are probably primary. Unques- tionably, secondary siderite is not common. In contrast, most of the ankerite, ferroandolomite, and dary. dolomite are secon- Much of this secondary carbonate is probably a byproduct of the de- composition of the iron-rich ankerite to form magnetite, with which it is usually associated. However, primary ankeritic carbonate in both the slaty material and in granules does occur. �8 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology May 2-3, 1963 Institute on Lake Superior Geology STRUCTURE AND STRATIGRAPHY OF THE UPPER KEWEENAWAN ROCKS IN NORTHWESTERN WISCONSIN George Moerlein Bear Creek Mining Company, Anchorage, Alaska Between the summer of 1955 and the winter of 1960, Bear Creek Mining Company explored the western tip of the Lake Superior Syncline in quest of possible copper-bearing Nonesuch formation. The area covered includes por- tions of Ashland, Bayfield, Douglas, Washburn, and Burnett Counties, Wisconsin. Field mapping, extensive magnetic and gravity surveys, some refraction seismic work, and diamond drilling each played a part in outlining the geology of the area. The normal sequence of Keweenawan sediments, Copper Harbour, Nonesuch, and Freda formations was recognized, and the tratigraphy of each formation will be discussed. The structure of the area is essentially that shown on the 1948 edition of the Geologic Map of Wisconsin, a northeast plunging syncline. however, is locally complicated by faults of major Evidence importance. will be presented which indicates that the formation of the Lake Superior Syncline, at least in Wisconsin, began in an time. This, very late Keweenaw- �9 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH of Geology Department May 2-3, 1963 Institute on Lake Superior Geology THE STRATIGRAPHY AND STRUCTURE OF THE ROVE FORMATION, GUNFLINT LAKE AREA, MINNESOTA G. B. Morey University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota in the South Lake Quadrang1. near Gunf lint Lake in Cook County, was completed in 1962. The area is on the north limb of the Lake Superior structural basin; accordingly, the strata Geologic mapping of Animikie Group rocks strike eastward and dip consistently five to 15 degrees south, except adjacent to the Duluth Complex where the dips increase to as much as 65 degrees. The Rove Formation overlies the Gunflint Iron Formation, apparently conformably, and is truncated by the Duluth Complex; approximately 1,800 feet of The formation consists of two recognizable lithologic units. Rove are exposed. The lower unit, about 400 feet thick, consists mainly of a black, very finegrained, thin-bedded or fissile argillite with abundant graphitic or carbonaceous material and pyrrhotite, interbedded with lesser amounts of gray, mediumThe grained, massive graywacke. Calcareous concretions are locally abundant. argillites, grayupper unit, about 1,400 feet thick, consists of interbedded wackes, and quartzites; the latter two rock types become more abundant upward in the section. Graded bedding, sole marks, intraforrnational argillite fragments, convolute and small-scale cross-laminations and clastic dikes suggest a subaqueous flow origin for much of the upper unit. A south-southwestward movement of material is suggested by many of these structures. The Animikie Group rocks contain several east-trending sill-like bodies, mainly of diabasic gabbro, which range from less than 100 to more than The sedimentary rocks adjacent to the sills are 1,000 feet in thickness. metamorphosed to mineral assemblages. characteristic of the horr1blende-hornfels facies. The sills are correlated with the Logan Intrusives; they are older than and are truncated by the Duluth Complex. �10 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology Institute on Lake Superior Geology May 2-3, 1963 THE APPLICATION OF TREND SURFACE ANALYSIS TO THE WHITE PINE COPPER DISTRICT S. C. Nordeng1, C. 0. Ensign, Jr.2, M. E. Volin3 Over one hundred sets of drill hole data were taken from the files of the White Pine Company and coded on IBM cards. The section was divided into upper and lower halves and linear, quadratic and cubic surfaces of best fit were computed for each half for average copper percentage, thickness, and ounces of silver per ton, utilizing a taped multiple regression program on a medium speed digital computer. The linear surface for the upper half accounted for one-half or better of the departures from the mean and showed slight improvement for higher order surfaces, suggesting that the trends of the quantities under consideration are essentially planar in nature. The best fit was found for copper, The surfaces show an increase in thickness to the the poorest for silver. north and northeast, and in copper content to the southeast. The lower section showed macimum improvement in the sum of squares for the cubic model for both percent copper and thickness. Maps of the cubic surfaces successfully predict the location of a known ore body for which Departures of observed values from com no data was entered in the program. puted values for the lower half are interpreted as resulting from relative thickening and thinning of the upper part of the lower section which is relatively barren, and the lower part of the lower section in which most of the ore is found. 1 Department of Geology and Geological Engineering, Michigan College of Mining and Technology, Houghton, Michigan. 2 Chief Geologist, Copper Range Company, White Pine, Michigan Institute of Mineral Research, Michigan College of Mining and Technology, Houghton, Michigan �U UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology Institute on Lake Superior Geology May 2—3, 1963 STRUCTURE WITHIN THE DULUTH GABBRO COMPLEX, GABBRO LAKE AND GREENWOOD LAKE QUADRANGLES, LAKE COUNTY, MINNESOTA William C. Phinney University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota Mapping and petrologic studies of the Duluth gabbro complex in the Gabbro Lake and Greenwood Lake quadrangles during the summers of 1961 and 1962 have indicated a complex series of gabbroic intrusions associated with antiform and basin-like structures. A major intrusion in the southeast quarter of the Gabbro Lake quadrangle and the north-central part of the Greenwood Lake quadrangle is roughly elliptical in plan, has a long axis of at least nine miles, and is inferred to be cone-shaped. It intrudes anorthositic gabbro and concentric layers that dip nearly vertical at the border and nearly horizontal at the center. Regular variation in mineral assemblages from olivine rich at the border to pyroxene-rich at the center indicate a normal differenNumerous smaller gabbroic intrusions as well as zones of tiation sequence. intrusions have been mapped. has Olivine gabbro with well defined layers having graded olivine concentrations in rhythmic succession forms a broad, shallow basin in the southwest quarter of the Gabbro Lake quadrangle. Within the basin, there are many anorthosite lenses that contain numerous one- to two—inch patches of olivine, apThe eastern boundary of parently concentrated from the interstitial fluid. the basin is in sharp contact (apparently intrusive) with the anorthositic The relative ages gabbro intruded by the cone-like intrusive mentioned above. of the cone-like gãbbro intrusion and basin-shaped gabbro intrusion are not known. Southeast of Gãbbro Lake, a marker zone in the gabbro can be traced around an antiformal structure that is elongated subparallel to the basal contact of the gabbro and has an anorthositic gabbro core. In the same area, a very coarse-grained pyroxene- and ilmenite-magnetite-rich dike, that is as much as one-fourth mile wide, can be traced for several miles. �12 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology May 2-3, 1963 Institute on Lake Superior Geology PRELIMINARY INVESTIGATION OF A PORTION OF THE NORTHERN COMPLEX, BARAGA COUNTY, MICHIGAN D. W. Pollock and S. C. Nordeng Michigan College of Mining and Technology, Houghton, Michigan During the summer of 1962, the writers initiated a study of a portion Some results of the "Northern Complex" which lies in Baraga County, Michigan. of this study are reported herein. (1) amphiboSeveral lithologic groups have been mapped. These are: plagioclase—rich gneis— lite; (2) greenstone; (3) rnesocratic gneisses and (4) varieties. ses. Each of these groups can be subdivided into more specific The groups occur in definite belts and the following gradations were observed in the field: greenstone chiorite-plagioclase gneiss amphibolite mesocratic gneiss plagioclase-rich gneisses A thin "infolded" belt of Michigamme (?) phyllite has been located west of Clear Lake in Sec. 14, R 49 N, R 32 W. The broad structural trend is an arc, convex to the west. In detail, the structure is more complex. Poles to foliation (llsdiagrams) were plotted, but with poor results. The most useful approach was to outline the structure on the basis of vertical foliation trends. The origin of the foliation reMesoscopic linemains in doubt as the origin of the rocks is not yet known. ation is only feebly developed. Investigation is continuing. of some of the many problems raised during this study �13 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology Institute on Lake Superior Geology May 2-3, 1963 SUSCEPTIBILITY MEASUREMENTS OF EMPIRE MINE MAGNETIC MATERIAL E. Richard Randolph Cleveland Cliffs Iron Company, Ishpeming, Michigan The Negaunee Iron-Formation at the Empire Mine on the Marquette Range in Michigan consists, briefly, of magnetic cherty iron-formation, magnetic cherty carbonate iron-formation, magnetic cherty silicate iron-formation and a hanging wall member containing many large clastic facies interbedded with the precipitate iron—formation. The common criterion for grading ore at the mine is on the basis of per cent weight recovery. The ore type which presents the greatest problem in grade control is the clastic facies of the iron-formation which can vary It is very difficult to distinguish in weight recovery from 10% to tl1%. macroscopic means. Close orrich, moderate and poor der magnetometer surveying is an aid to localizing large zones, but a more definitive procedure is desirable for day-to-day control. It was suggested that susceptibility measurements on the cuttings from blast hole drilling might indicate the grade of the ore in that hole more cheaply and reliably than crude Fe analyses or streamlined Davis tube testing. clastic ore material by Susceptibility is the ratio of the intensity of magnetization acquired by a substance to the strength of the magnetizing field acting on the In a rock containing magnetite as the principal magnetizable constitbody. uent, susceptibility is, for practical purposes, the measure of the amount of magnetite present. Because per cent weight recovery of magnetite is the criterion for the cut-off s between rock, lean ore and ore in the hanging wall clastic zone, a program relating susceptibility measurements to per cent weight recovery was started. The conclusions are as predicted: measurements show a broad range of values for the general area but within a limited area correlate sufficiently well to offer a rapid, cheap, reliable method for sampling blast hole cuttings for grade control. �l&1 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology May 2—3, 1963 Institute on Lake Superior Geology BIOGEOCHEMISTRY OF MINNESOTA LAKES: CARBOHYDRATES M. A. Rogers University of Minnesota, Minneapolis Fossil carbohydrates have been found in trypical sedimentary rocks; carbonaceous organic rocks such as peat, coal and lignite; fossilized wood; insect remains; modern lake sediments; modern and ancient marine sediments; and in lake waters. Carbohydrate materials were studied in the aquatic plants, lake waters and lake sediments of two eutrophic-alkalitrOphiC lakes of central Minnesota. Both free sedimentary sugars and sugars liberated on hydrolysis were recovered. Glucose, galactose, xylose and arabinose are the dominant sugars in order of decreasing abundance in aquatic plants of the two lakes. Maxima and minima in these sugars, as well as in the content of cellulose and hemicellulose, show little relation to season of collection and appear to be characteristic of individual plant species. Acid hydrolysis of lake bottom sediments recovered the eight sugars, arabinose, xylose, galactose, glucuronic acid, glucose, rhamnose, mannose and ribose, in concentrations ranging from 19.1 to 0.1 mg/gm of dry wt. sedThe variety and amount of these sugars is believed to demonstrate iment. the importance of microorganisms in altering the carbohydrate fraction prior to stabilization and preservation within the sediment. Acid hydrolysis of lake sediments from a deep core from Blue Lake, Minnesota, recovered in order of decreasing abundance the eight sugars, xylose, glucose, arabinose, galactose, mannose, rhamnose, ribose and glucuronic acid. A natural stability series for carbohydrates in the lacustrine envifairly stable: xylose, glucose, rhamnose, arabinose; moderateronment is: galactose; very unstable: ribose, mannose; fairly unstable: ly stable: glucoronic acid. �15 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology Institute on Lake Superior Geology May 2—3, 1963 GEOLOGIC INTERPRETATION OF AEROMAGNETIC ANOMALIES OVER PRE- KEWEENAWAN ROCKS IN CENTRAL MINNESOTA P. K. Sims, Minnesota Geological Survey, Minneapolis, Minnesota Isidore Zietz, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. in An aeroinagnetic survey completed by the U. S. Geological Survey of 1961 has clarified our knowledge of the Pre-Keweenawan rocks in an area about 3,000 square miles in central Minnesota, extending from the latitude in of Little Falls, in Morrison County, south to the vicinity of Gaylord, of the anomalies In the northern part of the area, sources Sibley County. units have have been identified from scattered outcrops and separate rock been extended, based on geologic considerations and magnetic data. The aeromagnetic data indicate that the igneous rocks of the Penokean orogeny (Woyski, 19L19), which have been quarried extensively for building monumental stone in a broad area centered at St. Cloud, extend in the and eastward beneath oversubsurface south at least to latitude L5°l5' N. Northwestward from St. Cloud, lapping upper Keweenawan sedimentary rocks. and schist appears to be the dominant bedrock. In the southern part of the area, outcrops are lacking and interpretation of the magnetic patterns is more equivocal. Except for an anomaly at above igneous rocks of Lake Washington in Meeker County, which probably is mafic composition, interpretation of the magnetic anomalies intermediate or of the baseis not attempted. South of Hutchinson, a change in the trendmarked discontiby the magnetic pattern, suggests a ment rock, as indicated nuity, possibly a fault or an unconformity, in the Pre-Keweenawan rocks at this latitude. �16 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology Institute on Lake Superior Geo1gy May 2-3, 1963 STRUCTURES OF CONCRETIONS IN THE THOMSON FORMATION CARLTON AND PINE COUNTIES, MINNESOTA Paul Weiblen University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota Calcareous concretions in the Thomson Formation found in the vicinity of Carlton are of two types. The concretions in graywacke and graywacke—iate beds consist of massive calcite, are ellipsoidal, and lack a distinctive internal Those in structure other than bedding, which conforms to the enclosing rock. finer-grained slate beds are zoned; they contain an inner core of slaty mater— ial, surrounded by well—crystallized calcite or by quartz with sutured grain The outer zone has a pseudo cone-in-cone structure, defined by boundaries. bands of slaty material. The calcite in both types of concretions replaces quartz and feldspar. The zoned concretions on the limbs of folds in the slate and graywacke succession are rotated out of the plane of bedding. The c axis of the calcite in the pseudo cone-in-cone structures is oriented parallel to the direction of maximum compression and a cleavage, which is well developed, parallels shear These features afford a promising means for further study of directions. structural relations in the formation. Remnants of concretions are found in the more intensely metamorphosed phases of the Thomson Formation southwest of Carlton, in phyllite, metagraywacke, and mica schist. Quartz has replaced the calcite in phyllite. Well—zoned concretions occur in the metagraywacke. The outer zones of these consist principally of hornblende, garnet, quartz, and andesine; the cores contain mainly epidote, quartz and andesine. Sections of the cores show that they are deformed into boudins. They also contain characteristic S-shaped structures formed by shearing and defined by heavy mineral concentrations. These similarStructures similar to these occur in the slate and phyllite. the concretions can be ities indicate that further sampling may show that Formation. used as stratigraphic marker beds in the Thomson Remnant calcite is found in the concretions in the mica schist, metagraywacke and phyllite. The (211) spacing of the calcite ranges from 3.04 angstrorns in the slate to 3.02 angstroms in the schists, indicating the occurrence of relatively pure calcite (less than 5 percent Fe,Mg) throughout the entire formation. Plagioclase coexisting with calcite ranges from An5 in the slate and graywacke to An40 in the mica scist and metagraywacke. It has been found that radiographs afford a practical method for studying the internal structures of the concretions. Fluorescence excited by electron bombardment provides a mean of distinguishing calcite from dolomite. �17 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology May 2-3, 1963 Institute on Lake Superior Geology BURIED EXTENSION OF THE KEWEENAWAN BASIN IN MINNESOTA GEOPHYSICAL STUDY A Isidore Zietz, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D.C. P. K. Sims, Minnesota Geological Survey, Minneapolis, Minnesota Approximately 30,000 linear traverse miles have been flown eromagnet— ically by the U. S. Geological Survey across the "mid—continent gravity high". This is, perhaps, the most oustanding gravity feature in the United States, extending from near Lake Superior in a southwesterly direction to the Sauna basin in Kansas. Coupled with the gravity measurements and meager drill hole records, the aeromagnetic data strongly, if not unequivocally, imply the existence of a several-mile-thick accumulation of Keweenawan lava flows, extending uninterruptedly for 800 miles, f tanked by Pre-Cambrian sandstones which locally may be more than a mile thick. Total thicknesses of lava flows and neighboring sandstone can be estimated from the gravity data, whereas the aeromagnetic data supply the details of the configuration of the upper surface of the flows. In Minnesota, the magnetic data clearly outline the Twin Cities artesian basin, an elliptical trough 60 miles long in a northeast direction and 30 to 35 miles wide. basin and north of latitude LL°35' N., At the eastern margin of the the magnetic data suggest that the basin is bounded by a narrow northeast-trending horst of mafic volcanic rocks, probably elevated at least 1,000 feet above the adjacent rocks. The horst is the basement manifestation of the Fiudson-Afton anticline, a northeast-trending Paleozoic fold. In southern Minnesota, south of latitude L44°l5' N., the mafic lavas are at considerable depths, but the surface of the flows rises to within 1,500 feet at the Iowa border. �18 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DULUTH Department of Geology Institute on Lake Superior Geology May 2—3, 1963 LAKE SUPERIOR CORES AND BOTTOM TOPOGRAPHY James H. Zumberge and William R. Farrand University of Michigan and Columbia University to Cores were recovered from eleven drill holes in water depths of 500 drilling 1,130 feet in Lake Superior in 1961 and 1962. A shipboard, rotary and to lorig was used to penetrate the unconsolidated Pleistocene sediments The sediments were recovered by gravity and piston cate the bedrock surface. coring -- continuously in the upper 30 feet and intermittently below that depth. reaching bedThe longest core penetrated 686 feet of sediments without sediments rock, and it shows at least four alternations of glaciolacuStrifle The other cores penetrated only 7 to 156 feet and the varved), red lacustypical sequence was gray, lacustrine clay (lower part trifle clay (some varved), and red clay till. Below the till, well—washed and red, clayey till. red and sand (outwash?) was found in three holes, and in four other holes white (Cambrian?) sandstone was reached. drill A sub-bottom depth recorder was used in combination with the topography. Near logs for the interpretation of stratigraphy and sub-bottom broad bedrock valthe Minnesota coast, more than 700 feet of drift lies in a valleyIn the eastern part of the basin, strong north-south trending ley. modified stream and-ridge topography appears to be a submerged, glacially system, rather thinly covered with glacial drift. Also, the possibility of strong east—west faults between Keweenaw Peninsula and Sault Ste. Marie is indicated. � https://digitalcollections.lakeheadu.ca/files/original/5a175e5c561d413faf02a1b640ea415e.pdf c174ae149f6d8beb5546748ab48f1a3a PDF Text Text Field Trip "Stratigraphy of the.Biwabik Iron Formation 11 Sponsored by the Lake Superior Geology Club Duluth, Minnesota May 4, 1965 �,, ~~ G>,._ /<I AUBURN ~t-«~ 1-/19 19/11. G' . G'-'9 ~ )'1- ~ 0 '9</ ~ O,s- +-~ ~ -v~ ~,o -v~~ <? INDEX MAP OF THE MESABI DISTRICT , MINNESOTA �FOREWORD Gentle reader, take heed, the field trip which you are about to take - not a polished affair with textbook illustrations and trip leaders able to J ve glib expla.ne.tions for everything you are going to see. o the gene al objectives for which the Lake Superior Geology In keeping with stitute was or- g nized, that is, to present preliminary r e sults of investigation in new areas of geologic interest, the leaders of this trip plan t o show you their approach tp subdivic1:1.ng the Biwabik iron formation beyond the basic fourfold subdivision ~rst proposed by J. F. Wolff in 1917. That the problem of further subdivision i ls difficult can be accepted si nce such authoritie s as Gruner, Grout and Broderick, E te , Schwartz and Gunderson have all come up with systems that many individuals use but which do not appear to be generally acceptable to all 'rorkers in the ield. In such a situation we may expect considerable discussion and disagreement i th any system proposed. ~Y emerge, Perhaps in the anticipated clash of opinions the truth. but don't count on i t. In any event the trip should be instructive " o both you and the leaders, and perhaps even entertaining to the philosophers rong you contemplati ng the state Of geol ogic knO'£o7ledge concerning this 1 the ,randfather of all iron for-mations. . A secondary but highly interesting part of this trip \d.ll be the 1ppo1~unity to observe the changes vmich take place in unoxidized iron formation rom the Eveleth area eastward almost to the contact of the Duluth Gabbro. T~~s spect of the trip should be of particular interest to students of metamorphism and those less c,o ncerned with the local problems of iron formation stratigraphy. lble controversy exists even in this area, the individualists among you vTontt I q.ave to accept any of our leaders' statements since the rocks themselves \-Till be tvailable for identification and collection. Due to the unexpectedly large number of people participating in this trip, we are antici pating some difficulty in maintaining our schedule of arrivals and departures f rom each stop. ~orn blows . compensation. Please return to the buses promptly a fter the I f you are left i n the pit don •t panic, apply for unempl oyment �The field trip will start at 7: 50 A.M. at Hotel Duluth and proceed rectly to the Auburn Mine property outside of Virginia . Upon completion of tq.e one stop at Auburn , the buses ldll ta.k.e us to the Erie property and proceed through four stops in various parts of the pit. Two stops are planned in the I REf Serve property to complete the program for the day. The buses will return to Duluth via Aurora and deposit passengers at the beginning point. Passengers 'rushing to remain on the Range should make private arrangements for transportation ftam the Reserve property or possibly from Aurora. It is anticipated that we ,dll finish the trip around 6:00 P.M. Lunch ~dll be served at the third stop in the Erie pit and rest stops are planned on ent ering the Erie property and leaving the Reserve property. Please read, consider and observe the regulations on the following page to which ~rJ have agreed in order that we can gain entrance to the various properties. �ruiruuTIONS: Through t he courtesy of the Oliver Iron Mining Division, United States Steel Corporation , Pickands Mather & Co., and the Reserve Mining Company, we have beFn granted permission to enter, inspect and collect small specimens on their rebpective properties. t~ In return for this privilege, we have agreed to abide by following regtuations which apply not only to visitors but also to all company pe~sonnel. l. pits. Safety hats and goggles will be worn at all times while in the various You will be issued such equipment at the first stop. This equipment is charged out to the Lake Superior Geology Club and we will have to pay for it if it is not returned at the end of the trip . 2. Picture taking of equipment is discouraged in all active pits and all pictures forbidden on the Reserve property. at the entrance to the Reserve property. for the fun of it . Arrangements will be made to check cameras Please do not try t o outwit these regulations You may make it difficult for future geologists to enter these interesting areas . 3. Please use caution when approaching rock walls . The talus slopes are notoriously unstable footing and rock slides from the walls above are not uncommon in the spring. While the purists among you will want to remove specimens from the living rock, let us remind you that \dth taconite, it ' s going to take a lot of hammering. We have a long, tO'\.lgh day ahead of us, so save your strength. also applies to potential mountain goats climbing up rock faces. Thi s You may endanger yorrself and other people as well as delay the trip , so stay off high faces. 4. Please use discretion wnen hammering on rocks near other people . Taconite is tough and hard. at high speed. Sharp chips have a tendency to fly in all directions The safety goggles supplied you are not just a bureaucratic detail. Us~ them at all times and make your arm on Minnesota taconite. sure they are on people near you before you t est It is reported to have an average crushing stkength of 55,000 pounds per square inch . �Ea ster n Biwabi k Str atigraphy f rom Gunderson a nd Schwartz .Minnes ota Geological Survey Bulletin 43 -~ z;~a ~ ~~ !I ~~! ;- s ~ -'C-Q; ~ ..~ ~ GENERALIZED COLUMNAR SECTION OF THE BIWABIK IRON-FORMATION ~ ~ -~ ~ ~ £ r: ~-:! == j -!!cri ~ ~ ? ! -0f:i!..._ou E~ ~ r ~ s o ~ ~ -- J: j IN THE EASTERN MESABI DISTRIC T, MINNESOTA i? 1-- - -- - - --------=---,--.,-,--- - - - -- - - - - - - - - l 6 i ·~· ~:g 32: c.5 Descnption of Submembe rs ;; .:...: w - Q (Notations cO - Jf ~ J I B {!6) (eo~t} and (we!:> I) refer to orcas near the easter n and western drill holes) calcite marble,. minor diop side, wollastonite , id oc ro s e, andradit e and quartz j """-;;;;ered (di'op/;ide) chert taconite locally wilh hornblende, hedenberq ite and some cummingtonite a nd oc tmol•te /ami'n aled (ferrohyperslhene - moqnel i le) c;uarl.t ! aconite with hedcnberqite c >~ w (l_ (l_ ::J taconite {west) I /:::,vy laminated (oclinoh'le-moqnefite) chert taconite 1-:---:-::::--fV ··-·tonile ond minor hedenbc rgi te -' (/) cr laminated (cummin91onite - mognetite) chert and loyoli te (east) and (421 "' .D :> <I 0 (71 E 161 F (201 with abundant granule struc tures and locolly w ith quart zfilled seplorio s tructures; m inor magneti te, c ufT'ming tonite and o ttinolite shaly bedded (cumminqtonite-maqnetite) quartz laconile hedenocrgite (cost); locally abundant w•l h minor andradite cumminglanite (west} quartz taconite (ea st) and mol/led (andradite) quartz obundonl magne ltl e - bearing granules throughout G (251 wavy layered (actinolite? -maqnetite) quartz taconite f---:1 J wit~ cumminc;~- quartz taconite r----t--__ond H locally liOl local ly with foyoli te (eas t) taconite (west) with with minor hedenberq:itei and cummingtonite (wes t) .,--+ - - (Sl (l6 ) " ' alq~l (moqnetile) quorlz toconife with abundant magnetite- r ich granules ond "---: ebblcs; conglomcrolic fabric throuc;~houl; minor hematite r---+-_ granule (maqneltle) quartz facomle with obundonl magneti te - rich pebbles ~top and thic kly layered (magnel!le) quoriL tocomle near bottom >- K (351 L (301 near wavy layered (silicole moqnelite) quartz taconite with abundant moQne tite· rich granules ond ptbblcs ; silicates ore actinolite ond ferrahyperslh ene (east) ond cummingtamte (we st) 9 1- cr w I u wavy layered (st'licote-magnett~e) silicate-quartz taconite with abundant mag netite-rich granules ncar bollom; silic.o tes with magnetite ore ferrohypersthcne and hor nblende (e o:o t) and cumming toni te and actinoli te (wes t); silicates wi th quartz ore fcrrohypers thene (cost) ond c umminqtonite (west) cr w (l_ (l_ ::J layered (maqnelt~e) loyolite-quorlz /acon/tc with fcrrohypersthene layered (maqnel/te) cumminqtom~e-quar tz tacom~e (wes t) M (201 N 41 0 (17) foyalde -quartz tacomle tocomle (westli minor with ferrohyp ersthene (eosl) and {eas t) and cumminqlomle-quorlz mac;~ne t ite bedded granule (magnetite) quortz - loyolile tacomle with some fcrrohypers thene and minor cummingtoniti! (cost) to quartz -cumminqtom~e focamle with · moogranules (west} ~et ite -beoring r: sholy quortz- foyoli!e tocomle cumminqlontle taconite 10 foyoltle tocomle (easJI and sholy quorlz- to cummingtont~e tocom~e (west); minor moonetite '!!aceous grophite -sikcote-quortz laconlle with abundant ferrohypersthene and minor foyolite, biotite, olmondilc ond pyrrhotite (eosl) and traces of pyrite, pyrhotit e and cummingtonite (wes t) . layered (magnetJ/e) loyolite -quortz taconite with m inor cumminQtonite ered (moqneflle) quorl.l taconite with minor cummingtonite throuq:hout, and hedenbcrgitc and some l oj!alite (east) ljr;;nule (magnetite) quartz taconite 1---+---+-- --flj r-minor f-,---:-:-:-i(/ (;;ered and granule 'j -, locotly, with minor cummingtonite throuqhout, ond foyolitc least) (moqnetJ~e) cummingtom~e-quorlz taconite with hedenberqite ond some fayolite (cos t) ~rlz f-;-;---;-o;;-( FIGU!\1': 5. - taconite with minor hedenbcrgite and cummingtonitei clastic quartz p ebble zone locally at bose Generalized columnar section or the Biwabik iron-[ormation. };j �sw - sw 28-58 - 1 7 S E -S W 1 7-58-17 ·. N W - NW 20-58 - 1 7 .r. - I . I 1/ v ~I , - ------ -- - ---- ---/+-- ---- / / : I I SW-N W ) 20 - 58-1 7 I I S E - NW 2 0-58 - 1 7 I G E O LOG I C M AP OF AUBU R N M I NE N SC ALE } . 1" - ·4 00' a. 0 --+--· ---- ~----· -·-· -·t--· --+--1 I I I l_ __ L E GE ND GEOLOGIC C O N TA CT S ( A PPRcJX I MA T F) ~ O VE R DU R OEN ____ ...,. CRE ST OF BA NK ..- ___ _... T OE O F B ANK �STRATIGRAPHIC S~UENCE IN THE BIWABIK IRON FORMATION AUBURN mNE 'lhickness in feet 1 UJ PER CHERTY MEMBER 16. 2 Jaspery, conglomeratic and algal chert (G and 15 . 14 13. 12 . + 10. submember I) 10 (est . ) Covered interval 10 (est.) Nodular hematitic chert beds interbedded with laminated hematite-silicate- magnetite beds 48 +'l Laminated hematite- silicate-magnetite beds with subordinate jaspery chert beds and lenses 31 Jaspery, conglomeratic chert beds interbedded with subordinate laminated hematite-silicate~magnetite beds 28 Cherty taconite ld th thin irregular ma.gneti te beds, magnetite mottles and disseminated magnetite 16 143 SIM'Y MEMBER ll. s 3 Laminated silicate magnetite tacom. t e with subordinate silicate chert lenses Laminated non- magnetic silicate taconite, fissile in part. 6 ' of fissile "intermediate slate" at bottom (G and S submember Q) lOl 37 ---:l::-:38=- LOWER CHERTY MEMBER I 9. Cherty taconite with irregular magnet ite beds . Upper 10 ' dark·~ colored silicate rich beds instead of magnetite beds , making base of lower slaty somewhat indefinite . 37 Mottled silicate- magnetite chert with chert "pebbles" and abundant coarse granules. ll Cherty taconite with thick (l"!) magnetite beds and mottles 84 has 8. 7 6. 5. Mottled cherty taconite vlith thin, very irregular magnetite ~ds. u Thick jaspery chert beds interbedded w1 th varying proportions of thin, regular laminated magnetite-hematite- silicatecarbonate beds . 66 �l Thickness in f'eetl CIIER1'I' MEMBER (Cont'd) 4. Thick hematitic chert beds with subordinate la.minated zones. Some clastic sand grains near bottom. Much carbonate. 8 Jaspery, conglomeratic and algal chert w1 th subordinate laminated zones. Sand grains common. 4 2. Massive chloritic (or hematitic) sandstone 8 1. Jaspery, conglomeratic and algal chert 4 3. 236 Total thickness exposed mGAMA ,.. QUARTZITJt~ 517 Base not exposed 1. Units 15 and 16 measured on bank between truck road and railroad near entrance to pit. Units l - 5 measured on SW bank, at SE end of' pit. Remainder measured above railroacl. 2. Unit numbers correspond to numbers pa.inted on the walls of' the Auburn Mine and are not intended to be a new stratigraphic system. 3. The lower slaty-upper cherty contact is not well-marked and disagreement exists as to its position. �__..... ...--- ERIE MINING CO MPANY / MAP OF ? PLANT AND PIT / / / I AREAS LEGEND I COARSE CRUSHER 2 FINE CRUSHER ,3~ CONCENTRATOR 1)PELLET PLANT , §\LOADING POCKET • 6 STOCKPILE 7' GENERAL SHOPS ' ,\ WEST PIT BIWABIK IRON FORMATION VIRGINIA FORMATION ::," 1;- 1 {! { DULUTH GABBRO �STOPS AT ERIE PITS Stor. At this stop, we have the base of the iron formation in the West Pit. The gama quartzite and the basal algal layer and conglomerate can be found in the roa • The alternating chert and argillaceous layers of submember V are exposed in the outer op. ' Fok The bank at the south edge of the pit is the Lower Slaty material P&Q. The r efore, the widt h of the pit here is the entire Lower Cherty member. 1 Sto J 2. This stop shows the upper part of the Lower Cherty ore horizon. The submember R can be seen along the top of the bank. It is greenish in color and !contains much minnesotaite and greenalite. Iead D irectly below this is the wavy bedded submember R. This is more noti ~ eable toward t he west, (containing abundant granular jasper). J The mottled submember S is below this layer. This submember occupies most of the lower part of the bank. It also contains much jasper as well as the con J. picuous pink to red carbonate mottles. J StoR 3. At the east end of the cut, we find the even bedded (U) and the alternating ma~sive and slaty submember (V). The massive layers consist almost entirely of ryedium grained green silicates . Some granular jasper and flinty black chert occ j rs. Minor amounts of sulfides are present. I Proceeding westward, we encounter the lower wavy bedded submember (T) and the mottled submember (S). Here the mottles consist of fine grained sili ~ ates instead of the carbonates seen in Stop 2. StoJ 4, This stop is in the upper part of the Lower Cherty member and shows submembers R & S . It correlates with Stop 2. The effects of the gabbro to the sou~heast are quite apparent. At the extreme east end there are abundant sulfides and Jvery coarse grained dark green silicates. Proceeding westward along the cut the grain size decreases and buff colored silicates (ferrocummingtonite) begin to app~ ar. The cut immediately to the south is in the Lower Slaty horizon (P). This :::t~::::u~ ;~~: ::~::::h::8 :les:;here Sto~ and shows recrystallization. Small 5. At this stop, units 0 through K can be observed. Representative blocks of e t ch subunit are marked. Locally abundant coarse grained silicates and some sulftdes occur. A few blocks show portions of jet-pierced holes. Some septaria are !e vident. �STJ ATIGRAPHY OF THE BIWABIK IRON FORMATION AT THE ERIE MINING CO. Pr oda~l:n~eo:::~ation ,.. A. Calcite - marble layer. B. Lean quartz and silicate as irregular zones and layers. U:PP+r c. s..a t y (3 - 16) (10- 35) & D. Laminated zones of magnetite and silicate interlayered with thinner chert layers. (30 - 50) E. Massive granular chert with disseminated magnetite and occasional magnetite-silicate layers. Septaria. (5 - 10) F. Similar to C. & D. but the chert contains much disseminated magnetite and granular jasper. (25 - 35) G. Massive with much disseminated granular magnetite and jasper. Locally concentrated into irregular granular layering. Conspicuous carbonate or silicate mottles. (15 - 20) H. Similar to above except more abundant granular layering. Layering becomes more laminated toward bottom. ( 10) I. Algal structures and conglomerates. J. Granular. Similar to G. & H. but more abundant disseminated granular magnetite. Carbonate - silicate mottles are very con• spicuous. (5 - 15) ;..!, h (3 - 10) Upple r K. Cherty Thin, irregular and discontinuous magnetite layers having distinct boundaries separated by thicker massive layers of lean chertsilicate. The diabase sill is within this unit. (28 - 48) L. Moderately thick layers of laminated magnetite and silicate separated by equally thick layers of chert with much disseminated magnetite. ( 30 - 40) M. Thin, well defined magnetite layers similar to K. with more magnetite occurring as granular layers and disseminated magnetite (20 - 45) N. Not recognized. o. Alt ernating laminated magnetite - silicate zones and chert layers. Similar to L., but with increasing disseminated granular magnetite in the chert toward the bottom. Conglomerate near base • ( 15 - 3 5) 'l �-2- Pilobable Correlation to Gunderson L~er P. Massive granular silicate unit with vague layering. (75 - 90) Sl/a ty Q. Black, moderately laminated argillite. R. Upper unit is massive with granular silicates in a chert • silicate matrix. Lower unit is similar to above with scattered tnirt layers of magnetite and disseminated granules. (20 - 35) s. Irregular zones and mottles of dense and granular magnetite. Much disseminated magnetite in the massive chert. Abundant carbonate or silicate mottles. (15 - 35) L wer Ta Cherty I . u~ v. (5-45) = L lern?ed, st/1!- Thin irregular layers and granular concentrations of magnetite within thicker massive chert layers. Occasional mottles. (20 - 35) Magnetite occurs in even bedded iaminated zones wfth s~lica~e and argillite and/ or as even bedded concentrations of granules iri the chert. (15 - 30) Thick laminated zones of hematite, magnetite, silicate and argillite alternating with massive granular chert layers. Conglomerate, algal and/ or slate usually occur at the base of this member. (6 - 30) �RESER 'E ' B BABBRlY~ A MONHESOTA LAKE SUPER UOR PNST i'V'Uli'E Of EOLOGY fiElD fRIP MAY 4B ~923 NERAt.: RESER VE MiNING COMPAN~ ~OLUCY DOES NOV PERMIT POSSEIIION OF CAMERAS ON VHE OPERVYa Oft PLEAS£ CHECK YOUR CAMERA WITH PLANT PROTECTION AV VHE MAIN GAV Eo i: PLEASE AVOID SVANDtNG 'tOO CLOSE UNKS ON VOP OF VHE WALL~ 0 YHE NOR'ti'H AND SOUTH WALL o MAKE CLOSE INSPECTION OF THE WALLS ll..ARGt VACON II 'II'[ UN ADDI T ION NAZAROOU~o AYO»O CLRMB ING ON VHE MUC PILES AS THE RE IS A POSSIBILITY or DtSLODGING CHUNKS VACON VV'Eo APPROXIMATELY 85 FEET OF ijpp R CHERTY AND 35 THE BAlE OF VHE NORTH WALL VO THE VOP OF THE YHE ~LWTH GABBRO LSE EN LY VHUS REGUON ABOWV 3 OUVH WALLo TH A FEW ~~NORED FEET TO VHE $0UVH UN VH t EXHUBtV~ EPRE~ENVr O FEEV OF ijpPER St.ATY ARE STRATA AREA o GENER£L L ~ CoN E- A HIGHER DEGREE OF METAMORPHISM THAN STOP No o 2 WH i CH MULE$ VO VHE WE~To ~GNEVITE AND QUARTZ ARE VKE PREDOMI NANT MU NERALSo H DEN8ERGtTE 1 FAYAL ITE, ACV tNOLIVE, FE RROHYPERSV HoWEVER, COARSE GRA U N~ Of NE AND HORNBLE NDE ARE COMMON c UNT BLACK HiSINGERI TE CAN 8E SEE N IN YH£ NORTH WAL lo IT tS ONE OF THE LAST StLICA~ E Tp FORM IN V~E BIWABIK HRON f ORMATION AND CUVI THROUGH ALL PREVIOUS MINERAL ASSEMBLAGE o ~NOERSEN AND SCHWARTZ AVVRUBUVE VHE roRMAVtON ~ OtNBERGIVE 8 FERROHYP£RSVHEN£~ ~EGMAYHTE WEINSo EiSENV4AllY OEFLY ~r Ywo COM~OSED CF HORNBLENDE AND CU VYPES OF VEI NS ARE Q~ARVZ AND ~UNK or MEDIUM fO COARSE GRA INED M~NavONI E~UOENV I TO fHE IN VHtl AREAo ALKAL I FELDSPAR o tNJEC~tON OF THE AC IDIC VE INS fHE MAFIC VEINS CON IIV HORNBlENDEo 2: W[ ARE ABOUV NORVHEA~V 3 WALLo Ml E VO fHE WE@V OF SVO~ Noo ~e A MONOCL WNAL FOLD II VID NV IN �I ~rD NERALLY FINER GRAt MAGNET IV~ SI ZE II PREVALENT I N THIS AREA Q MN ADDITION vo QUARVZ CUMMINGVONRTE, ACVINOLUTE AND ANDRADIVE ARE COMMON MONERALSo OTHER F A URES VO NOTE IN VHOS AREA ARE THE £LG L ZONE &NO A SMALL DIABA E DUKE I ~ICH TRENDS SE-NWo ,,6oo FEET A LARGER DIABASE DIKE ABOUT 35 FE WtD£ OCCURS APPROXIMATELY W SV AL ONG THE PIT CENTER LINE FROM fHE EA T END 'LSO VRENDI SE-NWo or VHE PITo TH~S DIKE � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology: Proceedings, 1963 Description An account of the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology. University of Minnestota, Duluth, Minnesota, May 2-3, 1963 Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Institute on Lake Superior Geology Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1963 Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource R.L. Blake T.Z. Zoltai R.E. Hessevick C.E. Carson Cyrill M. Gallick G.N. Hanson P.W. Gast Richard A. Hoppin John C. Palmquist Lyman O. Williams Norris W. Jones Gene L. LaBerge George Moerlein G.B. Morey S.C. Nordeng C.O. Ensign M.E. Volin William C. Phinney D.W. Pollock E. Richard Randolph M.A. Rogers P.K. Sims Isidore Zietz Paul Weiblen James H. Zumberge William R. Farrand Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource PDF Language A language of the resource English